Open Source Underdogs https://opensourceunderdogs.com The podcast for entrepreneurs about open source software. Fri, 31 May 2024 19:26:22 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.5 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/cropped-underdogs-favicon-32x32.png Open Source Underdogs https://opensourceunderdogs.com 32 32 Open Source Underdogs false episodic Open Source Underdogs [email protected] podcast Open Source Underdogs https://opensourceunderdogs.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/high-res-icon-2.jpg https://opensourceunderdogs.com Episode 70: Early-Stage Venture Capital, OpenOcean, with Patrik Backman https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-70-early-stage-venture-capital-openocean-with-patrik-backman/ Fri, 31 May 2024 19:26:20 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2339 Intro Mike: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host Mike Schwartz, founder of Gluu, and this is episode 70 with Patrick Backman, General Partner, CEO and Co-Founder at OpenOcean, and Co-Founder of MariaDB. This episode uncharacteristically diverges from the normal format. It’s more of a general interview than a discussion on the...

The post Episode 70: Early-Stage Venture Capital, OpenOcean, with Patrik Backman first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro

Mike: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host Mike Schwartz, founder of Gluu, and this is episode 70 with Patrick Backman, General Partner, CEO and Co-Founder at OpenOcean, and Co-Founder of MariaDB.

This episode uncharacteristically diverges from the normal format. It’s more of a general interview than a discussion on the business model of a specific company. We recorded it a few weeks back on March 1st. The release was delayed because I wanted to prioritize Kevin Muller’s pitch for attending the Open Source Founder Summit in Paris this coming May.

And if you’re on the fence about the Founder Summit, there’s still time. Last night, I had some barbecue with Frank Karlitschek, founder of NextCloud, and he told me that NextCloud did 80% growth on a revenue base in excess of $10M. So, if you want to find out how we did that, and you have the resources, go hang out with him and lots of other talented founders in Paris at the Open Source Founder Summit.

And, as this is a bit of an unconventional episode, maybe now is a good time to set some expectations for The Underdogs podcast for the next couple of years. My plan is to complete around six episodes per year for the next five years and finish at around 100 episodes.

The 100th episode will be Gluu, and you’ll find out how I was able to put all these years of feedback to work in my own startup.

I’ll be recording in person at FOSDEM, SO-CON and All Things Open. If you feel like your startup should be on the Underdogs podcast, or you have a suggestion for a startup that I should reach out to, send me a message on LinkedIn. I’m always on the lookout.

The other reason I’m slowing down is that Emily Omier’s podcast The Business of Open Source is doing a great job, documenting firsthand accounts from business leaders in the open-source world.

If Emily’s podcast existed in 2018, I might not have even started Underdogs. So, if you haven’t listened to her podcast, you should add it to your queue. And thanks Emily for all the hard work, a lot of logistics preparation and post-production work goes into each episode, so 200 episodes doesn’t just happen without a lot of commitment.

With that lengthy intro behind us, let’s finally get back to the interview with Patrik Backman. He’s a bit of walking internet history. And it was a lot of fun to get an opportunity to chat with him, so here we go. Patrik, thank you so much for joining us today.

Career Overview

Patrik: Yeah, it’s a pleasure, thank you.

Mike: Maybe just for the audience you could tell us a little bit about your background, and how you ended up entering the database business.

Patrik: I started actually out of school, out of university, I got recruited into MySQL, or MySequeL, as they say in the US, in 2003, and then I worked six years as part of MySQL database company. From couple of million in revenue, or almost 100, from 50 people to about 600, and then, in the last couple of years, I was part of the management team, I run a large part of product development, and also some business development.

And then, following the MySQL time, we exited to Sun Microsystems in 2008 for $1 billion – that was a great achievement, at least in the European, so to say, start of ecosystem. Following that, we started exploring how to build a venture-capital business. And parallel with that, we co-founded a company called MariaDB, which is a successor company to MySQL. But since 2011, I’ve been operating as a general partner, together with two other partners with OpenOcean, which does kind of invest in the early-stage data software in Europe.

Years at Sun

Mike: I have a Sun Microsystems’ coffee cup. I’m just curious, as somebody who had actually worked at Sun for a while, if you could talk a little bit about what was Sun like?

Patrik: It was quite a remarkable journey. After being acquired by Sun, I was part of the Sun for almost a year, and also part of the integration kind of tasks force to integrate the MySQL company into Sun Microsystems. But I think there was extraordinary talent around engineering overall in the business – it was of course a huge company – 35,000 people – but extraordinary talent, especially a software team which I met a lot, however, the commercial side was quite awkward to me. At the time, much of the philosophy seemed to be — what I noticed was that software was open-source, and for free. And then, the point was to sell hardware.

So, me coming in, with MySQL and still thinking that, ‘hey, it’s an interesting scaling business, there’s a lot of good ways to make business around open source’, Sun didn’t really have that mentality. And we were quite a lot discussing their how could kind of the commercial side be developed around the open-source products that Sun had and many, many great ones.

But then, I think the business side of that was a bit lacking, and they never really got to build that out – the company almost went into insolvency, or big difficulties, and then Oracle acquired it at a quite low price.

Inevitability of Oracle Owning MySQL

Mike: Do you think it’s somewhat ironic that Oracle, the prototypical commercial database company, ends up owning MySQL in the end?

Patrik: Well, what I’ve heard, and this is just ,of course, a rumor – so, “maybe” what people suspect – but I heard rumors that Larry Ellison always kind of wanted MySQL, to have control of it, because it was so popular and it had such a huge impact in the database industry, in terms of popularity, and in terms of power in the web and internet overall.

So, I think there was even some rumors that Oracle even earlier tried to get their hands on it, so to say, one way or the other, especially Sun Microsystems acquisition. Supposedly, it was much tied to the fact that that way they got control over MySQL.

More restrictive licenses resulting from Foss strip mining

Mike: I want to Pivot to MariaDB. I spoke with Michael Howard in 2018, and he was promoting BSL, or Business Source License, which HashiCorp later adopted also after a billion downloads of Terraform. Do you think that companies moving to these new restrictive licenses is a signal that the industry is standing up for itself, and that it’s sort of growing tired of the exploitive use of its software?

Patrik: Yes, absolutely. I think it’s a clear signal. At MySQL, 15 years ago, there was this — maybe today it seems naive thinking that ‘hey, if AWS, for instance, and Google, and Facebook use a lot of MySQL, somehow it will drive a commercial relationship down the line’, which is kind of beneficial to both parties and grateful for everyone.

However, it never really got there. It turned out that nowadays AWS has millions of these installations for their customers, and making a lot of money on them, but still paying really nothing for it. So, it has been clear that big players out there, they really want to use open source as far as they can for free, but themselves making a lot of money on it.

As this has become very evident that money will easily come to this popular open-source platform, then the restrictive license is what you need to go for, so to say. You need to be smart about your licenses so that it drives things to your business needs. Then, a question comes up, of course, for founders out there: what is the business need and the business ambition that the founder has, and different licenses serve different business models.

What is the best open-source license?

Mike:  So, let’s say I invent a new database called PigeonDB, and I want to license it somehow. Well, MariaDB used BSL licensing. Did that work? Like, what license should I use?

Patrik: As a founder, if you want to build a small kind of services business, you can use a free license as you want, very permissive. In that way, it gets maximum popularity, and spread, and awareness and adoption. Then, you can sell some support, or some fixes, or some advisory, or consultancy to users out there. And that’s a good business. You can even hire a few people, maybe tens of people, making even a few millions a year, and that’s a nice lifestyle business. That is a perfectly safe and good choice to make.

However, if you want to do more of a product-oriented business and earn licenses, or earn kind of product revenue for your product, then you need to have some restrictions on that distribution that you have. And I think that MongoDB is a perfect example of that. In popularity, I think MySQL and even MariaDB might be even more popular than Mongo. However, Mongo is making much more money than MySQL or MariaDB for that matter. So, having a restrictive license that prevents, so to say, kind of AGPL preventing the big player from just kind of hosting their own service database services and taking all the money for it.

Do we need a new open-source movement?

Mike:  Bruce Perens at State of Open mentioned the idea that maybe we need a new category of licenses. Do you have any idea if we did, what that would look like?

Patrik: I don’t know directly. I think there’s a good variety of licenses, and of course, one could always write their own, so to say, business source license is a new one created at MySQL and used at MariaDB. What open-source movement kind of have tried to do, or have done for 30 years, is collaborative work around software – it’s mostly the licenses have focused on one downloadable kind of software package that you take and install, and use kind of standalone, or in a combination with other software.

Now, most companies around open source, and also elsewhere, are making money by providing a service online. So, it’s a software service online, a cloud service. And somehow, it’s interesting that, in my mind, there’s a lot of enterprises combining open-source software, using it in their cloud setting for their own needs, but this glue – how they put things together, how they manage it, and so forth – this glue is typically proprietary.

Either they make it themselves, buy some proprietary by someone else, or buy this glue, so to say, from others, and somehow, an openness on this kind of glue between software and how it’s used in a cloud setting, maybe there could be some open-source movement on that. But that probably requires a whole new way of thinking. This is just an early thought, but something I’ve been pondering about.

Is Open Source a Tragedy of the Commons?

Mike: We have a professor here at UT Austin, who’s compared open-source software to a tragedy of the commons. Typically, in a tragedy of the commons, there’s a “freeloader problem”, where the freeloader is causing the degradation of the resource. I kind of argue that, well, what if the resource here isn’t just the software – because there’s no incremental cost to copying the software – but what if the incremental cost is actually maintenance of the project. Because for infrastructure projects like databases, what people really want is a stream of updates to the dependencies.

So, I’m wondering if you could sort of comment on the idea of like, is this “tragedy of the commons” analogy useful, and how do we avoid freeloaders?

Patrik: I mean, it’s built into the model that is open source. If you provide it with a permissive license, then people can use it for free and take benefit, and even maybe in a business way, in a wrong way so to say, take benefit of it, and so forth. But I think what should be recognized, and understood, and respected is that, indeed, anyone building software, even providing a free and open-source software, they should be allowed to have a credible and sustainable business model in order for them to be able to maintain and further develop it. But, then, it’s about what kind of balance you want to strike with what is free and what is commercial, and that’s where the license comes in.

Can the Government Help Fund Open Source Infrastructure?

Mike: There’s over four million open-source projects now. If you add up all the packages, and the repos, and especially the MPM repositories – excluding GitHub, who knows what it is if you include GitHub – there’s so much diversity in open-source projects. It seems like what you’re really saying is not that open source in general should have a business model, but certain types of infrastructure.

The government, let’s say, was going to fund open-source infrastructure to sort of address this freeloader problem – how would they know which ones to invest in?

Patrik: I don’t really know if that can be steered by government, or by any kind of regulating body, or any smart individual in that sense. I believe in the free market that there’s a lot of people can develop, and release, and provide software under different licenses and commercial models, and that it can be free or commercial, or closed-source or open-source. But in the end, it’s up to anyone in need of a certain solution then to decide what they take and on what premises.

I mean, someone might be okay to take something free and be ready to maintain it themselves, and not care about it if there’s a commercial side to it, or a company behind it, or even a developer behind it. Or vice-versa: someone wants to pay something for strong assurance that it’s managed by a company, and resources, and everything.

Beware VC Advice

Mike: I always caution founders that the advice you will get from venture capitalists is the advice of how do you make this into a really high-growth business.

Patrik: Yes. I could also give advice on how to just get maximum spread in different ways. However, what we, of course, think about as venture capitalists is that we try to find those businesses and help those businesses, or founders, that really want to build something significant in terms of a business and not just in terms of following.

Community Lead Growth?

Mike: What I’ve noticed is a trend towards something called community-led growth, where the company raises a bunch of venture capital. And then, they start an open-source project, and try and find a really devoted group of super fans who love what they’re doing, and then they look for a monetization strategy out of that. Have you been seeing that model more, and do you have any thoughts about is that going to lead to high- growth companies, or is it just a risky investment?

Patrik: Well, it is risky, it can work, but it’s often hard. I think specifically what is hard is that those founders, who are able and skillful enough to create a super-quality software that spreads and becomes open-source kind of very, very popular, the way to make money is often: yes, you can do an open-core model and have some commercial features, so to say.

And there’s a few examples of who have succeeded. I mean, Gitlab, and so forth, have succeeded in building kind of more than 100 million in revenue, but no one has really done with open-core kind of billions in revenue. And today, the way to really make money is by providing a cloud service – that’s what Mongo is doing very successfully, and many others.

And to build the challenge for those founders who create a very popular software distribution, kind of open-source software distribution, the mentality, and mindset, and skill set for building a cloud service is very, very different from building a great piece of software that you provide for downloading open source. So, often, the challenge is, and the risk is, how do you bring in that skill if you want to build a very large business.

Should Governments Use Open Source?

Mike: Patrik, you’re in Helsinki in Europe, and there’s a lot of innovation towards let’s say driving digital public infrastructure in the government. Should the government use open-source software, and how should the government consume and procure open-source software?

Patrik: That’s a good question. I think that open source really matters in infrastructure – to go back to the Oracle example, I think what enterprises, but also governments, should think about when it comes to infrastructure, you don’t really want to rely on something, like, a core piece of your infrastructure, where the provider can come every year and ask for 20% more in pricing, and you have no way to circumvent that.

So, a critical piece of infrastructure is, you shouldn’t have a lock-in closed-source component and the company that can squeeze you behind it. So, for infrastructure, it really matters, and then, how they should procure it – there’s always this software kind of service providers consultancy houses that still are needed to kind of sell it, in this way or another.

Yes, maybe the pieces can be free, but someone needs to help glue it all together, and help serve it, and help support it, and so forth. I think the biggest problem really is not in the nitty-gritty details of how government should buy these things, but actually in having a smart, technical person who is skilled in this kind of software, who knows what they’re doing.

Most things that could go wrong in my mind, when government buys software, be it open-source or closed, is that there’s incredible stupidity in the world – they try to, without really understanding the software, they try to do a long list of requirements. And then, the big software house, with maybe 20-year-old software, is the only one who has the resources to really answer all those zillion questions and come up with a packaging that serves all those needs. And then, it costs a billion to implement. It’s just crazy that these things happen with public money.

How to get the word out that open source isn’t free

Mike: I bet you’re talking about Western governments too, having challenges in operation of IT. How do we help all these other governments who want to implement, and we’re telling them to use open-source, but how do we communicate to them that we also need updates of the software, we need maintenance, and we need innovation in order for them to really make these ecosystems work?

Patrik: I must say I don’t know how to inform them, but this notion of “things should just be free”, yes, it certainly exists out there, and most companies want everything to be free, and the government. However, inside IT people understand that nothing is free – you need maintenance, you need support, you need help, you need people around any software to operate, and run it, and of course, improve it, but how to inform and educate people, it’s a good question that I don’t know how to answer.

Is now a good time to start a software company?

Mike: Last question, is now a good time to launch a software startup?

Patrik: Well, absolutely. It’s just tremendous what opportunities are out there. I think we have only scratched the surface of what data software can do, for instance, in all enterprises, in all businesses, in all functions, and probably in society, there’s processes and functions that can be digitalized, automated, optimized and improved. We’ve only seen the beginning of that. And of course, with hyper on AI, it’s a much broader thing than that.

It’s like everywhere in business, in functioning governments, in society, you can start tracking data, gathering data cheaper than ever before, put it together, build algorithms around it very easily to get intelligence out of it, get predictions out of it, get things optimized and automated – I think it’s very fascinating how the world can be improved in so many ways, using software in the future, and in the near-term actually. I think it’s a great time right now to think about wild ambitious ideas and work to implement them.

Close

Mike:  Patrik, thank you so much for joining and sharing all that experience with us.

Patrik: Thank you so much. It was really a pleasure.

Mike: And thanks to Alexander Izza from Resonance Public Relations. Cool graphics from Kamal Bhattacharjee. Music from Brooke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere. Next episodes will be recorded at the All Things Open Conference in downtown Raleigh, October 27th – 29th, 2024. This is one of the best open-source conferences in the US, so please join us if you can.

Until next time, thanks for joining.

The post Episode 70: Early-Stage Venture Capital, OpenOcean, with Patrik Backman first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 20:43
Episode 69: Kevin Mueller, Co-Founder / CEO Passbolt https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-68-kevin-mueller-co-founder-ceo-passbolt/ Wed, 10 Apr 2024 12:30:06 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2323 Intro Mike: Hello, and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, Founder of Gluu, and this is episode 69, with Kevin Mueller, Founder and CEO of Passbolt. Passbolt helps teams securely share secrets, which could be passwords, API credentials or cryptographic keys. It’s one of the few open-source projects in the privileged...

The post Episode 69: Kevin Mueller, Co-Founder / CEO Passbolt first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro

Mike: Hello, and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, Founder of Gluu, and this is episode 69, with Kevin Mueller, Founder and CEO of Passbolt.

Passbolt helps teams securely share secrets, which could be passwords, API credentials or cryptographic keys. It’s one of the few open-source projects in the privileged access management category.

I had the honor of meeting Kevin at FOSDEM in Brussels, although we recorded this episode remotely on Zencastr, auspiciously on the ides of March. So, without further ado, here’s the interview.

Kevin, thank you so much for joining us today on Open Source Underdogs.

Kevin: My pleasure.

Founder Summit

Mike: Before we start the official podcast, I see that Passbolt is one of the sponsors of the Open Source Founder Summit that’s coming May 2024, in Paris. Can you say a couple of words about the event?

Kevin: Yes, absolutely. This is an event that we are co-organizing with Emily Omier. We decided to co-organize this, and basically, to make this event happen. Because we realize that in the open-source world, a lot of funders are not talking to each other. And we basically go through the same hardships, we have the same difficulties, and some of us have some learnings that others don’t. And very unfortunately, and I don’t know for which reason, open-source funders tend to do their own things and not to speak with each other.

So, this would be a fantastic opportunity to put a bunch of open-source funders in the same room and talk very honestly, transparently, without having the need to sell their business ― it is basically open-source funders with open-source funders ― and talk about the hardships they are going through, talk about the problems, the solutions they found, in a very transparent and good atmosphere.

This is the purpose of the event, and I have to say that it’s going quite well. We have already sold all the early-bird tickets, and the event will be happening in May, in Paris. And from where we are, it looks like there will be at least 50 open-source founders in the room so far. So, it’s quite promising.

FOSDEM

Mike: Awesome. So, pivoting back to the podcast, a question for you: did you attend FOSDEM as a student, or as a young person?

Kevin: Yeah! It’s a really good question! I think the first edition of FOSDEM I participated into was ― let me think, in 2000, and I was still a student back then. And I think FOSDEM for me was like Meka of open source, and it was such a privilege to go there. I remember, when I first presented at FOSDEM, we met with the Richard Stallman, Maddog was also there, so, yes, definitely, I started going there as a student.

Origin Story

Mike: How did you go from an attendee of FOSDEM to a founder of an open-source software start-up, and did giving out free swag at FOSDEM this year bring it full circle for you? Or was it more like the “lunatics are running the asylum now”?

Kevin: That means it is very pleasant now to participate at FOSDEM as a founder of an open-source project. I think we went a long way from an open-source enthusiast, when I was a student, to being an open-source founder. Basically, the story is, I’ve always been an open-source enthusiast, not only me, but me and my co-founders.

And my first open-source project was, I think I made it back then when I was 16 or 17 years old. It was a PHP script to browse a file directory but installed as a web app on a server. And it found a bit of adoption back then, I kind of forgot about it. I started my entrepreneurial journey quite early in my life. It happened that, at 23 years old, I stepped in India for an internship. And then, I didn’t leave India for 15 years. And the reason why I didn’t leave is because, when I stepped there, I realized that there is so much potential in that country – everything had to be done.

And I decided to create my first company over there. My first company was a web agency, and we were basically developing web projects or web-related stuff from India, but for French-speaking companies, because I’m French ― you’ve probably figured it out from my accent. And the point that French-speaking companies had with Indian outsourcing is that in India people don’t speak French, and French people are terrible in English. So, even though there was a lot of hype with outsourcing in India, these two could not collaborate with each other. That was the purpose of my company.

And the positioning was quite spot-on because there was A LOT OF French companies, trying to outsource to India at that point, which means that very quickly, we were able to grow the company, and we went from me alone to Remy, which is my current co-founder at Passbolt, who also joined me in this venture, and we grew all the way to around 75 people in the company.

We ran a bunch of other things in India: we created three companies in total. One was also a product company, where we were teaching French online ―very few people know that, but French is actually the first foreign language that is spoken in India, because English is not a foreign language.

We had launched this platform, it became quite successful – we had a few hundred thousand of students that learned French with our platform. And it kind of gave us the taste for building products.

As you can see, none of the things we are doing are related to open source. But when open source came back in the picture for us was actually when we were growing our web agency. Inside the web agency we were developing, we were working with a lot of different customers, a lot of different projects. And one of the pain points that was occurring all the time was the password pain point. So, typically, whenever we are onboarding a new project, the first thing that the customers would do, would be to give us all the passwords and the credentials that we will need in order to do our job.

And most of these guys would send us these passwords by email, or by Slack, or through other channels, which is quite insecure, but to tell you the truth, we are not that much bothered with security ― we are more bothered about the productivity issues that are related to, okay, the password manager is getting those passwords, then he needs to distribute them to the team. How is he going to do that?

So, we tried a lot of things: we tried spreadsheets obviously, we tried emails, then we tried KeePass. And we really loved KeePass because KeePass is a fantastic open-source software. Very simple to install, all our developers had it, it’s considered secure, it has been audited, it is ANSI compliant, and so we loved it for all these reasons. Also, for the fact that you can organize your credentials, and folders, and subfolders, with granularity. So, you can basically follow the same hierarchy, the same structure as your customer project. But where we were very frustrated with KeePass was with the collaboration – we did not want to share the entire KeePass file with the entire team.

Because this gives security problems, but also it is very difficult to have only one file that scales with different people. What happens in practice is like each person will make a copy of the file and start using it independently, and then you end up having 5 or 6 files that have their own life, with the different set of passwords in it, and you don’t have the source of truth any more.

So, Passbolt was built in this context. We wanted a software that has the same properties as KeePass ― basically, that is open source, that is secure, that provides you granularity in a password organization, but on top of that, we wanted a multi-user/collaboration feature.

Actually, the first version of Passbolt was not called Passbolt. It was called absolutely nothing because it was an internal project, and we built it for ourselves, we started using it, and we were really happy with it. So happy that we started sharing it with the customers, partners that were asking for it. And when we realized that a lot of other companies, or people like us, had the same problem, this is when we decided to make a separate project out of it.

And one of the reasons why Passbolt is open-source today is because, very early on, when people were asking us to share the project with them, we were not sharing it― very naturally, we gave them the source code, we explained them how to install it. And after a few months, we started receiving emails from companies who had never heard of us, people in the US, people at the other end of the world, were pinging us for feature requests, or bug reports, and then we realized, “Okay, my God! There is a bunch of traction behind this thing. People are really talking about it. And because we were already sharing the source code, we decided to keep doing it and keep it open source.

Positioning

Mike: So, there’s a lot of password managers out there in the enterprise space, how do you position Passbolt as a product that’s selling to enterprises against all the other options that are out there?

Kevin: I would say this goes back to the origin of Passbolt. The reason why we built Passbolt the way it is, is because we are a technical team. So, the first version of Passbolt as a password manager was basically the password manager for technical teams first. And even today, the way Passbolt is used it is usually adopted by the technical team first. And they adopted it because of three specific aspects of the solution that are really important to us.

The first aspect is collaboration. In Passbolt, you can share passwords very quickly, instantly. With two clicks, you can share one password with one user, or you can share an entire folder with a group of users.  And then, there is inheritance on the permissions management system, and then you can audit also your permissions, you can see if there is something weird happening with the sharing, or password that has been shared that should not be shared ― all this is what I call the collaboration layer of Passbolt, which goes much further than most of the other solutions in the market.

And actually, technical teams enjoy a lot of these aspects, because technical teams are the ones we need to share passwords on a daily basis. And they need to share passwords because they are managing a large number of systems. And it’s not always possible to create one account per user ― actually, it’s almost never the case. You end up sharing the server accounts, or any type of credential you have with other people from your team. And you need to do it fast, and you need to do it securely. So, this is what Passbolt does for you on the collaboration front.

And the two other pillars of Passbolt are basically security and privacy. One of the problems of the existing solutions in the market is that they were initially built for a consumer. If you look at 1Password, if you look at Bitwarden, if you look at many others, including LastPass, the first version of their software was not for team use, or it was not for enterprise use. It was a consumer application, very monolithic ― basically, how can I help end-user open the vault, put this password in it, close it, and then access their credentials when they need it. And they are doing this extremely well.

But then, later on, they realize that, okay, of course there is a market in the price segment. So, a lot of these solutions built their Enterprise layer/collaboration layer as an afterthought. And the result of that is a clunky synergy between the collaboration and the security part of the software. Most of them had to do trade-off on the security. And because Passbolt was built to be enterprise-ready, from the ground up, we could really give it a lot of thought about the security model.

Typically, one thing we decided from the beginning was that the solution should be fully end-to-end. Another thing that we decided was that it is not enough to have just a username and a password to sign in on the solution, to basically authenticate, or to encrypt data ― we decided that no, we need a private key, we need a separate private key on top of the username and the password. And it’s a bit similar to what the crypto ledger’s solutions are doing. Or for example, MetaMask – if you want to connect to MetaMask, you need to have a separate private key that you import in the extension.

We wanted a similar security model, and this is what we did. The security model of Passbolt right now is based on the private key. This is the second pillar. And by the way, this is why we are getting a lot of traction, with a lot of privacy or security conscious organizations, such as national security agencies, or governments – a lot of them are telling us, “Yes, we are choosing Passbolt because you guys are the only ones with this type of security model that is fully aligned with our enterprise requirements.”

And the third pillar of the solution is privacy. Privacy means a lot of things. And I would say open source is included in this privacy pillar. It is the capability the solution gives you as a user, or a customer, to control your data. So, with Passbolt, you can self-host the software yourself, you can download it, install it fairly easily. We have a lot of Linux native installer packages. Basically, you can install it on Debian with apt-get, we are compatible with RedHat, we are compatible with most of the Linux distros there in the market. We are Kubernetes ready, we are providing Helm charts – we make it very easy for you, as a developer, to install it on your server. Then, obviously, the code is open source. So, no need to mention that, but anyone can audit it.

And this is important for a lot of software. But when it comes to cyber security, this is probably where it’s most important. Because it’s not enough to say, “My software is secure.” You want to make sure of it. There is nothing better than open source to prove that, “Yes, your software is secure”, because it’s not only you auditing it ― the entire community is auditing it. That’s how we ensure the privacy pillar of the solution.

Monetization

Mike: What’s the monetization strategy?

Kevin: We have a several type of customers. And I would say, with Passbolt, everything starts from the community ―we have Passbolt CE, as Community Edition, which is, in a way, Freemium, because in open source, it’s not as simple as that. It’s basically your free software that is, free (as in free beer) and free (as in freedom). So, anyone can download Passbolt CE, install it on their server, and start using it. There is absolutely no tracker, we do not ask any questions, we do not know what people are doing with the software ― we just know that they are using it.

So, as of today, on Passbolt Community Edition, we have around 300,000 daily active users. And that’s all we know about them ― we just know their quantity and nothing else. Basically, what’s happening is, because Passbolt is built for collaboration, the people downloading and using Passbolt Community Edition, they are using it at work, not for personal reasons. Because it is not B2C solution, it’s only B2B, only made for teams and businesses.

What’s happening, very organically, is, that once they install it, they start inviting other users, and very quickly, they go from 5, 10, 20, 50, 100. A lot of them will remain at maximum 5 to 10, or 20 for the small teams, and that’s completely fine. But a bunch of them will actually scale their usage. And once they reach 100, 200, 500 users, then their requirements become a bit more sophisticated.

For example, at 500 users, you might want to have SSO in your solution to a Single Sign-On, because it’s a nightmare for all our users. And it will give you support if you do not have an SSO plug-in, or you really want to connect the solution to an active directory, or to any type of directory, in order to make the provisioning easier for your users in your groups. Or maybe, you will have more need for compliance, in which case, you will need to generate more rapport from the solution, or to export your logs.

So, all these features are basically plugins that we are selling in the paid edition of Passbolt: we have two paid editions, we have Passbolt Pro, which is the paid self-hosted version. It is the same thing as Passbolt CE, but with more features, more enterprise features and also Premium support. Basically, they have someone to talk to in the case things go wrong.

And then, we have Passbolt Cloud. Passbolt Cloud is the same as Passbolt Pro, which is basically Passbolt with more features, but designed for people who do not want to do self-hosted. Or maybe, sometimes they have tried to self-host, and they didn’t manage to do it. Then, they’re asking us to do it for them. So, these are two products. The product currently, the paid product that has the most traction for us, is the Pro Edition.

Open Source vs. Commercial Features


Mike: Well, I think you already covered what’s open source and what’s commercial. But what about in terms of looking at your investment in R&D? At some point, you’ll have to invest R&D hours in building open-source features, and then some of that effort also has to go to the commercial plugins. Let’s say, how do you balance in your organization those investment priorities?

Kevin: Absolutely everything in Passbolt is open source. Even when we build an enterprise plugin and an enterprise feature, it is also distributed under an open-source license. And all license is AGPLV3. That’s the license we use for our source code.

For us, it’s like whatever we do is open source ― it’s not even a question. That’s the philosophy behind the product. And then, how do we decide what goes in the Community Edition, or what goes in the paid editions ― well, we follow a very simple mantra.

We know that people using the Community Edition are usually smaller teams. Because larger teams in larger organizations will want to secure the software from a business standpoint. The way we split the features is very simple: what we put in the Community Edition are features that allow smaller teams to gain productivity in their password management. So, obviously, this includes the security aspects, and security is never a trade-off. It’s available in all additions, but productivity is what we are focusing on in the free edition of the software.

Then, for the Enterprise Edition, we are focusing more on compliance and scalability. So, scalability -typically 500 users. I will need more organizational features because of such a large volume of passwords. For example, I need to be able to tag this password in order to add one more dimension.

Scalability is, as I mentioned, I want to plug it to an active directory, I want to do provisioning, I want more logs. So, this is what we provide in the paid edition. And how we decide to split the features ―whenever we have a request coming from the community, or coming from our existing customers, we just all sit together at Passbolt, and we decide on, “Okay, what problem is it actually fixing? Is it productivity, or is it scalability and compliance?” And this is how we do the splits. And we do it very transparently ― all the time, we have a discussion going on with the community, and we announce things beforehand.

How Does Open Source Add to the Business Model?

Mike: It sounds to me, like, open source for you is a distribution mode:  it gets your software shelf space, it gets your product into the hands of organizations that might need it. And then, you’re creating a funnel from that towards enterprise customers. But do you see open-source contributions from developers? Do you guys write all the code? And am I missing something about how you view the importance of open source in the open-source community to the business?

Kevin: Open source is definitely an alignment that we have with all users. And it’s not always the case for open-source projects. For example, if you build an open-source CRM, the fact that your software is open-source, you will probably not talk to the commercial economic buyer at the other end. But in our case, our person has bits on the economic front, or in the free users front, the community front, they’re all technical.

We are speaking on a daily basis with system administrators, DevOps, head of IT, CEOs―these are type of personas that are very sensitive to open source for all sorts of reasons. Because of control, for some of them. For others, it is because this corresponds to the stack that they are using on a daily basis. They’re already on Linux, they’re already using GitLab. And they consider that open source is a bit like a fair trade of software. It has moral values, and they want to go for it.

For some of them, it’s also because of security reasons. Because they consider that when a software is open source, it has some interesting security attributes. I would say that there was a natural alignment for us to make this open source and to bring the open-source values, as part of the marketing message and the value proposition of the software.

Then, in terms of go-to-market, obviously the same dynamic is happening. Because what we see clearly at Passbolt is, most of the search engines related visits, coming to our website, come because of open-source password manager keyword. It happens that there are a lot of companies that have already detected that they need a password manager, so we do not need to tell them ― they understand their need, they understand that they want to centralize, organize, share their passwords, but they have also identified that they want to do it in an open-source way. Hence, they end up on Google and they type open-source password manager. And then, obviously, the offer is fairly limited right now.

There is like Passbolt and Bitwarden. But if you want another price solution, then you are going to look into the specifics of the solution. And in this case, I would say Bitwarden is probably more oriented towards consumer and we are more oriented towards Enterprise and really privacy conscious organization – that’s where they decide for which one where to go.

Pricing

Mike: It’s one thing to know that people really want your product, and it’s another thing to know how much to charge per it. It’s really hard to get pricing right. I’m wondering if you got it right in the early days. And if you didn’t, how did you finally get enough data to get it right?

Kevin: I think no one gets it right from the first time. Our mistake at Passbolt has been like with many other open-source companies: we priced it too low at the beginning. And by the way, I didn’t mention that, but Passbolt was not supposed to be a commercial product from the beginning. When we started working on it with Remy and Cedric, my co-founders, we were comfortable, we had a bit of money to invest in this, and we wanted to have fun building it and really build a great product. But our idea was, let’s build a great product, put it on GitHub and let’s see. And basically, what happens is, once it was on GitHub, we had a bunch of traction – we had a very good traction, a lot of feedback. Organically, some companies started asking us if we had something to sell.

And they were like, “You know, we are ready to pay for this feature because we really need it. Now that we are scaling, we have 100 people on your software, we need more, we need premium support.” So, people started telling us by themselves what they needed in terms of features and in terms of offering. That’s how we went from being completely free to having a paid version.

And we had no clue about like how much we would charge for it. We asked the people that were asking for features. But people are never going to tell you openly, “This is my maximum budget.” So, they will always tell you ballpark figure, but probably on the website. And when we started charging for Passbolt, initially we charged 1 dollar per user per month. And this was fairly low. And to be honest, I think it played against us in the sense that Passbolt was not really perceived as a high-end solution in the security field.

Because price has an influence on how people position the product in their head, how much value they think your software is going to bring to them. So, obviously pricing it too low doesn’t necessarily play in your favor. And I think this is something we see very often in the open-source world. There are a lot of projects that are pricing their solution extremely low because they think they are competing on the price, while, most likely, they have a lot of other attributes to compete on. And this is something we’ve realized quite long after at Passbolt.

From then, we also followed what our competitors were doing. And obviously, we had less features, but probably stronger foundations in our software ― we knew because people would tell us all the time, like they would adopt Passbolt because of the security reasons, because of the security model, because of the collaboration layer. And we knew that they would consider Passbolt to be mature enough for their use.

From there, we decided to iterate constantly on the pricing. Now, once a year, we are basically changing our pricing, increasing it a bit more every year. And we are being quite vocal about it. It means we are informing our customers in advance. We’re having a discussion with them, with the ones who do not necessarily agree. So far, all our price increments have been received quite positively. Some of our customers have even asked us why we waited for so long to increase the pricing, and congratulated us because we did it. I think it’s a very positive signal from them.

Lead Gen?

Mike: It sounds like you’re in a very horizontal market, like the market for customers and organizations that need passwords is, like, everybody, but do you segment the market at all? And other than, let’s say the open-source channel, are you doing any other lead gen in any other segments of the market?

Kevin: No. All our traction and all our customers, as of today, we have around 1,500 customers, the industries where we have the most traction are basically public institutions, universities, and a lot of IT companies or IT teams – this is definitely the biggest sector for us. They all came organically ― we never had to do marketing, we never had to do outbound sales, and we tried it. Because we are a VC funded company, and when you get VCs on board, one of the first thing they tell you is, “Can you scale this thing?”

And it’s very difficult to scale words of mouth, but you can say you can scale your sales organization by adding a bit more outbound sales here, and some more outbound marketing there ― these are all the things we tried. But what we realized on the line is that the cost of acquisition for outbound sales, or outbound marketing, were through the roof, compared to what we can get organically through word of mouth and people who are really happy about the solution.

So, now we’ve completely stopped doing it. We do not do any artificial lead gen, we don’t do any lead gen campaign. The only thing we do is, we focus on building the greatest product we can, making sure community is happy. And what we see in practice is, whenever we deliver a nice feature, a feature that has been a long demanded, or there was a lot of traction in GitHub, immediately it has an effect on the lead generation and people purchasing the solution.

Supporting Old Versions

Mike: Pivoting back to technical question for a second. You mentioned that you have a Community Edition, and one of the challenges we found at Gluu is managing and patching the old software becomes sort of a drag like ― it’s fun to write the new stuff, but nobody wants to patch your version from like six years ago. What’s your policy on how long you’re going to support and continue to patch these older versions of Community Edition? Is it more aggressive, let’s say, than your policy for enterprise customers, with regard to the length of time of support?

Kevin: It becomes a burden, you’re right. But our policy is to make it work as long as possible. So, sometimes we are very surprised, we jump in support calls and realize that some of our customers, or users, have not upgraded their Passbolt for 3 or 4 years, and it keeps working. It’s a bit bumpy, not everything works, but most of it works. So, obviously it doesn’t really incentivize them to upgrade. And you really have to tell them, like, “Look, you should upgrade it, you’re going to get more stability, but also, you are going to get A LOT OF new features.”

And I think this is the main reason at the end why they are doing it. Currently, we don’t have anything built in the software to push people to upgrade to a newer version. And I would say, obviously it gets complicated. It is the way we develop, because then we had reasons to prepare for so many use-cases and so many versions of the API. But it’s a security software. We have to keep it working. It’s our philosophy―we have decided that we’ll do our best to keep supporting all versions of the software no matter how old they are.

We do not do telemetry at Passbolt, which means, we do not know what is in the park of software. We do not know what versions are running out there. So, then it comes to communication. Before we introduce breaking changes, we get very loud about it. We keep sending emails, we keep sending announcements on the community forum. And we pray that everyone has the information at the end and will decide to upgrade.

Is Cloud Better For Customers?

Mike: Is that sort of an argument for people using the cloud service?

Kevin: Well, obviously it’s easier for them, but then it depends on your requirements. If you really want to have something behind your firewall airgap, then you don’t have the choice: you need to go for self-hosted. I mean, what happens in organizations, what we see a lot is, initially, you have a system administrator who knows very well how to do self-hosting. He has everything on track, he’s doing his job, but then, the team changes, the system administrator changes. And then, there is a new guy that comes that does not know how to maintain the software properly. And this is when it gets complicated. Because it’s probably not on his radar, he needs to upgrade the version to a new one, or even that he has anything to do at all.

I mean, this is where we have to be smart at giving the information and be in touch with them, but obviously it’s not always possible. So, yeah, there’s a bit of complexity here.

Future of Passwords and Passkeys

Mike: I think we all agree that passwords aren’t going away for our generations, but killing passwords has become a meme. Does it feel a little bit weird being in a business, where like the common wisdom is you should be killed?

Kevin: Yes. Obviously, it’s not pleasant. We have this joke internally, where sometimes we are comparing ourselves to floppy making companies. A lot of floppy CDs, they all disappeared, but then, you still had a few vendors providing floppy discs because the demand was always there.

I think password is much bigger than that. We don’t think passwords are going anywhere, at least for core audience, the technical teams. Obviously, for non-technical users, that’s what is at stake―removing the passwords. And if I was the CEO of the company, that’s definitely what I would focus on: how can I remove the passwords from everyone.

In any case, at Passbolt, we do not consider this to be a problem. We’ll keep focusing on main use-case of the solution, which is, managing passwords inside technical teams first. And on top of that, our plans at Passbolt are definitely to go towards the passkeys management, and basically, Passbolt is already really good at managing private keys.

Because, as I mentioned earlier, this is core to our security model. That’s what Passbolt knows how to do: we take a private key, we put it in the browser extension, and then from there, we manage authentication and encryption scenarios. If you look at passkeys, it is not far from this principle. It’s almost exactly this principle.

We are already working on features inside Passbolt to help organizations manage passkeys, and we have a lot of customers that are actually waiting for this feature, how to federate their passkeys and add more permission control on top of it.

So, the conclusion: we do not worry about the future without passwords, passwords will keep being there. And for the ones who want to get rid of their passwords, we will have features for them, to implement passkeys and make sure that those passkeys are working properly and rotated when they have to be rotated, and so on.

Closing Advice For Founders

Mike: Kevin, any final advice for software founders who want to use open-source as part of their business model?

Kevin: Talk to your users. It’s really important. I’m saying this because we are advising a few companies, and obviously, we meet with a lot of other open-source funders. And it is very common to see technical founders just being obsessed with coding and technical performance on the platform, to the point where sometimes they forget the value proposition for their users and customers, and I really think it starts from there. We also did the same mistake. I’m not saying that we are better than them, but if I wanted to help an open-source founder save time, then, it would be, talk to your users and understand their use-cases first. Tech comes next.

Mike: And attend the Open Source Founder Summit in Paris, in May of this year.

Kevin: Absolutely.

Closing

Mike: Kevin, thank you so much for joining us today.

Kevin: Thank you, Mike, my pleasure. Thanks for the invitation.

Mike: Thanks to the Passbolt team for all their collaboration. Cool graphics from Kamal Bhattacharjee. Music from Brooke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere. If you are wondering why this episode didn’t feature Patrick Bachmann of Open Ocean, tune in next week. I prioritized this episode because I wanted to get in the reminder about the Open Source Founder Summit. Patrick – next week.

So, until next time, thanks for listening.

The post Episode 69: Kevin Mueller, Co-Founder / CEO Passbolt first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 31:41
Episode 67: Document Database FerretDB with Peter Farkas, Co-Founder/CEO https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-67-document-database-ferretdb-with-peter-farkas-co-founder-ceo/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 18:04:38 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2304 Intro Mike: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host Mike Schwartz, founder of Gluu, and this is episode 67 with Peter Farkas, Co-founder and CEO of FerretDB. Why FerretDB and not PigeonDB? That’s a very good question. Whereas pigeons are underappreciated for their speed and resiliency, ferrets are fierce and furry and...

The post Episode 67: Document Database FerretDB with Peter Farkas, Co-Founder/CEO first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro


Mike: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host Mike Schwartz, founder of Gluu, and this is episode 67 with Peter Farkas, Co-founder and CEO of FerretDB.

Why FerretDB and not PigeonDB? That’s a very good question. Whereas pigeons are underappreciated for their speed and resiliency, ferrets are fierce and furry and loved by everyone, except Rudy Giuliani.

Mike: A MongoDB API, with PostgreSQL storage, Ferret is a database platform that seems to have a similarly wide appeal. I guess, the 800-pound gorilla in this market is MongoDB itself, with around $35 billion in equity market cap. But in addition to MongoDB, Amazon has also implemented a Mongo conformant API that uses some kind of Amazon storage.
Is there a room in this very competitive and well-capitalized Mongo Cloud database ecosystem for a scrappy start-up with a good technical idea and a track record of reliable operation?

I recorded this episode at the State of Open Conference, or SoCon, which is the largest FOSDEM fringe event. If you can make it to SoCon, I highly recommend it. Unlike FOSDEM, it’s a more traditional event with badges and keynotes, and registration, and coffee, or tea, if you’re British, and after the chaos of FOSDEM, it’s a nice change.

So, this year, SoCon rented around five media vans specifically to record podcasts. So, thanks a lot to conference organizers, it was a pretty great idea. And there’s a picture of Peter and I, donning the Underdog’s headsets on the episode website. Well, with that unusually long intro, here’s the interview.

Origin

Mike: FerretDB was founded a little more than two years ago, you were probably thinking about it for a while before that. What was the spark that led you to actually take action and start the thing, and was the plan always to start a business around FerretDB?

Peter: MongoDB decided to leave its open-source roots around 2018, and all of the co-founders of FerretDB have open-source databases for close to a decade. Peter Zaitsev, one of our co-founders, maybe more, maybe 20 years. After MongoDB went public with SSPL and their departure from open source, we’ve been waiting for a couple of years whether there will be a fork, or if the community is going to do something about it, and nothing really happened.

There was no Fork, there was no OpenTofu reaction to MongoDB’s move. And in 2021, we’ve just decided that something needs to be done. That was the time when we started FerretDB as a side project mid-2021.

Project Launch

Mike: FerretDB has over 8K stars on GitHub, which is fantastic, that’s a lot. How did you go about promoting the project to the developer community to build that kind of support?

Peter: That was the beauty of FerretDB. When we started the project, we were not sure whether someone is going to be interested at all. Since there was no OpenTofu like reaction to MongoDB’s departure from open source, we were not sure whether the community even cares.

If you take MongoDB, there’s not a lot of community around the product itself, in a sense that most of the community consists of users rather than developers of the MongoDB codebase. So, we were unsure what will be the reception. And when we started working on FerretDB, again as a side project, we just created a tech demo, we published it on GitHub, and I think, the first 4K stars came in around two days.

So, we did not do promotion, and we did not expect this kind of outpouring interest in FerretDB. And I think part of the reason why the interest was high is because we’re building on Postgres, and the Postgres community really feels strongly about open source and about open-source databases, and they want Postgres to succeed in various different use-cases, such as document database or MongoDB-compatible use-cases. So, I think that most of the support came from the Postgres community initially.

Product Roadmap

Mike: So, what product features do you see as the most strategic to develop this year, or in the near term? And how do you think these features will help the business?

Peter: As much as it sounds crazy from someone who leads a VC-funded start-up, we are not really concentrating on the business part, because we know that the business success comes after strong adoption and ways to utilize FerretDB in meaningful larger use-cases. So, the most important to us is to increase compatibility with MongoDB. We want the user experience to be seamless, in a sense that if you use a certain tool, or framework with MongoDB, you need to be able to use that with FerretDB as well, without modifying anything in your code.

That’s our goal. But this is definitely not easy. There are a lot of features in MongoDB. Some of these features are not used by many, but would still be used by a very popular framework, and then we need to pay attention to that exact framework to make sure that, for example, Meteor utilizes Oplog, which is a duplicated feature in MongoDB itself.

We need to be very conscious about developing features, which would result in many developers being able to use FerretDB in place of MongoDB, through their favorite framework, through their favorite tools. What’s more important for us is to work with the community on establishing an open standard around document databases.

So, we don’t want to chase MongoDB with their features for eternity, that’s impossible. What we want to do is, we want to work with the existing MongoDB alternatives to establish an open standard, similarly to how SQL came to be, where, if you use SQL, you can query a Postgres database, you can query MySQL database, and any other relational database out there.

And when it comes to MongoDB, there’s no such standard – the best you can do is to become MongoDB compatible. But, it’s like saying that MySQL is IBM DB2-compatible. Do we say that ever? No. It supports the SQL standard, implemented it, and that’s why you can use SQL across the board, with relational databases.

So, we want to reach the same situation with document databases, where it’s no longer MongoDB-compatible, it’s compatible with an open standard.

Value Proposition

Mike: Do you actually have customers who’ve raised their hand and said, “I want to pay you guys for your services?”

Peter: Yeah. We were very lucky. I think, right at the second month, we were bringing in revenue, and that was reassuring feeling that this is something which is sustainable.

Mike: What was the value proposition for those customers?

Peter: I think that the value proposition here is that many customers have existing Postgres infrastructure, and they also have MongoDB. And they need to maintain the internal know-how about these very different databases, they need to pay services for both. And they can just combine the two databases into one and care only about Postgres, run FerretDB on top of it, and they end up with a much simpler infrastructure.

Channels

Mike: Is the open source really your only channel? Do you do any other marketing?

Peter: We are, I think, 80% engineering, and then, we pay attention to channel partners – those Postgres providers who are interested in providing further services to their customers. We don’t run an expensive marketing machine. And we feel that we don’t need to, at this point. We have enough on our plate, on our road map to care about.

Priority of FOSS v. Commercial

Mike: It looks like a relatively small team right now. How much of your time does your team spend on R&D, versus providing services to customers? Because there’s always some friction when you’re providing services – are you working on the product or are you helping customers. And those things can collide. How much time do you spend actually on R&D?

Peter: Initially, we signed a contract, which took away some of our focus from R&D itself, because that customer wanted us to develop features which were not on our road map. And right now, what we are focusing on is to team up with customers who need services and features in close connection to what we have on our roadmap.
Meaning that it’s more like a reprioritization of R&D, instead of going entirely different direction with our development efforts. I believe that with this approach we were able to – this is a ballpark number – but I think 80-85% of our time is still spent on developing FerretDB. Sometimes in relation with what our customers would also want us to do.

Community Contributions


Mike: Have you seen any material code contributions from the community?

Peter: Yes. We had a lot of interesting surprises like that. First of all, there are a lot of individual contributors. And we really like them, because they also want FerretDB to succeed, and they are invested. We have four or five new contributors every month.

The most surprising were the likes of SAP, for example. One day, we just woke up to SAP pushing code in our repo, and that was great. Because that meant that it’s not only FerretDB incorporated developing FerretDB, but others who are interested in creating compatibility with their own products and MongoDB using FerretDB. That was also a very reassuring moment that it’s not only us who want to make this happen, but some key players in the industry as well.

Monetization


Mike: I see you’re offering Services, or we talked about that – it sounds a little bit like Percona in a way, which, I guess, makes sense, because I see Peter Zaitsev is also one of the founders. Is Services the main way you intend to monetize? And what are some of the trade-offs you anticipate with this monetization strategy, versus, let’s say, licensing or Cloud, which are the two most common monetization strategies for database vendors?

Peter: We do Services because we know how to do that. I think that’s the short answer. So, working at Percona really taught us how to provide great services to demanding customers. That doesn’t mean that we are not looking at other sources of additional monetization. We are planning to roll out our managed service. So, we will have a cloud-based offering.

The reason why we think that is important is because, if you take a look at the SSPL license, it positions MongoDB Atlas and some of MongoDB partners as the sole providers of services around MongoDB or a MongoDB-compatible database. And we want to challenge that. So, first of all, we want to enable other providers who did not get a seat at the table with MongoDB Inc. to provide services for MongoDB users with FerretDB, but we also want to do our own cloud service offering. And that’s something we are working on, and it’s definitely a challenging task.

Back to your question, Services is just the easiest way of putting an open-source project onto a sustainable trajectory.

Governance

Mike: You say you want to be an open-source alternative to MongoDB, but how do I know you won’t change the license after the project gets some adoption? The project and the trademark is controlled by your for-profit company – why should we trust you?

Peter: So, Mike, would it make any sense to do the same thing as MongoDB? I mean, trust will be required. I’m not going to state, “Hey, trust everyone blindly.” I think whenever you choose a provider for an open-source offering, I think trust is definitely going to be one of the items you need to think about. But doing the same thing as MongoDB in FerretDB situation is just pointless. I don’t think that the market would react in any kind of positive way to that. It’s not something we can afford to do.

Mike: Also, you say that now, but after a billion downloads and you go public, and Pete Farkas is not CEO anymore – the new Pete Farkas might feel differently. Have you considered, for example, Postgres, I believe has a foundation, the Linux foundation is great, there’s several other foundations you could look at – why not contribute the code and make a community governed so that both the trademark and the code are really protected?

Peter: It’s in the works. When we started FerretDB, the traction was not enough to even sit down with the rest of the industry and talk about these things. What I can say at this point is that it’s in the works, so it is going to happen in some shape or form. We don’t expect the market to blindly trust FerretDB, we don’t want to do the same thing as what MongoDB did, we trust the existing mechanism of the open-source community, which is available to us to take care of this. So, we sat down with many in the industry in the MongoDB alternative markets, and we are actively trying to figure out a way on how to increase this trust.

So, FerretDB is not going to be the only company you can get FerretDB from – that’s not our goal. What is going to happen after we do an IPO, for example in 10 years? That’s a question I get surprisingly often. And from my position right now, this is very hard to imagine, but let’s take the example of HashiCorp.

It’s obviously really bad what happened. And the CEO departed shortly after or before, I don’t remember. They did not agree with the direction seemingly. Or just had enough of this whole ordeal of deciding whether HashiCorp is an open-source company or not. But what’s interesting about this situation is that we need to ask the question: Did HashiCorp provide value to the open-source community, or users, in general, in the decade, or I don’t know how long they developed the software?

If you ask me, I think they did. I think they did provide a lot of value and OpenTofu is free to take that over and develop it further. So, it’s not all bad in my opinion. On the other hand, I also would have preferred if they stayed open source and proved the market and proved investors that an open-source company, like HashiCorp, can still exist without changing the license. That would be my preference as well.

Investment


Mike: I have to apologize I haven’t been able to do all my research yet – I heard you mentioned “Venture Capital” – have you raised Venture Capital, and if so, why or why not?

Peter: We absolutely did not plan to raise Venture Capital. Because, first of all, all of the co-founders at FerretDB are coming from a bootstrap background, completely opposite of a VC-funded start-up. And then, after the GitHub project became popular, we started getting a lot of offers from investors, and we rejected a lot.
Before talking to our current investors, the reason why we rejected the initial offers of the investors we got in touch with is because they did not understand open source.

For example, some investors were like, “Okay, and when are you going to change the license?” And that’s not a good start. But there are investors who understand open source, and there are investors who are patient enough that they give the chance FerretDB, or some other company in open source, to provide value to the community, they understand that it’s not all about the license. There are successful open-source companies which took VC investment, and they are looking at those examples instead of, “Hey, how many licenses did you sell last month?”

After meeting investors like that, we were confident that this was the way for us to go. We needed a lot of capital to hire our current team – ten people as of now. And we also needed a lot of time. An open-source project, in order to get the necessary amount of traction – and I’m not talking about GitHub stars – I’m talking about real traction, like the number of contributors, that’s a much more meaningful metric here in terms of measuring contribution.

So, in order for that to happen, you can do all kinds of marketing, and outreach, and developer advocacy, but what you need first and foremost is time, time for the market, time for developers to understand what this is, time for them to hear about it, and then, you have real traction. For that, you need runway, we are already two years old, still running on our initial round. And without taking investment, this wouldn’t have been possible.

Partnerships

Mike: Do you see any partnerships with other business, or organizations, as critical to your success?

Peter: Very much so. Because as I mentioned earlier, the whole point of SSPL is to make sure no one provides MongoDB as a service. Since FerretDB can enable cloud providers and Postgres as a service providers to do just that, these partnerships with them are very important to us. And we are working with many of these companies to roll out FerretDB as a service.

If you take a look at our social media, we are full of these articles or videos, where Supabase, or UB cloud, or Scaleway, or CVO, or some others, decided to try out FerretDB, make it part of their offerings maybe and see where that leads to.

Next hire


Mike: It sounds like you’re being rather capital efficient, in terms of hiring and building the team. What do you think are the most important roles for you to fill in the next year or two?

Peter: For the initial years, R&D is the obvious reason why you would want to hire. So, you hire engineers, you hire very capable technical people, but as the product matures and as there are more users, you need more service-oriented people, salespeople, marketing people – and this is what we are seeing as the next evolution of FerretDB as a team, where we have more people who support the business side of things.

And by supporting the business side of things, we increase the sustainability of the project itself. We are really talking about a project and a business next to it. These are really two separate things in my mind: FerretDB as a project and FerretDB as a business. And for the last two years, we were focusing on the project. And as the project evolves, we will need to focus on the business.

Mike: Maybe just to make it a little more specific, what’s the next “hire” you’re looking for in the executive team?

Peter: The next hire would be sales, I believe. Simply because pricing and coming up with terms for a contract is definitely not something which I, as a service-oriented person, or engineers developing the software, should come up with.

Advice for Founders

Mike: You’ve been involved in a couple of start-ups. I saw you founded more than one company. My closing question is, do you have any advice for new entrepreneurs who are launching a business around an open-source software project?

Peter: I think that the best advice I could give, especially talking to some founders just starting out, is to try and solve a problem, rather than to find the technology you fall in love with. Solving a problem is a lot more important than what is going to give you traction, that’s what is going to give you opportunities. If you just find a cool technology you want to play with, let’s say AI. Okay. But what are you going to use AI for? That’s the question. AI – that’s not a product, that’s not something you can do anything with, or your customer would be able to do anything with. What is the problem that AI is going to solve, or your new database is going to solve. I think that’s the real question, and not all founders raised this question initially, I believe.

Why Ferret?


Mike: Okay. I said it was the last question, but I’m going to ask you one more question. Mongooses, they’re kind of badass, they fight cobras, and ferrets are kind of cute and cuddly – are you sure you want to be a ferret?

Peter: The story of ferrets and why ferret, that’s the second most common question I am getting. It’s just insanely hard to find the domain name, let’s face it. We were ferretdb.io, not even .com. Just recently, we’ve been able to get the expired domain ferretdb.com, because there was a database of various kinds of ferrets at ferret db.com. So, it’s insanely hard. I think the naming of the companies by far my least favorite thing, and I would not tell you the truth if I would tell you that we had this concept initially.

Because none of us are native English speakers, but after naming FerretDB FerretDB, we found out that to ferret out is something that exists in the English language, meaning to carefully search for something.
And I think that’s just a great name for a database in the end. Because that’s what the database does. So, FerretDB? FerretDB it is. I don’t think it’s rare to find weird animal names in open-source anyway.

Closing – Credits


Mike: Peter, thank you so much for spending time today. I love what you guys are doing. And thank you for sharing your experience with our audience.

Peter: Thank you so much, Mike. It was an honor to be here and hope to talk to you soon.

Mike: Thanks to the FerretDB team for the cool stickers and the social media retweets. Cool graphics from Kamal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere. Special thanks to Alex Izza from Resonance Public Relations for the logistical help. Actually, Alex has suggested two more interviews, which you’ll hear in the next two weeks: Solomon Hykes, founder of Dagger and formerly co-founder of Docker, and Patrik Backman, one of the co-founders of MariaDB and an original team member of MySQL.
Hopefully, I’ll have that out in the next week or so. Until then, thanks for listening.

The post Episode 67: Document Database FerretDB with Peter Farkas, Co-Founder/CEO first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 24:28
Episode 68: Solomon Hykes, Co-Founder / CEO Dagger https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-68-solomon-hykes-co-founder-ceo-dagger/ Fri, 15 Mar 2024 20:43:11 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2310 Intro Mike: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host Mike Schwartz, Founder of Gluu, and this is episode 68 with Solomon Hykes, Co-Founder and CEO of Dagger, but also formerly the co-founder and CTO of Docker. Back in February, I recorded this episode at the Civo Navigate conference in my hometown of Austin,...

The post Episode 68: Solomon Hykes, Co-Founder / CEO Dagger first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro

Mike: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host Mike Schwartz, Founder of Gluu, and this is episode 68 with Solomon Hykes, Co-Founder and CEO of Dagger, but also formerly the co-founder and CTO of Docker.

Back in February, I recorded this episode at the Civo Navigate conference in my hometown of Austin, Texas. If you want to hear the latest and greatest cloud native stuff and meet companies like Dagger, you should check out Civo Navigate. It looks like they are planning a US and Europe event each year.

This episode is a little on the long side because we cover some questions, relating both to Dagger and Docker. But if 45 minutes aren’t enough for you, there are a bunch of other interviews with Solomon, so just check the interweb.

And with that said, let’s just cut to the interview, so we can get to the main attraction. Here we go.

Y-Combinator Playbook?

Solomon, thank you so much for joining us on Open Source Underdogs.

Solomon: Thanks for having me.

Mike: I’m just going to dive into this with Dagger. Your approach seems very YC to me – who are the developers in pain that build Dagger?

Solomon: Yeah. Dagger came out of a process of talking to a lot of software teams about their pain, and the pattern we saw emerge was the problem of the deployment pipeline. You know, CICD, everything that happens after your code’s ready. But before your application is live, everything in between is just, painful, painful and complicated. And so, we’re focusing on making it a little less painful, a little less complicated. So, it is very YC, it’s the standard Y-Combinator playbook.

Community Lead Growth

Mike: What is the Daggerverse and Daggernauts, and what do you mean by community-led growth?

Solomon: Daggernauts are people who think of themselves as part of the Dagger community. Community is — I mean, it’s an overused word, but it’s really important to us, community-led growth is our business strategy. And the idea is, if you build a product for developers, and those developers are excited enough about it that they will not only use it, but show up on an online chat server to talk about it, come to meetups to talk about it, write blog posts about it, tell their friends, help each other – they become more than users.

You need a new word for that, so we use the word community, and then we market the product together. Sometimes we sell it together, and we write software for it together, so that that can become a way to grow as a business. It’s hard to do correctly, because you have to be authentic, you can’t fake it. Because a community will only form if there’s actually something in it for them, and it can’t be just transactional – they have to feel valued, respected, but when it does work clicks, then it’s very powerful.

Monetization?


Mike: As I understand it, you have an open-source project under the Dagger GitHub – your trademark – and your strategy is to monetize by selling a maybe cloud-controlled plane or dashboard, where enterprises can really see value. Am I on the right track?

Solomon: Yep, totally. Open-source engine, optional proprietary control plane.

Mike: What is the business value that enterprises are actually seeing, where they decide, “Okay. I want to go with the commercial offering.”

Solomon: Well, first of all, the commercial offering is very new. Our priority is adoption of the engine. If an enterprise can use both, that’s great. If they only use the engine, and they need to take a little more time to evaluate the commercial products, wait for a feature to be available, then, that’s totally fine. We’ve designed it that way.
For example, our cloud product does not have a self-hosted version yet. 

So, some customers do not care, and they’ll buy it today. And others are waiting for this self-hosted version. When we talk about the business value of Dagger, we’ll talk about the whole of the platform, open-source engine cloud for the buyer. Either it solves a business problem for them, as a complete platform, or it doesn’t.

Unique Features

Mike: There’s a number of tools in this area already, who are those super fans who say like, “I know about all that other stuff, but that’s not for me. I really need this Dagger.” Who are those people?

Solomon: Usually, in every software team, there is at least one person who’s the designated DevOps person, they’re the person who will have to fix the build, or make it faster, get the CI pipeline going, sort of support the developers in shipping. And then, over time, as the team grows, you’ll have more than one.

And in larger enterprises, you’ll have entire team, platform team, DevOps team, whatever – those people are typically the people who will get excited about Dagger because it makes their job easier.

Developers we help indirectly, the DevOps people we help directly. The main reason they get excited is because we don’t force them to throw away what they have, will improve the stack they have incrementally their terms – that just makes everything else easier.

Prioritizing Core v. Commercial?


Mike: Is there ever any friction when you’re figuring out how to allocate scarce resources at Dagger, on, “We should work on this core feature that is in the open source, or we should work on some features that improve the cloud offering, which will help us monetize.” And how do you balance those?

Solomon: Yeah, it does happen all the time. In fact, we’re small enough that it happens even within the open-source engine. Also, right now, we’re at an inflection point, where the core product is done – well, it’s not done, but it’s well-defined, and it’s well understood. And we have a community of people who are using it and want to use it more and more, which means they’re reporting bugs, they’re asking for features – there’s an incremental roadmap that we’re executing on.
Meanwhile, we’re building out this commercial product, which is, like I mentioned, it’s much newer, and it needs a lot of work. Resource contention is a problem. I don’t think we’ve found the solution. Honestly, focus is our friend here. For example, I mentioned we’ve prioritized adoption of the open-source engine.

So, to be honest with you, over the last six months, I think we got a little bit too ahead on the commercial products. We approached it like we could build both at full speed in parallel, but then we realized, when we looked at what people were asking for on both sides, we realized, okay, we can build both, but we cannot build both at the same level of priority. So, we’ve changed our text slightly, and we’ve decided to make it clear that we are prioritizing the core open-source engine at the moment.

And with the resources they are left with, we’re developing the commercial product. But we’re narrowing the scope of the features of the commercial product – in practice, that meant going from two flagship features to one flagship feature in the commercial product, for example. I think it’s just mostly being realistic and also being flexible adapting to changing circumstances.

Community v. Monetization?


Mike: I’ve noticed that with a number of start-ups, their initial focus is really on getting adoption and getting those super fans and then figuring out monetization later. I’ve also had guests who said they should have thought of monetization from day one and built around that. Where do you come out on that?

Solomon: I think there’s a balance to be found for sure. For example, I’ve just said, we had to sort of scale back a little bit on developing the commercial product. I’m still very glad we started developing it early, and we’re validating it, whether there is something that anyone is willing to pay for, and also, a million details along the way – how much to charge for it, is it cloud or on-prem, what market are we competing in, who are our competitors.

The clock starts the day you start building it. And I do think completely putting off even thinking about it for potentially years can be a mistake. So, we were pretty deliberate about starting early, but then, once you’ve started, you got to manage your priorities – that’s our approach.At Docker, it was all on community and think about monetization later for sure. And it worked. I’m not surprised when you say some people regret not working on monetization sooner. I completely understand.

Why Trademark is important

Mike: Actually, I would like to dive deeper into the monetization because that’s really interesting, but before we even get there, maybe just any thoughts about the use of the trademark, and how you’re approaching Dagger differently from a trademark perspective.

Solomon: At Docker, we underestimated the importance of protecting your trademark when you’re building an open-source platform. Ironically, the best example of doing that right is also the same company that abused our trademark the most – namely RedHat. RedHat really is a great model for how to be extremely open on your code. Red Hat has always been serious about open-source licenses, opening up even proprietary products from companies that they bought. They would open up the code. They really walked the walk on copyright on the license of the code itself, but the way they made it work is they’ve always been extremely strict and enforcing the use of the RedHat trademark.

It is the best model for an open-source business. The stricter you are on the trademark, the more open you can afford to be on the code. In practice, that means this is open source – you can fork all of it and redistribute it. It’s all fair game. You can take all of it or modify it and redistribute your modified version. But you can’t call it in our case Dagger, you have to call it something else.

Ideal Use of Trademark

Mike: What was the impact on Docker as a result of people, or organizations, using the trademark?

Solomon: The problem was the kleenex problem basically, that Docker washing became the problem. As Docker popularized containers, and containers became the hot new thing, Docker became the hot new thing, and the Docker brand became very valuable. You know, the whale logo, everything associated with it – something new, something exciting. This community that was just blowing up – we had I think 120 meetup groups around the world, hundreds of thousands of people physically coming every week to just show each other a cool stuff they were dealing with Docker.

That brand was basically very valuable, and anyone, any vendor could just take it and say, “Oh, yeah, we do that.” Of course, it meant that Docker as a business did not enjoy as exclusive a competitive advantage as it deserved.
And also, over time, it hurt the quality of the experience, because you could go to a random vendor and they tell you you’re getting Docker. So, you install their thing, and you think you’re getting Docker, but you’re getting some weird Frankenstein product that maybe there’s some Docker inside it somewhere.

But the experience is not up to my standards, or the standards of the Docker team. So, you’re going to walk away disappointed, it didn’t work properly, it wasn’t compatible. They said it would be portable, but it only works on this vendor system, whatever the problem is. And now you’re going to associate that negative experience with the Docker brand. So, losing control of your brand is a really terrible thing to experience. The way to not lose control of it is to enforce your trademark in a very strict way.

Mike: Although Dagger is open source, you don’t want anybody doing Dagger hosting, or introducing a Dagger powered product. What about the hosting side? We’ve heard a lot about open-source data. If somebody used just Dagger hosting, we’ve seen WordPress hosting here in Austin – where are the limits, or where are the boundaries?

Solomon: Our approach is, if you think Dagger hosting is a great thing to do, come talk to us, and we’ll partner. Actually, we’re having conversations now that actually becomes forcing function for designing it. Okay, let’s talk about what does Dagger hosting mean actually. What that experience will be is not as straightforward as hosting a database. There are questions of what’s going to run on the client, what’s going to run on the server – those things are still being worked out. So, now we get a chance by forcing people who want to sell hosting for Dagger to come to us.

Now, they’re part of the design conversation, now these potential partners, we are showing them the architecture we have in mind, we’re showing them the feedback we’re getting from our community what they want.

And now, we’re all going to design this together. And if it still makes sense in the end, and they’re still interested, then they’ll get a license to use a trademark. Or they could just say, “You know what? This is great. We don’t need your brand, we just want the code, and we’re just going to do hosting, or something – they change the name, and then they can host it now, they don’t need our permission for that. Keeps us honest at the same time.

Mike: Because they have the right to use the software.

Solomon: Exactly. Because it’s actually open source. There’s no special license or anything.

HashiCorp shows system worked?

Mike: There’s another company I thought you were going to mention when you mentioned RedHat, and I think RedHat’s also underappreciated. But I was thinking of HashiCorp. They actually did and continue to do a very good job of defending their trademark – TerraForm.

However, they did run into some friction with the community. Because, after a billion downloads of their software, they changed to a non-OSI approved license. And there was some blowback from the community. And I think they broke a social contract in a way. By your definition, they did it right, but is there anything they could have done better?

Solomon: I think that episode with HashiCorp was actually very useful for start-ups like Dagger that are earlier in the journey. We’re telling the markets, “Here’s our open-source product, here is our business model around it. And it’s a sound model, and you can trust us that everyone wins.


RedHat was very useful in standardizing part of that model. Okay, RedHat has opened everything, and they’ve been very strict on the trademark. And they’ve been successful, so that helps us make our case. But one question we can’t answer with only that example is, okay, but what if later you change your mind, what if later the founders leave, and the professional CEO takes over? Or, what if you sell? And you can’t say, “No, we won’t.” I mean, because you don’t know. And that’s what happened to HashiCorp.

And what’s wonderful about this example is that it turned out okay for the customers. Because what’s happening now is, there was a fork, it’s run by a foundation. Now, there’s one more option. After HashiCorp made this decision to break the social contract, basically they were punished or rewarded, depending on how you look at it, with a community-run alternative, which customers can now choose to switch to at any time.

Now, I get to say, well, we don’t plan on doing this, there’s no good reason for us to do that, but just in case, a few years in the future we change our mind for whatever reason, here’s what will happen: we’ll get forked, there’ll be a community-run alternative, and you’ll get to use that. So, it’ll be fine.

Mike: So, the system worked.

Solomon: Yeah. I think the system worked. I have no clue if in the end, this is good or bad for HashiCorp, if they made a mistake, or if it’s not that important. I mean, I don’t really have an opinion on that, but I know it helps us make the case for our model now.

Do we need a new OSI model?


Mike: We’ve recently attended SoCon, the State of Open Conference in London, and Bruce Perens gave a talk, where he suggested we need a new open-source definition. And we see open-source companies moving to other types of licenses that are slightly more restrictive. Do you have any thoughts about whether maybe we need some innovation in this area?

Solomon: I think we do. Honestly, the elephant in the room is this battle over what’s open AI – well, there you go [laughing], that’s the problem right now. What does it mean for AI to be open and what happens when the closed vendor has opened in the name, and then you have open-source models that have a closet says, you know, Apple can’t use it, or something. Neither open AI, nor so-called open-source models today, meet the OSI definition of open source. Is that okay or not, that’s the debate. But I think given just the enormous attention on AI right now, if anything causes the state-of-the-art in this area to change, it’s going to be that.

Every other ongoing point of contention is dwarfed by the focus on AI. That’s my opinion. Maybe that’s an opportunity to leverage that attention and that desire for change. And that those tensions channel it into constructive changes to the standard. It’s dangerous, because maybe what ends up happening is the standard shifts in the wrong direction.

It’s possible that we regress, that we actually instead of getting incremental improvement on the current OSI model, maybe we lose benefits of it that we take for granted at the moment. And on top of all of that, even the definition of software itself is called into question. Like, what if all the software is generated by a model anyway.
So, I’m glad it’s not my job to figure that stuff out. I’m glad I’m not the expert.

Does Open Source Pattern Match with a Tragedy of the Commons?


Mike: A professor here at UT, and we’re recording this at University of Texas, Austin, wrote a paper comparing open-source to tragedy of the commons. She asserts that actually open-source economics pattern matches with some of the things that go wrong in a tragedy of the commons and proposes some remedies.

Solomon: I completely agree with that analogy, but I also think it’s getting applied wrong. Because common use of a limited resource – that needs to be replenished, the land. But software doesn’t need to be replenished – it doesn’t matter if one person downloads it, or 10,000 people download it. The bits themselves, once shipped, are not a resource that needs to be replenished. But the maintenance effort, the support burden is. And so, I think the grazing is not when you download the open-source software and then you use it without paying back. I think that the grazing happens when you’re filing a bug on the GitHub repo, and you’re expecting a maintainer to read it and then answer your question.

Or, you are sending a patch that you really need to see merge for your own downstream needs, and you need a maintainer to review it and give you feedback on it, ideally merge it yesterday. That’s grazing.

So, the resource, the equivalent of the land is not the software. I think the equivalent of the land is the people maintaining it. Because those maintainers behind the scenes are burned out. They are holding the world on their shoulders, and a lot of times they’re volunteers. But even if they’re paid, we’ve had people burn out of Docker because the world showed up, and they all wanted the Docker engine, and they wanted this new thing merge, and they needed this bug fixed, and they all needed it yesterday. And some of them were very demanding.

And some of them had millions and millions in contracts on the line, and RedHat was a culprit in that, for example. And we had people burn out not just from Docker, but from tech. Because they just cannot take it. You know, I have great hair now, and I didn’t when I started as a maintainer of the Docker project. We need to solve that. And I think tragedy of the commons is a perfect analogy there.

How to Maintain a Mountain of Open Source?


Mike: You mentioned open AI, and when I look at open AI, I see that it’s built on a mountain of open source. But they have the connection to the customer, which gives them that sort of last mile that enables them to extract value. What I’ve noticed is that there’s an inexorable stream of CVEs. That, because my software is built on a mountain of open source, some of those dependencies are always getting a rear patching once a month, just to keep up with it.

And I think the expectation for an open-source project is not just that it’s open source, but almost like this social contract that you will continue to patch it forever. And when the next log4j happens, we expect you to do it tomorrow.

 Solomon: I agree. Yeah, that’s part of the problem. It’s like an open-source project is a service. The unspoken contract includes everything you’re talking about – ongoing maintenance, ongoing support, ongoing operations of the project itself, running the CI pipelines for it. There’s no system in place for doing that in a sustainable way. I think it’s an unresolved tension in our industry today.

I just think sometimes we go down the wrong rabbit hole, trying to solve it, because we just frame the problem – it’s not a software piracy problem, the problem is not that people are using the software for free to make money because that’s normal, that’s expected. If someone has to wake up at 4:00 a.m. because a really terrible security vulnerability was just discovered and they have to patch it because only they know how. And they were volunteers, and they have billion-dollar companies depending on it, and the billion-dollar companies are the ones calling them – that’s not okay. That’s like fundamental problem for everybody involved. And that’s an actual real-life scenario. That stuff happens. So, yeah, we got to figure that one out.

Lessons from Docker Monetization Battles


Mike: Yeah. This is a global problem, and it’s really hard to solve global problems. I’m going to switch back to Docker, and again, excuse my ignorance, I’m not a Docker expert, about the history either, but one thing I have noticed is that they seem to be doing a little better now.

Solomon: Oh, yeah, yeah.

Mike: And so, monetization and pricing you mentioned, I wasn’t even going to ask you about your price journey for Dagger because it’s too early. Whatever you think of now probably is going to change. But you do have some interesting perspective, I think, on having this incredibly, maybe epically, record-breaking popularity in terms of who loved the software, but then also challenges around monetizing. And then, also now, the ability to see what they’ve done. And I’m just curious if you had any thoughts on what they’re doing now?

Solomon: Of course. A very common thing I hear is, “Docker struggled as a business because they gave too much away for free.” And I really think that’s wrong, meaning Docker was correct to open source, and it never had to be backtracked. Docker never had to change its license and anything while I was there, and after. At no point did Docker have a regret open-sourcing something – there was no temptation to walk it back. I think that’s a victory.

And second thing, there were many, many opportunities to monetize on top of this immensely popular open-source project. And many companies successfully did that, pretty much the whole tech industry made buckets of money off of Docker, except for Docker, for a long time. And that’s not anybody’s fault other than Docker’s.
Docker failed to build a commercial product that was exciting enough for people to buy. That’s the reason Docker struggled. It was purely an execution problem. It was ours to lose, and we screwed it up. And all this typical startup failure ways lack of focus, which comes from an inability to say no to something, so you can actually focus on other things.

And it’s just lack of discipline on hiring and expenditure and strategy. So, ultimately, instead of shipping one great commercial product, we shipped eight average ones. If you look at the numbers, if you go up to the point where Docker got closest to that, and it got recapitalized and split in two, and the commercial part got sold off to Mirantis.

And the core assets, the brand, the open-source tools, the developer tools lived to fight another day. By that point, Docker had spent 300 million dollars to build a 60-million-dollar business. The math doesn’t work out. So, yeah, that was the main reason what caused Docker to be successful now, is a very simple – they had to downsize, sell off that failed enterprise business, they were left with the open-source Docker engine, Docker Hub and Docker for Mac, these desktop apps install Docker on your desktop. The simplest thing in the world. It just so happens that when we shipped that back in 2016, we did not make it open source. So, we have this really easy Mac application: click, click, you got Docker. We bundled that as a binary, and we did not open source it, and nobody cared. And it was free. And then, one day Docker said, “You know what? This application is still free unless you make this much in revenue as a business, and then you have to pay us now.”


And that was it. That turned Docker into a successful business pretty much overnight. So, not sure what lesson to take from that. The product that we ended up monetizing successfully in what, 2020 let’s say. It had been there for four years. You just had to put a price tag on it.

YC Twice?


Mike: So, you’re a new entrepreneur. Are you going to recommend going through the Y- Combinator?

Solomon: Yes. 100%.

Mike: On your second start-up, did you go through YC again?

Solomon: I did.

Mike: Can you talk a little bit about why? Like, you knew everything from the first time around, why did you do it again?

Solomon: It’s a complicated answer. The shorter version is, I joined a little bit later. It’s three of us co-founders at Dagger. My two co-founders, Sam and Andrea, they were first employees at Docker. They left, and they started something new. And I joined a little bit later. The reason I joined later is because I was taking a break, and I was a visiting partner at Y-Combinator for one batch. If you do this thing, they invite entrepreneurs to be a partner for a little while. At the same time, they were asking me the exact same question you asked me, “Hey, should we join YC?”, and I said, “Yeah, you should join YC totally. You’ll meet new people, you’ll get a lot of help.”, because they were first-time founders.


And they ended up assigned to me, so I was their partner, one of their partners. We spent a bunch of time together at YC. I was a partner, they were founders, and we talked about their idea what to do. And then, we got excited about it together. And at the end of the Y-Combinator batch, I joined as a founder, which means that now we’re a YC company, but like technically, I did not go through YC as a founder of the first time, if that makes sense. I did not have the opportunity to make that decision. But if I had had the opportunity, I would have done it.

Because I had been through YC, but my co-founders hasn’t. So, as a group of founders, we had not gone through it together. And that’s very valuable. And also, YC got better over time. New partners, new programs, new resources, and more importantly, more alumni.

So, the other founders in the batch are some of the smartest people you’ll meet. Being surrounded by other founders and talking about your founder problems with them, and then staying in touch and growing your network that way and helping each other after you leave Y-Combinator. That’s incredibly valuable. I always tell everyone, you should join YC if you can. And if you’re an outsider, or a first-timer, then even more so.
And if you say, “Okay. I’m a second-time founder, I’m not going to do it.”, I’ll still say you should do it, but I understand the way you’re not doing it. If you’re a first-time founder, there’s no reason not to go through YC, if you get a chance.

Advice for Open Source Founder?


Mike: Last question. Do you have any final advice for founders who want to use open source as part of their business model? Just some quick advice.

Solomon: Yeah. I would think of it as a tool in your toolbox, as a founder. It can be the perfect tool, or it can be the wrong tool. It really depends on your product, your positioning in the market, your strengths as a founding team. So, I would not blindly apply a playbook. And I would always make sure that if you’re open sourcing something you know why, especially for engineers, engineer founders.


There’s always a pressure to open-source everything, because you want to be loved and respected by your peers, giving things away. Open source is just a shortcut to that. Sometimes, the right answer is to not open source something to withhold it. And sometimes the answer is to open source. It really depends on the situation. So, be strategic about it, my general advice.

Closing Credits


Mike: Solomon, thank you so much for sharing all this with our audience, thank you so much.

Solomon: Thank you.

Mike: Thanks to the Dagger team for volunteering Solomon, to Alex from Resonance Public Relations for suggesting this interview, and to the CIVO Navigate team for the logistical help with the recording schedule.

Don’t forget to check out CIVO Navigate next year if you want to learn more about cloud native technology.

Cool graphics from Kamal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere. 

Next episode, in a slight divergence from the format, we’ll hear from Patrick Bachmann of Open Ocean, in his role as Venture Capitalist that funds high-growth open-source software start-ups, informed by his roles at MySQL and MariaDB.

Until next time, thanks for listening.

The post Episode 68: Solomon Hykes, Co-Founder / CEO Dagger first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 28:54
Episode 66: Open Source Founders Summit 05f524, with Emily Omier, Founder https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-66-open-source-founders-summit-05f524-with-emily-omier-founder/ Mon, 26 Feb 2024 03:37:33 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2280 OSFS Website: https://05f5.com/ Intro Michael: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is a special episode to promote the inaugural Open Source Founder Summit, which is happening in Paris, May 27th and 28th. Talking about this event is Emily Omier, host of The Business of Open Source Podcast,...

The post Episode 66: Open Source Founders Summit 05f524, with Emily Omier, Founder first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
OSFS Website: https://05f5.com/

Intro

Michael: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is a special episode to promote the inaugural Open Source Founder Summit, which is happening in Paris, May 27th and 28th.

Talking about this event is Emily Omier, host of The Business of Open Source Podcast, and along with Luxembourg Passbolt, is providing the initial activation energy to get this new institution of open-source entrepreneurial collaboration off the ground.

If you haven’t heard of Emily’s podcast, you should add the Business of Open Source to your favorites’ list right now. She’s recorded more than 200 episodes in the last 4 years. So, if you listen to all of them, I guarantee you’ll be much more prepared for your start-up journey.

Why Launch the Open Source Founders Summit?

Mike: Okay. Here’s the interview with Emily, so she can fill you in on the rest of the detail and why she’s interested in doing all this work to make this event happen. Emily, thank you so much for joining us on Open Source Underdogs today.

Emily: You’re welcome. Thank you so much for having me, Mike.

Mike: The reason I thought this would be a good idea is because I heard that you’re organizing a new conference. Maybe you can tell us a little bit about why you’re doing this?

Emily: Yeah, that’s an excellent question. So, the conference is called Open Source Founder Summit, and we can also have a long argument about semantics about whether it’s a conference, or a summit, or whatever it is.

A retreat, the rationale, or the motivation behind this event is several fold. I am a positioning consultant for open-source companies. I go to a lot of open-source conferences of all kinds, including actually a couple that are focused on business. And I always felt that there wasn’t any events that sort of represented the entire breadth of open-source businesses.

So, there was actually a specific conversation that I had with somebody before the Heavybit DevGuild’s conference focused on open source last May, and in this conversation, this other person was talking about how there’s no unicorn open-source companies in mainland Europe.

And I said, “Well, what about Odoo?”, which people don’t know about it is an open-source company that’s based in Belgium, that has 2000 employees around, and in fact, actually does have a $2-billion valuation. But anyway, this person I was talking to was like, “Oh, no, no, Odoo is a unicorn.” I actually didn’t have the numbers there with me, so I was like, “Okay, whatever. I’m not sure.” I didn’t argue back.

But it got me thinking about the fact that Odoo, which you may have noticed, is like one of my favorite open source-companies success stories – it’s totally left out of a lot of these conversations because a) they’re in Belgium, which is like fabulously uncool, it’s like as far away from the tech centers as possible. Maybe not quite, but it’s like, they’re in Europe, and they’re not even in Berlin or London – they’re in Belgium.

They’re not Dev tools, they make business applications, or like an open-source SAP, and so because they’re not Dev tools, they’re left out of a lot of the conversations about open source.

They didn’t go public, they did get some venture backing, but most of it was a while ago. They’re a profitable company. Basically, like they’re a company that I think most founders would consider a massive success, and yet, sort of left out of the conversation.

I was feeling like a lot of non-Dev tool open-source companies were left out of the conversation, a lot of non-venture-backed open-source companies were left out of the conversation, and it just seemed like there should be a place to get open-source founders together that was going to represent sort of all the different voices of open-source companies.

I’m going to add one more thing, which is, that, in general, I think a lot of conference talks are not super actionable, and I wanted to create a conference that was going to have content that was really actionable for people.

What is the format?


Mike: I was thinking about this last night, and I was wondering what the format is going to be. Because almost all the founders could probably be speakers. So, what do you envision the format to be, and how do you see this differing from, for example, I interviewed Joe Jacks a couple of years back, when he started, or launched the Open Core Summit – how do you see it being different? And what do you think the format’s going to look like?

Emily: First of all, this is a small event, so, maybe 6 years from now, this will be a bigger event – we’ll see. But we have a maximum of 100 people. So, that, in and of itself, is a different format from a lot of events, but we do have a couple of speakers, we have 10 that we’ve reached out to and are sort of the main speakers in the mornings.

But there’s also going to be lightning talks and breakout workshops. And the hope is that everybody who wants to do either a lightning talk, or to moderate a workshop, a breakout workshop, will be able to do so.

Another thing that’s different about this conference is that it’s invite-only, it’s curated. You can request an invite, BUT that means that only people that we, the organizers, feel like have something to contribute to the conversation are going to even be in the room. And this, I think, is very different from a lot of conferences where anybody can buy a ticket and show up.

Why Paris?

Mike: We didn’t mention the dates. I believe it’s the last week in May, in Paris, but maybe you can tell us a little bit about why Paris, and how’s the weather in May in Paris?

Emily: The dates are May 27th and 28th. I am an American and I do live in Paris, so yes, part of why it’s in Paris is because it’s convenient for me. I am organizing this conference with somebody else – his name is Remi Bertot, he is the founder and CTO of Passbolt, which is a security-first open-source password manager.

They are based in Luxembourg, so Paris isn’t terribly inconvenient for him either, but I actually think doing this conference in Europe is also just in and of itself a good idea. Or I will say, particularly not in Silicon Valley.

I feel like part of the goal is really to create community among open-source founders and have this broader conversation. If you are a founder and you live in San Francisco, it’s much easier to find community and to know other open-source founders, whereas if you live even in a place like London or Berlin, it’s actually quite a bit harder to find that community.

And one of the goals here is to create community among open-source founders. And I should mention that our real hope is that this isn’t just a one-off event, but that it sort of becomes something that’s both an annual event that happens every year, but also that there’s sort of a community that brings people together throughout the entire year.

So, yeah, I think having it in Europe as a way to, again, bring more types of open-source companies, who don’t fit the mold of just like your standard Dev tool venture-backed Silicon Valley company, I think it makes a lot of sense.

Mike: And the food’s going to be really good.

Emily: I didn’t talk about the weather. The weather is usually quite good in Paris in May. Bring your spouse, bring your spouse!

Who can attend?


Mike: Yes, that could be one of the selling points. And a quick pitch. I heard you mention that Remi from Passbolt is going to help you organize this, and Kevin Muller from Passbolt, we’re arranging for him to be on The Underdogs podcast. So, sometime in the next month or so.

That’s another great company that people don’t know, all the time based in Europe in the security space. If you’re not a founder, is there any room for non-founder who else might want to attend this event?

Emily: Yeah. If you’re in a leadership role at an open-source company, you should come. We are calling it Open Source Founder Summit, but basically, if you lead marketing at an open-source company, you lead product at an open-source company. Even if you’re not a founder, this is like a place for you to be.

I just didn’t want it to be like 50% investors, for example, or 50% people who are going to be trying to sell to the founders. You don’t have to just be a founder, we do vet people, so you can’t just go to the website and buy a ticket – you might have to make a case. But, like I said, if you’re in a leadership role, it’s just going to be me, sending you an email with the ticket link.

Takeaways from Podcast


Mike: Some of my listeners might not know that you host a podcast called The Business of Open Source has more than 200 episodes, which is amazing. Can you tell me a little bit about the podcast and sort of your journey with a podcast, what you’ve learned along the way?

Emily: Yeah, sure. I do host the Business of Open Source, I take a pretty broad mandate on talking about the business of open source. So, I talked to founders, but not only founders, I also talked to other people in leadership roles, I talked to investors, I like to talk sometimes to big companies, and there’s actually some interesting things that I’ve learned from having so many conversations with people.

Actually, I think that this is one of the reasons why I’m so excited about having like a slightly wider lens on open-source companies.

First of all, I think there’s more business models for open-source companies and people sort of realize it a lot of times. I almost feel like we talk about open core and SaaS as if they’re the only options, but they’re not. And I think that it’s really interesting to talk with people who are trying to sort of novel ways to monetize open source.

Another takeaway I have is that it’s really good to sell to the government. If you’re an open-source company, governments really like transparency and being able to run their code on-prem, or run their software on-prem and stuff. So, that’s definitely a takeaway.

Some other takeaways — I actually did a talk about this at OpenCore Summit in December — another takeaway that I have is that open-source companies can be really hard mind games. Not just for founders. I think this is really underappreciated actually. Because it can be really hard to hire people who have experience with open-source companies.

If you’re starting an open-source company yourself, you hire a salesperson for example, and that salesperson has never worked in an open-source company, doesn’t really know what process is like.

And it’s different, and they’re going to have more of a learning curve than they expected, and there’s going to be all this weird stuff about like losing deals to your own open-source project that’s going to mess with their head. And it’s just something to be aware of, I think. If you’re running an open-source company, think about, is this a mind game for yourself, but also what about the team.

Still Learning after 200 episodes?


Mike: So, along the way from doing this podcast, what I’ve discovered from doing my own podcasts is that open source is way more nuanced than I thought it was. And did you think you knew a lot going into the podcast about open source, and have you been surprised, and are you still discovering new stuff even after 200 episodes?

Emily: I did not think that I knew a lot about open source when I went into the podcast. I mean, I’m constantly surprised. Sometimes by really dumb stuff, like, somebody mentions a project, and I haven’t heard of it, and later you are like, how the hell did I not hear about this. Like, you really feel like an idiot. That still happens to me. Stuff just like ideas, or concepts, that haven’t come up before. Yeah, I’m always learning. And I would say this, sometimes people have asked me, “What’s your secret for staying up to date?”, or whatever. It’s like the secret is the podcast. I do really enjoy doing the podcasts, and I learn a lot from it.

Focus of Consulting?


Mike: Okay, maybe one last question. Because I think you said you are an open-source positioning consultant, can you tell us a little bit about exactly how you help companies, like what does your consulting work revolve around?

Emily: That’s a really good question. I am a positioning consultant, and I work with open-source companies. And fundamentally, a lot of my work revolves around helping companies a) figure out how to place their entire company in the marketplace and b) figuring out how to manage the relationship between their product and their project. Both things are really critical.

So, a lot of people think about positioning, and they think about marketing. This is actually false, so positioning is fundamentally about understanding your place in the ecosystem you’re working in, even which ecosystem you want to be playing in, and then, understanding the differentiated values of your project and of your product, understanding the difference between the two.

And that is going to have cascading effects through your product roadmap, your project roadmap, your whatever marketing you’re doing for each of those things, and whatever you’re doing for sales for those three things.

So, I think of product sales and marketing as like the pillars of go-to-market, and that’s what I help companies figure out. But because I specialize in open-source companies, it’s largely about being really clear on the nuance difference between project and product.

Final Thoughts


Mike: A lot of people don’t know that the reason I started this podcast was to help other founders not make the mistakes that I made in starting my open source, and getting a lot of the things that you’re talking about confused, or not positioning well. So, I think there’s a lot to learn. I would encourage everyone to think about attending this conference. And with that, Emily, any last words you want to add?

EmilyCome to the conference May 27 – 28. If you want to lead a lightning talk or moderate a workshop, we need to know by March 15th. You still have to buy a ticket if you do so. Because, again, everyone who’s coming, has something to contribute, and we actually hope everybody is either doing a talk or leading a workshop. But we have to have a schedule in place, and it takes some time to do that.

Anyway, we want to know by March 15th if you’re interested in doing that. But, yes, come – Paris is beautiful in May. The event I think is going to be really awesome. There is nothing like it anywhere in the world, so come.

Closing


Mike: Emily, thank you so much for sharing all this info. Best of luck. And I wish I could be there, but I’ll certainly be following online.

Emily: Excellent. Thank you, Mike.

Mike: The website is 05f5.com. May 27th and 28th, in Paris.

If you’re an open-source leader, it’s a great opportunity to learn from and with your peers and have epic bragging rights about being at the first Open Source Founder Summit.

Cool graphics from Kamal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere. 

Next week, Peter Farkas, Co-founder and CEO of FerretDB. Until then, thanks for listening.

The post Episode 66: Open Source Founders Summit 05f524, with Emily Omier, Founder first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 15:04
Episode 65: Scaling Data Pipelines with Nick Schrock, Founder/CTO of Dagster Labs https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-65-scaling-data-pipelines-with-nick-schrock-founder-cto-of-dagster-labs/ Wed, 14 Feb 2024 21:04:52 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2269 Intro Mike Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 65 with Nick Schrock, Founder and CTO of Dagster, a platform that helps companies create data pipelines, which is critical to transform and update data in order to make it useful, for example, to generate reports, content,...

The post Episode 65: Scaling Data Pipelines with Nick Schrock, Founder/CTO of Dagster Labs first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro


Mike Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 65 with Nick Schrock, Founder and CTO of Dagster, a platform that helps companies create data pipelines, which is critical to transform and update data in order to make it useful, for example, to generate reports, content, or other actionable information.
Dagster might not be a blueprint you can emulate. Like all start-ups, there are some hard to replicate serendipity that enables Nick and his team to build this amazing company. But as Machiavelli says, “Great leaders need both – fortune and virtue.” In other words, you need to be good at what you do, i.e. virtue, but they also need some good old-fashioned luck.

But what separates a really successful founders, like Nick, is the ability to harness fortune and virtue and combine it with some deep insights about the market, and turn it into a profitable and fast-growing venture not easy to do.

So, with that said, let’s cut to the interview, and let Nick tell you, in his own words, how Dagster evolves.

Early Career

Nick Schrock: Great to be with you.

Mike: Nick, thanks for joining us today.

Mike: Can I just go back a little bit and ask you to share some of your story about how you ended from going from the University of Michigan Computer Science to working at Facebook? So, that early period – how that happened?

Nick: Oh, I wasn’t expecting to talk about the preface book days. I’ll do the quick version of that. I graduated from Michigan in 2003, and I actually went to work at Microsoft, right out of school. And Microsoft’s a great company, and they treated me well, but… 

And actually, the division I was in was the developer division. And I thought that they were just extraordinarily talented, but at that time of my life, that wasn’t for me, in terms of working at a big company.
I wasn’t actually sure if I wanted to do software anymore, so I went to the London School of Economics for a year, because I thought I might want to go more into finance, or even government service – you know, I was a young man kind of searching around.

But I ended up getting back into software. I worked for a healthcare start-up out of Ann Arbor, which is where Michigan is, for what – 2 and a half years.

And then, I went to Chicago to try to do a start-up. That was very quickly spun down because me and a friend, who had worked in the finance industry, we wanted to do it, but then, it was about 6 months before the financial crisis.

So, that was incredibly poor timing. I spun that down, and actually, turns out a friend of mine, who I knew from Microsoft, kind of heard that was on the open market, and he just reached out and was like, “Hey, I’m working at Facebook, it’s really a special place. You should consider looking at it.”

And I was looking at staying in finance in the Chicago area. And I flew out to Facebook, and it’s just the vibe difference between a place like Facebook and a hedge fund in Chicago cannot be overstated.

You know, everyone at Facebook was young, super excited, idealistic, the office was incredible – there was just all this energy versus all these miserable people working in the hedge fund. So, the choice was obvious from there. And then, off to the races after that.

Why was Facebook so innovative in 2009-2015?


Mike: So, what was it about Facebook in 2009 that made it such a hotbed of innovation? Like, what new problems were they trying to solve?

Nick: The engineering-driven culture there, combined with the actual product that was being built. So, the product grew at unprecedented rates, it was used in unprecedented ways and was data intensive also, in kind of an unprecedented way.

We were forced to kind of do a lot of innovation on the fly in incredibly constrained environments actually, both in terms of resources, timing – you know, we had to get stuff to work. And I think that it is true that those constraints do breed innovation.

And that time of period was interesting because in 2009 – how to put this – we weren’t really taken seriously as an engineering organization, I felt. And then, fast forward say 4 to 6 years, and we were taken very seriously as an engineering organization.
It was really cool to participate in that. And in the end, if you look at the output from that eng org at that time, it really is pretty extraordinary in terms of what systems were built internally as well as what was open-sourced.

Technical Origin

Mike: So, few years back in 2018, after being at Facebook for, I guess, maybe 8 or 9 years, you decide to start a company called Elementl, which becomes Dagster Labs. Can you talk a little bit about how that came about?

Nick: Near at the beginning of my tenure at Facebook, I helped create this team called Product Infrastructure, whose mission was to make our application developers more efficient and productive. So, concretely what that meant is that we build internal frameworks and abstractions for the engineers who actually built the site and the mobile apps to build product.

That team did a lot of great work, and we ended up externalizing about a bunch of that work in the form of open source. So, React came out of that group – I had nothing to do with React, but kind of the people across the hall from me, so to speak, produced React. And that obviously went on to be an extremely successful open-source framework. And then, what I’m personally more affiliated with is, I’m one of the co-creators of GraphQL.

I’ve lived and breathed developer tools for a long time and also seen the impact that open-source adoption at scale can have. So, that was definitely on the mind when I left Facebook in 2017, and figuring out what to do next.

And in fact, I was going around the Valley and talking to companies, both inside and outside the Valley actually, about what their biggest technical liabilities were.
And this notion of data, an ML Infrastructure kept on coming up over and over and over. And I decided to dig into this, and very quickly I discovered that this area kind of pattern matched to what I care about and the types of problems I want to work on, typically the things I like to work on is to share a bunch of properties.

One are just engineers in pain. Like their dev workflow is broken, they have bad abstractions, they’re not productive, and purely because of tooling and abstraction reasons – that actually kind of makes me angry and frustrated on their behalf. And on a personal level, I feel that is really motivating.

Second involved finding – yeah, I like to call it like “a problem that matters”. I like working on really broad horizontal problems that could potentially have impact on millions of developers, kind of core essential problems that matter.

I was data engineering adjacent at Facebook, I wasn’t a practitioner. Data pipelining is extraordinarily important actually. People like to dismiss it as data cleaning, or they are kind of data janitor work, but when I looked at it, from kind of fresh perspective and I really thought about it, I was like, listen, data pipeline, they produce these assets, these data assets that drive all analytics, all the dashboards that you work with, all the ML models.
And if you really think about it, these data assets drive a huge proportion of human decision-making and automated decision-making in our entire society. Who gets mortgages or not, how do we price health care, what kind of news do you see – these are fundamental essential things, and it needs to be built on solid foundations.

And the fact that it – in my opinion – like, it was not built on the appropriate tools and processes, and everyone felt it was like chaotic and out of control all the time, was deeply disturbing. So, things were fundamentally, and still, in some ways, are fundamentally broken in data ML engineering. So, that’s really motivating.

Another thing, another property is that I like working on technologies that are sort of a strategic point of leverage in an organization. GraphQL fits that bill. Because if you kind of can intermediate all client-server interactions with a common software layer that has rich scheme information and stuff like that, it’s like an enormous point of leverage for tooling.

And in the data space, I quickly gravitated towards the orchestration layer because I felt it had the same properties. You know, orchestration orchestrates data pipelines. That means, it invokes every single runtime, it touches every single storage system as a result. And then, likewise, any practitioner that wants to put a data asset or pipeline into production has to interact with orchestrator in some way shape or form. So, a strategic point of leverage, I thought that was super, super industry.

And then last, like some feeling that you have a technical insight that’s novel and interesting, and that’s kind of how we got to this notion of — at the beginning we called it Software Structure Data Sets, but now we call it Software-defined Assets in data pipeline.

And the basic idea is that instead of just writing a bunch of imperative tasks to string stuff together, you instead think about it, you write a software representation of the data asset that you end up wanting to ship to production and be consumed by our downstream stakeholders.

So, that was a very long answer, but I found a problem that kind of checked all the boxes, for what I like to work on. And it’s not just checking boxes – if those boxes are checked, I’m like deeplypassionate about it. That’s kind of how I got here.

Business Origin


Mike: You started working on this problem at Facebook, but then you said at some point, you sort of hit this critical mass of like pattern matching, like you said. And you’re like, “Okay. I’m going to start actually a business. Maybe in Silicon Valley, it’s not terrifying, but it’s a big step.” How did that actually work? When did you decide, “I’m going to start a company.”?

Nick: It’s funny. I’m struggling to recall exactly when it happened, but I knew founding company was definitely something I was very interested in doing. Both in terms of working on a product, but also building a culture, and especially engineering culture.

In terms of company building, that part was very motivating. In a lot of ways, I was talking about how I thought the kind of the output and culture of early Facebook engineering was pretty extraordinary. And replicating the good parts of that in an independent organization was super appealing to me as well.

I think I just started talking to people and my message and the problem I identified really resonated. And then, I was talking to some investors, actually not with the goal of doing a fund raise – it’s kind of funny how it works like that – but there was like, “Nick, you want to look at data pipelining, with your background and, you know, work on something, that we should really think about formalizing this with some capital and a company, so you can accelerate your progress.”

It’s one of those things that almost just kind of happened. And I’m a big fan of, “Be an opportunistic.” It’s also true that from the time I left Facebook, I knew that founding a company had a lot of appeal to me.

Transition to new CEO


Mike: One of the podcasts previous guests, Sytse Sijbrandij, once asked me, “Do you love the product, or do you love the business?” And it’s an interesting question. I think I know were you following that spectrum. And can you talk a little bit about how you came to work with Pete Hunt, the current CEO, and do you have any advice for founders on how to navigate when there’s a pivot in the leadership?

Nick: I might like the business more than you would expect. I obviously – I don’t want to put words in your mouth – but I’m assuming you think I like the product more than the business. Actually, I did a bunch of economics and business in college and then the grad year in LUC, and I thought about doing MBA, so I’m definitely a business-minded. I imagine I annoy our FinOps people because I always like dig in about all the financial metrics and whatnot.

Yeah, we can get to Pete. I knew Pete from the Facebook days. He was one of the co-creators of React. We didn’t work really in-depth with each other then, but we met each other socially and through each other’s work, and really kept in touch for a long time after Facebook.

He wrote a small seed check into the company. We also collaborated actually on some podcasts because we were kind of obsessed with this Facebook engineering culture, and we actually put together a podcast series, Software Engineering Daily, with like 15 ex Facebookers, and we learned a lot about each other during that process.

Pete had started a start-up and sold it to Twitter, and he was working on Twitter. And I was also talking to him on and off about the business. And I was in the market for a head of engineering in early 2022, and Pete and I discussed it. And I was privileged enough to bring him on board. And given his experience, formerly being a CEO of a Dev tools company, he had built a marketing organization, and the sales organization and scaled to $5 million ARR.

I knew he was going to be much more than a head of engineering – I even had super high expectations for that – but he really dramatically exceeded those expectations. And I think, it became very obvious to me that he was just way better operationally than I was, in terms of like the mechanics of management, organization building, managing marketing, managing sales – he had done it before, and it was pretty clear.

I, at the time – just to be transparent – I was solo founder CEO, I moved around the country a couple times, I had 2 little kids. Now they’re 2 and 4, but I’ve also started a family during the course of this journey – I just needed like a co-founder figure to share the load.

Because I didn’t have the time to work on what my superpowers are, which is kind of this cross-product of Engineering, Dev Rel and Marketing I think is where I excel. And the other stuff is like, he could do a much better job with that. So, it just made a ton of sense.

I think I’m very lucky in that I don’t think it’s a repeatable process for a lot of founders to do what I did. Because you need that other human, who you know well, who would have been I think if Pete had his own company at the time, we might have just co-founded something from day one, and had like enormous trust context in – like, the transition to bring him in and then move him to the CEO position was like super smooth. I think it was like super obvious to everyone they knew it wasn’t going to be like this massive culture shift. Because like Pete and I are still aligned on so many issues.

I think the entire team was super excited about it, and the transition was really smooth – no leadership changes, no attrition, the company started performing better. I think it was obvious pretty quickly that that is the right move.

Monetization


Mike: So, diving into the business a little bit, how does Dagster monetize? I see a cloud offering, is there also a license enterprise distribution?

Nick: No. We only do a cloud product. So, just for context for the audience, Dagster is a data orchestration platform. And you can think about it like, you write data pipelines in this Python framework for building data pipelines and orchestrating, meaning, ordering computations and modeling the assets that get produced by those computations.

You can install it open source, and people have deployed that to production – a ton of people, I should say we have thousands and thousands of users – but the cloud product allows us to do a ton of the hosting on your behalf.

Most of our enterprise customers have this hybrid product, where we host the control plane, which you think about it like everything is complicated – the metadata database and long-running processes that monitor things and whatnot. Then, they run their actual compute, it’s their data pipelines and their infrastructure.

So, yeah, there’s a cloud product you sign up for, we can host a bunch or all of the compute. And then, also, we add enterprise features on top of it – SSO, alerting, gobs and gobs of features that generally deal with complexity in the Enterprise that companies typically pay for.

So, that’s our primary business model: you sign up for Dagster cloud, you swipe your credit card or talk to our sales people, and you can have the best experience of a data orchestration platform in the world in our opinion.

Why sell small customers?

Mike: I noticed that Dagster sells to small teams – like you said, you can sign up for like 100 bucks – and also to large enterprise. I’m wondering does the small teams’ business actually add up to real revenue, or is it just a pipeline for enterprise customer?

Nick: I think in terms of what investors care about, and what the long-term trajectory of the business is, we certainly conceptualize it as mostly a driver of pipeline – yes – but a broader adoption as well. So, there’s tons of users that use our hosted product that wouldn’t use our open-source product. And simply because they don’t want to host their own computing infrastructure, which is totally reasonable.
So, I guess, if you kind of boil everything on the business, yes, there is – it is a source of enterprise leads, for sure, but it’s also a source of more adoption, which means more people talking about the product. More people having being passionate about the product.

Because an underlying flywheel adoption is also essential for the long-term commercial success of the company.

I think like that’s the most interesting component of it. It used to be, say 10 years ago, that you’d have an open-source product and you’d be like really pulling teeth to use the commercial or the hosted product.

I think the pendulum is really shifted now, where tons of people wouldn’t consider adopting an open-source technology if it didn’t have hosting options. Just because of the way that the entire world has shifted towards more hosted services, which is I think a win-win for everyone involved.

Pricing

Mike: One of the underappreciated challenges of a tech start-up is how to price your offering. I saw a note on the pricing page about an old plan and a new plan. The new plan’s a little complex – not being an expert, I couldn’t really quite follow it. Can you talk a little bit about the pricing journey and where and why you ended up where you are?

Nick: Totally. I like to say, if building an infrastructure company were a video game, pricing is the final boss. And that actually even undersells it. Because iterating on your pricing model is a continuous process, where you have to make sure that it’s working for everyone involved, that we can run a healthy business and that the customers feel like they’re getting a fair deal in terms of — because in the end, they need to get more value than they paid for.

You are correct to point out that the initial pricing was simpler than the current model. Initially, we started out where we wanted to have like no seats limit and just charge on consumption. I felt that a very fair way of doing consumption was to just charge on the number of minutes your pipelines run.

So, the issue with that – and I think this is a good takeaway for your audience – is that customers have to morally accept the pricing plan. Like, it has to make sense to the underlying way that they think. And the problem in a data pipeline solution, if you’re charging by, say by runtime, is that frequently what you’re doing in orchestration is that you are like calling out to Snowflake or Databricks or some other heavyweight computational system that does all the heavy lifting of the compute.
So, from the standpoint of the customer they’re paying us just to kind of wait for an API call to complete. That shifts the mind of the customer to think of us as just a compute hosting service.
And if you’re just doing that, the value proposition of our product doesn’t make sense.

So, the pricing impacts the way that the customer perceives the value of the product, which is obvious when you say it out loud, but isn’t obvious when you’re kind of in it.

We’ve really stepped back and looked at this – the real value in an orchestration system is in the kind of the control signals and the metadata. Like, concretely, you open up a orchestrator, or our orchestrator, and you see all these fancy Gantt charts of what’s going on, you have a ton of visibility, and then the words that our users often use is, “Ugh! Dagster is like the single pane of glass that consolidates my entire data platform, I have visibility into all this stuff.”

So, that’s where they perceive the value. They do not perceive the value like it’s a hosted compute service. That had the benefit of being simple, but didn’t actually align with the product value that the users perceived.

We switched to charging based on metadata and control plane events that drive our UI. I think the other thing is that for founders in the audience is that you have to have a pricing model that works for sales. And early on, you don’t have enough data to know how much consumption there’s going to be for a customer, for like say the next 12 months. And with the way sellers work, they have to hit their ARR number ― that adds up to their quota, that determines whether they can feed their children or not. So, it’s very important to the sales team.

We had to also add sort of a per seat component that effectively acts as a platform fee for our enterprise customers that allows us to kind of project and forecast ARR that would be appropriate to the value it’s going to deliver to the customer.

You also have to think about the internal incentives and how it’s going to work for sales people, who are reliant on selling your product in order to send their kids to college.

Why Audience Selection is Important?


Mike: I am going to pivot a little bit back to tech for a second, but really more to talk about the open-source community. What’s interesting about Dagster is that it reminds me a little bit about the battle between Perl and Python. They were open-source tools in your area that existed before, but they were a little bit hacky or more challenging.

Can you talk about what are some of the challenges of building an open-source community in an already competitive market, where you needed a lot of features just to get the baseline of functionality? And then, how did you focus on either getting new, or getting some of the developers to switch into your platform?

Nick: You need to make sure that you have an audience that cares about what you care about, and it is very differentiated on that dimension, to the point, where they are willing to take a risk to bet on you, to work around missing features or missing integrations that might exist in a more mature solution. So, identifying that small subset I think is extremely critical.

There’s now, I think, a kind of standard reading for Silicon Valley founders, which is Peter Thiel’s book Zero to One. And he talks about how you start with a small market and then dominate it, and then move on to progressively larger markets. And I think that really, really resonates with me, especially in developer tools.

One kind of approach – and this is kind of the nature of tools that I like to work on too – is that what you can do is pick the audience that you think has the most leverage in the organization. And for us, it’s like the data platform engineer. Like, there’s engineers whose entire job in life is to serve stakeholders who build data pipelines on top of a data platform that they build.

And a huge part of that is setting up a great developer workflow with CICD and testing, so you can actually maybe know if you’re going to break something before you push to production, which is very frequently not the case in data pipeline.

I think our early audience was really people who really got it that testing, and fast feedback loops, and developer life cycles, is like the baseline foundation of productivity. And productivity is just huge in working in the software. Because productivity is not just about doing tasks more efficiently, it’s about making an entirely new things possible.

So, yeah, I guess I kind of went for a field there, but to circle back to the beginning of the question, I think it’s audience selection and being deliberate about that, it’s really what’s important.

Governance

Mike: Recently HashiCorp has changed their license, and I see that Dagster’s published in its own GitHub repo, so you’re under the Dagster repo. Dagster is your trademark. How can you assure the community that if the board decides to sell the company to Oracle, for example, that they won’t change the license immediately? And have you considered moving the Dagster open-source project to community governance and making it safer to use for the future?

Nick: As someone who’s gone through a foundation process for another technology, we moved GraphQL to its own open-source foundation with community governance. I have a pretty deep understanding of the trade-offs here. I think it’s a question of maturity and life cycle. The risk that you said exists. There could be a boardroom coup, and I’m out and Pete’s out, and then, we’re sold to Oracle or something.

By the way, the probability of that is approximately zero, but let’s theoretically do it. And then, Oracle could change the license―that is possible. I don’t think that’s a realistic risk in any sort of near-term.
So, if we had community governance, it would eliminate that risk. However, community has a ton of it overhead. And where does the beginning of our journey for innovating, and we want to be able to move quickly and respond to feedback quickly, build features, have complete control in that way.

And that’s definitely the right trade-off for us right now. Compare and contrast that to the GraphQL story, with GraphQL, we open source the spec, a document that was meant to be very stable from day one, and evolved pretty slowly over time. So, in terms of the technical artifact there, it actually matched like having a foundation process and governance over it made a ton of sense. But for Dagster and the immediate future, we’re having more centralized control, and increased pace of execution definitely makes the most sense to us.

2023

Mike: I’m going to move to a temporal question about 2023. A lot of tech companies struggled in 2023. The Times reported that 3,200 venture-backed tech companies went out of business in 2023. Of course, I don’t know how many normally go out of business, but still it seems like a lot. I was wondering, was 2023 a good or a bad year for Dagster? Did you buck the trend and grow 100%, or did you also feel pressures on budgets from enterprise customers?

Nick: We had a great year. So, not only did we grow 100%, we grew 400%, and our NDR was north of 150%, which means, our existing customers were also increasing their contract sizes. I feel great about the business, especially being able to grow this quickly in this environment. I am also grateful that we didn’t raise round of financing in a wildly inflated valuation, with too much capital in the FED bubble in 2021.

Because, at the time, certainly, it was frustrating – a bunch of my peers were  — you know, all of a sudden, the CEO has a billion-dollar company, even though they in reality weren’t that far along in the journey.

Now, I think a lot of those people kind of are in a pretty tough spot, and they’ve had to do layoffs, and it’s painful. We kind of stuck to our fundamentals there, so, I feel very good about it.

I still think the pain is going to be very real for the industry through 2024, maybe even into ’25. Because, yes, there’s an advantage to raising a bunch of capital too, in that you have a long runway. A bunch of these companies, they have so much cash on the balance sheet, and the interest rates have gone up that their interest is actually a meaningful source of income too.

There are more waves of company death coming in ‘24 and ’25, I guess I’ll put it that way.

But we’re in a great trajectory, and I think we’ve raised an appropriate capital to the progress in the business. And we were able to raise a B in 2023, which was a very challenging process, but it felt great to be able to do that. Not many of the companies were able to do that.

Open Source R&D v. Commercial R&D


Mike: Here’s a question, and it’s a little bit about engineering priorities: you have an open-source project of which your team contributes a lot of code to, and you also have a commercial cloud product. Can you just talk sort of at a high level, from an R&D perspective, like how much of your budget gets invested into your product versus how much gets invested into the open source? And how do you balance those priorities?

Nick: It’s actually hard to tease apart. Because, if you’re an engineer who is working on a feature that will have manifestation in cloud, often you’re kind of spanning the entire stack and like working on the open source, but then also working with some proprietary features. So, it’s difficult to cleave it that way.

The other thing is that we reorganized the engineering, the R&D organization around company objectives fairly frequently. I actually can’t give you a precise number at any point, or historically/cumulatively, about how much we’ve devoted to both open source and the cloud product specifically.

I guess what I’ll say is that we still invest a ton of our eng resources. I would say like 40% of engineers effectively work exclusively on the open source, and then there’s another tranche that kind of spans the entire stack, and then there’s another tranche, like people who work on our cloud platform, and all the DevOps and SRS work around keeping that alive and operational.

I don’t know, I guess you can call 50/50, but it’s actually really difficult to put it even semi-processed number on it.

Dog Years


Mike: Well, it sounds like it’s really been an amazing journey. And I’d like to remind you that it really hasn’t been that long either. Only 2018 doesn’t seem that long ago to me.

Nick: Well, it seems like a long time to me, man! That’s the old joke. It’s like dog years in a start-up, one year feels like seven. I have to pinch myself. I only moved away from the CEO seat like 15 months ago or something. And it feels like a lifetime.

Founder Advice


Mike: We covered a lot of topics, but I guess, my last question is, is there any advice you have for entrepreneurs, who are launching a business around an open-source software, product or project?

Nick: I think one of the things that founders need to think about — I mean, this could be an entire hour podcast about all the advice that I would say, but couple things to think about: one is, know when to go slow and know when to go fast, especially when you’re talking about so-called “one-way doors” in Jeff Bezos speak, where you’re making decisions that are either extremely costly or impossible to undo. Company branding is challenging to change in terms of the specifics of open source and dev tools, API decisions, especially in open source, last forever. You need to be deliberate on that.

And a commercial product, you can actually iterate extremely quickly. So, I think it actually is important to kind of have two cultural muscles. One is much more upfront design-oriented and collaborative with community, and deliberate and thoughtful on API design, but you still want to have that super-fast feedback and development when you’re developing the commercial components to your product that are hosted.

The other thing I would optimize for – if I was traveling back in time and talked to myself – is optimize for getting yourself into a situation where you can have a super-fast feedback loop, with early users and customers, where you still have the opportunity to change things, and do so quickly.

If you’re in a super-fast feedback loop with a single customer, you can make API changes much more easily. And the ideal situation still is, if you are working on a technology internally at a company, where you have access to all the code that uses it, that is just super valuable.

You’re also basically getting a seed round for free, because, often you’ll have people around you, and you’ll be working on it.

So, I don’t think I truly internalize what an advantage that was, to have it done the core R&D internal at a company. Yeah, I think like there’s a little more resistance now to open source the internal tech with kind of — it’s a less idealistic environment these days. But those are kind of the top-level things that come to mind.

Closing Notes

Mike: Well, great. Thank you so much for taking time out of your day, Nick, and best of luck with Dagster Lab.

Nick: Thanks. It was really a joy to be on this podcast. Thanks, Mike.

Mike: Special thanks to the Dagster PR team for reaching out and helping with logistics. Cool graphics from Kamal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere. Next episode recorded at the State of Open Conference. Peter Farkas, Co-founder and CEO of FerretDB. Hopefully, I’ll have that out in the next week or so. So, until then, thanks for listening.

The post Episode 65: Scaling Data Pipelines with Nick Schrock, Founder/CTO of Dagster Labs first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 35:44
Episode 64: API Service Mesh with Idit Levine, CEO and Founder of Solo.io https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-64-api-service-mesh-with-idit-levine-ceo-and-founder-of-solo-io/ Tue, 07 Nov 2023 19:53:01 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2233 Intro Mike: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 64 with Idit Levine, Founder and CEO of Solo.io, an API Gateway and Service Mesh company with a product called Gloo – not to be confused with Gluu – the company that I lead, who sponsors this podcast.I’ve been...

The post Episode 64: API Service Mesh with Idit Levine, CEO and Founder of Solo.io first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro


Mike: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 64 with Idit Levine, Founder and CEO of Solo.io, an API Gateway and Service Mesh company with a product called Gloo – not to be confused with Gluu – the company that I lead, who sponsors this podcast.
I’ve been trying to get Idit on the podcast for many years ever since I spoke with her at an Open Source Conference in 2019, and finally, her PR agent reached out to me a few months back, and, of course, I agreed immediately.

Solo is not your typical startup journey, it’s sort of a miracle it got off the ground, but once it did, they didn’t waste any time – they’re already breaking 10 million in sales.

To avoid spoiling the story, I should just stop here, so let’s cut to the interview.
Idit, thank you so much for joining us today.

Idit: Thank you so much for having me, Mike.

Did Solo Join an Incubator?


Mike: My first question, and this is sort of a different one, but it’s something I’ve been thinking about, is when you first started Solo.io – which was not that long ago, I think five or six years ago – did you join an incubator and why or why not?

Idit: I did not. I wasn’t even aware that they exist, honestly. When I started the company, what I knew is that I had some “technical” friends that I knew that I can start it, and basically started doing this – the software was more about the technology. So, I needed to learn that while I was raising money, and so on.
Honestly, Mike, I think the first VC that I met, they asked me about a pitch, and I asked, “What is a pitch, what am I supposed to do?” I really didn’t know much, I needed to learn.
I wasn’t aware of a long incubation, definitely not in those days, because it’s not very popular.
I just basically started the company around software and just tried to get some money in order to kind of like bootstrap the company. But that’s basically the things I would do. Honestly, mainly because I wasn’t aware of it.

Mike: Do you think if you could do it again, you’d use an incubator?

Idit: No. Now, I feel that they learn so much from those processes. I think it’s very good if a first founder maybe is not aware of a lot of stuff, that’s really helpful to be kind of like protected by team that has done it before and knows how to help you and guide you.

Today, I think I learned enough of the process, and I’m doing it for a while right now. I made a mistake, I learn from them, so now, I’m feeling that I’m more free to actually do it myself again, if I need to.

State of Company at Seed Funding

Mike: At the time you raise your seed funding, was the open-source project started, did you have any technology, did you have any initial customers or team? Like, what was the state of the business when you closed, let’s say, that seed round?


Idit:  No, there was nothing, honestly. Before that, I worked in the EMC. Part of the EMC, my job was to basically do cool stuff on open source. I was in business, I was in the city office, and my job was to basically, if I had a new technology and we had to figure out how we can play that. Basically, we did a lot of open source and invent development. We immediately knew that we were playing back then, in Kubernetes, Mesosphere and Mesos, and all that great kind of technology. Docker was just a new thing back then, so, again, playing in that ecosystem was immediately a thing that we’ve done.

When I started the company, there were two things that I started pitching in the beginning. The first thing that I was pitching was unikernel. It took me a few months to understand that that’s something that I would not be able to ever raise money on. Probably for good reasons.

By the time we were at home, I was pretty bored, so I built another open-source project called Squash. And that was an open-source project that related to debug microservices in Kubernetes.

And that was relatively successful project, but mainly, as I said, I think that there is a good money on it because the work that I was doing before in the open-source, I literally built a reputation of someone who is capable of doing a cool project.

How Many VC’s Pitched?


Mike: How many VC’s did you pitch in your initial seed funding round?

Idit: Oh, man, a lot. I mean, as I’ve said, again, you remember, I was on the east coast, but once I decided to do it seriously, I left the EMC, and then, I basically went to the west coast, where there is VC that is more in that space and that, yeah, I got a lot of those, a lot. I think like every founder as well.

Products?


Mike: I don’t want to go too deep into the tech, but when I look at the Solo website, I see there are a few products. I am wondering if there’s like an 80/20 rule here, where one of the products accounts for 80% of the revenues?

Idit: We don’t have 20/80, actually, that’s interesting. I think it’s probably 50/50. And the reason is because of the packages, a lot of time we’re selling them together. If you look at all the projects, the main two markets that we’re going after is, the Gateway and the Mesh market. We started with a Gateway mainly because the Mesh wasn’t — you know, we couldn’t sell it.

So, we started from the Gateway, and we knew that this is kind of like an entry point and kind of like a stepping stone to a Service Mesh, so that felt very in the area. And I believe that in the future the Mesh will grow more.

First Customer

Mike:  So, one of the challenges of a start-up is always the first customer, especially if you’re selling in the Enterprise space. How did you convince this customer to be first? What did they actually buy? And whatever they bought, does that resemble your current offering today?

Idit: Yes, actually, as I said, we started selling the Gateway, and that was a flagship product of the company. When we started, basically what we did is, we had three design patterns in a way. I didn’t do it the regular way, we did it from open source. We didn’t go and talk to customers and say, “What do you want us to build?” And then, we built it. We were more like, we’re in the open-source and kind of like say, “Okay, that seems like the right thing to do.”

Kubernetes came, you needed a new API Gateway, you wanted probably an Envoy – that’s what we believed people wanted – and then, we went to pitch.  And a lot of those customers came to us from the open-source community.

So, we learned a lot from that process. What we did, and we did it differently, because we are coming from open source, we basically managed all our relationships with our customers through Slack. Then, understood what we need to do in order to make that very, very successful in their infrastructure. And we basically got all those requirements and built them into the product. It’s very different to build an open-source project versus an Enterprise environment.

Value Prop


Mike: So, what would you say is the most important thing that motivates your customers to buy your product?

Idit: I think that today Solo is kind of like three things that we are very good at. Number one is, we really, really understand the marketing really, really well, and the technology in it, so we know what’s coming up. We know what is 20 and what is not, we’re looking at adoption – we really understand that very well.

So, we always compromise with the customer that we will bring them to the edge of the technology. If there is a new technology that is relevant, we’ll probably put it in our product. I think that’s one thing that customers like, so the perception of Solo is that it is an innovative company, which it is – it’s what we are.

The second one I think is customers in sales, which was always one of the things that is the most important to us. This work with Slack, when I started it, everybody told me that’s not going to scale. And surprisingly today, when we have hundreds of customers, it is still scaling, and the technology itself, if you look at it right now, there was a lot of shifts in the market in terms of the infrastructure that you’re running, most likely running in something like Kubernetes.

So, it makes sense that you would have a Cloud native Gateway, and when you start scaling and scaling and scaling, it makes sense that you will take care of something like MPLS and Security and Zero-Trust and Observability, and all those microservices – it’s just that this is the needed technology when you are going to scale. And that’s where the market of microservices like Kubernetes is right now.

Is Solo a Distribution of existing Open-Source Components?


Mike: Solo is an interesting company in that, in a way, you write software, you write a lot of software. But you also have a curated distribution of open-source components that you give your customers a control plane to manage and take advantage of. So, it’s not just the software that you’re writing, but without Envoy and without Kubernetes and without Cilium, you really maybe couldn’t even build a product. So, do you think that maybe this is a new model, where you add a little software on top of this huge curated distribution of other very complicated components?


Idit: Instead of creating the open-source project – we do have one, for instance, Gloo Edge is a technology that is an API Gateway based on our technology, and it is based on Envoy. I think that what we were good at was identifying, pretty much at the beginning, which of those technology would be better on Envoy, when honestly Envoy was relatively a very small community no one really knew about it, and NGINX was the chosen proxy.
We chose Istio, even though we could have competed like everybody else and tried to build a better service mesh, but I knew that that will be the choosing mesh, even though when we looked at it, it was pretty messy, and we knew that it would take you a while to get there.

I was very, very aggressive to my team saying we are not going to be competitive, we are going to use that.

And the reason is because the software that wins is not always the best software. It is the software that most people are leaning to because they will make it eventually the best software. And I think that that was something that Solo has recognized very well. All that technology, all those products that we are doing is basically we are building – and I will not say a little – we are building quite a lot of logic, ease of use and enhanced technologies on top of those — let’s call it basic component that you need.

There is a lot of complexity actually in the control plane, way more than in the data plane, for instance. But, yeah, as I said to you, this is my model, hopefully sellers will succeed with it, but yeah, I believe that open source is building an amazing technology, and that we should leverage the best.

We are also contributing a lot of those technologies. I mean, if you look at the Istio right now, the new thing that we did with Ambient that we and Google contributed to it, it’s mainly we are the main contributor to it. And Istio, we are contributing a lot to it, we have a full team that is responsible to contribute to it. If you look at this, probably I think the most engineers that are working today on Istio are coming from Solo.

How to Decide What Features Are Open Source?


Mike: I was looking at the open-core model, but I’m actually more curious about, there’s always this friction between what do we put in the community version and what do we open-source. What’s the decision process behind deciding whether a plug-in will be commercial or non-commercial?

Idit: In the beginning when we started, we had nothing, we put everything in the open source, but then at one point, we understood that that’s a problem. Because eventually, somehow, you’re not going to exist as a company if you are not going to make a little bit money at least. So, we needed to figure out that what we’re putting on to double it will make sense, we are not hard to open source because it’s very important to us that open source will be successful.

It’s why we continue contributing constantly to the open source, but we also need to make sure that we will have something that differentiates it on top of it. And the decision in the beginning when we thought about it, the Enterprise feature that people actually really, really wanted to have a provider helping them was security or stuff that will let that do. You know, Enterprise feature like HA.

So, that’s the stuff that we put in Enterprise. The question is, you are usually around technology, would it make sense to be in the core open-source project because that is where it belongs. It’s kind of like a core feature, or it’s actually an extension to that open-source project.
And therefore, it’s going to be that Enterprise edition. To us, it was very important that the core should be open. That’s the way we’re doing it.

Pricing

Mike: I always worn entrepreneurs that pricing is one of the most challenging aspects of a tech start-up in particular. Can you share maybe some of the lessons you learned about how to price in the first few years, did you get pricing right initially, did you have to do a major pivot – what was your experience there, and do you have any lessons learned in pricing?

Idit: As I said to myself, okay, maybe the real unit of contribute for instance in the Gateway is supposed to be the API call, but honestly, that will take a lot of time for me, and it’s also going to be a pain for my customers, so how can I still value how much they use it, without actually interfering too much with the customer and with my engineering team.

And what I came with in the beginning is that the data plane is usually a good assumption, because if you have a lot of call, you’d probably want to scale that data plane. And in the data plane, it’s easy to call, the customer tells me I have five clusters, this is a data plane I am using – it is very easy to measure it and if people use it more, that’s fine.


So, that was the beginning. When we added the service mesh, there was a way more data plane and there was also a way more potentially change. Because you have cycles, and the cycle is basically going directly with the application, the microservices. The microservices going up and down, so very hard to basically figure it out. We needed to change that model and we went to the cluster model.

We said, just let’s keep it simple, we don’t want it – again, it’s all about keeping it simple. That’s what was important to me. I don’t want my customer to need to have a PhD in order to understand the way we were pricing.

That’s what I did. And again, it’s probably cost me some money. I probably left some money on the table and that was fine. But again, it was all about and it is still all about Solo as the partnership. It’s all about the relationship that we have with our customers, it is a real partnership, we are seriously the extension of their team.

But, you know, stuff changing all the time, so you always need to adjust. And honestly, you are learning that from your customer. So, for instance, what we saw right now is that some of the customers that are basically using us, it is more like advanced development center kind of thing.


Innovation centers like city offices or the innovation center on the ITN, and when they are starting, usually what they want, their job is to basically build something to offer to the businessmen. So, the question is, the money is not going to come from them, you cannot expect them to have tons of budget to pay you to run it.

So, what they really want is more of the consumption model. What they want is to create something and get the platform available everywhere, without paying millions of dollars, but then, they will basically enable teams to come after. And that’s different. The model should be different, it can be how much clusters you’re running. Because it could be that you’re running an empty cluster in the beginning. So, we needed to adjust based on the customers. So, it’s always moving kind of like we are learning from the customer how we can make it better.

But again, to me, the way I’m looking at this and that’s always my motto – whether it is truthful building, writing software or selling product – I want to take the challenges on my team. For instance, I prefer right now to build a sophisticated metering that will make the best customer end-user experience for my customer, even if it’s harder.

How to Maintain High Growth

Mike: You know, I was reading an article, and it said that you were projecting five to six times growth for the next year, what is a key to obtaining this high rate of growth? How is that possible?

Idit: First of all, the market – and that’s very, very important. Like for instance, when we started, we had the Gateway that was very popular and everybody needed it, and then the Mesh came, but it took us a while until Mesh would be everywhere. Right now, there is a lot of stuff that is going really, really well for us, and that’s what is allowing us to go.


What number one is, for instance, that is still going to the graduation. So, we actually choose the right service mesh, and not only this, it is going right now to graduation which has shown maturity.
So, that by itself means that there is more demand from the market. You just need to have the right market product to sell, and when a customer wants it, it would be really lazy to grow. But I’m not going to say that there are no challenges, in economy, it could be that we have an amazing product, we have tons of money – that’s not really helpful if our customer doesn’t have money. They’re not going to buy it. Again, that point – you need to make sure that the product is a necessary, that people will need to spend money for it.

Just, again, listen to the market, make sure that you have the right market fit, which I think is the most important, thinking about the packaging, make it very, very easy for people to consume your product.

Metrics and Data?

Mike: You’ve mentioned that you’re data-oriented, and I’m wondering, what are some of the most important metrics that you track?

Idit: This is a good question. I mean, if you ask my CFO, who is a very, very data-oriented person, a lot of the metrics that is running is metrics is numbers – how many VCs we are doing, how much of it is in production and that kind of stuff. Data that I’m looking at is different than the data that my CFO, the metrics that they’re looking at. I think in every business, it’s all about people, it’s all about the people in the business, it is all about the people in the market. Why has AWS decided to do this, why has Google decided to do this, what’s going on inside this organization – all this information is not metrics, but it’s data that you need to collect in order to make the right decision.

How do I predict it five or six years ago that there is going to be a lot of clusters and that people will need a service mesh for each and Istio will be that service mesh. That was pretty crazy to do five years ago.


But I had enough data that would lead me to believe, a lot of data that would lead me to believe that this is the direction that we need to go. So, we do have the metrics of how many customer success, otherwise you cannot scale – you need to know when something is wrong and, you know, big enough organization right now that “I’m not everywhere and I don’t know everything anymore.”

What Gives You Joy as CEO?


Mike: What gives you the most joy as a CEO?

Idit: It is always your job to basically kind of like try to cover the gap that you have in the company. As in the beginning, we had engineers, but we didn’t have anybody to do evangelism, and kind of like after that, we grow, and then we got that evangelism, so I’m not doing evangelism anymore. You are always doing more stuff, and to me, the way I’m looking at this, honestly, when I’m waking up in the morning is, what is the next fire that I need to put off, like where do I have a problem with, what is not working well the way it is working right. It is seriously like that’s how you should think about it – where is the next fire will come from and how am I covering it.

And to me, I’m a person that is easily being bored, so, I like learning, I like seeing what the problem is, I’m dangerous in every position in the company, potentially. I’m dangerous enough now after six years that I learned all of those.

So, I think that, the fact that it’s never boring, but I wish it was a little bit more boring. I mean, I heard a joke from someone that said, “A founder that started a company in the last five years, what did they need to overcome?” We needed to overcome Covid, we needed to overcome the SVB with the Silicon Valley Bank fall, we needed to overcome the fact that all our competitors suddenly could have raised 100 million dollars, you know, like crazy variations with seed money.

And so, there was a lot to overcome since then and it is never boring. And I think that as someone that likes challenges, that drive “I want to be the best, I want to win.”, so, that’s what I’m enjoying.

And I’ve got an advice from Diane Greene, who was the founder of VMware. And she was one of the people that started Google Cloud, so, one of the feedbacks that she gave me when I started. She basically said to me, “You can decide which type of CEO you should be.” Keep the stuff that you really like to do or you really feel that you’re a huge differentiator. And my guess is, it is that technology is the strategic, that is my strength.

And bring strong people next to you to cover the stuff that you can give away. So, my advice is to go to market. That to me is kind of like the way I’m looking at this, but honestly as a CEO, you really do a lot of the stuff that you don’t want. I mean, your job is to fix the problem or to cover stuff and to enable the other teams. If I need to help my engineers, I will do that if I need. You know what I mean? I will do everything I need to enable the team base. That is I think very important.

What Advice Would You Give Yourself If You Could Go Back in Time?

Mike: If you could go back five years or six years and give Idit some advice, what would that advice be? It doesn’t have to be at the very founding, it could be in the early stages too.

Idit: Wow. I learned so much. It’s very challenging to run a big team and make everybody aligned. As the company’s growing more and more and more – that’s become more than another. I think that the advice that I would tell my younger Idit is basically, just follow your instincts, listen to people, but eventually, make your own decision. I think the thing that I was doing wrong in the company was, a lot of times, I’d hire a leader for market and he’d go to market. And I knew that this is not my strength.

So, even though I didn’t believe always that what they thought were doing is wrong, I let them do it because I said, “Look, they are the expert. I’m not an expert in marketing, so let them do this.” I paid a big price for it because I felt that actually a lot of times, they were wrong and it’s within the company.
So, I think that what I learned today and why I think that I would be a better leader than I was back then is because I’m going to die or succeed on my mistake, honestly. Because there’s nothing faster than us to come and take responsibility for someone else’s mistake.

Again, it doesn’t mean that you’re not going to listen, but after all the data at the beginning, if you believe, like trust your instincts, don’t assume that someone else knows your business better than you. I think that this is something that I made a mistake a lot of time, actually multiply times. Before I said, “Okay, that’s it.”

Close

Mike: Idit, thank you so much for sharing all that experience and know-how and best of luck with Solo. Although it doesn’t look like you need it, you look like you’re doing amazing, so, congrats.

Idit: You always need more luck, but thanks.

Mike: Special thanks to Idit and the Solo team for reaching out. Cool graphics from Kamal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke for Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.

Next episode’s expected Jan of 2024, an interview with Nick Schrock of Dagster. I’m slowing down a little bit, but I’m still trying to do four episodes a year.
Don’t forget the State of Open Conference is returning to London, Feb 6th and 7th. So, until next time, this is Mike Schwartz, and thanks for listening to Open Source Underdogs.

The post Episode 64: API Service Mesh with Idit Levine, CEO and Founder of Solo.io first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 22:57
Episode 63: EBPF Networking Isovalent with Liz Rice – Chief Open Source Officer https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-63-ebpf-networking-isovalent-with-liz-rice-chief-open-source-officer/ Sun, 13 Aug 2023 23:17:07 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2208 Intro Mike: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 63, with Liz Rice, Chief Open Source Officer at Isovalent, the software startup behind Cilium, an eBPF-based Networking, Security and Observability project.  This episode was recorded in early February at the inaugural State of Open Source Conference or SoCon,...

The post Episode 63: EBPF Networking Isovalent with Liz Rice – Chief Open Source Officer first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro

Mike: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 63, with Liz Rice, Chief Open Source Officer at Isovalent, the software startup behind Cilium, an eBPF-based Networking, Security and Observability project. 

This episode was recorded in early February at the inaugural State of Open Source Conference or SoCon, which was held in London at the QEII Center in Parliament Square. The force of nature behind SoCon was Amanda Brock, CEO of Open UK and editor of the essential book Open Source Law, Policy and Practice, 2nd edition. Check it out on Amazon if you’re an open-source founder. Don’t miss SoCon next year in 2024, especially if you’re already in Europe for FOSDEM.


If you think eBPF or enhanced Berkeley Packet Filter sounds like a geeky low-level technology that you don’t need to know about – well, you’d probably be wrong. It enables developers to safely write code that runs in the Linux kernel. And safely is the key word here, because if you crash the Linux kernel, everything on the whole server goes down, all the containers, and everything else running on that server.


However, by exposing the power of the Linux kernel, developers can write code that runs faster and consumes less energy, and faster and cheaper has always been an attractive feature. Cilium combines three products into one. It’s like an old-fashioned firewall, an API Gateway and Wireshark, and it’s Kubernetes pod aware. It’s used by a number of successful products like Teleport for access management or Solo.io Service Mesh.
Simply said, eBPF is going to fundamentally change our infrastructure.


I met Liz at the SoCon conference, and after learning a little about Cilium, I was really impressed, and I asked her if she would come on the podcast, and luckily, she said yes. So, here we are with the interview.

Mike: Liz, thank you so much for joining me today.

Liz: Thanks for inviting me.

Tech Overview


Mike: As I understand it, Isovalent leverage’s a kernel technology to build a product called Cilium Enterprise. The upstream Cilium project on GitHub has over 22,000 commits and 14,000 stars – these are really impressive numbers for a project that started in 2016. How did this happen and how does this relate to the origin story of Isovalent?


Liz: Yeah. So, Cilium is built on a platform called eBPF, which is the kernel technology that you referred to. And eBPF allows us to run programs that are triggered by events that happen in the kernel, and those events could be Network packets, they could be a system call being made by user application – pretty much any sort of event in the kernel can be used to trigger an eBPF program.

Cilium was the first networking project to take advantage of eBPF. And it was always designed with the idea of container networking in mind. And the folks who started it are the founders of Isovalent, as well as being the originators of the Cilium project. So, Thomas Graf, Daniel Borkmann, who’s a kernel maintainer looking after eBPF, within the kernel.

And eBPF and Cilium, particularly eBPF in Networking and Cilium, kind of grew hand in hand since 2016 thereabouts, as we – the many, many contributors to the Cilium project – as it grew and as it gained functionality, sometimes that’s required additional capabilities in eBPF.

So, it’s been really almost like a long game. I think when Daniel and Thomas and Dan, the CEO, when they were first thinking about using eBPF, it was such a cutting-edge kernel technology – nobody was using it in production.

You know, when we add something to the kernel today, people won’t be using it in production for probably three, four, five years to come, so really, anticipating what the future was going to be.

I first saw Thomas presenting Cilium and the underlying eBPF technology back in 2017, and at the time I thought, “Well, this is revolutionary, this can change so many things.” Because not only can we see Network packets being manipulated by eBPF programs, we’ve also got this incredibly performant way of observing those Network packets and reporting on them that we can use for observability tooling. And like you mentioned network policy – we can implement network policy in eBPF.
Just making policy decisions about whether an individual Network packet is permitted or denied by policy, based on Kubernetes identities – this is the other real strength of Cilium.


It knows the Kubernetes identities, the labels of every pod. And so, you’re no longer just looking at network flows in terms of IP addresses and the port numbers you’re actually looking at them in terms of “this is a flow between service X and service Y.” It is so much more meaningful for a Kubernetes’ user.

Why the name Cilium

Mike: Just out of curiosity, do you know what Cilium means?

Liz: I think they’re little hairs in the inner ear – I’m not entirely sure why that was used as the name for the project.

Origin


Mike: I understand the eBPF technology is mind-blowing – Cilium is quite a project as I said. I mean, you’re not one of the co-founders, but do you know anything about how did it become actually a business?


Liz: I think pretty early on, as Cilium, the project, was getting established, and this sort of understanding that eBPF was going to be a really great foundation for efficient networking. That idea of building a company around this technology was probably in Thomas’s mind right from the get-go – I don’t know that for sure, but I imagine it was. And he and Dan Wendlandt, who I mentioned earlier – this is Thomas Graf and Dan Wendlandt – Dan had the background in software-defined networking, he’d worked at Nicira.


And I think they really saw the future of container networking being built on eBPF, so it was kind of natural to build a company. But, for the first few years, really the focus was on building the Cilium open-source projects, getting that really well-established and really well-known in the Kubernetes community.

It’s now been adopted by the CNCF, so we’ve actually contributed the project to CNCF, we’ve recently applied for graduation status there. It’s probably the most widely adopted in production networking plugin for Kubernetes now.

That kind of path from open-source projects, we really need to see this widely adopted, and then, a business that can provide, not just support, but also some Enterprise features that really large adopter is going to need. And just makes a lot of sense.

What does a Chief Open Source Officer do?


Mike: Your title is Chief Open Source Officer, and that’s a title I’ve never actually heard before. How is that role defined at Isovalent and why were you so excited to take on this mission?

Liz: It’s a particularly interesting title in a company where the vast majority of the engineering is open-source engineering, but I don’t run the engineering teams. My role is much more about how do we continue adoption of the open-source project, and how do we interface with the foundations, the community – I do a lot of work with the CNCF as well. How do we both act as good citizens towards that community and do the right thing in the open-source world. But also make sure that we’re taking advantage of everything we can.

You know, foundations like this offer us a lot of roots to speak to people who might become users and how we can do that in a way that is beneficial for people who want to learn about Cilium, or who want to learn about eBPF. So, that kind of educational role also falls within my team.

Open source v. Enterprise

Mike: This may sound like a silly question because Cilium was so powerful, but from a business perspective, what would you say are the main value propositions of the software?


Liz: So, from the open-source perspective, it’s a highly performant networking solution with built-in observability and security features. And we could dive into more details on what those are. From our perspective, it’s fantastic. If people are satisfied using the open-source version of the code – that’s great – we never want to make it such that — we don’t want to curtail the functionality, so that it always wants to be useful to open-source users.

That said, there are some features that particularly larger Enterprises are particularly interested in that you won’t need if you’re not a big Enterprise. So, for example, integrating with Legacy workloads. Some high availability features that you don’t really need unless you’re at a certain scale – those are the kind of features that we provide in the Enterprise distribution at Cilium.

Isovalent v. Sysdig?


Mike: Do you see yourselves competing with a company like Sysdig?

Liz: On the security front – yes. There is an element of competition there. I think we’re sort of speaking with slightly different customers there. Because, to my understanding, Sysdig is very much a security focused solution, whereas Cilium really applies more to a platform team who’s establishing, I would say Networking first, with this incredible set of security capabilities that you can then show to the security team, these amazing capabilities that they’ll get all that they already have by using Cilium.

I think we’re probably talking to different people within our respective customer organizations, but there is a certain amount of overlap around particularly the kind of runtime security, which we have a sub-project of Cilium called Cilium Tetragon. And there’s the ability to create profiles for the kind of things like accessing sensitive files or running certain executables, privilege escalation, suspicious network activity – these are the kind of things that we can detect at runtime using eBPF.

Why contribute project to the CNCF?

Mike: You mentioned that Cilium was contributed to the CNCF. What was the reason you brought the project to the CNCF? Also, what does that mean for the governance of the project?

Liz: It’s a big step to contribute a project. Because we hand over the intellectual property to the CNCF. That is something that Isovalent used to own and no longer owns. And the governance of the project really needs to be in the hands of the community. So, Isovalent remains the most prolific contributor, but – and this is again part of my role – encouraging more people and more organizations to get involved in not just code contributions and not just documentation contributions, but also the kind of broader evangelism of what Cilium is and the advantages of Cilium.

So, yeah, we’ve really embraced that community. And I think the phrase that we’ve used internally is “paved the world with Cilium”.

And the best way to pave the world with Cilium is to give it to as many people as possible, and the CNCF gives us a really great route to reaching all those people who are using Kubernetes. It gives those people confidence that it doesn’t matter what happens to Isovalent, the Cilium project is in the hands of a much, much bigger organization at this point.

And then, you know, that subset of people who are using Cilium, but then, find themselves needing Enterprise features. We won’t necessarily be the only Enterprise distribution, but there’s no doubt in my mind that we have the greatest expertise. So, hopefully, we will be the obvious choice for someone looking for Enterprise features or Enterprise support agreements around Cilium.

Trademark


Mike: This actually leads into my next question, which is that CNCF actually owns the trademark for Cilium, but your product, the Isovalent product is called Cilium Enterprise. And so, hypothetically, another company could make a product called Cilium Pro. I mean, I looked at the contributors and I went down eight contributors, they all work for Isovalent, I didn’t have time to go any further, but, obviously, your company has a lot of expertise, but still, the prospect that company spent a lot of money defending their trademarks, I almost never heard of anything like that – is it sort of terrifying, though?

Liz: I mean, at one level, yes, it is kind of terrifying. And Cilium is a brand name that is better recognized today than Isovalent is. And that’s a challenge that we have to embrace. And there are rules around what you can and can’t use – I think that there are probably still a few instances of documentation and use of the word Cilium, which we’re not really allowed to do any more, that we haven’t managed to tidy up everything.

There’s limitations on what you can and can’t use around a name based on what is now a Linux Foundation trademark. But everybody understands there’s a transition between us having a trademark and then giving it to the foundation. It obviously takes a little while to tidy up all that options around that, yeah. So, Isovalent Cilium Enterprise is the Isovalent distribution of what is a CNCF-owned community project.

Outside Contributors


Mike: I mentioned that there’s a lot of Isovalent engineers who are contributing code, but are there other engineers who are also contributing?

Liz: Absolutely! Google is quite a prolific contributor, Cilium is actually used in Google’s Dataplane V2, we have maintainers from Datadog, again a huge adopter who has been using it. Enormous scale – there’s some really good talks from Datadog talking about the scale of which they’ve deployed Cilium, we have contributors from Palantir.
Yeah, there’s several what we call committees, so maintainers of the project, who come from lots of different organizations. And then we have – I think it’s around 700 contributors in total. Isovalent today is just over a hundred people. The contributor base is much, much wider than just Isovalent. That said, we probably have the largest group of people working full-time at Cilium.

Market Segmentation?


Mike: On the commercial side, for infrastructure, the marketing is very horizontal, but have some natural segments worked out in terms of the customers who convert from open source to a commercial relationship with Isovalent? And are you figuring out that there’s any ways to segment the market here or the messaging?


Liz: I think that’s something we’re learning – I have just mentioned that we’re about a hundred people now, so we’re growing in our capabilities for how we target different customers and different verticals. We’ve had a lot of success in financial verticals media, quite a few transport, strangely enough. Yeah, so there’s a pretty wide breadth of Enterprises who have adopted this. I guess, the prerequisite for nearly all cases is that there are Cloud Native Kubernetes users, or that we do have some users who are using Cilium in a standalone load balancer scenario.

Have we figured out how to market to all of these different types of businesses? We’re absolutely still evolving and learning. But I think the fact that we’ve for many years had this very community-based focus, a very community-based approach, means that we can establish relationships and have trusted sharing expertise on a technical level that then encourages those engineering teams to recommend us internally.

And when it comes to making a choice about an Enterprise product or whether they need commercial support, those engineering teams already know who the experts are, and have potentially already had help from our team through the open-source community.

Team Location


Mike: Is there an Isovalent headquarters office where engineers go in, or is everyone like spread around the world?

Riz: We are fully distributed. We do have offices in Zurich, where Thomas is based, and in the Bay Area, where Dan is based. And I think that the timing, you know, really around the pandemic, just at the point as Isovalent was growing was sort of around the same time as the pandemic hit. So, inevitable that we were going to be remote based.

And as people have joined, they joined from countries all around the world. We have people from as far as long as Japan, or Alaska, Australia, throughout Europe and across the U.S. So, our team is really now fully distributed, and the culture has to embrace that. So, we’re very much focused on being remote first.

We do get the team together, and we try to get the whole company together, at least once a year. And we have a lot of encouragement around getting teams together in what we call hive time. Because we’re all about kind of bee-related metaphors.

Monetization: What features are enterprise?

Mike: I’m curious about monetization. It sounds like it’s open core, and what are the extra bits that you’re offering, I guess, in the Enterprise? And how do you decide what to make open source and what to add as an extra feature in the Enterprise distribution?

Riz: I see that the term open-core can sometimes come with a bit of a negative connotation. Sometimes people think of it as an open-source software that’s got some kind of, you know, been cut off at the knees, and that’s absolutely not what we believe in.

We absolutely believe in the open-source product being genuinely usable, and there are some pretty large organizations who continue to use just the open-source version. The kind of things that people will come to us for will be — there are some high availability features, there are things like BGP support for connecting into your legacy data center workloads, some Telco specific protocols that we’ve worked on – we very much don’t want people to feel that there’s something that’s core to their basic use case that they can’t do with Cilium.

Unless they are big enough that they’re the kind of organization that wants to pay anyway. You get to a certain size of organization, where you really don’t want to be just relying on open source with no sense of who’s going to support it when anything goes wrong. And they may come to us for features, they may come to us because they just want to know that somebody will be there to help them, you know, with a contract in place, should anything be needed.

Features for Growth


Mike: We mentioned that Cilium is a really broad product. Is there one particular product feature that you see driving the most growth, going forward in the next couple of years?

Liz: That’s a really great question, because we do have you know really, really powerful features in a number of different axes. So, for example, we just did a partnership with Griffon, where we’re building some really great dashboards, again a big part of this is available, completely open source.

There are also going to be some additional Enterprise features here. Perhaps the thing that strikes people is that they get this amazing visibility. And you know, that could be the moment when they realize, “Huh, look at the power of Cilium!” And the fact that we can see all these latency metrics or security information being shown in a visual way. So, that could be one thing that really drives growth.

It could be Service Mesh. We have a very efficient approach to doing sidecars Service Mesh in Kubernetes. Service mesh is one of those features that when it first started being talked about in probably 2018 – huge hype, huge excitement – the reality of people adopting Service Mesh, they found that it’s actually quite resource-heavy, there are issues, instrumenting all your workloads with these Service Mesh sidecars.

I think some of the realities of deploying Service Mesh had not quite lived up to the initial expectations. And then, last year, we announced the sidecarless approach that Cilium can bring. And mostly through the power of eBPF, it’s incredibly efficient. We can shortcut a lot of the path that a network packet has to take through the Service Mesh.

So, I think that’s another area that can be a real driver for growth, as people realize they can get all the benefits of Service Mesh, but without the overhead that they’ve come to associate with it.

And then, finally – security. I think I mentioned earlier the runtime security tooling that we’re able to provide through eBPF and through the Tetragon project, combining in a really performant, efficient security tooling. At the moment, everybody’s focus in security seems to be on supply chain, but they also still have firewalls. I’m quite a big believer that we have runtime security, everybody has runtime security in the form of firewalls.

We just were on the cusp of people understanding how powerful this new generation of runtime security tools can be to essentially firewall, not just Network packets, but things like bad executables or unexpected privilege escalations, that kind of thing.

Mike: Does the breadth of the product ever feel like a curse? Wouldn’t it be so much easier if there was just one application, and we can focus the marketing message and the sales, and all is just this one thing?

Liz: I’m sure the marketing team tasked with coming up with a tagline would find it a curse, yes.

Lessons for Open Source Startups?

Mike: So you’ve been in the techs business for a long time, taking off your Isovalent hat for a second and just as an observer of the startup scene, and other than the open-source scene in, do you have any advice for particularly entrepreneurs? Because this podcast is really designed first for founders, any advice for founders?

Liz: Yeah. This is actually something I’m getting increasingly interested in and I’m working with the CNCF on how we can encourage businesses on how to operate and be successful with open-source based businesses. There’s two sets of vendors who I would say have quite a lot to learn, particularly if they come into like a Cloud Native community audience.

There’s one class of vendor who is open-source based, they have an open-source project that they’re building their business around. The second class is people who are not open-source, but they have a product that they want to sell into the primarily open-source based Cloud Native community.

I think for both those sets of people, really understanding how powerful community is, Cloud Native community is kind of where I’ve lived for the last, I don’t know, half a dozen years. And it’s incredibly powerful, the relationships that you can build up – not just between individuals, between organizations, can be a really solid foundation for the business relationships that you then build on top of that.

And I think the real lesson for a lot of vendors is: don’t just expect to turn up at an event, pay for a booth or a table, and expect people to come and buy your software. Invest in time as well, invest in contributing, get involved in our project, get involved in the cigs and tags.

Don’t just expect people to immediately think that your open-source project is the one true amazing solution. Take the time to learn what other people are doing around that, and then, have those conversations about why your solution is great and what its strengths and potentially weaknesses might be. Learning to get involved in a community is really, really important.

Closing Notes


Mike: Well, I think that brings us to a close. Liz, thank you so much for sharing and best of luck with Isovalent and Cilium.

Liz: Thank you so much.

Mike: Again, special thank you to Amanda Brock and the whole open UK team for launching the State of Open Conference, where we recorded this episode. Cool graphics from Kamal Bhattacharjee, music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.

Remember how Liz said that eBPF and Cilium are really good for Service Mesh? Well, remember that, because next week’s guest is Idit Levine the founder of Solo.io.

Until next time, this is Mike Schwartz, and thanks for listening to Open Source Underdogs.

The post Episode 63: EBPF Networking Isovalent with Liz Rice – Chief Open Source Officer first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 24:45
Episode 62: Amandine Le Pape, Element CO-Founder / COO, Messaging and Collaboration https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-62-amandine-le-pape-element-co-founder-coo-messaging-and-collaboration/ Thu, 08 Jun 2023 14:40:51 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2191 Almandine Le Pape is the Co-Founder and CEO of Element, the the company behind the Matrix protocol, which deines a "chat" and collaboration protocol that enables federation across Slack, Rocket.Chat, Element, and many other implementations.

The post Episode 62: Amandine Le Pape, Element CO-Founder / COO, Messaging and Collaboration first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro


Mike: Hello, and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 62 with Amandine Le Pape, Co-Founder and COO of Element, the software startup behind Matrix, an open standard for secure, decentralized real-time communication, which you can learn more about at Matrix.org.

This episode was recorded in early February at the inaugural State of Open Conference or SoCon, which was held in London at the QEII Center in Parliament Square.

SoCon was made possible by the inexorable tenacity of Amanda Brock, who leads an organization called OpenUK and is the editor of the 2022 Oxford University press book, Open Source, Law, Policy and Practice, (2nd edition).

If you’re an open-source founder and you haven’t read this book, go to Amazon right now and order it. If you can travel to London next year, I hope to see you at SoCon 2024. If it’s half as fabulous as this year’s event, you definitely should not miss it. I guess that’s enough gushing about SoCon, let’s get on with the interview with Amandine.

Origin of Idea


Michael: Amandine, thank you so much for joining us.

Amandine: Thank you for having me.

Michael: As one of the founders, I have to ask what’s the origin story of Element? And at what point did you think about starting Matrix, the open-source repository and Matrix of protocol?

Amandine: So, it goes back to almost 9 years now, in 2014, where we were a team selling commercial messaging apps to Telco’s, incubated in a big corporation called Amdocs. After a while, we were really annoyed by the fact the whatever we did with our apps, WhatsApp would always win. WhatsApp would always be on the front page of the Telco’s website, next to the app we were building for them.

And this fragmentation even from a user perspective is really bad. For email, I can talk to anyone with my phone, and can send SMS and call people whatever phone they use, whatever network they are on, while on chat I have to actually install a new app every time someone wants to use a new one. So, we came to Amdocs and proposed them to actually try to fix this by creating an open standard for communication.

Having built on top of all the other existing standards before, we had learned a lot and thought that with the professional team, we would be able to truly bring something to the world, which was able to answer the needs that we had of interoperability for chat and messaging voice over IP.

Origin of Company / Project

Michael: That sort of answers my question, but you’re working at Amdocs and you’re thinking, “Well, wouldn’t it be great if we could federate these chat servers,”, but how does that lead to actually starting an open-source project and the founding of the company?


Amandine: So, what we do actually is create the open standard and open protocol – we set it up as an open-source project. So, within Amdocs, we set up completely something independent with a new brand, completely open-source. And we started working on it for three years, actually building the reference implementations, defining the spec, etc.

After three years, there were other companies building on top of Matrix and monetizing it, like Erickson for example, selling communication systems for banks in Sweden. Whilst the core team, we were still building the project and not funding it.

So, based on that, we thought that it would be better to actually set up an independent company and try to monetize Matrix on the side. So, that’s when we actually spent out of Amdocs, set up Element as the commercial company, which builds the flagship app itself – called Element – and selling services and proprietary product on top of Matrix. And we also set up the Matrix Foundation as an independent nonprofit, which is the custodian of the standard itself.

Project Contributions


Michael: The Matrix Foundation governs the protocol, but it also has some software in there. There’s a reference implementation, I think, in Python. Who contributes the code to that software project? Is it mostly Element or, are there community contributions?

Amandine:  Basically, Element contributes a lot of code towards reference implementations of servers and SDKs and some of the application services. And it’s literally donating the IP to the foundation, so that it’s completely independent from the commercial entity. But beyond that, Element contributes the reference implementation server Synapse, we also have another server called Dendrite – all the various SDKs for iOS, Android, etc.

But then, the community, on the other side, is actually building their own projects and building their own reference implementation servers, their own SDKs, Bridges, etc.

So, whilst Element contributes a lot to some of these projects, which are the ones which are often used in production by governments or enterprises. The community is very vibrant, and I think we’re close to 5,000 contributors across the entire Matrix project and the different repos.

Value Prop


Michael: So, there are a number of communications platforms out there, we’ve actually had Ian Ten from Mattermost and Gabriel Engel from Rocket. And there’s Slack, of course, is out there. What makes the Element commercial offering different, and why do we need another communication platform?


Amandine: So, if you’re just trying to have your own communication system that you can run yourself, then yes, you may want to just go to Mattermost or Rocket.chat. The difference with Element is the fact it’s built on the open standard – it means that once you run your Element and Matrix deployment, you can communicate to any other deployments out there. The same way that when you deploy your mail server, it federates with all the other email servers out there.

And actually, Rocket.chat built a bridge to Matrix, so now, Rocket.chat can communicate with Element without a problem. And the interesting thing is that was under the impression of the Swedish government, which brought all its vendors into one room and said, “Guys, we cannot use SaaS solutions for communications – we don’t want to designate one vendor for all the government, ministries should be able to choose the app they want to use. So, you have to federate, you have to interoperate – figure it out, find something.”

By the way, there is this standard called Matrix that should do the job, but that means that today, if you use Rocket.chat, you are able to participate in the Matrix network. So, the interesting thing is also that when you use Matrix for your communication, as for a government for example, it really solves the political problem.

Because different ministries will own their own communication, they will deploy their own servers, they run it wherever they want, under the security they want, but yet, they are able to participate in the wider network and the ownership of the discussion is shared between the two. So, you completely skip over the “Shall we use your system or my system” to come to work together on this project.

Building Matrix v. Element Brand?


Michael: So, here at the conference, I noticed that there’s a Matrix booth, but there’s no Element booth. Why did you feel that it was the right thing to do to promote Matrix and not the commercial company here?

Amandine: It felt more aligned with the idea of OpenUK in terms of building open source in the community side of things. Basically, the same way, this weekend we had the Matrix. It’s Matrix which is being most represented – we don’t even have an Element sticker or an Element banner out there. Even if Element is open source too, but really trying to grow the ecosystem in the community for Matrix.

Technical inspiration


Michael: This is a little bit of ancient history – but do you remember a platform called Diaspora? Were you thinking about Diaspora at all when you started Matrix?

Amandine: So, the thing is that we’re addressing very much the social network side of things whilst we wanted to go for the full communication, real-time communication system. In terms of whether we thought about them when we chose the decentralized structure, actually it’s more inspired from Git, and basically the idea of replicating the content of the conversation and the history of the conversation on every server.

Community Contributions


Michael: Let’s talk a little more about the community. What areas do you think the community makes the most contributions? Is it in Bridges, Bots or Widgets, which is, like how you extend the functionality? Or is it in the core server? Where do you see the most activity from the community?

Amandine: So, the way we built Matrix is to make sure that the development of clients was super easy. Because what we saw in the past is every time people wanting to add chat in their communication systems, everyone thinks it’s easy – it’s just sending a message. And then, if you want the actual features of history, etc., it’s tough. So, we wanted to provide an easy way for any web developer to add chat to their system.

So, all the complicated stuff is in the server with a very simple client-server API, just HTTP/API that anyone can use. It means that we have a lot of contribution for clients, a ton of clients out there – all sorts of clients, from common line to mobile, etc. We even have clients running on Nintendo DS for example. And a lot of Bridges as well because people want to connect to existing networks out there, so they tend to build their own Bridges. There is also contribution to the core, to Synapse itself, and we actually have the rest SDK as a new core project, which is led a lot by the community. I think it’s a quarter or a third of the developers actually are not employed by Element. And it’s like the core contributors on this project, and it doesn’t even have an internal room -everything is really in the open for the rest SDK.

Monetization


Michael: So, Element is very transparent about the monetization strategy. It’s fairly simple, it’s based on monthly active users, and it looks like it’s the same price whether you host it yourself or whether it’s SaaS – can you talk a little bit about the logic behind the pricing model? How did you get here and were there other pricing models? And did you get it right the first time?

Amandine: All those are complicated. So, when we started, we thought that the easiest way to get going would be to provide it as a SaaS platform, because it’s end-to-end encrypted and based on an open standard. So, even if we run it for people, it means we don’t see what’s inside, what’s happening on the platform due to their encryption, and people can take the data and move it to their own server later on if they want.
The fact is, our customers actually want to self-host – be it on-premise or in a cloud – so, we had to basically make sure that the on-premise hosting was actually served very well. That’s why we ended up, this is — I don’t know which alteration of pricing model it is, but it’s definitely not the first one. And yet, the idea was like, okay, let’s try to simplify one single price in the cloud or on-premise, it should be the same, because in the end it’s pretty much the same service.
I think we are about to release unless we released a couple of weeks ago – I can’t remember – a new pricing model, which is a bit like a more integrated basically. Here, we had, I think it was a three- or four-dollar user a month. And then, you can add add-ons on top of it. But we’re trying to build packages where basically the add-ons are included, but the total price may be higher, so have more of a split like this.

Sales Motion


Michael: So, what does the sales motion look like? Do people download one of the open-source and find you? Is it more an inbound motion or, are you out there, trying to find like who wants a service – like what is the sales, how have you built the sales team?

Amandine: We hired our first salesperson three years after starting the company because everything was coming inbound. Basically, it’s very much the community being here and enthusiastic, and then, you have people who tried on personally or investigated, and then bring it in-house and suggest it to their governments or their enterprise as something that would be useful.

The community has very much been our main source of leads, and so many times you have a first customer called, and then you see one guy sitting at the back of the room with the Matrix hoodie, and it’s the one who doesn’t say anything. But you know it’s the guy that people actually listen to and trust because, from technical perspective, they are the expert. So, we now have a sales team, and we’ve focused a lot on making sure we have content and marketing, etc. do a bit of outbound, but yes, the fact that our tech is good and take his, “No, it is good.”, is our best-selling point and our visibility as Matrix as well.

Market Segmentation


Michael: Have you found that there’s some natural segmentation in the market, either vertical or by application, like how does it breakdown? It seems like it can be used by so many organizations, so does that drive your marketing department crazy?

Amandine: Yeah, it’s tough to focus when you can be used by anyone, basically you can solve pretty anyone’s problem. When we started, before setting up Element, we looked at the different business model to figure out how are we going to monetize it to actually fund the development. We ended up with 72 business models. We went for one which we thought would be pretty easy, which is enterprise collaboration and starting on SaaS, etc.

We looked at one of them was public sector communications, and we were like, “Huh, that’s a good match!” But oh, my God, no way we’re getting into this, it’s going to be endless sales cycle tenders – no way! Guess who knocked at the door? It was the French government! Because in the end, it’s such a good product market fit in terms of no vendor lock-in because it’s open-source and open standard, ability to run yourself, end-to-end encrypted, decentralized, so it matches the organization, and each ministry can have their own deployment.

So, we have really seen a good product market fit there as either generic collaboration tool, like French government for example uses very much as with team’s replacement, or also, for specific use-cases like defense. Because you can take Matrix into extreme environments, you can use it peer-to-peer, in a mesh network, you can use it low-bandwidth on ships. So, the US Navy is trialing it on ships. Their ship has their own server, and if your submarine is actually going down, loses contact with the network, they still can talk locally. And when they come up, then it merges the history, and they can get back in contact and see what has been happening with the rest of the fleet.

So, all sorts of very specific use-cases, which I’ve been working on. But overall, it’s very merged, we need sovereign communication, end-to-end encrypted, we need to replace WhatsApp because it’s not compliant and it’s centralized, and we need to replace teams because it’s not even encrypted and centralized.

Partnerships


Michael: You’re still a pretty young company. When was the company actually founded?

Amandine: Element was founded in 2017.

Michael: Okay. So, have you built out the partner network at all? And are partners helping you deliver or have partners become a distribution channel for you at all yet?

Amandine: We’re just starting. Literally, we’re still building up offers, contracts, etc., because we’re seeing a lot of companies who are actually helping institutions deploy their own NextCloud or LibreOffice and this sort of things. And now, they’re coming to this guy saying, “Can I have my Element deployment as well please?” So, there’s this sort of partnerships that we’re looking at, but it’s very, very much the beginning.

Trust Management


Michael: Maybe I can degress back into the tech, or maybe this is a tech / business question, but it seems to me like one of the challenges around a federated system would be trust. “Yes, I could connect to anybody, but if I’m a submarine, how do I know I’m not connecting to an enemy’s ship? Yes, I can connect to anyone, but how do you know who you can trust?”

Amandine: You can set up securable gateways, for example, which are going to give you an opportunity to apply business logic to it. Like, for example in the French deployment, you don’t necessarily want anyone to be able to message the top layers of the government. You want to put like civil servants in the government, can invite external people civilians into a discussion, but the other way around is not true. So, you have tools like this which says, “Oh, your server can connect to anyone, or, your server can only connect to this subset of domains,” and this sort of thing. So, we rely on additional tools around it to do that.

Ecosystem


Michael: What are your plans to foster growth in the ecosystem? So, not just the open-source contributors, but also sort of other companies who maybe have a commercial interest in working with either the Matrix protocol or the core Matrix open-source project?

Amandine: The idea from the start was to create Matrix as big as the biggest ecosystem as possible. And Element being the leader of it, but maybe like ten percent market share, the same way as Google is probably the leader of the web market, but it’s like tiny market share in corporate reason – it’s just a very big market. We are trying to encourage companies to build on top of it and support them.

Within the foundation, we want to set up at some point the ability to provide grants. We’re setting up a membership model within the foundation and then the ability to actually be able to fund all this money to other people contributing to the ecosystem. So, that’s the kind of things were trying to do. But we are very, very conscious about making sure that others have the space to grow within the Matrix ecosystem, so that it’s basically rising up the sea for everyone.

Commoditization


Michael: One of the key differentiators for Element is this aspect of decentralization and federation between servers, but that’s not proprietary. Are you ever concerned that maybe your key differentiator is also open and maybe, overtime, not unique?

Amandine: So, the beauty of an open ecosystem is that people will complete a value, so it’s up to everyone to find where the best value lies and bring their own expertise. So far, we have been relying a lot on the fact that we’ve been the expert in Matrix, having created it. So, we are the best to run servers at scale and this sort of thing. So, people come to us. We are at the point where other companies are now competing with us at that level, providing hosting.

So, we need to bring our expertise into more specific use-cases, and maybe it’s this specific property product for use-cases like around security, and that sort of things that we can build proprietary, and we can license, because we know best how the protocol works and we can go around these things. So, yeah, it’s up to us to be creative.

Another thing is that the vision is that everyone would be communicating via Matrix in a few years from now. And some of them will be using Element, some of them would be using all their applications out there. But we do provide today as an Element’s kind of app store, where you can install an integration to GitHub or Bridge to Slack, etc. One idea is that this App Store would be available to any other applications out there and can become one of the main points of monetization potentially for Element in the long term.

Product Roadmap


Michael: On the product side, which product are you the most excited about do you think has the most growth potential? And were you’re investing – perhaps more in R&D?

Amandine: Right now, we are rewriting the Element application, especially on mobile, based on the rest SDKs. So far, we had an IOS and Android SDKs. We are rewriting it from scratch using a Swift and Kotlin for Android. Basically, trying to get to a point where Element is as performant and fast as Telegram, with a user interface which is super simple. Because that’s been our biggest problem so far. Element has been very slow and bloated, and that’s really hindered the growth of Matrix as a whole.


This is the thing where we are investing a lot, and it should be out in the public test flight for iOS next week or in the couple next few weeks. And it’s really exciting because it’s like you started with some of the biggest accounts, and it’s like 100 milliseconds start – it is really nice.

Europe tech startup challenges?


Michael:  We’re here in Europe, and the founders are European – do you think that there are any challenges about being in Europe versus Silicon Valley, and what’s it been your experience of tech startup in Europe?

Amandine: Our market is very much around privacy data sovereignty and this sort of things – which is huge in Europe – so, somehow, it’s probably easier for us to be based in Europe because we have Germany, we have France, and they’re all so advanced on this angle of data sovereignty and privacy. I think that was really good for us. And it’s now a real challenge to cross the Atlantic and see on the other side if we can address this market as well. Because in the US, as far as I see it, the clouds seem to be pretty much the default and it’s less questioned than here.

Advice for entrepreneurs?

Michael: So, every startup is kind of a marathon and an emotional roller-coaster – do you have any advice for entrepreneurs, especially entrepreneurs who are looking to use open source as part of their business model?

Amandine: We just had an interesting panel around the community side of things, so one of my advices would be if you are actually wanting to do it, think about why. If you want to do it right, really take care of your community. Because the open-source company without a community, it’s missing the point of doing the open source. So, make sure you manage to grow a nice community because this will help you so much. It really makes the experience something different, and you know, otherwise, it’s just usual tech entrepreneur, in terms of make sure you stay alive because if you don’t, then you cannot take care of the rest of them.

Advice for women founders?


Michael: I have a related question for you: we need more women founder role models for the next generation of open-source founders. Do you have any advice for women founders?

Amandine: It’s always hard for me to talk about this, because I’ve never felt that I’ve been hindered as a woman. I have the feeling that the problem is more that, early on, it’s like the work needs to be done at school level. It feels like it’s education, from young kids to understand that no, tech is not just for boys, and yes, everyone can be involved. And as a woman founder, I think we always tend to – it’s the things we hear quite a lot – but tend to not push and not take the seat at the table. I think we need to be careful about that as women. We tend to just like intervene when we think it’s necessary, but we need to be a bit more outspoken and push it a bit more. Because, otherwise, people around us who are just more pushy will just walk over basically, even if they’re less competent.

Credits


Michael:  Amandine, thank you so much for joining me today. I know you have a busy schedule, probably flights to catch, so thank you so much for sharing your experiences on the podcast.

Amandine: Thank you for having me.

Michael: Special thanks to Amanda Brock and the whole OpenUK team for working so hard to launch the State of Open Conference. It was really amazing – thank you. Cool graphics from Kemal Bhattacharjee, music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosovere.

Next week, as I promised, Liz Rice from Isovalent, who’s going to tell us about the Cilium project and all the cool things they’re doing.

Until next time, this is Mike Schwartz, and thanks for listening to Open Source Underdogs.

The post Episode 62: Amandine Le Pape, Element CO-Founder / COO, Messaging and Collaboration first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 24:33
Episode 61: Interview with Nauren Batjargal, Co-Founder & COO of Erxes, a Leading Open -Source Customer Experience Platform https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-61-interview-with-nauren-batjargal-co-founder-coo-of-erxes-a-leading-open-source-customer-experience-platform/ Sun, 04 Jun 2023 19:26:28 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2184 Intro Mike Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 61, with guest Nauren Batjargal, Co-Founder and COO of Erxes, a firm based in Mongolia that produces an open-source CRM and Customer Experience Platform. It is the first crowdfunded startup I’ve interviewed in the series. So,...

The post Episode 61: Interview with Nauren Batjargal, Co-Founder & COO of Erxes, a Leading Open -Source Customer Experience Platform first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro


Mike Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 61, with guest Nauren Batjargal, Co-Founder and COO of Erxes, a firm based in Mongolia that produces an open-source CRM and Customer Experience Platform. It is the first crowdfunded startup I’ve interviewed in the series. So, without further ado, let’s cut to the interview.

Mike: Nauren, thank you so much for joining us today.

Nauren Batjargal: Thank you for having me today.

Mongolia


Mike: You are the first open-source founder I’ve spoken with from Mongolia – is there something special about Mongolia that led to the development of this open-source platform?


Nauren: It’s minus 40 degrees right now, Celsius degrees, in Mongolia right now. It’s actually some of the coldest places in the world right now, so…yeah, here we are. Just doing the things that we do every day. Except the cold.

Mike: Where is the team located? Is there a critical mass there in Mongolia, or you are globally spread out.

Nauren: Yeah, we’re globally spread out, but the majority of the team and the development team is based in Mongolia.

Why position directly against Hubspot?

Mike: So, I liked the description of Erxes on GitHub. It says, “The open-source HubSpot alternative enables SaaS providers and digital marketing agencies/ developers to create unique experiences for their entire business.” I’m curious, why did you choose to position yourselves there versus HubSpot?

Nauren: We started the whole business, I mean, substituting the HubSpot, because, basically, we started the Erxes when we were the marketing agency. Then, like, while we’ve been marketing agency, and that we had to obviously generate some leads. And then, at the same time, looking after some of the existing clients as well as nurturing and implementing the project, at the same time with the limited human resources we had. And we’ve been using Intercom and HubSpot, Pipedrive, I think. You could name most of the marketing tech tools we’ve been using.

Partially because the single tool can only fill the part of the business life cycle. There was a lot of manual work behind using those several tools, as a small company. Most of the time, only four or five people are using four or five different tools, but then, there’s so manual work at the back. But then, on the other hand, it was too expensive for us.

So, that’s how we started. The main plug-ins, what we call it now, the main features that we have is what really HubSpot does. And also, explaining this kind of tool is really difficult. I use HubSpot to give an idea for everyone, like it’s an easiest and quickest way. So, that’s how the name came up.

Value Prop

Mike: What are the most important value propositions for your customer?

Nauren: There’s so many tools out there, and an average company uses at least 5 to 10, some like more than 10 tools they use in their everyday operation. Just using those so many different tools can lead so many ineffective and manual work. And also, eventually, it makes each team start talking in different languages – purely because the database they’re using is not the same. And those tools don’t often talk to each other, which directly affects the costs as well as the growth of the company.

The biggest value proposition that Erxes offers is, make the entire company talk in the same language. Because, the open-source, you can customize it entirely to fit to your business. And it has more than 48 plug-ins that can fit into every single of your different field, or different teams that you have. And even if Erxes doesn’t have any of the tools that you require, maybe you can develop one, or maybe you can integrate it because it’s open-source. You can actually do that. Plus, it’s open-source, and compared to some of the closed tools, it offers fairly sustainable price-friendly options.  As long as you could manage maintaining, and configure, and all those technical work that you can manage doing it, yeah, you can have better pricing options that can have you grow better.

Technical Skill Required


Mike: There’s a funny saying that I always think about, which is that open source is only free if you don’t value your time. Because there is a care and feeding aspect to operations.

Nauren: We have a service that we provide to save our customers’ time, to help to set up all those technical work. I know when you start a new tool, it’s a lot of work – especially with the tools like Erxes or HubSpot. It’s a lot of time, but once you get to know this value proposition and once you decide to move forward to this, there is a lot that you can benefit from.

Monetization


Mike: Which actually brings us to a good question about monetization. How do you monetize a SaaS license, plug-ins, APIs, and which monetization strategies are actually the most important to the company in terms of both current revenue and growth?

Nauren: Because we started and we had to bootstrap, we’ve had a number of enterprises which have like a large number of customers. Most of them operate in highly regulated industries. We offered them a tailored solution and like a dedicated support. What we aim in the future is to support partner companies as well as developers, independent developers, who can benefit from us, so then, we can earn from our support, as well as from the percentage from their revenue.

That’s one way of revenue-generating. And also, some of the plug-ins that we have are paid plugins – that’s the other revenue-generating plan that we have.

Moving from Enterprise to SMB?

Mike: So, you are really looking to figure out how can you really grow into the SMB space, which maybe would have better growth for you.

Nauren: That’s right, that’s right. That’s the biggest challenge that we have. Last year, we prepared our technology to be ready for this growth and resistant. But then, this year, we go into purely focusing on building the community and supporting those developers within our community, and make sure our tool is now developer first, shifting from an enterprise first to a developer first, I would say.

Product Focus

Mike: You mentioned that, perhaps, you’re going to introduce commercial plug-ins – which area do you see contributing to the most growth in the future?

Nauren: Yes, we already have a number of commercial plug-ins. This year and the next couple of years, we really purely focus on developers building the great developer roadmap and supporting them. And whichever way this will lead us, we will follow it. Because we started listening to the developers, and yeah, making the whole road to be smooth and easiest as possible.

Segmentation?


Mike: So, with regard to your business plan going forward, marketing technology – it’s a very horizontal market, which makes it very challenging, as you know as a marketing expert. What is your plan to segment the market? Is developers your segment? Or is there any other way that you’re looking to segment the market going forward?

Nauren: You are right. We’ve been doing marketing ourselves for the last 10 years. One thing that we know is, depending on who they are, and even though the companies operating in the same place and doing exactly the same thing, in the same industry, when it comes to marketing, they all require completely different thing from one another. Building a tool for them – it just doesn’t work if it’s just one SaaS tool. And that’s why we started this open source.

And the biggest advantage Erxes has is, whoever doing marketing is using Erxes can make the tool fits completely entirely for themselves, just like Lego. So, you could just make little changes within the plugin, and also you can add additional little bits and pieces to make it fit entirely, especially all those additional tools that communicate within the organization as well – you can sync it all together, sync the data all together, and eventually work as one.

So, in that way, anyone who uses marketing, whether it’s different or the same, you could have your own tool. Because we made a mistake over the years.

Like in the past, we were trying to segment the market, and then, we build something and then the next thing we jump in, and it turns out to be completely different. And then, we create another plug-in, and we create another plug-in. That’s how we already have 48 – like, so many plug-ins we already created. Even in the same industry, they require completely different tools. I mean, being open-source, it just helps make this tool to be suitable for everyone really.

Product Best Positioned for Growth


Mike: And in your marketing strategy, do you see your cloud-hosted offering as being a bigger driver for growth or the plug-in license revenue?

Nauren:
We always believe in open source. And we believe that the open-source plug-in is the biggest growth potential that we have.

Origin

Mike: When was Erxes actually started exactly – what year?

Nauren: The idea was initiated in 2016, but officially started in 2018. So, it’s six years.

Challenges of Mongolia


Mike: Just getting back to Mongolia for a second, because it is a very remote place. Have there any challenges from being in Mongolia?

Nauren: In terms of being an entrepreneur, being a developer, it’s the same – we are just using the computer and talking to you at the midnight in Mongolia. It’s normal, just like any other entrepreneur on a daily basis – it is the same. Except the weather and the atmosphere. Mongolia is based in Central Asia, and the Covid and all these political and economic challenges that we’re facing – it affects some of the members of our team. Otherwise, it’s just pretty much the same, you know.

Mike: Interesting. Yeah, thank you for sharing. Any advice for entrepreneurs who are launching a business around an open-source product?


Nauren: I mean, it’s the same. Whether it’s open-source or SaaS, you got to be really tough, stick to your decision and to make sure you love it. And then, to be persistent in challenges that you would face along the roads. Starting the business is not easy. Whether it’s related to technology or any other industry, it is the same. It’s challenging. So, you just make sure you be prepared.

Mike: Nauren, thank you so much for joining us today, and best of luck with the Erxes.

Nauren: Oh, thank you very much.

Mike: And thanks to the Erxes team for reaching out. Cool graphics from Kemal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke For Free and Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.

Sorry for the long delays in releasing episodes. Being CEO of Gluu has been keeping me busy. But I’ll have two more episodes in the next few weeks: Liz Rice from Isovalent and Amandine Le Pape from Element. So, until next time, this is Mike Schwartz and thanks for listening to Open Source Underdogs.

The post Episode 61: Interview with Nauren Batjargal, Co-Founder & COO of Erxes, a Leading Open -Source Customer Experience Platform first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 13:37
Episode 59 – Igor Farinic, Evolveum: Open -Source Software Vendor in the Identity Management and Governance Space https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-59-igor-farinic-evolveum-open-source-software-vendor-in-the-identity-management-and-governance-space/ Sun, 22 Jan 2023 17:15:56 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2133 Intro Michael Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs episode 59, with guest Igor Farinic, Co-founder and CEO of Evolveum. For those of you who don’t know Evolveum, it’s a European company based in Slovakia that specializes in Identity Management and Governance. This kind of software is used by Enterprises to provision and manage...

The post Episode 59 – Igor Farinic, Evolveum: Open -Source Software Vendor in the Identity Management and Governance Space first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>

Intro



Michael Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs episode 59, with guest Igor Farinic, Co-founder and CEO of Evolveum. For those of you who don’t know Evolveum, it’s a European company based in Slovakia that specializes in Identity Management and Governance. This kind of software is used by Enterprises to provision and manage users and their entitlements within the organization, which is of course critical for security. I’ve known Igor for many years. Right before the pandemic in March of 2020, I had dinner with him and his team during an industry conference.

And I was super impressed with their passion and dedication. And I know that this level of engagement comes only with a great leader who builds a strong culture and mission. So, while Evolveum might not be your typical Bay Area unicorn, I think there’s a lot we can learn from Igor and Evolveum. And it was a long overdue interview, so here we go. Igor, thank you so much for joining us today.

Igor Farinic: Thank you for having me, Mike.

What Is MidPoint?

Michael: For those in our audience who are not Identity gurus, what types of challenges does Evolveum MidPoint help themselves?


Igor: There are so many challenges in that digital Identity security space we are selling. For every vertical, it’s a different story. Most of the challenges are pretty common, so you have to connect your source of data, which is usually HR system. Then, you have to onboard your people, persons and transform them into digital identities, and then do something about those – do some application account and so on. That’s pretty common for everyone.

Origin

Michael: So, how did Evolveum get started?

Igor: The previous recession actually, we were out of a job, with Radovan. Radovan is fond of the co-founders. We were looking for new opportunities and we had to develop next-generation open-source Identity Management system, but after some time, the company have been on the product. And we were hit very hard. So, actually, we did not have many options left. After some time, we decided to continue developing the open-source code based at what’s already in place. And actually, we helped transformed that and rebranded it into MidPoint. It was natural for us to remain open-source.

Early Days

Michael: Getting the momentum, or like the starting velocity in something like that, is really hard. Did you have some lucky breaks or some initial customers that it really made it possible at the beginning?


Igor: We were very lucky actually. We had like two or three groundbreaking partners and customers that helped us a lot in the early days. Without them, we wouldn’t be here today. After two years, we ran out of our investment money because we were invested by friends and family, especially out of our own pockets. So, thanks to these partners and customers, we were very lucky to start getting first subscriptions money, we took off and, yeah, we are here today.

Market Segmentation

Michael: So, Identity is such a broad horizontal market, does Evolveum segment the market in any way? For example, by vertical market or use case?

Igor: We are building strong partnership network – that is our primary focus, and we are not segmenting directly, but some of our partners are focusing based on some geographical location, some are focusing on some verticals. And also, some of them on different deployment models. Some partners are building a new product or code product on top of MidPoint.


Customer Profile

Michael: Can you talk about the range, some of the vertical segments that you’re serving – what some of the customers look like?

Igor: I would say we can serve all the verticals. Our partners can serve all the verticals. But there’s segmentation, like in the United States we have very strongly academic deployments. And in Europe, there are more verticals that are covered, banking and financial institution, Academia and so on. And governments as well.

Sales Channels

Michael: How do you find customers at Evolveum? And what would you say are the most effective sales channels?

Igor: Our primary focus is, I would say, inbound marketing. We are trying to produce the best content we can. We are publishing everything for free. We are pure open-source software, so, we do various things in open domain, not only code, but also documentation, and all the content is open.


Monetization

Michael: So, let’s talk a little bit about monetization. What does Evolveum actually sell?

Igor: Primary subscription. Over the last two years, during the Covid, we have transformed 85-90% of our revenue subscriptions. And this is very good for us because it gives us much more opportunity to produce even more content and even more code thanks to the subscription.


Michael: I guess you’re talking about support subscriptions?

Igor: Yes. Support subscription.

Michael: Some people would say that it’s a challenge to scale that business model
because it’s so hard to find good people, and Identity is really a multidisciplinary set of skills – it takes a lot of time to train. What are some of the challenges you see with the support subscription model?

Igor: Yeah. Actually, the only challenge with a subscription model – you have to move forward and start providing value to the customers to get the subscription from them. And to get to that point, you have to deploy the product. We are happy to have so many partners that actually are doing the implementation work for us. As I already mentioned, we have now almost 90% of the revenue subscription, so we are not doing implementation work. Almost no implementation work anymore. Even older subscriptions are thanks to our partners because they are deploying the product for the customers. And we have decided that we have pre-recorded all our trainings and are providing this trainings to our partners for free to improve the knowledge and speed up the process for implementation projects for the customers.

Open Core?

Michael: Have you ever been tempted, or have you ever discussed any ideas to move to open core, to add some extra bells and whistles in a commercial product?

Igor: Not, not really – we have also made a public pledge to stay open. There were some events in the Identity space or there’s some products that started as open-source and they are moving to goal source. That was the time when we have made this public pledge. And actually, I’m also listening to some of your podcasts as well. These are great for inspiration. And I remember there were some previous that some of the products or the other way around all being open-core and starting to open-source everything.

And actually this is the same situation here: to keep different processes or infrastructure in the company. It’s very complex. It’s asking from us to do everything in public space. It’s much cheaper but simple, and so on.


Cloud?

Michael: What about in the Cloud? You know, the other two big business models that we see most commonly are Open Core and Cloud. And I know at Gluu, I would say, every other year, we had a conversation about a Cloud version of Gluu, but what about Evolveum? You mentioned some of your partners are launching Cloud services. But have you considered launching a Cloud-hosted version?

Igor: No. We are having a very close communication with our partners. We are doing a lot of partners webinars. And we have decided that we will improve the MidPoint, that it will be Cloud-ready. And the partners will take over and they will do the operation of the code version of MidPoint. So, we are somewhere in the middle right now – it’s already code-friendly, very code-friendly. It just needs to focus on their long-run upgrades, updates and so on. So, this is to be a result interest in the next LTS version of MidPoint.

Community

Michael: So, building the community is always a challenge in open-source ecosystems. And I’m wondering, are you seeing any contributions from the communities? And if so, in what areas?

Igor: From the early days of Evolveum, community was very important to us and remains very important. No one is contributing to the core of the MidPoint or codebase, but that’s perfectly fine, because we helped many contributions that are outside of the community core. Like, for example, the community is developing connectors. There are so many connectors out there that are open-source. And I’ve been only able to develop community that is making MidPoint as a platform very strong.

We held translation to 18 different worldwide languages, which is great. We are using Transifex platform to coordinate the activity, and most of the translations are up-to-date with each release and 100% translated. So, that’s great. We are saving a huge ton of money on our own translations here.

I would say also the community management is pretty active. Community managements are our best effort channel for us. Now we are trying to have a community that is not only asking questions but actually helping. And we are motivating our partners to help the community. So, that’s very important for us. We have also written and distributed our own MidPoint Identity Management and Governance. And we have also translated this material and people are contributing improvements, I mean language and so on, to the book as well.

For us, even the subscribers are the community because they are primary contributing the money that is paying our builds. And thanks to them, we can build even better products.

Translation

Michael:  Just for my own curiosity, I have a question about the language translation – how deep does it go? Are we talking about not just the interface but also the logs and the documentation? And you mentioned the book – are there any places where the translation doesn’t go?


Igor: All user interface. So, it’s not only end-user facing interface but also administrative interface. There are several thousands of keyboards that are being translated. Thankfully, everyone is happy with the documentation in English that we are providing. So, this is not being translated just for the book. The book was translated to a few languages.

Team

Michael: Okay. I’m curious about how you build the team. What’s the geographic distribution sort of the team at Evolveum? And how do you find people?


Igor: We have many challenges over the years to actually build strong team, but now we are very happy with what we have inside the company. And yeah, there are many, many challenges, but what we are focusing right now on, internally we are using Slovakian language and our market is Czechoslovakia – Czech and Slovakian people.
Internally discussing, if we actually change that inside the company and start
hiring in other geographical locations. But for the time being, we have like 26 people working for us in the company right now. And we are preparing for the next round of hiring. And we will see how it goes. If we start hitting challenges in our market, we are ready to transform and start hiring more internationally.

Competitive Threats / Future?

Michael: What do you think are the competitive threats to Evolveum? Is there anything that keeps you up at night?


Igor: Actually, I have a pretty good sleep. I am happy wherever we are right now. Yeah, there are always challenges that we, as a company, would like to start resolving. Because we help resolve the situation, we have a very stable platform, actually provisioning and connectors are stable. So, we are able to do the basic job, we are also in the Governance.
We can do certifications, we can help get visibility of data, people have access, where and why. And now, we are actually opening new streams – it’s not only Cloud on one front. On the other front, we are experimenting with recommenders for various situations. Then, we also started experimenting with machine learning and so long to bring much more benefit to the community.

Advice For Entrepreneurs

Michael: I think we’re sort of coming to the end. And one question that I ask all my guests is, if they have any advice for new founders. I guess I’d like to add to that, do you think that now is a good time to start an open-source enterprise software company? And if so, what advice would you give to that founder?

Igor:  I would say it’s a great time. I have seen a lot of analysis where open-source products are taking over and actually having a great time. I will tell you it’s a great time to start open-source business. And for us, what was very helping in the past, it was pretty common that everyone was expecting open-source codes for free. But we have very strong boundary with our software – you can download it, you can do whatever you want with the software if you follow the license, which is pretty, I would say, great because it’s Apache license and UPL license. But if you start approaching gaps and would like our assistance, we are very strict that we are not doing services for free.
It was very hard in the early days, but over the time when we became a recognized platform, it improved so much that people are not expecting that anymore. And that’s great.

I would also say that if you compare open source to commercial products, then open source is not free. The expenses for open source are different, like for example, you don’t have to pay for the licenses but you still need to find people to pay to do the implementation and deployment. Someone has to do that operation for the solution. And you still shall pay the support. Personally, I myself wouldn’t go into a production where I’m managing maybe 1,000 or 2,000 Identities and actually don’t pay support contracts. Identity is so important for the business that I wouldn’t use that.

Close

Michael: Well, I’m sorry we didn’t have this conversation earlier because we’ve known each other for so long. But thank you so much for being on the show, Igor. And I’m wishing you the best of luck as always.

Igor: Thank you, Mike.

Credits

Michael: Thanks to the Evolveum and Gluu teams for helping me to pull this episode together. Cool graphics from Kamal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke for Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere. If you liked this episode, don’t forget to tell your friends.
And if you’re interested in open source, especially if you’re based in Europe, you should check out the state of Open Source Conference in London, February 7th, 2023. I’ll be there, and I’m even recording a podcast live at the event.

So, until next, time thanks for listening!

The post Episode 59 – Igor Farinic, Evolveum: Open -Source Software Vendor in the Identity Management and Governance Space first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 16:54
Episode 60 – Robotic Process Automation with Antti Karjalainen, Founder / CEO of RoboCorp https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-60-robotic-process-automation-with-antti-karjalainen-founder-ceo-of-robocorp/ Tue, 31 Jan 2023 16:31:19 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2160 Intro Michael: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 60 with guest, Antti Karjalainen, a co-founder and CEO of RoboCorp. RoboCorp is a vendor in the RPA or Robotic Process Automation software market. It’s a type of software that allows businesses to automate repetitive and routine tasks...

The post Episode 60 – Robotic Process Automation with Antti Karjalainen, Founder / CEO of RoboCorp first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro



Michael: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 60 with guest, Antti Karjalainen, a co-founder and CEO of RoboCorp.

RoboCorp is a vendor in the RPA or Robotic Process Automation software market. It’s a type of software that allows businesses to automate repetitive and routine tasks typically done by humans through the use of software bots or robots. These tasks can include things like data entry or customer service interactions. If you’ve ever gone to a website and a chatbot pops up – that might be powered by RPA.

As you can imagine this software market is growing rapidly as more businesses are looking to automate their processes and improve efficiency. RoboCorp is a newer business than I thought at first, given how thoroughly they’ve established a leadership position in this very competitive market. Antti has a lot of great insights, so without further ado, let’s cut to the interview. Antti, welcome to the Underdogs podcast.

Antti: Thank you, Mike.

Origin

Michael: So, no founder interview is complete unless we hear the origin story. I take it as a young undergraduate student, you probably didn’t predict your career in RPA. So, how did you get into the industry and how did RoboCorp get its activation energy?

Antti: Yeah. I mean, that’s a long path obviously when we talk about these kind of founding stories. It all started with me just by doing software engineering work after graduating. And I ran a small consulting company around software engineering. And with that, we used to do a lot of Q&A test automation with a project called Robot Framework. It is a python-based keyword-driven test automation framework. I got into that community while using it. It is based out of – well, the project came out of Nokia, so that’s why the Finnish roots.

I got into the community, started doing things around the open-source project, hosting events, stuff like that, and then, I bumped into RPA, which is starting to emerge and take off around 2016 and 2017. And I thought immediately that that has a lot of commonalities with the test automation. In test automation, you obviously drive a system to validate it, and in RPA, you drive a system to perform a business process. So, I thought that maybe Robot Framework could become the leading open-source community for RPA and started on that path eventually after my first company got acquired.

So, a few years later, I’m looking at the market and there’s this big competition emerged, raised a bunch of money, started growing really rapidly, and RPA was the fastest growing segment and Enterprise software for like three years in consecutive.

So, I thought that somebody needs to build an open-source solution for that, and I didn’t see any other person having the right connections to do it, so I decided to start on that path myself and that sort of lead into RoboCorp. I felt that I had to do it in a way.

Product

Michael:  What are the products that RoboCorp sells?

Antti: We sell one product, which is the Control Room. That’s the proprietary component in the stack. That’s the orchestration platform as we call it in RPA. That’s how you deploy the bots, manage them, govern them and manage user rights and so forth. So, it’s really a central piece in how RPA works and how the bots actually get to execute work.

And then, we have a bunch of other components in the stack. You know, namely the code open-source stack, which allows you to build a bot and run it. And then, obviously all the automation libraries that enable you to connect to various applications, from browsers to mainframes, to ERP systems. And then, we have the developer tooling on top of that which creates a good developer experience. So, anything really outside of the core control room platform is open source with us.

Low Code Strategy

Michael: One way that RoboCorp has been innovative I think is through the use of Low Code. And why do you think that Low Code is so critical in your market?

Antti: In RPA, you deal with different sorts of developer personas. Some are very technical, come from a developer background, others might come from a accounting background for instance. So, when RPA got popular, it was marketed as something that anyone can really use to build these bots. But then, as it got adopted into the Enterprise, it sort of went into more complex use cases, more mission-critical use cases. So, it became a automation professional domain.

We started out with the automation professional in mind and built this Robot Framework and Python-based tools for them and got initial success with them, but we soon realized that it’s too different for the developer persona to be targeting.

They expected to have a drag-and-drop interface in front of them. So, we started thinking, okay, how can we innovate and create something that’s actually meaningfully different in that space. And so, we built a local layer on top of our open-source stack, which allows you to create a local solution, but it generates code in the back end. So, we call it “Code Native Low-Code”.

So, you work on this drag-and-drop interface, you build the automation from individual steps, which might be like opening browser, clicking elements, etc., and in the backend it’s converting that real-time in the code. And back, if you edit the code, you’ll see it in the local as well.

So, that was just the market expectation, and we wanted to sort of not be an outlier there to be perceived as more difficult than the competition, while in real life it really isn’t.

But coming from a background where RPA developer might not have actually written a line of code, presenting them with a VS code editor is just too jarring of an experience. But I think we balanced it the right way, where we can still keep the both worlds next to each other, low-code and then pro-code, as we call it here.

And it has been a pretty interesting journey to build something that hasn’t been built before that way.

Community

Michael: Can you tell us a little bit about the community? You mentioned you started with an open-source project in Python – were you able to bootstrap that community into the RoboCorp community? And how is it going building that community out?


Antti: The Robot Framework Community is pretty extensive. I think the project gets around 1.5 million downloads a month from Python package index. So, it’s used extensively in end-to-end testing in Q&A. And initially, what we took out of that was all the integrations that had been built over the years.

So, we get to leverage this massive base of all these libraries that integrate into various systems that Robot Framework was used to test, started out building our own tooling. And sometimes, the test automation community doesn’t really overlap with the RPA community, so we had to start building our own community as well. Sometimes they do overlap. We have customers who are now consolidating their test automation engineering, first with the RPA engineering, for instance.

We have customers who are coming into our products because they know Robot Framework already, and so they’re experienced with the tech and have confidence in it. So, to a decree, this overlap in those communities, it feels like we are building these two parallel communities that overlap in parts – it’s like a Venn diagram in a way.

How Low-Code Impacts Onboarding

Michael: One of the areas I feel RoboCorp is doing a really good job is by reducing the friction to onboard people into both your community and also into the commercial engagement with RoboCorp. And I wonder if low-code is maybe a gateway for people who go into the pro-code area. But can you talk a little bit about how that journey works from getting newbies and getting them in to be RPA professionals and customers?

Antti: Yeah. For sure, low-code isn’t a big enabler there. You’re not staring at like a blank screen, but you have all these capabilities listed as actions that you can start dragging on a canvas. So, it’s something that pretty much anyone can start doing, and you don’t have to have an in-depth tutorial or training to be able to do that. So, it’s a big enabler.

And also, by the way, we see the test automation community now starting to leverage the automation studio, the local tool as well. It is definitely excitement – low-code. And for good reasons. I mean, you can frame out some solution that you have in mind in minutes rather than learning the syntax from scratch.

And then, when you want to refine the solution, you can go into the code and start customizing it, maybe building custom Python in the creations, Python keywords and so forth. It is actually something that I prefer to use even with my developer background. If I start a new project, I start it with the low-code tools frame it out, get the structure right, and then might go in the VS code and I finish it up. But it’s such a big step up in the ease of getting started that you don’t really need to install Python, bunch of libraries, figure out your Dev environment, all of that – that just goes away. That just gets easy, but both sides of the community, pro-code people and the local enthusiasts like to use it.

Cloud Native Impact

Michael: So, one last technology question. Cloud Native has been a really – I mean, for me at least, it’s felt like a monumental shift in sort of how the customers deploy and operate. And I’m wondering if you’ve seen something similar in the RPA market, where Cloud Native has impacted or open new opportunities for delivery?

Antti: Yeah, definitely that’s a big part of what we do. The Control Room itself that the orchestration platform does, some Cloud Native SaaS solution – that’s something that you can just few minutes click into it and get an account going. That’s a great way to deploy RPA across a number of organizations, a number of different companies if you are a service provider, for instance. Building obvious solutions, you sort of have this single pane of glass that you can operate across.

Now, with RPA is also a double-edged sword. It sort of comes with benefits and the negatives as well. RPA is typically something that you do with applications that might be inside corporate firewalls, inside private Cloud environment. So, the bots actually need to operate typically in on-prem environments. And still, we use a Cloud Native solution to deploy them. And there’s a lot of architecture and engineering questions that we had to solve to make it as secure and robust as possible, to make it happen and be seamless for even the largest Enterprises to be able to adopt it.

Obviously, the benefit is that you get a single version deployment, you don’t have to go through installing a lot of infrastructure to get it started. You don’t have to update versions, you don’t have to maintain databases and so forth, but I think, especially with RPA, since it’s dealing with quite sensitive business processes typically, it deals with sensitive data as well user information, healthcare information, financial information, the security questions around that information are significant, and also compliance. So, that’s one key part of how we architected the Cloud Native products from the beginning, to be able to service on-premise use-cases.

Customers

Michael:  Who are the customers of RoboCorp today?

Antti: We serve a number of different types of customers. First, starting with the Enterprise, we have a number of large Fortune 500s and Global 2000s in the customer base. Some of the public references are companies like Emerson Electric, Ally Financial in the US, and there’s a lot of Enterprise customers that are still not public referenceable. But then, additionally, we have a large base of implementation partners – they have different business models, so they might offer a managed service on top of RoboCorp, where they build business process automation and deploy that across customers. It might be healthcare specific automations, it might be insurance – really any vertical, you name it – and then, there’s the system that created community who offer services on and around RPA.

We cover from mid-market customer base, in broad range of verticals and geographies and all the way to the highest Enterprise tears.

Segmentation

Michael: It’s interesting to hear you say that you had partners who are maybe developing business specific vertical solution and then marketing them – is that a strategy for segmentation or are you trying to identify, my guess, markets that you can deliver business value into and partners who can deliver that?

Antti: Really, it boils down to direct Enterprise customers, and we do get some mid-market customers that are good with us. But then, the partner strategy is really in the core of the company. The opportunity with RPA is so vast, so you can basically imagine any kind of company and they will have use cases for RPA. So, it comes down to whether the customer has a team of their own around business process automation. They might be using API-based solutions, all kinds of intelligence document processing, and together with RPA, to build end-to-end solutions inside a corporation.

Or then, when we go into the mid-market and below, it becomes a use-case driven segment. So, that’s where you need to know the specific ins and outs of, let’s say, mortgage origination. Their partners are better off to serve their own sort of expertise area. It is basically we sell directly to sort of teams inside Enterprise, and then, we have the partner ecosystem to serve on a use-case basis. That’s how we think about it.

Partners

Michael: Are these partners globally distributed?

Antti: Yes, definitely. We basically have partners across all the continents. It is really distributed right now, and there’s different categories of partners as well. Some of them might offer business process outsourcing services, some of them are automation pure-play vendors as we call them. So, they specifically focus on automation services. And then, they are the big force, the accounting companies, so they will typically also deploy RPA with their customer base.

It’s really wide range of different kinds of partners. And within that base, there’s different kinds of business models that they deploy. Everything from reselling into consulting, into system integrator work, into managed services.

Team

Pricing

Michael: Is the RoboCorp team similarly globally distributed?

Antti: Oh, yeah, for sure. We are right now, I think, in nine different countries, about 50 or so people at the moment, adding headcount right now. But we are fully remote company and we’ve been like that from the beginning. So, engineering, typically, is around Europe. And we do have a big base in Finland for engineering, but it is also distributed as a product engineering design. And then, our partner operations are right now led from Europe, and then, the broader go-to-market team is in the U.S. so, sales marketing customer success.

Michael: I always warn founders about how hard pricing is. There are a number of strategies to price I saw in the RPA market – what is a RoboCorp strategy and how long did it take you to get there? Did you get it right the first time and where are you today?

Antti: Oh, man. I mean, pricing is really difficult, it goes across everything really. When I got started with RoboCorp, I started kind of building the vision for the company. Now, we knew that we wanted to be the open-source standard for RPA for sure. We wanted to innovate around how do you build bots, how do you operate and manage them at scale, deploy them at scale, all of that stuff, make it more robust and resilient and faster, all of the technical attributes that you want to have for solution like this.

But then, the second big innovation there was around pricing itself and the business model. RPA traditionally has been really complex in license, and you can imagine this like a large Enterprise pricing scheme, every item has their own price tag, starting from a developer license to a test license, to an orchestrator, to a bot license, to an attended bot license, and you name it.

We wanted to make it really simple. We sort of went back to first principles and started thinking about, “Okay, what is the best proxy for value in RPA?” Traditional RPA will be pricing bot licenses.

So, essentially, you have a bot license that allows you to run one bot at a time. If you want to run two bots at a time, you purchase another license or so forth. And if the bot isn’t doing anything, you are still paying for the license. We thought that the better capture for value is going to be around consumption, and namely the working time of the bot. So, whenever your bot is working, you’re producing value, and so that’s the proxy.

We were the first one to build a consumption-based pricing model. And we did it from the beginning and started building the whole platform with that in mind, that we wanted to get rid of the concept of a bot license and go to consumption. And that still works, people love it. And they like the sort of flexibility of it, they don’t need to know how many licenses they need to purchase in advance. People will have peak demand loads at the end of the month or end of the year, end of the quarter, they will run reports that the bots will do. And those can demand hundreds of these bots working at the same time.

So, it really allows them to think of the processes from the best engineering perspective rather than thinking from a licensing perspective. That was my good starting point, but then comes all the details, like all the small details. Okay, you’re running a bot that needs to work 24/7 with a minute best price that becomes really expensive. So, we needed to add billing caps on a process-by-process level to cap the value at some point.

You want to do parallel execution, these kind of things – there’s different ways to really make it work. When you go into the Enterprise, you get into these conversations of, you know, we are ramping up, we have all these plans for RoboCorp, but we don’t know how much we’re actually going to consume.

If they’re coming from a legacy RPA platform, we are typically two to three times faster to execute, but they really cannot know in advance. So, we need to make provisions for first year, onboarding, ramp up, all that stuff. So, pricing is really, really difficult even though we try to come up with the most simple and elegant pricing scheme possible. And it’s still an ongoing process – we are actually redoing some of the pricing right now as we speak.

Value Prop Evolution

Michael: From the day you started, you had a certain value proposition in mind. And what are the most important parts of that value proposition today that maybe differ from where you originally started?

Antti: You know, we thought out that we will have this more of a bottom-up approach to RPA, where you can simply just download tools, explore them, build something, and then get it into use, into production as a self-service motion. And we thought that that would take us into a growth path.

So, we built the product in a way which allows you to do like full self-service, but then, over time, we realized that in RPA, you typically have a different buyer than the technical user is. And the buyer is very non-technical. So, we needed to start adding a lot of this sort of top-down aspect to the product itself and into the selling motion itself.

You know, in the recent years, I realized aspects of the value prop that we even didn’t fully understand ourselves, things around being able to store the bot code in GitLab and GitHub and user version control, now, the typical low-code solution doesn’t do that for you – it is all a proprietary XML-based model that you operate with, so that really isn’t a facilitate versioning.

When we went in first time and did like larger financial institutions, they told us that, “Hey, we chose you for one reason: because we can actually audit the bots, we can put code review processes around these bots.” And not for the reason of validating that the code is good quality, but actually, validating that the digital worker doesn’t go rogue, doesn’t do things it wasn’t intended to do.

So, the fact that we can do proper version control actually meant proper governance and controls and compliance for our customers – that was a new thing that we discovered some time ago. As we’ve gone into the Enterprise, and we got really good success stories there, things like reusable components across the bots, so you can share code between the bots and build asset libraries that you can leverage in future bots that you build. You don’t need to re-implement all the functionality again and again, like you would do in a more traditional local platform. You know, these things have become more and more valuable over time to ask on the customers.

Advice For Open-Source Entrepreneurs

Michael: I guess, as we tie this interview up, I wanted to get your thoughts on the open-source industry maybe more head large. As a successful founder, what do you think are some of the challenges that other entrepreneurs who want to use open source as part of their business model are facing today?

Antti: Yeah, that’s an interesting question. Now, open source does have many different kinds of business models around it, I think. First of all, understanding what you can do around whether it’s an open core model, whether it’s a support model, or Cloud-enabled model. That’s the choice that you have to make kind of early on as you start building.

Sometimes, open source can be a one-way door. You put something out there in the public domain, you don’t get it back. So, realizing that and being mindful of what you actually put in the open-source side of your business – what’s proprietary, how do you monetize, how do you do that, it’s an important decision. And you know, we’ve seen companies in the last decade or so, going to open source and potentially give out too much of the value prop.

I think Docker has been a good example of that. Now, they’ve actually turned around and doing great, but for a while, insiders I’ve heard saying that we gave out too much, that we didn’t capture the value. So, being mindful of what the customer wants to pay and trying to make it meaningful. You don’t want to build artificial gates.

For instance, whenever somebody’s using our purely open-source stack in a large Enterprise, we’re super happy about it because that’s still using us instead of the competition.

I encourage everyone to use RoboCorp even though you wouldn’t be paying for us – that’s all-net positive to us – but just being kind of mindful of where are the gates around paid, what the value is that you’re delivering. It might be things that are sort of not obvious for technical people, like myself, where it’s around governance and compliance, which is a huge hassle for a larger Enterprise customer.

So, understanding what the intended buyer is willing to pay for is one key part of it. And second is, is there really a open-source flywheel that you can leverage, is there a community building on top of your product committing directly to your product, are you willing to take in those contributions as they come in, how do you control a community roadmap for instance? Or is it more like building a component that then gets integrated into other open-source – I mean, there’s so many different pathways that you can explore and kind of plan for us as you go forward.

Closing

Michael: Antti, thank you so much for sharing these thoughts with our audience, and I wish you guys the best of luck in the future.

Antti: Thank you. It was great being here.

Michael: Thanks to RoboCorp for reaching out and the Gluu team for helping me pull this episode together. Cool graphics from Kamal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.

If you’re interested in open source, especially if you are based in Europe, you should check out the State of Open Source Conference in London, February 7th and 8th – I’ll be there. I’m even recording a podcast live at the event.

So, until next time, this is Mike Schwartz. You are listening to Open Source Underdogs. Thanks for listening.

The post Episode 60 – Robotic Process Automation with Antti Karjalainen, Founder / CEO of RoboCorp first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 25:04
Episode 58: Cloud Infrastructure Automation Platform with Armon Dadgar, Co-Founder & CTO of HashiCorp https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-58-cloud-infrastructure-automation-platform-with-armon-dadgar-co-founder-cto-of-hashicorp/ Wed, 28 Sep 2022 16:38:22 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2120 Intro Michael: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 58, an interview with Armon Dadgar, Co-Founder and CTO of HashiCorp, the company behind the Uber successful open-source projects Terraform and Vault. In addition to writing one of the pillars of cloud infrastructure with over 100 million...

The post Episode 58: Cloud Infrastructure Automation Platform with Armon Dadgar, Co-Founder & CTO of HashiCorp first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro


Michael: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 58, an interview with Armon Dadgar, Co-Founder and CTO of HashiCorp, the company behind the Uber successful open-source projects Terraform and Vault.

In addition to writing one of the pillars of cloud infrastructure with over 100 million downloads, HashiCorp IPO-ed in December of 2021, with over 250 million in trailing 12-months revenue.

So, without further ado, let’s just cut to the interview with Armon, and let him tell you about how HashiCorp built this amazing business. Armon, thank you so much for joining the podcast today.

Armon: Yeah. Thank you, Mike, pleasure to be here.

Common Theme Of Products

Michael: HashiCorp has a number of great products, and we could probably fill three thirty-minute podcasts just talking about Terraform, Vault and Consul, but at a high level, what’s a common theme of business problems that these products solve and how do they fit together?

Armon: All of them are coming motivated ultimately by the same problem, which is, how do we actually build modern applications in a cloud environment. It sounds like a simple statement, but once you double-click into that, there’s a reason we have so many products. It’s really looking at, “Hey, if we think about what it means to build a modern cloud application, we want it to be automated in the delivery end-to-end, and we want to bake in security-by-default. We’re sort of changing our application architectures to be much more sort of microservice or smaller units rather than they become monolithic applications.

And so, once you sort of bring all those requirements and you end up with a whole bunch of challenges around, how do I provision that infrastructure, how do I secure it, how do I connect it all together, how do I deploy and manage the runtime of those applications. So, collectively, that ends up being the focus of our broader portfolio.

What Is Commercial?

Michael: I was reading the S-1, there’s a great sentence that describes open-core where it says, “We sell proprietary commercial software that builds on our open-source products with additional enterprise capabilities.” What are some of the examples of those enterprise capabilities?

Armon: Sure. I’ll just pick one product to make it a little bit easier. If we’re talking about our Vault product, as an example, you know, the open-source version really designed around kind of a single-data center, single-deployment use case, if we look at the enterprise features, there is a whole class of them just based around things like multi-data center.

If I want to do replication of my data across multiple data centers, if I want to be able to do a horizontal scale out from just one active node to multiple active nodes and do a sort of a horizontal scaling, if I want to do a disaster recovery sort of a replication, where I have a different hot/cold set up effectively, where I have our hot/warm I should call it, and have a different site that I can flip over for disaster recovery purposes. It’s all of those different kind of capabilities for us, sort of classified enterprise, but you have to have a license too. And that’s why we sort of describe that assignment as open-core approach.

License Enforcement

Michael: With open-source software customers get used to deploying it without any license enforcement mechanism, are you using license enforcement for the enterprise distribution? If you are, how’s that going?

Armon: Yeah. The enterprise binaries for us do require a license. We’ve tried to make it super easy so that operationally it’s not a big lift, as people go from open-source enterprise. So, effectively, you swapped open-source binary for enterprise binary – it’s configured the same operates the same.

And then, alongside the binary, you basically put the license file there. And then, the enterprise version autoloads the file. So, it’s really meant to be a very low lift in terms of doing the transition between them, but we do have a license file and it doesn’t force some level of what’s the term of your license, what’s the maximum number of entitlements. And that’s baked into the license.

Tension Between Free and Commercial?

Michael: Is there ever any tension in the product team when you think of a new feature about whether there should be an open-source feature or a commercial future?

Armon: Occasionally, I think one of the things we did early on, HashiCorp history was to articulate the framework on how do we think about what is open source, first what isn’t. And so, for us, the delineation has always been “if it’s a feature that enables our technical practitioner”, meaning, you’re the end-user of Terraform or Vault. And this feature is kind of core to that workflow of the problem you’re trying to solve with the product. Then, it really should be open source. The tool shouldn’t feel like crippled in any sense to the end-user. So, whether you’re managing one VM or a million VMs, great, it’s not scale limited, or crippled in any way.

Then, on the other side, we have a set of what we call organizational complexity, where it’s really not a feature of an individual user needs. It’s an artifact of running it in a larger organization.

And a large organization cares about things like single sign-on, role-based access control, 2FA, audit logs, security and compliance. Those are not things any individual user would care about, it’s only in the context of an organization that you run into those requirements or those challenges. So, those more cleanly fall into what we would consider enterprise capabilities.

Because we have this framework, by and large most features are pretty clear – it kind of falls into one bucket or the other. Every once in a while, you sort of get that tension of a feature, where it’s not entirely obvious which bucket it should go into, then, it turns into a bit more of a discussion. But for the most part it’s usually clear-cut.

Accounting For Support V. License

Michael: I was looking at HashiCorp FQ, and I noticed that you break out revenues by category and support was roughly three-quarters of the revenue. And I’m wondering if you have customers who are using enterprise features? Is there something about the support subscription that is easier to mark it, or why is that?

Armon: Yeah. It’s a super common misconception when people look at our public filing. And this has to do with sort of the vagarities of 606 accounting rules. So, certainly I’m not an accountant, but at a high level effectively, we sell one product. We sell an enterprise subscription to our software. That has support included. We do not sell support separately. You can’t buy an open-source only support license from us.

So, the disaggregation that you see between a license and support line, whether it’s on our 10-Q or 10Ks or S1, is purely a sort of accounting artifact forced by 606 rules. We’re forced to make some determination on what’s considered license and what’s considered support. And that assessment is actually done by a third party, by PWC for us. So, it’s entirely strange accounting artifact. You actually have to add those two-line items together, because, effectively, we only sell one thing, which is an enterprise skew, and those two-line items are combined.

Market Segmentation

Michael: You know, infrastructure product, that’s very horizontal and has practically universal appeal. It can be both a blessing and a curse, because when your product appeals to everyone, who do you actually market to or sell it to?  Does HashiCorp segment the market, and if you do, does that lead to any schizophrenia for the marketing teams or any of the other teams?

Armon: This is, I think, in some sense the best question. And I think if I could know what I know now and go back to founding HashiCorp again, the most valuable lesson I think I’ve learned — if I go back to early HashiCorp, and you ask me the exact same question, I would have said, “No. We sell to everybody. Everybody is our customer.” What we learned is that that’s a mistake. If you say everyone’s your customers, kind of the same as a nobody’s your customer, frankly.

Because the buying motions, what people want, how you would actually build a go-to-market team, are completely different between saying “I care about the Global 2000.”, the world’s largest enterprises, and “I care about the long tail of SMP.” We have almost nothing in common, frankly, from a go-to-market perspective. So, I think early on, we tried to do both. I think we quickly realized that that doesn’t make any sense.

So, it was really a kind of early 2016 that we made the decision to say, “You know what, we’re going to focus on enterprise as our initial segment.” So, we did split the market and we effectively said, “It’s the world’s Global 2000 top organizations. That’s who we care about from a commercial perspective.” Because that’s going to then tailor what are the products for building, what does our pricing and packaging look like, who are we hiring for a sales and marketing teams. And so, that was roughly our focus from call it 2016 until late 2020, early 2021, when we started actually building a separate commercial focus team to go look at that long tail.

And I think what I tell a lot of founders that I advise is, “Yes, in the fullness of time, you can do both.” Yeah, today HashiCorp does both, but we’re also at over 400 million in revenue. So, it’s a different place to be versus when you’re at zero. You don’t have the people, you don’t have the resources to be able to focus on both those segments at the same time.

And realistically, if you look at even companies like Datadog, at the time of their S-1, they were almost entirely focused of the long tail of SMB. They had very little enterprise customers.

If you look at the number of customers paying over 100,000 dollars is relatively very low. And it was really only post-IPO that they built out a team to go focus on that enterprise global segment. I think there’s an important lesson in there, which is, whether it’s Datadog focused on SMB first, up till their IPO or HashiCorp, where we focus on enterprise up to our IPO. You know, it’s very hard as a startup to do both of those at the same time.

Vertical Segmentation

Michael: Even enterprise is a broad market. I’ve noticed a lot of zero trust marketing. Do you break out even the enterprise segment a little bit more?

Armon: Yeah. Even with an enterprise, we think about it across sort of a — to some extent both a regional split as well as a vertical split. So, by and large, our business today is 85% North America.

We have obviously a small footprint in Europe, and an even smaller footprint in Asia, but we’re very North America heavy. And then, relatively light footprint in certain verticals. We’re over I think certainly the verticals that are more called cloud forward is where we focus.

So, in the early days that was Financial Services, Media, HITEX. Overtime, Retail and Manufacturing became a part of that. Now, I think you have some of the laggards, which is probably energy, aerospace, defense, public sector to an extent. So, some of those I think are just starting their cloud journey versus maybe the financial folks who started it back in 2016.

Distribution Channels

Michael: A lot of times, I asked a question about distribution channels, but HashiCorp has such a dominant position in open source. I almost have to ask it in the opposite way and say, are there any distribution channels other than open source that really are important to you?

Armon: Probably not, to be honest. Probably not. And I think the majority of our business — certainly it starts with open source, but I tell you, our business is by and large, a direct business, meaning, we don’t really go through channels, or partner to a large or meaningful extent.

And I think that’s actually been a shift in buying pattern with cloud. I think a lot of our customers don’t want to be kind of intermediated. They prefer to have a direct relationship with their vendor. And I think that’s been sort of brought about by cloud to a large extent.

Monetization Strategy

Michael: A lot of companies in the open-source space struggle to find the right monetization strategy, especially to land and expand. Did you get it right the first time or were there some important pivots along the way?

Armon: Oh, man, I don’t think we got anything right the first time. In 2015, 2016 is when we really started to do a soul search for what would the commercial sort of nature of HashiCorp be, and at the time, we have to kind of go back.

There was really no examples of successful open-source companies outside of RedHat. I mean, to a meaningful extent. Everybody else, we were sort of in the same cohort along with Mongo, and GitLab, and Confluent and everybody else. So, we’re all kind of figuring it out. Our view is that there’s only so many pads. Obviously, one option was support and services model. More like a RedHat. And I think the challenge there is, outside of RedHat, it was hard to see that scale.

I think RedHat had the uniqueness of the sheer scale of the operating system market kind of dwarfs everything else. So, it was not clear that you could really make that model work. Then, there is obviously open core. And I think there was a question of like, “Would that alienate the open-source community?” That is going to create sort of too much tension with the open-source model. So, it wasn’t obvious if that would work.

You could go with a SaaS model, but again, this is 2015, and if you’re thinking enterprise is your target customer or they weren’t necessarily ready for SaaS, you know, even in 2022, many of our enterprise customers are not ready for our cloud-hosted service.

So, depending on where you are in the stack, your customers have either more or less willingness for a cloud managed service. And I think the fourth option we saw was some of these exotic licensing models. And again, we felt like is that high risk of alienating your open-source community and really, most businesses want to entertain something like that – it’s kind of an exotic approach. So, we kind of looked at those four. And for us, and where we were in the kind of space of the market, we said, “You know what? Open core feels right to us.” But we did dabble with these different options, we did build early SaaS.

So, actually, for people who’ve been following HashiCorp for a long time, they might remember we had an Atlas product, which was sort of a hosted platform-as-a-service built around our products. We ended up sunsetting that when we decided to focus on enterprise, because it was misaligned to our target customer. So, we tried to SaaS, we actually sold about – in the early days – we sold support around open source, so we did some amount of support and services.
In some sense, we played with all of the different models except for the exotic licensing, but ultimately decided that open core made the most sense for us.

Pricing Strategy

Michael: Sometimes I joke with people that when you open a pizzeria, you know you’re going to sell by the slice or by the pie, and you kind of know what price, but for something as new as the cloud, all of our previous assumptions were hard to use. Like, per CPU. Well, you are spooling up instances dynamically. So, how did you figure out what was the right unit or what was the right sort of way to measure usage in your open-core platform??

Armon: Oh, man, there’s an underlying assumption that we’ve ever figured it out in there. I think pricing and packaging is such an interesting thing. Because there’s always trade-offs with it. No matter what metric you pick, users will find a way to sort of game it. It always gamifies in some way or another. I think it’s almost finding the least bad is how I think about it. They all have weird trade-offs.

I think with each of our products, we’ve sort of gone through multiple iterations of, is it licensed by the number of users, is it licensed by the number of applications, is it licensed by the number of resources under management. Like, CPUs might be a good example. I think we’ve licensed by the number of requests you make, like API request.

I think we’ve sort of played with all of these. Ultimately, I think, if we pull it back to sort of what are the philosophical goals, I think what we want to achieve is a few things: one is, you want a pricing model that scales with the value our customers are getting out of it. Meaning, I don’t want if my customer 10x-s their usage of it but my licensing stays flat. Otherwise, it’s not a fair exchange of value.

Two, you want the license estimation to be relatively straightforward for your customer. Meaning, when you’re going through an enterprise sales cycle, you don’t want them to have to guess, “Hey, how many API requests do you make within a 200-millisecond bucket on this time, on Tuesday, with your peak traffic??” That’s a very difficult thing for a customer to try and estimate in any meaningful way, to be able to have a sales conversation.

So, those kind of pricing metrics tend to be bad because they introduced a lot of friction to the deal, versus if you said, “Hey, how many users do you think you’re going to have on this?” “Or how many applications do you think would be using this?” That’s a much easier thing for the customer to actually go estimate.

I think once you start to say, okay, we want something that scales roughly linearly with the customers value they’re getting out of it, and we want it to be something that is reasonable for them to be able to guesstimate, as part of a sales cycle, and that they feel is a fair trade of value, those end up being kind of the guiding philosophy. And then, I think “per product” ends up being a slightly different answer for us just because we have a broad portfolio.

MPL License

Michael: I was looking at the Terraform, GitHub – I read the license. I saw that you, actually, personally checked in the license in 2014. And it’s a Mozilla public license 2.0, and it hasn’t changed since 2014. So, I’m wondering if you could share what are some of the reasons you chose that license and how’s it working out?

Armon: Yeah. It’s a great question, and we often get questions about it. So, in some sense, our goal was, we always wanted something super, super liberal rights. Our initial instinct was actually to use like the MIT or BSD licenses. Something that’s basically kind of a “do whatever you want, no warranty is attached.”

Back in 2013/14, we talked to our lawyers, we’re like, “Hey, we want something super open, something that no customer is going to have an issue adopting with.” Because they are going to feel like there’s some ickiness to the license. And we feel like BSD and MIT are the way to go. And the advice we got was, “Those are good licenses. Nobody has an issue with them. BUT, from a legal perspective, they’re viewed as a bit ambiguous.”

Meaning they’re not super clear on does this grant access to trademarks. For example, the Terraform name is trademark. Are we granting access to that trademark – yes or no? We have several patents around some of our products. Are we granting access to those patterns – yes or no?

So, they felt like MIT is a very good but maybe overvague. Where MPO is just as liberal, you can do whatever you want, but it’s slightly more explicit that it’s not granting you license to trademarks, or patents, or any of these other things. It’s just a slightly more explicit license but equally liberal. And so, we’re like, “Great! That fits our needs sort of perfectly.”

I think, in retrospect, the piece that’s still unclear about MPO is some of the community contribution. If you’re contributing code to what are the terms and conditions under which you’re doing it.

So, in the meantime, several years after 2014, we introduced a Contributor License Agreements – anyone who contributes code to any of the HashiCorp projects is required to sign a CLA. And the point of that is just to create that legal concept around, “Hey, you agree that if you’re contributing this code, you’re doing it under the NPL license to this project.” Because it’s not explicit enough, I guess, in the sort of existing NPL and existing workflow.

I think, actually, Apache2, in retrospect, is probably what we would have used just because it’s slightly more explicit. It has the contributor license agreement, a sort of like baked into it, and it’s a very, very well understood and well accepted license. So, we probably would have been slightly differently, but MPL has worked out fine for us.

New Products Are Open Source Too?

Michael: You’ve done your part for open source. No one can deny that. So, my question is, what about new products? Now that you’re launching new products, is there are sort of a discussion about whether or not to make these new products open source?

Armon: Yeah. I think obviously our quarterly products -Terraform, Vault, Nomad, Packer, etc. were all kind of — the era was kind of 2013 to 2015/16 is when we introduced the kind of core portfolio of six products. But I think, even if you look at our new products, the ones we introduced in 2020, Waypoint and Boundary been kind of the two, big new open-source projects, they followed in the same footsteps. They’re both MPL, they’re both open-source from day one, they’re both going to follow an open-core sort of trajectory in terms of how we monetize them.

And I think, for us, we talked about this in the S-1, there’s sort of this core flywheel of our business, which is really about sort of winning the practitioner heart and minds with open source. And there is the foundation of how we then build an ecosystem around the tooling, which, then, is how we go and win the enterprise customers.

I think that core motion hasn’t really changed for us, and it really starts an open source. There hasn’t really been a change in our strategy. And sort of in that sense, it’s kind of more of the same, even though our newer products are five, six years after our initial tranche of product.

When Does Open Source Make Sense?

Michael: So, let’s say entrepreneur walks up to you at a party and he says, “I’m working on this piece of software, should I open-source it?” What do you say?

Armon: “Oh, that’s a good question. I actually think the answer is, it depends. And I think what it depends on is, where do you sit in the value chain. And what I mean by that is, I think infrastructure and developer tooling in particular benefits quite a bit from open source.

Because I think that is an area where people want to be able to customize that you’re selling to a highly technical audience. If you think about the people who are the buyers and users of our tools, they’re highly technical, they are Dev teams themselves. You benefit from that effect because they want to be able to customize and contribute back, etc.

Now, when I look at some of these other projects, where we’re going to go creative, an alternative to whatever, Facebook or Instagram, and it’s going to be open source, your target user is my mom. Like, my mom is not going to contribute back to that project. She might be an end-user of it if you’re successful, but she’s not going to contribute. She doesn’t know what GitHub is.

In that sense, would you benefit at all from it being open-source? Maybe, to the extent there’s a community of people who want to work on your company for free and their spare time, sure. But I think in practice, the answer is no, probably no real benefit to that.

I think that it varies quite a bit on who is your customer, what’s the vertical, where do you sit in the value chain. I think the closer you get to developers as your end-user and your target audience, then I think the more you benefit from open source.

Governance?

Michael: Has HashiCorp ever considered moving to a more democratic governance framework? Right now, it seems like most PC back software companies that are achieving high growth have very little desire to give up any control over the product or the future of the product, but there is something to be said for having a governance process, with the ecosystem and the community sort of gets a say. Would that ever be considered?

Armon: Yeah, that’s a great question. I think we’ve considered, and certainly I think there’s a number of great foundations, whether it’s Apache or Linux Foundation or CN/CF, there’s a number of these larger kind of foundation vehicles that you could join. Practically speaking, we’ve never considered it. And I think it comes back to number of reasons. For us, it’s always been that we’ve wanted to kind of have tight control over the destiny of the projects. That’s always been super important to us. There’s always been a reluctance for us to kind of move away, if you will, from the benevolent dictator for life model that I think has served us relatively well.

Tao Of HashiCorp

Michael: I saw Tao of HashiCorp in your S-1, and I was wondering if it’s the first time that the word Tao has ever been used in S-1? And can you tell me a little bit what is the Tao of HashiCorp?

Armon: Sure. We published this document a long, long time ago. I think back in 2013 when we first started the company. And I think what we wanted to do was make really explicit what were the principles that we think about infrastructure management has.

Some of this probably sounds stupid in 2022, but we have to remember the state of DevOps tooling, as we call it today, was very different back in 2013. So, for us, it was a bit of a declarative statement of principles where we said, “Hey, we think everything should be driven by infrastructure as code, for example.” We think everything should be designed around the idea of sort of microservice architectures at the time.

It’s a bit more technical jargon around communicating sequential processes, but effectively, the idea of sort of network agent model with API driven interfaces. And so on and so forth. There’s a number of principles that we sort of outline in there, where immutability is actually a good example, where we talked about kind of immutability.

Today, a lot of these things seem almost obvious. You’re like, “Yeah, things like infrastructure as code obviously, and immutability.” In 2013, none of those things were obvious. Nobody did infrastructure as code. Like, people point and click on the Amazon console. Nobody did immutability.

This was the heyday of Chef, and Puppet, and CFEngine, and people ran config management in production. So, I think a lot of the principles of the time were very contrarian, but we wanted to be very upfront on, “Here’s our views on how infrastructure should be done well at scale, in a disciplined way.”

And by the way, these are the principles around which we’re building our products. So, in some sense, it was meant to be a design ethos for the products themselves. I think people often comment that even other very different products in our portfolio – they all have a common look/feel ethos, and that’s sort of not accidental. They’re all built around the same ethos that we sort of outlined.

Ecosystem

Michael: I’m interested in the ecosystem. I’ve seen for some open-source companies, like, take for example Automatic, the company behind WordPress, that the ecosystem really can be critical. Can you talk a little bit about how the ecosystems evolve and who are some of the most important ecosystem partners, and what open-source companies can do to sort of design ecosystem development into their business model?

Armon: I think actually first ecosystem is super important. I think you know going back to that kind of flywheel we talked about in the S-1, piece one was when the practitioner, piece two was, standardized the ecosystem. And I think every year, internally, when we articulate our company goals, those are our three North Stars. It’s when the practitioner standardized the ecosystem enabled the customer. And so, all of our goals actually derived from those three North Stars on an annual basis.

It’s something that we spent a lot of time thinking about. And I think it decomposes into number of different areas. One is, to your point, from a product architecture perspective, what can we do to encourage it. And I think something we were very deliberate on with our products is this notion of a core plus plug-in model.

If I take Terraform for example, there’s the Terraform core, which is the main engine that does the graph processing, the workflow, all that fun stuff. And then, we have a very well-defined plug-in model with an open-source SDK that allows anybody to basically create their own Terraform provider. And a few hundred lines of code, you can integrate it with pretty much any API you can think of. So, that plug-in model then enables any one of our community members, anyone of our technology partners to go create an integration with Terraform.

Same sort of a thing with Vault, it has a core engine, and then, it has this plug-in ecosystem that allows you to create a plug-in for authentication or plug-in for dynamic secret management, or database credential rotation, etc. And these are all well-defined plug-in interfaces.

So, that is a product architectural decision, where we want to make it simple to create these plug-ins, and kind of keep them a little bit arm’s length from the core, so that you can come in and write this without knowing how Terraform is. You don’t have to be an expert on the Terraform codebase to go write one of these plug-ins. Same with Vault.

Then, on the other side, very early in the company’s history, we invested in a technical alliances function. So, the goal of that team was to go and do exactly standardize the ecosystem. It was tied to that North Star, which is, “Hey, go talk to the critical technology partners, and encourage them, and help them to hold their hand on doing those technical integrations with our products and building that ecosystem around us.” So, that was a very deliberate focus of that team, and we still have a large technical alliances team that does that.

And the third part of your question is then, who are the folks that we really think about as influential. I mean, it goes without saying, the hyperscalers, given the space we are in, so we spent a lot of time with Amazon, Microsoft, Google, Alibaba Huawei, you know, the hyperscalers that you would expect.

And then, beyond that, it’s a very large ecosystem of probably 200, 300 technology partners, obviously not all of them equally important. But, you know, if you think about infrastructure as code, great, how do I have tight integration with all of the version control and CI vendors. Let’s get GitHub, GitLab, Circle CI, Atlassian, etc., who are the key people in that space. And then, for our runtime products, you care about observability.

Okay, so who are the people there? New Relic and Datadog, you know, AppDynamics, and so on and so forth, Splunk, Sumo Logic. I think in each of those categories, where we know our customers are going to want critical integrations, there’s probably the top three to five vendors that account for the majority of that market.

And so, you really want to go spend time with all of those vendors to make sure, great, no matter what product of ours you’re adopting, the observability integrations are already there, the authentication integrations are already there. The version control integrations are already there. You add all those things up, and you end up with a lot of partners that you spend time with.

Challenges For Open-Source Companies

Michael: We’re getting to the end, and I want to zoom out a little bit. What do you think are some of the biggest challenges facing open-source startups today?

Armon: I think one of the biggest challenges of the open-source landscape has shifted a lot. And what I mean by that is, when we started with HashiCorp there, the “incumbents”, if you will, were all proprietary commercial software vendors. And I think there’s a truism when people talk about startups, like the challenge of a startup is always, as a startup, you need to find distribution faster than the incumbent can copy your innovation. And that’s always been true. Because the incumbent, by definition, is going to have way larger distribution than you will. But you are innovating them on some dimension. Naturally, it starts going to be more agile. That’s always been the race.

I think when I look at early days of HashiCorp, the innovation for us was not just on the product. It was that hey, we can get a massive distribution advantage through open source by going direct to our end-users and getting that virality of sort of use. Obviously, there’s always a cat and mouse between startups and the incumbents. And I think the incumbents, to a large extent, have figured out that that asymmetry exists with open-source.

So, whether you’re competing with Microsoft, or VMware, or whoever it is that in your category is your incumbent, they, by and large, figured out that this asymmetry is this. And I think many of them have worked to neutralize that asymmetry. And whether that’s by them embracing open source in some sense. Take a look at the platinum sponsors of the CN/CF, you might notice something – none of them are startups, they’re all the incumbents of sort of the old world.

Because they’ve all figured out that they’re exposed to that sort of asymmetry, and so, how did they close some of those gaps. I do think it’s changed the game a little bit because I think that challenge is now how do you get that distributional advantage, without sort of allowing the incumbents to copy the innovation. I think that’s a real challenge. And I do think it requires a different level of creativity. And I think to a large extent, it’s about shifting a little bit of some of that two more of these cloud services. I look at folks like Databricks and like what are they doing really well.

Yes, it’s open source at its heart, but that’s really not their distribution channel. Their distribution is actually much more power through their ease of use of their SaaS and having sort of a freemium product LED growth model on top of the open source. And I think that’s very different than the HashiCorp approach, circa 2015.
I do think there’s this constant evolution and cat and mouse. And I do think, to a large extent, the incumbents have become aware of that asymmetry.

Advice For Entrepreneurs

Michael: So, personally, startups are an emotional rollercoaster, especially tech startups – do you have any closing advice for entrepreneurs who are just starting on that journey?

Armon: Oh, yeah. It is a roller-coaster is an understatement. Roller-coasters tend only to last a few minutes, these last a decade plus. It’s a hard question. I think the biggest thing is, make sure you’re truly passionate about the space, because there is going to be so many obstacles and so many downs. It’s not going to be an easy smooth ride. And I think what makes it the going possible is that you have to have a sort of a deep underlying passion for the problem space that you find yourself in.

I talk to a lot of founders, they’re in it because they think, “Hey, this is going to be a good space to make a quick buck in or something like that.”
And almost inevitably, they get burned when the going gets hard. Because they don’t actually care about the buck. So, I think if you aren’t truly passionate about it, it can be hard to make it all the way through the marathon. Because it is a marathon, it is not a sprint.

Closing

Michael: Armon, thank you so much for sharing all of this advice and wisdom, and congratulations on HashiCorp. It’s an unbelievable accomplishment. I can’t say congratulations enough, but thanks again for joining us.

Armon: My pleasure. And thank you for the kind words, Mike.

Michael: And thanks to the HashiCorp team for helping to schedule Armon for this episode. Cool graphics from Kamal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.
We are going to publish two more episodes this year. I won’t announce the guest yet, but they’re really fantastic. And if you want to say hello, I’ll be attending the “All Things Open” conference at the very end of October in North Carolina. And I hope to see you there. So, until next time, thanks for listening.

The post Episode 58: Cloud Infrastructure Automation Platform with Armon Dadgar, Co-Founder & CTO of HashiCorp first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 33:33
Episode 56 – Connecting Web3 Blockchains, Federico Kunze Küllmer, Co-Founder of EVMOS https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-56-federico-kunze-kullmer-co-founder-of-evmos/ Mon, 06 Jun 2022 17:13:11 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2062 Intro Mike Schwartz: Federico, welcome to the podcast! Federico Kunze Küllmer: Hey, Mike, thanks for having me today! Background Mike Schwartz: Before we dive into Evmos, tell us a little bit about your journey how’d you get here? Federico Kunze Küllmer: So, I started in Computer Science and Industrial Engineering in Chile. I did a semester...

The post Episode 56 – Connecting Web3 Blockchains, Federico Kunze Küllmer, Co-Founder of EVMOS first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>

Intro

Mike Schwartz: Federico, welcome to the podcast!

Federico Kunze Küllmer: Hey, Mike, thanks for having me today!

Background

Mike Schwartz: Before we dive into Evmos, tell us a little bit about your journey how’d you get here?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: So, I started in Computer Science and Industrial Engineering in Chile. I did a semester abroad at UC Berkeley where I joined this student organization called Blockchain on Berkeley, and that’s where my journey on the blockchain ecosystem but also in the open-source ecosystem started.

After I graduated, I started working on numerous open-source projects like Tendermint, Cosmos SDK, which powers many of the projects that you can see out there, like Binance, Terra, and the entire Cosmos ecosystem. And now, Evmos, which is a project I’m building.

Mike Schwartz: Awesome. So, the topic of today’s podcast is how we can use DAOs to perhaps provide an alternate funding mechanism, an organizational mechanism for open-source projects.

But before we get into that topic, some of our listeners might not know what a DAO is. Can you help give a baseline sort of definition?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: For sure. DAO stands for Decentralized Autonomous Organization. It’s basically – think of it as a corporative or any association of different accounts that live on the blockchain or through different governance mechanisms are able to decide on certain like outcomes or voting certain proposals at the DAOhaus.

They also have like a common shared address where they can, for example, pull their accounts and their tokens, so they can spend on different initiatives. That’s how you can, more or less, create these sorts of autonomous organizations to eventually fund the different public goods and base-layer infrastructure that you’re providing through open source.

Is DAO Discord Group With A Crypto Wallet

Mike Schwartz: One of the founders of a DAO called “Friends-With-Benefits” has described the DAO as a Discord group with a crypto wallet. Is that inaccurate?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: In some way, that’s accurate. In a way that the crypto wallet is here, was that the important component, where every member of this organization has some shares, so to say, so that they can be long in this organization. So, I would say that’s pretty accurate, where every member of the Discord has some share in the organization.

Tokens V. Options

Mike Schwartz: In a traditional company, let’s say, that most of our listeners are familiar with, you issue stock to team members. That stock is normally issued in the form of options. And those options, even when exercised, are subject normally to a fairly restrictive stockholder agreement. So, in this case, it sounds like you’re saying that the sort of members of the team, instead of being issued stock, are going to be issued a token specific to this project. What are the ways that such a token would differ from the traditional options or a corporate equity grant?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: The main difference here between a token and a share in a company is the immediate access to the liquidity, when you have options for a company that is not publicly listed or is not currently raising a fund, like a funding round. It’s really hard to get liquidity for those options once they’re exercised. So, with tokens, you actually have the opposite. When your tokens are vested, you can start selling them in the open market. I would say that’s a main difference.

On top of that, tokens can also have certain behavior, like, for example, you can create tokens that are vested over certain period of time, or like some tokens that are locked for like one year. Like, trying to simulate a one-year cliff they usually have with options, and so on and so forth. So, it’s actually trying to replicate the same behavior that you have right now with options, but on a decentralized way, and actually having those tokens be liquid.

Token Liquidity

Mike Schwartz: If you get tokens in a DAO, these tokens aren’t necessarily going to be listed on a public exchange, so how exactly would owners of the project tokens get liquidity?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: For example, either you issue these tokens individually to each of the members of the team, so that they can like have different vesting schemes or vesting schedules. So, if you have like an individual joins a company or organization at a given time, you can issue these vesting schedules over time that is publicly available on the blockchain. And you can see the account that says the tokens are being vested over like four years or one year. And then, you can also create these flobots for each of the tokens.

That’s when you issue them individually to each member, and you can also create as you mentioned, like a DAO, that is covering certain rules, where all the shareholders vote to distribute the proceeds or these tokens that the DAO account controls to the different members, according to the different shares they have.

So, that’s like the two ways that you can fund this, as either issue a vesting schedule individually or the tokens individually, or the other option is like have these common wallets, where you create different wallets or proposals, which are voted by each of the members.


Mike Schwartz: Maybe I’m not understanding: if I go to pay rent or buy milk, you know, how do I sell my project token into something that’s liquid like Ethereum or Bitcoin?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: You can do that by issuing the tokens that are native, from the certain project, and usually they were publicly traded on decentralized exchangers or centralized exchangers, like Coinbase or Binance, etc., so you can like actually swap the token if they’re listed. And then, like, thus, bring in some liquidity so that you can trade the token against like another known crypto currency like Bitcoin or Ethereum.

Mike Schwartz: So, what you’re saying is that you could sort of build into these project tokens an automatic conversion feature into something that’s liquid?


Federico Kunze Küllmer: Yeah. Usually, the project doesn’t need to be necessarily the one that is providing this exchange on a decentralized way, but usually rely on other projects that are fully interoperable. If you’re building a specific application, your application can connect to another smart contract that provides this functionality for another digital assets, like Bitcoin and Ethereum, and then you can use that and trade them to fiat, for example.

Mike Schwartz: I see. So, you’re saying that there’s already a generalized token. So, you don’t issue a specific token for your project, but maybe you use a platform that gives you a token that already has the properties. What are some of the platforms that are out there that could do this? Just maybe a couple of examples?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: On Ethereum, the most notable ones are probably Uniswap. You also can find some of the others that are targeting other types. But, yeah, like the main one is definitely Uniswap, I would say on Ethereum. On Cosmos you can find for example Osmosis, which is another platform that supports this.

How To Define The Governance?


Mike Schwartz: You mentioned that in a DAO, you can implement different rules, depending upon the specific goals of your project. I think of that as the governance of the project. It seems to me like it’s somewhat challenging to set up the governance of the project. Where do you start that process? And, you know, while there’s governance frameworks that exist for Discord group participation, are there templates out there or playbooks for open-source projects? And it seems like sort of a difficult problem. And where do you start and how do you define these rules?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: This is a great question. In general, where you can find different governance protocols that are used in these different DAOs, so you can have different types of votes, you can have different type of proposals that you can submit. One is, for example, you can signal certain changes to your community. Like signal certain changes, when I introduce it to your community, how strongly do your community feels about certain topic. And those are, like, just for example, “Do you support us doing this?”

That is actually not caring weight on blockchain itself, but, for example, you can also build some type of proposals that are voted on by every member. You can distribute the tokens from these DAO, or from other community allocated tokens, in order to fund public goods, like open source or other contributions from other external contributors, which has already, for example, like my company was funded through these sorts of like community-allocated grants, through these governance mechanisms.

So, they’re like multiple types of proposals that the community can vote already, and you can find them on Cosmos, which is a Blockchain ecosystem we are in. And on Ethereum, there’s already some smart contracts that support this functionality as well for DAOs.

Mike Schwartz: But digging into it a little more specifically, when you define the governance, are we talking about smart contracts, are we talking about legal documents, are we talking about English explanation of what the rules are for this DAO, or all of the above?


Federico Kunze Küllmer: It’s usually in the set of code, and it’s a smart contract, you would say. And then, you also find another sort of like blockchains that also support governance and the code itself. So, for example, you would submit a transaction with this proposal saying, “I want to fund this team to execute on four different milestones over one year.” And then, this proposal gets voted by the entire community.

And once the proposal passes automatically, because it’s on the blockchain, the governance logic is on the blockchain, it automatically funds the team that was allocated the grant, for example, to complete these different milestones. So, you allocate it automatically, so to say, when the proposal passes..

Allocating Tokens To The Team

Mike Schwartz: It sounds like you’re saying that the measure of work that we’re going to compensate in the smart contracts for is a milestone, but when I look at an open-source ecosystem, what I see is that people tend to think about the developers, but we also have code reviewers and people who do Q&A and write documentation, and Kubernetes Helm Charts, and triage issues and do outreach.

I collectively call all of these contributors like the open-source creators, if you’re going to do one big grant for, let’s say for a milestone, how do you decide who gets what and how do you make it fair?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: Yeah. This is a great topic that is, I think, very challenging. Because there’s always someone that needs to be like continuously monitoring the milestones and whatnot, and then, also, this visibility of these different grant programs.

Some of these open-source creators, as you mentioned, maybe never heard of these ways of funding through development. Usually, sometimes there could be like one single developer that is creating one single library that is like the backbone of these other different projects. Usually, right now, how it’s being implemented, there is these like committee receipts.

So, instead of distributing the funds directly to the grant recipient, it is distributed to a committee that is composed by two external parties that are reviewing these milestones, so they get approved. And then, you also have one member of the team that is receiving the grant.

So, for example, like two out of three of these members of the committee can like distribute the funds. So, it’s more of like a reputation based, where like these other members of the committee send the tokens to the grant recipient.

Revenue Sharing With Developers

Mike Schwartz: You mention that there was a committee that decides how to compensate the team members. I know I’ve heard of some other DAOs that use something like, let’s say, how many Discord messages you post equates to how many tokens you receive as compensation.

Or, perhaps, how many GitHub issues you complete, or how many hours you work. So, is there any way, instead of using a committee, that you can build some other more intrinsically valuable mechanism to track the contribution of the participant?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: Yeah. For example, one way that we’ve dealt with this problem is by creating what we call a decentralized abstract model. It’s basically a marketplace where developers publish their applications. And then, users, by interacting with them how to pay a transaction fee. And developers get 50% of this transaction fee for every transaction.

So, in the long term, it’s creating a sustainable funding mechanism for them. Or, like, your application is more popular and it’s used by more users – they will pay 50% of those fees to your development team. And that’s how we’re trying to get all these projects funded. It’s by actually having like a way for them to get the proceeds from the users that are interacting with the blockchain.

Initial Funding

Mike Schwartz: That’s interesting because you answered my question in a different way than I anticipated, which brings me into an area that I was going, which is, of course everyone wants to get paid. I think of that as the left side of the equation, developers, or other creators, or community members, getting paid tokens. But on the right side of the equation, we need to actually have people giving money, whether that’s fiat or crypto or something. The value has to flow into this ecosystem.

So, the model that you mentioned is interesting, where you’re saying that perhaps the people who pay for the code, a portion of that code goes to the creators in a community. And by the way, I think you still have the problem of how to split that value between these very different creators.

But tell me, well, maybe let’s go in that direction and say, besides this model you thought of, what are some of the other models, why would companies or people want to fund a DAO? In the traditional corporate startup world, we find angel investors or venture capitalists, or strategic partners who put money into our company, when we’re starting a DAO, what’s the equivalent of that?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: I think it’s all changing the model from value capture to value creation. A lot of these open-source creators actually need funding to finance the engineers in the day-to-day operations of the project. The main thing that you can do that is by creating these sorts of DAOs, then fund these public goods, sort to say. That’s why you can find these public goods in DAOs to fund these like open-source contributors.

Mike Schwartz: So, before I can sell my product, I have to build it. It’s hard writing software, you know that. And sometimes, it takes longer than we think to write this. So, a bootstrap model where we’re directing funds from the output of the software back to developers is great, but only after the product is done and shipped, and people are paying for it because it’s valuable. But what about before that? Or how do you get it started, I guess?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: We, for example, our company got funded through this mechanism. We didn’t have any investors, prior investors before, we created our project. So, we have requested – through our governance proposal to the community of another blockchain, which is the Cosmos hub – we’ve requested funding to basically fund our entire team for a year. And that helped us like bootstrap all the necessary funding to create a company, to hire engineers to basically ship the code that we were meant to deliver with this proposal.

Mike Schwartz: Was this a one-off where there was something very specific to Cosmos Hub, or is there a playbook here for other open-source projects? How does that playbook differ?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: Yeah. And this case was something like specific to the ecosystem itself, because our project was going to attract a lot of developers from the Ethereum ecosystem that already knew how to build smart contracts.But if you try to extend this to a more general case, not necessarily funding blockchains or decentralized applications, you can also find different DAOs that can provide this funding in exchange for — I don’t know, like shares.

Because sometimes the main struggle right now of all these projects, open-source projects actually, is how to get funding. Some of them don’t necessarily have a business model, but they’re providing this utility that serves, as I mentioned before, it’s like the base layer so many other projects rely on. I think that through DAOs, you can actually create a lot of funding opportunities for all these different open-source projects that can have like a potential impact, not only in blockchain but in the entire open-source ecosystem.

DAO Frameworks

Mike Schwartz: So, there’s a number of platforms out there for DAOs. The ones that I’m thinking of are mostly built on the Ethereum blockchain. So, things like you might have heard of Aragon, or Utopia, or Syndicate, or XDAO, or Colony, or DAOstack, or SubDAO – there’s a bunch of these frameworks or platforms for creating a DAO. Because to create the technical infrastructure for DAOs, for example, the voting or the treasury function takes quite a bit of work and knowledge about how to build smart contracts and how to build this infrastructure. Tell us a little bit about how you build Evmos.

Did you use one of these platforms or did you build your own platform? And what are your thoughts about some of these platforms for open-source projects, maybe more quickly create a DAO to incentivize their creators?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: I’m going to reply first how we build Evmos. We used a framework for building blockchain, because our project is a blockchain that provides a base-layer infrastructure for smart contracts that are fully interoperable with the other ecosystems. So, we’re expanding on, like for example, in our case, like smart contract interoperability.

So, the framework that we use is not necessarily meant for DAOs but to create your own blockchain. Like, for DAOs, or like these open-source funding communities that want to be created through different DAOs, I think Aragon provides like a great framework for you to, like, one-click deploy of Dao in order to create your community.

Mike Schwartz: It sounds like you’re saying that using a framework is a good idea, but you didn’t go that direction because you are blockchain experts. Is that a fair reading?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: Yeah, exactly. We’ve been working on blockchain for the past five years or so. But if other communities that are maybe not as familiar with blockchain and want to create this, the way to go is using one of these frameworks to build different Decentralized Autonomous Organizations, or DAOs, that provide different options for you, like different voting rights, different threshold for voting, or how much quorum do you need to get your different proposals that you have within your DAO, different voting types and proposal types.

You can even have different thresholds, so to say, to send funds from the DAO out to other wallets and to fund the development. So, yeah, I think these are very flexible, these new DAO tools are very flexible for you to upgrade your own value proposition.

Evolving The Governance

Mike Schwartz: So, we’re in early days of DAOs, and it seems like, even if a project decides to use it as approach, they are probably not going to get it right the first time. How do you make your DAO flexible enough? Or do you maybe give it like an end life and say, “Well, this is what we’re going to do for a year, and then maybe we’ll start a new one, based on that experience.”

What’s your advice on? As this technology adapts and we’re learning so much, how do you do something today, and not totally regret it, like in a couple of months that you should have done this thing or that thing?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: The beauty of these tools is that actually you can add more functionality as you go. I think they’re very flexible in terms of like, oh, you misconfigured something or you want to add new functionality, and these tools allow you to do so.

Mike Schwartz: Great, but there’s tools and rules. And when you set up the governance for the project, you’re setting the rules for your ecosystem. And you changed the goalposts, so your team might not be so happy. So, what are the strategies for sort of, on the governance side, for acknowledging that things are changing and you might need to make changes?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: Yeah. I think like involving your community that is part of the DAO is the first step. Because, trying to push for these changes in a unilateral way is more complicated in the long run because you will be seeing us, as I mentioned before, like value extracting, then value creation. Yeah, then creating value for the entire community.

So, I think like involving your community members is the first step to try to do so and try to get feedback from them. And sort of like, if you feel strongly about a certain rule to be implemented or completely crossing out an existing rule that can be eventually updated, or even deleted from your, say constitution of this DAO. Involving the community on like what decisions you should take and how strongly they feel about, I think is like the first step that you need to take.

Seasons

Mike Schwartz: In “Friends with Benefits”, I heard them talking about seasons, season 1, season 2. So, does it make sense to sort of like have a contract with your community that says, “Okay. These rules are temporarily fixed, and we will revisit them at a certain point.”

Federico Kunze Küllmer: Yeah. I think of seasons are more of like periods in different governments that we have today. So, like, you have the president that is only for like one period or one season in this case. And then, you can go for re-election. Or you can, in this case, if we were trying to compare this with a season of this DAO, it is like, “Oh, do we want to extend these existing rules for another period and then releasing at the end of the period, or do we want to change them completely, or do we want to change a few of them?”

I think it makes sense to have a certain period where you say like, okay, we’re going to take a step back and revisit like all the things that we made during this period. See how we can improve them over time, if we made any mistakes, how we can compensate for them, and like try to release all the changes that need to be implemented for our community to be happy, engaged and incentivized in the long run.

Are Companies Afraid Of Blockchain?

Mike Schwartz: I was just at a conference and I heard somebody say that traditional companies, let’s say, are still afraid of blockchain. You know, they might say that they’re interested, that they want to research, but ultimately, they’re afraid of blockchain. But have you seen any evidence from companies, or do you think it’s fair to say that companies are still terrified or just don’t understand this whole space?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: I think that like expanding this to companies as well is also very beneficial for the entire ecosystem of open-source, like using blockchain too, like us, as an alternative source of funding for the companies that already provide regular payments or subscriptions to these foundations in order to build support. I would say the main challenge here is, once you have enough builders, or enough companies, or enough projects, like subscribing to these DAOs that provide funding for open-source projects is how do you actually distribute those funds, and how then you prioritize different support, so to say, for features that some company might prefer to include, for their own benefit versus other that is also providing that. I think that’s one of the main challenges.

For example, GitHub is already doing that through different sponsor tears, like the higher amount tears usually have prioritized supports and features. And I think that could be built in a DAO for example, so that you can have like prioritized support from the open-source team to your specific company. And I think if DAO were to be built in a blockchain, that will create like more funding and more, I would say, openness also, for companies to adopt this.

When To Get Legal Help

Mike Schwartz: When we’re just in the crypto world and we’re talking about a crypto wallet and smart contracts, we don’t need any lawyers, because this is completely unregulated world.But when we connect to the real world, especially if we’re going to engage companies, we’re going to need actually some type of like legal entity perhaps. And perhaps we’re going to need to get the lawyers involved. You know, I’ve heard finding lawyers who understand this decentralized token-based crypto world is difficult.

Are we making inroads in this area, and at what point do you think that maybe you need to get a lawyer, to look at whether your project’s use of this new incentive model might need some real-world legal guardrails?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: I think the main safeguard towards — like preventing this sort of like extraction of value from these open-source projects is creating the right licenses. I would say like open-source licenses can also, with the help of lawyers that understand open-source licenses, can already create some sort of defense mechanism for you to prevent these cases. And I think there’s already projects in the blockchain ecosystem that have created their own license, preventing others from just like extracting the value that they’ve created through this open-source code. And then, like framing them as it was theirs, so to say. They want to still be open-source, but at the same time, they want some retribution, or they want some like external support.

So, as for licensing, getting a lawyer there on blockchain licensing, it’s like one of the first things. If you’re building an open-source project for the DAO day-to-day operations, you probably won’t need a lawyer to work necessarily on many of the cases, because you can say that, for example, this smart contract would govern your rules or your constitution of the DAO, but not necessarily have someone like enforce certain contracts directly with each of the members of the DAO, because it’s all decentralized, all governed by code.

Evmos Business Launch?

Mike Schwartz: I think this is the longest discussion we’ve had about underlying technology of these podcasts ever. So, I want to like finish the podcast with talking a little bit about Evmos. You’ve put this playbook into action, and where are you now and how is it going?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: It is going great. As I mentioned before, we got these projects fully funded through the open-source community of the Cosmos hub because Evmos was meant to build the base-layer infrastructure. It is fully open-source, and we built up a library that allows other communities or other teams to build smart contract support for their applications. So, we built this with a community grant, and we finally launched two days ago, on Wednesday, 27th of April. Yeah, it’s going well, very smooth, after having a few hiccups in the past.

And now, like everything is running super smooth, and hopefully, in the next few months, we can focus on smart contract interoperability. And of course, this will be fully open source for the teams to benefit. Because like all the other projects in the ecosystem will be able to connect and interact with smart contracts so that you can have your DAO to create this sort of different sources of funding, was isolated in only a single blockchain, but now, with the infrastructure that we’re providing, that is again open-source, you’ll be able to connect these DAOs with other blockchains and other applications out there.

Are Developers Receving Tokens?

Mike Schwartz: The economic model that you described earlier, where value is flowing back to developers – have developers gotten any tokens yet from adoption?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: The adoption model is basically a marketplace between developers and users. In our launch, two days ago, we introduced incentives for users that interact with the smart contracts. And in our next release, which is going to probably be in two or three weeks from now, we’re going to introduce a fee model that is basically sharing the proceeds from the transaction fees with the developers. That is already fully implemented, we’re only running on some internal test through Q/A process. And it’s going to, hopefully, be shipped really soon.

Developer Education

Mike Schwartz: Did you have to educate your team about this new model? Did you have any formalized education or they were mostly blockchain gurus and they understood all this right away?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: It’s a complete novel way because it’s never been introduced before in the entire ecosystem. Usually, the proceeds don’t go to developers even though you are interacting with their applications on their smart contracts. Their proceeds would usually go into the miners, securing the blockchain.

So, we had to create an internal specification, an internal memo, and architecture decision record from an engineering point of view. And then, like, finally create like a blog post meant for the general audience about this token model, for how to incentivize developers, how to incentivize users through this new model that is completely innovative in the space.

Details Of Evmos Blog Explaining Model

Mike Schwartz: Would you say that that blog post has enough detail to serve as a real playbook or template for other open-source projects to replicate what you need to do?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: Yeah. If you go to https://medium.com/evmos , you can find the blog post about the token model on how  this fee mechanism works to share the transaction fees. And if you go to our documentation under https://docs.evmos.org/ , you can also find the technical specification of how to implement this and how this works at a technical level on the different concept it has. So, then, as an engineer, you can also learn more about like how it works under the hood.

Evmos Governance

Mike Schwartz: Is the governance also defined somewhere where people can say, you know, what are the rules that they set up for Evmos? And maybe I can adopt that for my ecosystem.

Federico Kunze Küllmer: So, we share the same rules as the entire Cosmos blockchain ecosystem. And you can also find some documentation guides, and FAQ is also in our documentation, if you go to evmos.dev, about how governance works, how the voting procedure works, what are the different like governance proposals, etc.

Why Cosmos V. Ethereum?

Mike Schwarz: Cosmos versus Ethereum. Why did you choose Cosmos?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: So, Cosmos, first, is for fully sovereign interoperable ecosystem of applications. So, instead of having to share the same blockchain space, as you find in Ethereum, you can sort of like create your smart contracts in there, and they can interact with them, but they’re isolated in the same machine. And what you want sometimes, as an application developer, is to have your own community, is to have your own ecosystem.

But you want that ecosystem to also talk to other blockchains or to other applications, so that you can like connect, and create value, create different sort of like use cases that weren’t impossible before. So, Cosmos allows you to basically create these applications that are fully sovereign in the sense that they have their own voting mechanism, for their own community, but they’re at the same time fully interoperable with other blockchains in this space.

Cosmos Compromises

Michael Schwartz: A lot of people talk about like the properties of blockchains, like decentralized, fast, and sometimes they involve also compromises. You know, when you get one thing, you have to give up another. Can you talk a little bit about what are the compromises that you make on Cosmos would you say?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: Yeah. So, the main thing is composability, which we solved now with Evmos that we launched two days ago. So, composability stands, like you have someone else builds an application for you. You have all the base-layer infrastructure and you want to deploy just your application, you don’t want to deploy like a full blockchain, which you need to build like, I don’t know, like a business development team.

You need to build miners to run on your blockchain, you also need to create like a marketing team and all that stuff. Maybe you just want to deploy your application and see if other users interact with it. You want this application to also interact with other applications. I think that’s a main trade off.  On Cosmos, before Evmos, you didn’t have that functionality to deploy applications that were interacting with each other. And then, the other thing is developer manager.

I think a lot of developers go to Ethereum, even though their transaction fees are higher, and they don’t have fully interoperability solutions or sovereign solutions like Evmos has. So, they have like way more developers, for example, than you can find on Cosmos.

Advice For Entrepreneurs

Mike Schwartz: Awesome. So, this has been a really great conversation. I know we’re a little bit over on time, and I think it’s such a deep topic. Before maybe to wrap up, if you have some final advice for open-source founders or entrepreneurs out there, what would that be?

Federico Kunze Küllmer: The first thing is to look for different alternatives out there. If they’re not super familiar with any specific project that is funding this, but I think like funding this through a DAO, if you are a small developer, you can easily get like a grant on all these communities to create base-layer infrastructure or applications for libraries that can help these different blockchains. And I’m also available on Twitter for you to like DM me, and we can talk about your specific needs. You can find me on https://twitter.com/fekunze?lang=en on Twitter.

Mike Schwartz: Federico, this has been really fascinating. Thank you for answering a lot of my very basic questions and being so patient, and best of luck with Evmos. It sounds like you’re doing really great work, so thank you again.

Federico Kunze Küllmer: Thank you, Mike. This was super interesting.

Credits

Mike Schwartz: That’s it. Special thanks to the Evmos team for helping us schedule and promote this. Cool graphics from Kamal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.

Mike Schwartz: I wanted to get this one out as soon as possible because the business model is so innovative.

Watch your feet for more episodes. We will probably resume next year. I have a list of companies and leaders that I’d like to interview. I wanted to get this one out as soon as possible because the business model is so innovative. Thanks for listening. And please reach out to me via the website if you have any ideas for the show.

The post Episode 56 – Connecting Web3 Blockchains, Federico Kunze Küllmer, Co-Founder of EVMOS first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 40:20
Episode 57 – Tokenizing the FOSS Package Ecosystem, with Max Howell, Founder of Tea.xyz https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-57-max-howell-founder-tea-xyz/ Wed, 03 Aug 2022 19:32:14 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2094 Tokenizing the FOSS package ecosystem.

The post Episode 57 – Tokenizing the FOSS Package Ecosystem, with Max Howell, Founder of Tea.xyz first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro

Max’s blog post on our announcement day is a great summary of our mission, he touches on how difficult it was making homebrew without compensation and how we’re setting out to fix “the Nebraska Problem”: Something new is brewing

This link has a good summary of our white paper, and a link to the paper itself: Tea Releases Whitepaper Outlining Decentralized Protocol for Rewarding Open-Source Developers

Here is my favorite interview Max has done (so far!), a “Dev & Tell” with the Developer DAO community.

Michael Schwartz: Hello, and welcome to Open Source Underdogs! I’m your host, Mike Schwartz and this is episode 57, an interview with Max Howell of Tea.xyz. Max is the third Web3 guest – see episode 37 and 56 for the other two.

He has some notoriety as the founder of the Brew repository. That’s relevant here because Tea is a next generation Web3 package repository toolkit that developers can use to build properly incentivized open-source ecosystems. It’s a wildly disruptive vision of how we can make open-source software more equitable, more secure, and more innovative.

Tea’s published a white paper about how they intend to build a new layer one blockchain, but Tea’s also a well-funded startup that’s making a two-year roadmap to make all this Web3 tokenized repository ecosystem stuff a reality. If you’re like me, some of this blockchain jargon may go over your head. For example, what’s the difference between Proof of Work and Proof of Stake? What’s a DAO? What are Cosmos and Polkadot? My advice is, just go along with the jargon, hit pause, and do some Googling in the background.

Web 3

With that said, without further ado, let’s cut over to the interview with Max. Big welcome to Max Howell, CEO of Tea Inc. and renowned founder of Homebrew, the ubiquitous package manager for macOS. Max, welcome to the podcast.

Max Howell: Thanks for having me here.

Michael Schwartz: You mentioned in a previous podcast that you were into computer science major as an undergraduate, maybe before we dive into Web 3, and all the business model stuff, you could tell us a little bit about how you ended up in the tech business and open source.

Max Howell: Sure thing. So, I have a chemistry degree. It’s a British masters, which means it’s four years and not as prestigious as the US masters. That came from thinking I wanted to do science. I think I was undue influenced by all the ‘80s movies, where scientists were changing the world and saving the world and being cool in general.

And I did a year in chemistry in the lab. And it was like, three months, and I was like, “I can’t do this.” It was boring. I stuck it out for another nine months. And then I quit. I was like, “I got to figure out something else to do myself.” And programming had always been a hobby, but dad had introduced it to me when I was six. And I’d done a bunch of programming here and there as a hobby yeast, and never considered it for a career.

Partly because when I went to the career fair, as a 17-year-old, and I met some programmers there, they were just like the geekiest people I’d ever met. And I was like, “Oh my God, I don’t want to be like that!”

But I fell back into it, after quitting the job and moving back in with my parents and not really knowing what to do. Obviously, I was like in this depressed funk. And then I found open source, I installed Linux. And I found the communities that are out there for open source, and this was back in like 2003/2004, and fell in love with it basically. I started making apps, go involved with a bunch of apps on desktop Linux, worked for KDE, contributed bunch to KDE.

And then, that got me a career in the industry. I found this job in London, they contacted me because of the work I’ve been doing on this music player called Amarok. And that got me into it.

What is Web3?

Michael Schwartz: So, one more warm-up question. What’s your definition of Web3? For example, like, what features distinguish a Web2 piece of software from a Web3 piece of software?

Max Howell: Web3 is just the natural evolution of how the Internet has gone. And I think Web2 especially – we lost the web, right? If we go back to where the web came from, where the Internet came from, and what it was about, it’s all open source at the beginning. Everything about how it was developed, was decentralized, and not monetized, and for the benefit of everybody by putting information out there and making open API’s and programmable interfaces and small tools that could interact with each other and create a network for humanity.

And Web3 really, for me, is just an acknowledgement that we lost our way with Web2. And then we centralized everything. And we gave too many big companies too much power and control over how it’s built. Even open source, and like maybe even especially open source.

So, I don’t like the way open source is now mostly developed by companies. All the big projects, they purchase, well, they hire – we don’t want to say purchase – they hire the developers who work on these important projects. And then, that company then like controls it essentially.

I believe that they don’t intend to do malicious things with these projects. But like, at the end of the day, I don’t trust Microsoft, Google, Facebook, etc. It’s who build this essential infrastructure that makes the Internet work.

So, I love the fact that Web3 is also returning to some sort of roots movement with open source, where people are building themselves, and like, tokenization is part of the reason that that’s possible. You don’t need a company to support you.

What Makes a Web3 App?

Mike Schwartz: You know, Tim Berners-Lee recently said something like, “My decentralized web doesn’t need blockchain. And because the Internet was already pretty decentralized, and maybe even still is with, like, a billion domains and millions of autonomous web servers.

I get the ethos and the aspiration of Web3 that you’re expressing. But is there a technology underpinnings or infrastructure that’s available in Web3 that wasn’t in Web 2? What makes Web3 app?

Max Howell: We’re developers and engineers, and we love to, like, define things precisely. But, you know, I don’t think these things can be defined that precisely. Tim Berners – Lee, probably his internet still is as decentralized as it was initially, because he’s probably still using all these Web1 tools, and hasn’t really migrated. I doubt he has a Facebook account or anything like that. But for the vast majority of us, we’re using these highly centralized chunks of the Internet that have massive sandboxes around them. And that’s what we need to be working on to get rid of.

You know, blockchain is a part of Web3, because that was the ingenious invention that allowed us to understand that we can make databases that are decentralized, where we were struggling to do that. And a lot of people still don’t think it’s that important. But, you know, the recent crypto crash, it was pretty impressive how DeFi stood up while all these centralized systems collapsed.

So, for me, that means that you don’t even need to prove that Web3 is the way forwards, it’s just going to prove itself, as Web2 continues to have issues with centralization.

What is the Monetizing Strategy?

Michael Schwartz: Before we go down the blockchain rabbit hall at a high level, Tea Inc. is a for-profit company. What is the basic plan for Tea to monetize? Is it going to be a strategy similar to other Web3 startups?

Max Howell: Yeah, so, we’re a well-funded startup. And we’re currently raising a little more. Like, our intention is to give ourselves like two, three years of runway, so that we can build a kick-ass suite of products, which also allow for the open-source ecosystem to be remunerated.

But after that, essentially, we see the package manager component of what we’re offering as a form of an app store. And we see ways that we can, like monetize — it sounds terrible to say we’re monetizing open source, and that isn’t what we’re doing.

Like, we’re not changing the nature of open source at Tea. It’s important that we emphasize that fact. You can’t change something that’s so established 25, 30 years, even more, that it’s existed like 100% free, and everything about what we’re doing is still free. And our remuneration system, which we’ll talk about later, with no doubt, understands that. And that’s a key part of it.

So, any monetization we apply on top of that will be an opt-in kind of way of doing things, where we allow like teams and enterprises and businesses that are using the Tea product suite to gain extra value out of the fact that they’re a business, and that they need systems that help the dev employees to work more effectively. So, we have a number of ideas there, but they’re under wraps currently still.

Why Tea Blockchain v. DAO?

Michael Schwartz: Why a Tea Blockchain and not a Tea DAO? Or, is there also a DAO?

Max Howell: Yeah, there will also be a DAO, we need some kind of blockchain to record the data. Essentially, we’re putting out the package registry. And I say the because, currently, there’s 400 different package managers out there. The vast majority of them are duplicating the same data time and again.

The history of the Internet, and open-source and software technologies, it is full of examples, where like people cobbled together systems, because it is just about works for now. And then eventually, someone figures out how to make it more cohesive, bring it all together, and then, like provided that solution is correct, it gets adopted. So, we’re trying to do that.

We’re making a decentralized blockchain based package registry. Everyone who maintains open source will be able to publish their releases into it, their own private keys, as a result deduplicate all of that, but also allow for the Tea remuneration system.

Can other projects use Tea as a template?

Michael Schwartz: The Tea protocol algorithmically defines the governance and payments in this package ecosystem. And it seems like that’s very scalable, and it’s sort of free of subjectivity. Do you think that other open-source projects, I guess, besides package managers, might define protocols that model value in their ecosystems, by using metrics different than what you used?

Max Howell: I expect so. For me, this is a great use of the technology. We’re going to start seeing more and more people and projects doing things like this. So, there was one — what’s it called – someone was trying to replace Steam, essentially, with a similar kind of model blockchain based licenses that you put in the chain for releases of your games, essentially.

And then, it’s just understanding that you put an NFT out there, and you direct token towards that NFT, based on who owns it, like people will shy away from making new layer ones. But I think that doesn’t really make sense. So, we have like great tools nowadays for building new layer ones. And essentially, just each one has its own like specific database.

I remember, when I worked in my last firm, this music startup in London, and we replaced the entire database with a completely custom model. Because it was impossible at the time with, like, the way computers were – at least then – since before, cloud infrastructure was awfully common, to get enough performance out of the type of data that was used there.

Having your own blockchain for your specific use case, you have to bridge the tokens in order for it to be generally useful to a lot of people. But we’re going to see more and more of that. And Tea, I think is a good example. And I’m hoping that it’s going to cause people who are skeptical about Web3 technologies, and blockchain especially, to reconsider that skepticism, when they see what we’re doing and how we have good intention.

You asked who our customers were. And for me, the people who are not paying us – the open-source ecosystem package maintainers, and package consumers who are not going to directly be paying us in any manner. Or even indirectly, in fact, based on how our model is going to work.

We believe in creating solutions that are going to improve the open-source ecosystem, because we’re all super passionate at Tea about open source. And ensuring that it thrives, thrives in a way that currently it’s remarkable to me that open source exists, and that it works.

Why use an NFT for package maintainers?

Michael Schwartz: In the Tea ecosystem, you mentioned that we have package maintainers, and we have package developers, we have end users, people installing packages, and we also have package testers. Those are sort of the roles or the actors within the ecosystem that I’ve sort of figured out. And based on your role, your GitHub usage may differ. You know, in this ecosystem, where you’ve defined these actors, how do you figure out how value is distributed between them?

Max Howell: Well, we’re still fleshing out the specifics, we’re doing a yellow paper right now on how, specifically, the value will be, what percentages of things. But as package maintainer, you release packages, like initially, you have a creator NFT that you put into our blockchain that indicates that there’s a new open-source package, and then each release has its own NFT.

And so, you put those out there, and you have to stake a little bit of value to say that you are supporting this package, and that you are guaranteeing the security of the package, and that you’re guaranteeing that the semantic versions of the package are correct. A lot of the things we’re going to try and do with this technology is not just remunerate open source, we also increase the robustness of the ecosystem.

Open source is messy right now, and things break all the time. And that’s partly because there’s no incentive really beyond what is best for the rest of the open-source ecosystem, and a moral imperative to do a good job. So, the maintainers are going to release those NFTs.

And we understand that a lot of projects involve more than one person. And we expect to either build ourselves a bunch of DAO tooling, so that each project can have its own DAO, which runs on top of the Tea token. Or for the open-source ecosystem to step up and do that, like everything we’re doing, we’re coming at it with the attitude that we have to build things that are flexible, and composable, so that the open-source ecosystem can build on top of what we’re building, so the maintainers do that.

And then, there’s Tea tasters. Tasters are going to be people who are — they’re staking against packages in the graph. For a start, we’re calling this steeping, where people are staking value against a package, several other packages, etc. And then, as a result, they’re also staking value against all of the dependencies of those packages.

So, if you stake against Log4j, for example, a good example that we use regularly, then all Log4j’s dependencies will be staked against effectively.

The key part of our system is that stake rewards that are done per epoch, probably 24 hours, are distributed to the packages that are staked, as well as the people staking. So, there’s an incentive for the stakers, like in a normal proof of stake type system.

DAO Voting?

Michael Schwartz: So, democratically, I think everyone appreciates that the package maintainers get a vote, but if an organization wants to financially contribute, is there a way for you to contribute to the governance?

Max Howell: So, we’re going to have a DAO which will have governance based on ownership of the token, or at least have some of these votes be strictly for patch maintainers rather than like other people with vested interests outside of that.

The DAO will be deciding on slashing events that we are intending to have to increase the security of the open-source ecosystem overall. So, if your package has a security exploit, then you can expect to be slashed.

If you violate semantic versioning, which can break the internet, then you can expect to get slashed. And the DAO is responsible for receiving the votes from those who are participating and creating a larger vote with the rest of the token holders.

Will OS vendors adopt Tea?

Michael Schwartz: Do you see operating system vendors adopting Tea?

Max Howell: I can see them suddenly transitioning to using our package graph instead of their own. That’s one of the things that I want the packaging ecosystem to do. This is duplicated data. Sometimes, it’s duplicated for good reason. But we can be like the original resource they use to figure out what versions of Tool-X and what dependencies Tool-X has, etc.

Now, the way I’m building Tea is very feasible for it to be the only package manager Linux distribution users. So, we’re packaging everything all the way down, not including Libc, everything up above that, but design this thing to be more of a developer tool than system operations tool or DevOps tool.

Now, it’s an exciting tool in that one of the things I’m doing with it is, much like Git was released as essentially a set of primitives that it made it possible to build a version control system. But especially when it was initially released, it was not a very good version control system. A part of the reason, it took a while to catch on because the user experience was bad, and certainly gotten better in the last five, six years, I’d say – we’re releasing a tool that’s essentially a set of primitives for packaging.

So, I’m hoping that just like with Homebrew, I built it to inspire people to get involved and to contribute and to be a part of it, I’m building Tea in exactly the same way. And I’m hoping that the open-source community is going to be super excited to use Tea’s primitives to build essentially entirely different tools on top of that.

So, one thing I’d like to see is for these Linux distributions is they still maintain their own package manager, because many times, it is like the package manager is what defines what is different about different varieties of Linux. So, I expect them to build essentially their own. But like Tea should be like the bottom 70% of, in much the way that open source has evolved over the last 30,40 years. So, people release these fundamental libraries and tools that change what is possible after that.

Then, they become like bricks in a tower essentially, where after that, everything is easier and simpler and faster to build. That’s what we all love about open source, I think, and why it must be free, and must be freely available, and must consist of an awful lot of tools, and make it as easy as possible to consume.

Metrics for Value

Michael Schwartz: In your package ecosystem, I didn’t see anything about documentation as an actor. How do you plan on handling that? Because I think that’s another one of areas in open source that needs attention.

Max Howell:  Most of what we have out there right now is just a few blog posts, tweets and a white paper. And the white paper really only discusses the protocol, the blockchain components. We deliberately haven’t gone into a lot of detail about the other parts. But what we’re building at Tea is a suite of products, which have a blockchain underpinning as the decentralized database for the package registry. And I’m a huge believer in documentation myself. This is limited what we can do for the open-source ecosystem. But we are going to have a way for projects to publish their documentation into the Tea platform in a much licensed form.

How to incent all project contributors?

Michael Schwartz: I’m wondering about these other contributors to building quality world-class software, is there any way for them to participate in the Tea ecosystem?

Max Howell: In the white paper, we define package maintainers as being known where the token is directed, or when the stake rewards come in. That is a vague term, probably not, at least initially, anyway, going to define it beyond that. So, it goes to one wallet. But we are going to encourage and expect projects to form a DAO and distribute that token with tooling that either we will write or the community will write.

That points it up to the project to decide how people are doing documentation, or outreach, or translations. Like, these are extremely important roles, worked on the number of large and small projects. And a lot of the time, the people who are just out there, fielding support, are the most important, and they deserve to get some of the rewards for sure. So, we’re encouraging, but we probably won’t initially, at least for version one, build out other tooling.

We shouldn’t be doing everything. It’s not the best way for things to go, there needs to be some competition in the space where people come along and say, “Okay, here’s some DAO tooling that is suitable for Tea.” And someone else will come along with something else. And then, we’ll see which ones gain popularity and which ones work.

How Tea will incentive other types of contributors, like technical writers?

Michael Schwartz: One of the interesting aspects of your design is that you are sort of gamifying reputation, where based upon your reputation, it almost impacts your level, which could impact how much you’re paid as for your contribution.

Can you give us some thoughts about what were some of the pros and cons of setting up that system? For example, I think you’re using GitHub stats as the basis for reputation, but can you just talk a little bit about how you came up with that idea? And what are your thoughts on the first iteration that you’re announcing?

Max Howell: The stake rewards will be given to projects based on who is steeping those projects. So, we’re outsourcing that kind of decision making to the community. There will be a curve to prevent projects getting too much, because there’s some that are more popular. We’ll be incentivizing people to steep projects that are less popular. And to avoid gamifying that, there’s slashing which can be submitted to the DAO for review, if people are publishing patches that are just fake.

And then, dependencies will get — they have this sort of in-built reputation for dependencies, because if you’re a dependency for other projects, then that’s proof in itself, that you have a successful project that deserves to get those steeping rewards. There is a reputation system for reports, for like security issues or other slashing events. And we’re still working out the details of that.

GitHub stats – that’s solely for an initial token trove, essentially. We want to make sure that the open-source community, those who actually are contributing to the open source that powers the internet, start off with a reasonable amount of tokens, so that they can be part of the Tea ecosystem, the amount will be in proportion, I should think – details not exactly worked out yet. But you have to have open source. And that’s what we’re doing with the GitHub OAuth.

Why use an NFT for package maintainers?

Michael Schwartz: I noticed that you’re using an NFT. An NFT is issued to a package maintainer I guess for a certain version – why did you use an NFT there?

Max Howell: Well, I think it’s a really good use of NFTs for a change. NFT’s got a bad rap – everything’s got a little bit of a bad rap in the sector, probably because there was a lot of…naughtiness, shall we say, going on with JPEG based on NFTs. And JPEG isn’t even part of the NFTs – it’s just a hash inside of it. NFT is just an immutable data point, and that’s what an open-source release needs to be – an immutable data point.

Once you’ve released a package, if you change it, you could be breaking like portions of the internet, or portions of people’s products, or like introducing security issues into portions of what is Web to Internet currently. It’s a logical use of the technology of what an NFT is.

Is the Protocol a Formalized Set of Smart Contracts?

Michael Schwartz: This might be displaying more of my ignorance about the blockchain level one stuff, but at the risk of that, would you say that the protocols provide a template for the smart contracts that you’re going to have in your ecosystem?

Max Howell: Well, I have a bunch of smart contracts that control staking and steep rewards, but either blockchain will be EVM compatible, or at least generally programmable in some manner. And we expect people to build on top of it to make open source into a viable career path for people.

Now, Emery talked about it, but I hope that once Tea is up and running, some of these extremely well-paid engineers at Facebook and Google net will quit to work on things that have actual benefit to humanity. Because they have ideas, they know about open source they could be building that actually benefits the world.

Blockchain Tooling?

Michael Schwartz: Okay, one more geeky question for you. You mentioned that it’s getting easier to build a level one blockchain. Can you talk about maybe some of the technology stack that you’re looking at to do that? Like, what are some of the tools that you’re considering?

Max Howell: We’re still figuring it out. But, like, all choices are becoming more and more clear, I think. So, like Cosmos is great. Everyone says great things about it. And you know, they provide the great tooling, so that you can build out what you need. Polkadot’s also great. And so, that’s an option for us. And we’re quite interested in Neo4j. So, they are the three main ones. I just like the way that they’ve understood that we are using same kind of bricks, when you’re building out these tools.

It is just easier to iterate when like 90% of the difficult bits are done. Like all of us who are engineers, who have tried to build something that is a library from scratch, just for fun, and you realized that there’s a lot of work that goes into that. That’s why open source is so valuable.

Like years of bug fixing, maturity, understanding like the nuances of things, that doesn’t matter how many meetings you have with a team, you don’t figure out until you actually build it. Blockchain has reached that level now, where you can’t just whip one up.

A lot of the people we’ve been talking to and a lot of our investors were like, “Don’t make your own layer one, it’s a nightmare, you’ll hate yourself!” It’s less and less the case. It’s still complicated. Launching a blockchain is a lot more complicated than a lot of things you can do in the cloud. Takes a lot more planning and resilience. And I’m glad that we have experienced people on staff who were going to help us with that.

Could Tea have used a DAO?

Michael Schwartz: And you don’t think that you could have done everything you need to do by just using a DAO that ran on top of an existing layer one?

Max Howell: Yeah, probably. We haven’t finally finished out what we’re going to do, we haven’t made any final decisions yet. So, it’s still possible that we’ll pick one of the existing layer ones. And, you know, we’re going to have a DAO whatever, you got to have your own DAO, you can’t just like take someone else’s. And that’s just a bunch of smart contracts anyway.

The truth is like, there’s a few pieces to what we’re doing that if we use our own system, it makes it possible for us to get the performance characteristics more correct. The dependency graph of all open source is to tend to 20,000 different projects with depending on what kind of layer out – like, if you’re in an NPM package, you can have like 5,000 – 6000 dependencies. Figuring out the reward distribution for that, performance implications are quite interesting.

And so, we want to have control over that. But, yeah, we can use this ZK roll-up and all that. And maybe we still will – maybe. There’s considerations we have that just make sense for us to consider our own.

I was saying it earlier, it’s like rolling your own database. Sometimes you have to do that. It’s more like just having your own instance of Postgres running. Like, if you take blockchain tech and just tweak it slightly, it’s only slight tweaks here. I think it makes sense for the technology.

Non-Profit?

Michael Schwartz: Do you think that there’s any advantage to have a non-profit entity, like a government or a charitable organization might say, “We really want to help pay open-source developers, we’re going to give this much money to it.” Do you think there’ll be any advantage to having maybe a non-profit entity that’s sort of attached to this?

Max Howell: Our DAO will be a non-profit entity. That’s why DAO’s are interesting. I wonder how they’re going to change over the next 10 years. Certainly it’s all so very nascent, but like the way you were describing it is like sponsorship bounties. Like Gitcoin, for example. And, you know, fundamentally, we don’t feel that sponsorship or bounties are functional for funding open source.

Open source is a bunch of people who have passion and need a steady income. They don’t want to have to wait for people to post bounties and then accept them, getting unsteady income in that respect, and sponsorship’s the same. And also, like sponsorship bounties really reward the top of the stack, projects that people really know about – Log4j was a great example of a project that nobody knew about, which everybody was using.

And Tea is by design, trying to fix the lower rungs, the Nebraska projects, like the XKCD comic that features the maintainer from Nebraska, who nobody knows is keeping the internet running.

Tidelift vs. TEA?

Michael Schwartz: You mentioned also that you are part of the Tidelift ecosystem, you’re a Tidelift developer, do you think in Tea.xyz, would that be better for you? Or would it be about the same?

Max Howell: Well, yeah, that’s the point. The project I get sponsored by Tidelift for is PromiseKit, which is this framework for iPhone that I developed about 2015, a few years after Homebrew. It was used by 100,000 apps. I’m not sure if that’s still the case, because Apple have released some fundamental technologies that make it, so you don’t need the Promise’s abstraction as much. But I haven’t checked in a while.

So, 100,000 apps, part of the motivation behind Tea was, for years, I’ve been saying, if every one of those apps pay me just $1 a year, then, that’s a good enough salary for me to not have to chase contracts, or join other companies and startups.

It’s not a great salary, but it’s a starting salary, where they can like make some other open source and maybe has 100,000 users, etc.

So, yeah, Tidelift gives me 400 bucks a month, which is very generous. And I maintain PromiseKit as a result to a certain extent. But I haven’t done a lot to it a long time. There’s a lot of things I could have done to it if it was more of a moneymaker.

This is part of the reason that we’re doing Tea, we’re building Tea is that when you think about all the people like myself, who’ve put tens of 1000s of hours into open source, a Homebrew loan was tens of 1000s of hours, the whole time I was having to either take contracts and then work two jobs, or save up some money and quit, so that I could work on open source full time.

Because I like open source, I want to work on open sources. It’s where I feel they’ve actually made a difference in this world, while building crappy apps for companies that are hoping to sell them for millions of dollars is really not as much of an impact on humanity at all. I need a reasonable salary for that.

And Tea’s goal is to make it, so that people like myself, who do make the open source that powers the internet can just make open-source full time. I can imagine how much further along we’d be, if everybody who’s contributed the open source could have been doing that full time, for the last 20 years. That’s how it should be.

First Startup?

Michael Schwartz: Is this the first company that you founded?

Max Howell: I’ve tried to found a few others years ago, 2012, trying to found a music startup with a friend. My co-founder, me and Timothy have tried to found a few here and there, made progress on some of them. And it’s difficult. Getting funding is difficult. Like I say, if Tea existed, I would be using Tea to build Tea in order to fund it. And you know, Web3 does change it. It makes it so you can tokenize, and then, basically, you’ve received investment in that respect.

So, the future is rosier for this kind of thing. I would hope that it enables more and more people to build technology that the world needs, without having to chase VC money.

Advice for Entrepreneurs?

Michael Schwartz: Do you have any advice for entrepreneurs who want to start a business around a piece of open-source software?

Max Howell: The truth of it is, you have to market what you’re doing heavily, find people on Twitter or Discord, and push what you’re working on, heavily. Probably nowadays, also means, making videos and being involved in more than just Twitter and GitHub. Because that’s how I made all my open source big. Monetizing it, that was always the trickier part. And let’s face it, a lot of open sources monetized nowadays is SaaS -Software as a Service. And that works well.

And before I figured out Tea, which was about eight, nine months ago now, it sort of came to me in a moment of inspiration, I was trying to build SaaS, which was going to be an open source one. That’s how I’d do it right now, if you’re going to go with the Web2 texts, but we’re hoping that Tea will enable entirely new ways of doing business with open source. We don’t want to change the nature of open source, but hopefully, it will enable people to seriously consider it as career open-source communities, essentially.

Michael Schwartz: Well, Max, thank you for your patient answers. I think that I understand Web3 a little bit better right now. And best of luck with Tea. And where should we go to find out more?

Max Howell: Tea.xyz is our URL. And from there, you can find our entry link which has some references to some of the material we’ve published elsewhere and find our white paper and our Discord. Discord has a dev channel, it’s probably the best place if you’re a dev.

We are also hiring. So, if you’re interested in changing how the Internet is built, then we have a number of positions available, from working on the package manager through to. Interestingly, I’m after a bunch of TypeScript Reactives.

Michael Schwartz: Awesome. Thank you so much, Max, for being on the show.

Max Howell: Thank you so much, Michael.

Michael Schwartz: If you want to hear more, on the episode 57 website, I will post additional interviews with Max and some Tea links. Thanks to the crew team for helping me pull this episode together. Once again, cool graphics from Kemal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.

Next month, I’ll talk to Avi Press, the CEO of Scarf. He has a lot of interesting thoughts around open-source data and how companies can use that data to better support their communities. If you liked this episode, don’t forget to share it on your favorite Web2 or Web3 social media channel. Until next time, thanks for listening.

The post Episode 57 – Tokenizing the FOSS Package Ecosystem, with Max Howell, Founder of Tea.xyz first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 33:29
Episode 55 – Miguel Valdés Faura, CEO and Co-Founder of Bonitasoft https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-55-bonitasoft-miguel-valdes-faura/ Wed, 02 Dec 2020 15:57:20 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=2003 Intro Mike Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is Episode 55, with Miguel Valdés Faura, CEO and Co-Founder of Bonitasoft. Not every tech company follows the same trajectory to success. Hypergrowth is great if your market supports it, but the world of infrastructure software is diverse, and...

The post Episode 55 – Miguel Valdés Faura, CEO and Co-Founder of Bonitasoft first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro



Mike Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is Episode 55, with Miguel Valdés Faura, CEO and Co-Founder of Bonitasoft.

Not every tech company follows the same trajectory to success. Hypergrowth is great if your market supports it, but the world of infrastructure software is diverse, and hypergrowth can subject your business to unreasonable risk.

To me, Bonitasoft was a reminder that a CEO’s responsibility can transcend shareholder value. While the primacy of shareholder value seems axiomatic in Silicon Valley, it’s worthwhile for entrepreneurs to weigh that risk. Miguel and his team did just that, and their success validates the idea that business models are not a one-size-fits-all proposition.

As a side note, as I was doing my research, I noticed that Miguel has interviews in Spanish, English and French. American CEOs are lucky to speak two languages, but three is pretty exceptional. Anyway, I hope you enjoy the interview. This was the last of 2020. So, without further ado, here we go.

Miguel, thank you so much for joining the podcast today.

BPM Market Overview

Miguel Valdés Faura: Thank you, Mike, for having me.

Mike Schwartz: So, although this is a business podcast, you’re a technical founder, and sometimes, it helps to have a high level of understanding of the market. Business Process Management, or BPM, it’s still an important way to think about how to apply technology, but the technology landscape has changed so much since 2001, I guess when you started the project, and even since 2011, when you started Bonitasoft. Why is BPM still a good way for companies to think about how to build applications?

Miguel Valdés Faura: Good question. So, it’s because companies – I like to say that it is all about processes, a ton of processes that are required to run a company, some that are more critical than others, but BPM technology has been here for a while to help companies, to rethink, re-invent and automate their processes, whatever, they are critical or not. Also, I think it is something that is here for a wider dimension, and of course, the market is evolving because also the needs of those processes are changing in organizations.

Project History

Mike Schwartz: So, the Bonita project itself started at the French National Institute for Research in Computer Science. The project was transferred to the Bull Group, and then, in 2009, you started BonitaSoft with Charles Souillard and Rodrigue Le Gall?

Miguel Valdés-Faura: Exactly.


Mike Schwartz: And also, over the years, how is the community grown? Is the Bull Group still involved, and are there other important contributors in the ecosystem?


Miguel Valdés Faura: BullGroup, which is now part of Atos, at the origin, is involved, but as a partner. It is one of those hundred employees, partners that we have – I’m talking about Consulting and System Integrators Partners that helps customers worldwide with the Bonita implementation, but nothing more, meaning that over the years, Bonita self has grown into an international community that goes beyond specific companies, but, also, having individuals working sometimes as freelance models, as part of the bigger companies.

And I think that’s one of the main achievements now. We have now a community of around 150,000 individuals working with Bonita, not all of them of course are contributing, it is only a small portion of this contributing code, but there is people participating in answering questions in the forum, or translating the products – there is a lot of activity in the Bonita community that is not relied only on one company.

Why No-Code Is No-Go?

Mike Schwartz: In an interview a few years back, you said that the no-code approach does not open the possibility for developers to write code that meets business needs. Can you expand on that? Don’t business people love drag-and-drop GUIs, to build BPM workflows?

Miguel Valdés-Faura: Yeah, a good one. So, probably, it was referring that with this new trend of local done, this new kind of developers, the thing some analysts were calling business developers, at some point, we were facing with people that are not skilled in development to build some complex applications, and at some point, they’re going to face some limitations. Of course, a lot of people like to build on applications, using drag-and-drop, as I mentioned, or visual tools, but when the application gets more complex, or when you need to customize a little bit more the application, at some point, developers need to be part of the game as well.

So, I’m not saying that it’s not useful to have business people participating in the development projects. I’m not saying that the local movement is not something that is real, I’m just saying that we need to find a balance between things that can be done graphically, and first that require code, and it’s about how those two different skill sets can collaborate, how business people or people without development skills, can also work on the same project with developers.

Probably, those two personas are not going to use the same thing.

Customer Profile

Mike Schwartz: Thousands of organizations use Bonitasoft, but switching to the business side a little bit, from a revenue perspective do you see the 80/20 rule, where 20% of your customers make up 80% of your revenues? And if so, what does that 20% segment look like, with regard to use cases or industry verticals?

Miguel Valdés-Faura: In terms of the verticals, of course, I think it’s not only something  -particularly Bonitasoft, all BPM vendors, you know, have a lot of traction in market that are highly competitive. So, for example, insurance, banking, telecommunications, because there is a lot of pressure to do better than the competition, because there is a lot of processes that are related about how you provide better services to your customers, and how are you going to retain those customers by providing good services.

So, those will be probably the main four sectors in which Bonitasoft is evolving and getting customers, and also, potentially the ones, in which other vendors are also evolving. In terms of the split or the size of the customers that we have, we have this idea from the very beginning to focus on medium and large organizations.

So, there are some BPM vendors that are focusing on smaller implementations, we are really focusing on complex implementations and meet large organizations. So, the majority of our customers, like 75% of our customers, will match that criteria. And the majority of the project implementation inside those projects are either core or critical to their business. We usually don’t start working with a customer in less critical business process, but this is part of our strategy. And, of course, our product is better suited for those complex implementation.

Value Proposition

Mike Schwartz: Kind of a basic question, but what would you say are the most important value propositions for your customers?


Miguel Valdés-Faura: First of all, we are selling a platform, not a product, so, what we want is like to bring together those two personas that I was referring in a previous question, so business people or less skilled people, in terms of technical skills, and how developers can work together. So, we have a platform, in which you have clearly separated the visual programming capabilities versus the coding capabilities. So, in a sense, we are taking the benefits of the majority of things that we see in an open-source project. So, extensibility, open architecture, which APIs, compatibility with other open-source technologies that are things that appeal to developers. And at the same time, we have an integrated platform, a unified platform, that is also providing visual capabilities to less technical people. And, also, this clear separation in which, depending on the skills that you have, you can use some of the capabilities of the platform, and depending of your skills, you can use some others – these are the things that make us different, and that people like about our solution.

Monetization

Mike Schwartz: Bonita project is open source, and Bonitasoft has a platform built around that – how exactly do you monetize?

Miguel Valdés Faura: So, we sell subscriptions – package additional capabilities to the open-source version, and also, some professional services. And those subscriptions, minimum is an annual subscription, are sold either for people that are deploying the Bonita platform on premise, or people that are using our cloud offering now. But, in two situations, we are basically adding capabilities on top of the open-source solution, like for example, monitoring capabilities and scalability. And we package that together with a professional support, SLAs, contractor warranties, as part of this subscription. Also, it’s a 100% of our probably related revenue is a recurring revenue.

Cloud Strategy

Mike Schwartz: Cloud hosting is really a great business model, and I heard you mention that you have a hosted offering. How has the hosted offering evolved over the years, and do you see that becoming sort of the most important way that you deliver the software? Would you say self-hosted is still going to be more important from a revenue standpoint?


Miguel Valdés Faura: Yeah, a good question. I think in our space, the BPM space, and particularly because of the nature of the projects that we target in our customers, as I was referring as core or critical, we still have a lot of people using the on-premise version, especially in banking insurance that are sectors that are still using a lot of on premise, or they are starting their cloud movement, using public clouds, but not really externalizing everything to SaaS solutions. So, on-premise is still really a big majority, but we have released our cloud service 18 months ago, and we already see a traction. So, there is more and more customers also embracing that new offering – I will say today is more like 80/20. We expect that this is going to change.

It took us a while to offer a Bonita Cloud version because we didn’t show a lot of demand previously. We, as I mentioned, we started seeing some companies that are more and more interested. We really believe that it’s going to be maximizing in the next years, but again, the on-premise is still the number one option today for our customers.

Prioritization Of R&D

Mike Schwartz: So, how do you prioritize your R&D effort, because you’re still contributing to the open-source project, but you are also building your commercial like extra features. And how do you prioritize R&D?

Miguel Valdés Faura: That’s a tricky one for every open-source company. Because you need to make also clear rules about what are the developments that are going to go open source versus the ones that are going to go commercial, and the same applies to the teams – do you have the same organization working on the two kind of features, do decide to have different organizations?

So, we have evolved over the years, but one thing hasn’t changed is that we have defined from the very beginning clear rules about what is open source and what is not. For example, we didn’t want our open-source version to be something that cannot be put into production, because that was not the essence for us, the essence for us as open source.

So, the open-source solution at Bonitasoft you can develop, and you can put it into production, however, for example, as soon as you’re talking about scaling – if you need to CCP, if you want to do clustering, those are the kind of things that, from the very beginning, have only been available in the commercial version.

Also, first of all, is about defining the rules, so, your development team knows what goes into one edition versus the other. Not only your development team, but also of course the community, the community using the open-source version and also your customers – it needs to be really clear. Secondly, over the years, we have evolved, also, in terms of how the development team is a structure, to be more focused on one product, one edition, meaning, one set of people for developers working, one part of the product that is either open source, or is commercial, which, of course, is a way simpler to manage from a management point of view.

Cloud Native Opportunity

Mike Schwartz: In the Cloud Native world, scaling is sort of table stakes, like Kubernetes out of the box is clustered, and my company Gluu, we’ve decided that we’re going to make scaling sort of part of the open-source, just because it seemed like it’s hard to get adoption in the Cloud Native world unless you support Kubernetes, and Kubernetes has clustering.

Do you see a similar trend in the BPM market? And are any challenges or opportunities around Kubernetes and the move to Cloud Native?


Miguel Valdés Faura: Even before Kubernetes, the move that we saw was the adoption of Docker. So, four years ago, we started to demand Docker super, as a way to use and deploy Bonita. So, that’s one of the first that we did. So, to certify a Docker image for people wanted to start their projects, it took us depending of the geography some time, we got that traction from the US, a little bit less in Europe in terms of adoption of the Docker image. Now, it’s a reality – there are more and more people using that. And, of course, those people are also asking now, “Okay, let’s combine that with Kubernetes.”

We have decided that Bonitasoft, that this is part of the kind of the capabilities that we can provide as part of our Cloud Edition. So, the elasticity capabilities that are offered to our Cloud customers is based on Kubernetes. And I think that the value to the customer is that we are able to manage that automatically for them.

This is something that we are at Bonitasoft proposing in our Cloud offering. But if someone wants to do it on premise, and they want integrate, the current Bonita on-premise version without the Kubernetes and manage Elasticity, they can do it.

But at Bonitasoft, we have a package to make it really simple for people who want to use the Cloud service.

Growth While Pivoting

Mike Schwartz: As you know, investors are super-focused on top-line growth. They want growth, growth, growth, but when there are major technology shifts, like from 2011 to today, seems like a different world. It’s hard enough to survive, let alone to grow a 100% per year. Can you talk about some of the challenges of achieving this high level of growth, especially if you have to pivot at the same time, like you probably did over the last couple of years?


Miguel Valdés Faura: A really good question. I mean, you know, it looks like hopefully things are changing, but when we started Bonitasoft off in 2009, and especially in the years that follows, looks like everyone needs to become a hyper-growth company. And of course, I really was trying to raise a lot of money, and we did it as well as Bonitasoft. And, of course, raising a lot of money means also at some point delivering really high growth. But things are changing, and I think that that’s okay, and that’s possible in some situations, it’s something you need to also be willing to do.

We wanted, at some point, growing the company that way at Bonitasoft, especially at the beginning, we decided to change. We decide to change because we wanted to build a more sustainable business, and of course, the level of research you take, if you are always following the hype- growth is a big risk. Because, of course, you are depending a lot of on money from investors, usually high-growth means high losses. So, you need to raise money. Of course, missing some of your targets can put the company at risk.

So, we decided five years ago to change, and embrace what we call a sustainable growth business model, in which profitability scheme for us, in which we try to grow as much as we can, if the company is profitable, and learn in environment in which people are enjoying their day-to-day work.

Now, we have to switch from one to the other, and I think that the pandemic that we are living these days is also reminding us that potentially that’s also a model that some other companies should consider..

Transition From Growth To Profitability

Mike Schwartz: That’s very interesting that you’re saying, “switch to high-growth as long as its profitable”, but how did you manage a relationship with your investors? Were they on board with that, or was there some friction around, saying, “We don’t want to accept this high level of risk?”


Miguel Valdés Faura: You mean, at the beginning, or when we decided to change to a more sustainable growth model?

Mike Schwartz: When you decided to change.

Miguel Valdés Faura: I think they were happy to see that after seven years of existence, we wanted to start looking to profitability. I think at some point that’s important for a company. And so, they were okay with that. And, then, of course we think that we have another kind of discussion with them because we are not asking any more money, the company is profitable for the last four years. So, then, do we need to deal with all the things like, okay, are we looking for an exit, are we looking to grow and do some acquisitions that we want to continue to grow the business organically – but, in any case, you are not forced to raise money which I think is good for us, and in some situations also good for investors.

Building The Sales Team

Mike Schwartz: So, it’s the technical founder one who’s been on the business side for a long time. Building a sales organization is really challenging – is there anything you’ve learned about building the sales team that you’d like to share with startup founders?


Miguel Valdés-Faura: Yes. It’s maybe because I’m also an engineer by training, but, of course, we did a lot of adjustments in the sales organizations over the years, and we’ve made a lot of mistakes and we’ve learned a couple of things. We made some great success, but you know, for the last four years, we are operating with sales methodology that probably you know this, it’s called Customer Centric Selling methodology, which is really focus on the value that you can bring to the customer, that is more focused on quality versus quantity, in which you do, not a lot of prospection, but you are really trying from a marketing perspective to have people really interested in having a discussion with you, and spending a little bit more time and trying to provide a solution that is, as I mentioned, to the problem.

So, then, you can surely acquire a new customer, but also make sure you can renew over the years. And this is one of the big things that we did. And we did it by having a mix in the sales team, people that are coming from different backgrounds, including engineering.

And I think that’s one of my first learning is that you can’t have people that have an engineering background that are doing exceptionally with that, and I think we’re seeing that with more and more companies.

Second, you need a methodology that is really focusing on providing value and delivering value to the customers. And this methodology needs to also be shared with marketing, and needs to be shared with the rest of the organization, including product teams know. And that has been a big change for us. Of course, we didn’t need that from one day to the other, but that move to this new methodology, having the right mix of people and focusing more on content and maturity of our leads than on quantity and prospection, has made a big difference for us.

Partner Strategy

Mike Schwartz: You mentioned that Atos was still a partner, and perhaps, there are other partners who are either bringing you business or you see as critical. But can you talk about like the role of like how the partner strategy has evolved over the years?


Miguel Valdés Faura: Today, we have three different kind of partners – we were talking about Atos, we have a category that we call Consultants and Systems Integrators Partners. As I mentioned, we have something like a hundred and plus of those partners, so, including CGI, including Atos, including Sopra, and then, other things that you in the U.S., you call it more boutique-like partners, or people that are more specialized in one particular sector. So, implementing projects in insurance or in banking. For example, in the U.S. people like Evoke, in Latin America people like Indra – this is one category. Those kind of partners are helping us either to identify new opportunities and also to do the implementation.

By the way, 62% of our new business is influenced by those consulting partners. Second category will be the technology partners. So, there’s no surprise here, this is about integration of our product with other products in a similar market. So, for example, we have those kind of partnerships with the UAiPath in the RPA space. We have this kind of partnership with a DocuSign. So, basically that means bi-directional integration between the two products. And I joined go-to-market, in which we think that the two products combined can bring more value to the customer.

And the third type of partners that we have are OEM Partners. So, it’s people or companies that are embedding our technology and reselling as part of their product. So, to name one that is more representative. Talend is doing that, Talend is that integration leader that is embedding Bonita as one of their offerings. So, those are the three kind of partners. And of course, this thing has been evolved, and has been over the years. So, we started with putting a lot of effort on Consulting and System Integrators Partners, and then we started to focus, in a second step, on more of the technology side of the story.

OEM Patnerships?

Mike Schwartz: You mentioned OEM partnership, which is interesting for open source, because I think that companies who want OEM can use the open source and become part of the ecosystem. What is the driver for a company to OEM in open-source product?

Miguel Valdés Faura: A good question. I think is that the nature of the technology that you are embedding, if you are embedding just Log4j for logging – that was, at least, used 15 years ago, – or Hibernate for persistence. Potentially, it’s the same done embedding, BPM engine or Workflow engine.

So, if you are embedding a solution, that is more like a project or a platform, that is in some way critical to the other solution that is embedding, potentially you’re going to look for, not only can I do it from a license perspective, but also, potentially, you are going to contact the other company to do a partnership. So, that’s what’s happening a lot in our ecosystem – embedding a VPN engine or embedding the whole platform, embedding a workflow solution is something that’s potentially going to be used for mission-critical things.

So, if that is the case, even if the license allows you to do it, potentially, you are going to also look for some help from the company that is building that. And of course, then, it could be also an issue with the license. You know, some of the licenses, for example, the GPL license are not allowed to embed directly without having an OEM equipment in place or changing the license. So, it could be either a license issue, or it could be that you need some helping if something goes wrong.

Licensing

Mike Schwartz: I normally don’t ask about license because I’ve actually been thinking about doing a whole another podcast, or maybe in a season or something, just on licensing, because it’s a complex topic.

Miguel Valdés Faura: Yeah.

Mike Schwartz: And, of course, Bonitasoft’s project’s been around for a long time, but is it GPL license – can you just talk for a second about the open-source license that you’re using, and maybe why?

Miguel Valdés Faura: The open-source project is really under the GPL license, and it’s more historical reasons, this is how we started the project. You know, at that time, it was the time when MySQL was – those kind of projects were appearing, it was the time of Enterprise middleware – so, we kept that license because that was also all discussions around open-core business model. And we didn’t change the scene that, for example, we are now also launching new ones, new products in which, we are also moving to some other license like Apache or MIT. But we kept, for the Bonita project, the GPL license because this is the one that get everything started.

Mike Schwartz: It sounds like the less permissive license actually has benefited you. But I think there’s sort of a knee-jerk reaction or policy among entrepreneurs these days to use permissive license, like MIT or patchy, but it sounds like GPL actually helped you in this case.

Miguel Valdés-Faura: Yeah, it kind of helped, for example, we’re talking about the OEM, it can help the OEM space, some of the people are going to see that there are some restrictions, and then, of course, there is this debate about, okay, but if I’m burying a GPL library, it’s going to be contaminating my project, but usually when you have that issue is because the project that you are building is usually something that you want to follow the open source, you want to commercialize something, just by liberating all those people work in open source, so, yeah, as you mentioned it, it’s always a complex discussion.

But, yeah, I think there are some benefits of using GPL, there are potentially some drawbacks depending of what do you want to build with that license – I think it depends. So, it is not magical rollover for what is the best license to use in your next project.

Keys To Growth In 2021

Mike Schwartz: So, there’s a lot going on today. We have the pandemic, moved to Cloud Native, changes in paradigms, like continuous delivery. What do you think are the keys to growth in the next few years?

Miguel Valdés Faura: I think nobody knows. I think we need to be humble, especially with everything and all those things that are going on, that are going on these days. But you know what, I will be back to my – what I was talking about the sustainable growth. I think that more than ever, being in a business, running a business in which you know that you are profitable, that you are of course trying to maximize, and you are ambitious to maximize the growth, if you are still profitable, having a strong customer base that this renewing year after year is what makes a big difference, especially when there are some situations that they want to do, are facing now.

Because, of course, if you don’t have that, and for some reason, you just stop signing new customers, or signing the new customer database that you were signing before. If you have a strong customer base, you’re going to suffer more than others. So, I will be back to that concept of sustainable growth because I think it’s what makes the company less risky, more sustainable in the long run.

Advice For Entrepreneurs

Mike Schwartz: You know, startups are roller-coasters. I personally don’t recommend starting a company, especially a tech company, to anyone who’d asked me, but for those people crazy enough to dive into entrepreneurship – do you have any advice for new entrepreneurs who are launching a business around open-source product?

Miguel Valdés Faura: I will have one. It’s obvious that I think it is good that we remember that from time to time, which is, there are no two companies that are alike, so, the same applies to founders. Don’t pretend to be somebody else. Of course, listen and learn from others in your ecosystem, but be yourself. And if you create a company, as you mentioned, if you are crazy enough to create the company, try to be surrounded by people that share the culture that you have in mind, the strategy that you have in mind. Don’t pretend to be a CEO that you are not. And that’s – I go back to – not all the companies need to be the same, not all the companies need to be unicorn, not all the companies need to follow the same business model, but you need to be really comfortable about the choices that you make, otherwise, it is going to be even harder than you know it simple journey.

Closing

Mike Schwartz: It’s 55 podcast. I always ask that question at the end – no one’s actually given that answer yet, but I have to say I agree with that a100%. So, thank you for being the 55th guest, and best of luck this year. And thank you so much for being on the podcast, Miguel.

Miguel Valdés Faura: Thank you very much, Mike, for inviting me. It was a real pleasure.

Mike Schwartz: Special thanks to the Bonitsoft team for helping us to schedule the interview. Editing by Ines Cetenji. Transcription by Marina Andjelkovic. Cool graphics from Kemal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.

This is the last episode of 2020. Next year, I’ll keep going, although probably at a somewhat slower rate. If you have any ideas for the direction the podcast should go in 2021, I’d love to hear your feedback. You can contact me on the website opensourceunderdogs.com. Happy holidays, founders! Hang in there, and keep an eye out for new Season 4 episodes after the New Year.


The post Episode 55 – Miguel Valdés Faura, CEO and Co-Founder of Bonitasoft first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 29:04
Episode 54: Justin Borgman, CEO of Starburst, the Company Behind the Presto Project https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-54-starburst-justin-borgman/ Tue, 27 Oct 2020 17:02:57 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=1974 Intro Mike: Hello, and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is the episode 54, with Justin Borgman, Chairman, CEO, and Co-Founder of Starburst, the company behind the Presto Data Access Project. Before we get started, I have a quick request – we all want to help open-source founders and startups....

The post Episode 54: Justin Borgman, CEO of Starburst, the Company Behind the Presto Project first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro

Mike: Hello, and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is the episode 54, with Justin Borgman, Chairman, CEO, and Co-Founder of Starburst, the company behind the Presto Data Access Project.

Before we get started, I have a quick request – we all want to help open-source founders and startups. I make the podcast, but I need your help to get the word out, so tell your friends, post on LinkedIn, tweet out a link, post on Hacker News, or follow me and share one of my posts on LinkedIn, whatever you think makes sense, go for it.

One of the themes of Machiavelli’s the Prince is Virtu e Fortunavirtu meaning excellence in your domain, and fortuna meaning luck, whether good or bad. I really like how the story of Starburst exemplifies this 500-year-old insight.


Justin has a ton of domain virtu. He has deep technical knowledge, but he’s also on the lookout to harness fortuna. He’s one of the few podcast guests to acknowledge it. And Starburst earns its name because it’s one of the most stellar open-source business success stories I’ve heard in the last few years.
There’s so many great insights in this episode, a lot to think about. So, without further ado, let’s get on with the interview.

What Is Presto?

Mike: Justin, thanks for joining the podcast today.

Justin: Hey, Mike, super glad to be with you.

Mike: Before we dive into the business stuff, I find it’s helpful to talk a little bit about the technology. Can you start by giving a brief history of the Presto project? What it’s good at, and how the community coalesced around it?

Justin: It was really back in 2012 for developers at Facebook, Martin, Dain, David, and Eric came together to create a new infrastructure project that would be a faster way of querying data at Facebook. Facebook, of course, collects massive amounts of data, hundreds of petabytes worth of data , and needed a faster alternative to a prior project that they also developed and they called Hive.

Hive was a SQL engine for Hadoop, and it just wasn’t fast enough. So, Presto was created to be a faster means of accessing that data. But it has one really important differentiation in addition to the speed, which is the ability to access data anywhere. So, it’s like a database without storage – that’s kind of one way to think about it.

So, it looks at storage in other systems, which could be Hadoop, it could be S3 and AWS, it could be a traditional database, like Oracle, or Teradata, or Snowflake. And regardless of where that data lives, Presto can reach it, query it, and deliver SQL-based analytics.

So, that’s kind of what makes it special, is the ability to access the data everywhere. And that’s gained particular momentum, I would say more recently, as many large enterprises have data silo problems, where they have data in a bunch of different databases, and are now perhaps moving to the Cloud in some fashion.

Mike: And if I’m not mistaken, high concurrency is one of the areas that make sort of this data access plain different?

Justin: Yes, exactly, it’s very fast, and can support high concurrency. And in a lot of ways, this technology was sort of, I like to say built in reverse, in the sense that it was tested at ridiculous scale from day one. You know, very often, when you start something new, you don’t really know how it’ll work at scale until you get people using it. But because it was really born out of the internet companies, Facebook, and Uber, Airbnb, and Netflix were all early adopters to use the technology, it was really tested, and at scale, and as a result delivers great performance and concurrency.

Origin Story

Mike: Starburst is not your first company, you are part of a team at the company called Hadapt that’s sold to Teradata in about three and a half years, I think.

Justin: Yep.

Mike: How did that experience lead you to Presto?

Justin: In a lot of ways, this is really a continuation of that journey that began 10 years ago. So, that was 2010 that I started Hadapt. Hadapt was a spin-out actually from Yale University and the computer science department – there’s some research called HadoopDB, which was pretty pioneering research at the time, in terms of thinking about Hadoop as a data warehousing solution, and being able to deliver fast SQL analytics on top of Hadoop.

So, we spun that out, raised Venture Capital, built that business over nearly four years, as you mentioned, and then sold it to Teradata. We had ups and downs, definitely lessons learned through that experience. And I think, really, my discovery of Presto after arriving at Teradata in 2014 was kind of an exciting opportunity to reimagine the strategy that we had with Hadapt.

So, Hadapt was the SQL engine for Hadoop, Presto is a SQL engine for anything essentially, allows you to access data anywhere.it was an opportunity to basically take all the lessons learned from the first experience and start to apply them over again.

It was actually my team from Hadapt that ended up contributing a tremendous amount of software to Presto, and working with the guys at Facebook, who created it to really make it an enterprise-grade piece of technology. And I think, as we started to see Presto get more and more capable, and see more and more people use it, that was what created the idea in our head that maybe there was a business to be formed around this.

Community Engagement

Mike: It’s a really interesting opportunity, and I can’t actually think of another example like it, but when I’m talking about open source, I sometimes talk about three types of open-source companies. One would be volunteer, where a bunch of guys or girls get together and write some piece of software that they love, but not necessarily for a business.

And then, I talk about corporate open source, where there’s some piece of software, where a company funds it, but it’s not their core business, but then, they realize that makes sense for them to collaborate like Kubernetes, let’s say ,and Google, and these pure-play, open-source companies, where the company behind it is developing it, and they’re the main contributors.


And so, lots of great open-source projects come out of this corporate open-source area, the podcast that is mostly focused on pure-play because they were trying to help entrepreneurs and founders start open source, use open source as part of their business model. But you’ve sort of, like, created a very interesting situation, where you have a mix of corporate and pure-play because you’re benefiting from, not just the community, but, really, Facebook is a big contributor to the project to — I heard almost 50/50. So, how’s that really evolved, and how do you continue to encourage this very symbiotic relationship?


Justin: You’re right. Preston has a very interesting history to it, an interesting journey. It started as a small project at Facebook. When we got involved at Teradata, we were able to apply a few million dollars a year of R&D budget into advancing that as well. And then, of course, you’ve got a few other companies contributing also along the way.

And, as a result, all of that kind of accelerates the development of the project. And I think that maybe what’s most unique here is not only that Facebook created great infrastructure software as a byproduct of their business – they’ve certainly done that before – but rather that there was kind of a commercial partner very early on, and myself, and my team at Teradata thinking about the commercial applications of this.

So, you know, back in 2014, Presto was still in its early days, Facebook wasn’t trying to monetize it obviously, that’s not their business, but we were already thinking about how this could be used by Fortune 500 customers, and what difference this could make to their business. And I think that led to its very enterprise-applicable evolution, and set us up really well to eventually commercialize this in 2017, when we left Teradata, the creators of Presto joined us from Facebook. And we went off on our way to build this business.

Idea Incubation

Mike: So, you were working on Presto while you’re at Teradata. And did Teradata ask for any equity, or how did that work when you told Teradata, “We want to start this company basically working at Teradata? Like, what was that like?

Justin: Yeah, well, what was interesting about that – and I guess just to set the context, I think Teradata, from 2014, when they acquired my company through to probably today, has gone through various iterations of kind of rethinking their overall strategy, in terms of how they evolved into this next generation of sort of Big Data platforms. Because they had great success in the ‘80s, ‘90s, and early 2000s, as this kind of monolithic data warehouse, where you would ingest everything and store it in one place.

But obviously that became very expensive over time. And the appliance model, hardware and software combined, wasn’t necessarily set up for this future as people move to the cloud. So, they’ve gone through a lot of iterations. And it was really in that iterative process, where they weren’t really clear where they wanted to go, that they actually felt like Presto is maybe a distraction for them.

So, that actually created the opportunity, I think, for us, to say, well, we think it’s a little more than a distraction. And, you know, we’d be happy to sort of take that off your hands and work on this together.

So, it was a very amicable split – we remain partners, we’re still partners today, where we work together on some customer accounts, the technologies work together, we can access data in Teradata, for example, from Presto. So, that partnership remains. But it was one that I think for them, they viewed us as sort of taking Presto off their hands because there were maybe close to a dozen companies within their customer base that were using Presto. So, we were able to deliver really first-class support to those customers, you know, not provide any interruption there, even as we left and formed this new business. So, they don’t own equity, it’s purely a partnership.

Identifying Opportunity

Mike: It’s just amazing like how you deal your business, is you got a huge company Facebook to help you grade and test this infrastructure. You got to do R&D in Teradata, and then you started the business with customers – it doesn’t get any better than that really.

Justin: Now, you’re absolutely right. And believe me, the good fortune is certainly not lost on me. You know, advice I give to entrepreneurs of any type, not just open-source entrepreneurs, is to just have your eyes open to opportunity. I think it passes us all by all the time, and very often we miss it. And I think seeing it, and then, you know, running and jumping on it, it certainly has been beneficial in my career. I’m even going back to my first company and spinning out technology from Yale, which you could argue was the great benefit of various government research grants, funding that research in the first place. So, keeping the eyes open and seeing an application for where it could become a business.

When To Raise Money

Mike: So, initially, you didn’t have to raise money because you had some customers that came that provided some runway, but you did raise a series A, and I guess, October 2018, so, pretty recently. So, what was in the decision process to say, “Okay, now capital is going to help us.”, like what were some of the benchmarks that you reached, that helped you say, “Now is the time we should do that.”?

Justin: So, that’s exactly right. We started without raising any capital. That allowed us to build a profitable cash-flow positive business over those first two years of operating, which I think, by the way, as an aside, gave us a lot of opportunity to be patient and sort of think through exactly what we wanted our go-to-market strategy to be, what kind of strategy we wanted to take around monetization.

And we didn’t have the pressure of investors necessarily breathing down our neck, which I think many, many entrepreneurs have in those early days. So, I think it was a great way to start a business, what forced us to change and actually consider taking capital was really a realization that the market opportunity was bigger than we felt like we could actually satisfy growing at purely an organic rate.

So, we took that series A really as a growth round, you know, even though it’s called the series A, I think it’s a little bit misleading, because it’s probably more like a series B for most companies in that. Not only was it a large amount of money 22 million in that first round, but it was really deployed towards expansion and rapidly growing the business. Less so about proving product/market fit, which is more typical in a series A.

As you said, we did a series B shortly thereafter, which was probably more like a series C, adding another 42 million. So, we’ve gone from raising nothing to now 64 million. And really I think that was all made possible by really building the fundamentals first. Making sure you have that product/market fit sorted out, and then, you know, applying fuel to the fire to expand.

Revenues Pre-Investment

Mike: What was the revenues when you raised the series A?

Justin: Yeah, well, if it was 12 months looking forward, I would say it was already looking north of $10M at that point. So, that allowed us to really take the funding and apply it to, again, expansion rather than kind of sorting out the basic product details.

Mike: And what year did you actually start the company?

Justin: 2017.

Mike: That’s pretty amazing – two years to go to $10M. It’s pretty stellar.

Justin: Thank you. I mean, again, I think a big advantage here was that, in some ways, this was like building the same company over again – I mean, there are a lot of differences between this and my first, but they’re also enough similarities, just in terms of the types of customers that we sell to, the types of use cases, the types of problems that they’re trying to solve. So, I think that historical knowledge was advantageous for us to just move a little bit faster this time around than we did that the first time.

Balancing R&D Investment

Mike: Okay, switching gears a little bit into more basic business stuff. You mentioned in one of your previous interviews that I listened to, that Starburst is basically pursuing an open-core strategy. So, performance, robustness, security patches that goes into open source, things like connectors, security, ease of use, I guess GUI deployment stuff, goes into the core. One of the questions that I’ve sort of wonder about is, how do you decide how to prioritize R&D in open source versus the enterprise features when you go the open-core route?

Justin: Yeah, I mean, I think that’s the key question. So, it makes sense why you’re asking it, and I think it has to be on the mind of every open-source entrepreneur. And it’s a delicate balance because, on the one hand, you want to make the open-source project as useful as possible to get widespread adoption. Because really that’s your lead generation vehicle – I think that’s the way to think about it.

A lot of people say open source is really just another form of a freemium business model. There’s a free component, and that just happens to be open source in an open-source model. And then, how do you kind of upsell to the Enterprise version. So, for us, I think the logic was, what are the reasons why people use Presto anyways in the first place.

And we think performance is a core element to that. So, we wanted to make sure that performance is always great, right out of the box, with the first experience of it, including the open-source version. So, that’s why a ton of work goes into open-source around performance enhancement, scalability enhancements, those kinds of things.

And then, we think about, well, what do people in enterprises, who are willing to pay for this stuff, what do they want. And that’s where it is, things like security features, which are just essential for any large, mature enterprise things, like role-based access control, data masking, if you’ve got social security numbers or credit card numbers, being able to mask digits appropriately, having audit logs for querying.

And then, because Presto access is all these different types of data sources, it also made logical sense that if you’re going to access a database like Oracle, or Teradata, or IBM, all of which are very expensive in their own right, well then, a customer, probably, is willing to pay for enhanced connectors to get faster throughput to those systems.

So, that was kind of the logic was trying to like think through what are the enterprise features that someone is willing to pay a premium for, versus what just produces an out-of-the-box great experience. Because I think so much about open source is really people doing their own self-evaluations of the technology. So, self POCs, if you will, so, you want to make sure that’s great, because you can’t control that. You may not even know who downloaded it in the first place. So, that’s where you really want to put I think a lot of energy into the open-source project. And then, it’s as more of those production features that are important to the larger enterprises, where those I think you can hold back.

Why Not 100% Open Source?

Mike: I interviewed Mike Olson from Cloudera, you might know him.

Justin: I do, oh, yeah.

Mike: He was one of my first guest, and he gave a very similar comment to what you were just saying. And he was quite emphatic about it. And yet, Cloudera recently switched to a 100% open-source strategy. And other open-source companies have also, for example, Chef, and of course some of the older, Linux distributions are, RedHat and SUSE are all open source.

And so, one of the things I’ve been wondering myself is, you can use the open-core strategy. It makes perfect sense I think to business people, but I also wonder, this license is paying for the right to use the software. Do you think that customers are actually paying for the right to use, or they’re paying for the engagement with your organization? And do you think, if you made it all open source, it would actually negatively affect your revenues, or customers would still want to engage with Starburst a company?


Justin: I think I can speak from experience here, because part of what’s interesting about our history is that we’ve kind of evolved through the various open-source business models in our brief history. So, when we first started the company, we didn’t have any proprietary IP, so we naturally just sold support contract. So, the early customers that we started with were just support contracts.

I think the challenge that we quickly identified is that support alone is not the most compelling value proposition. It is to some, I’m not saying it’s not, but it’s not a sufficiently compelling I think to win over a broad set of customers.

I think that’s where the open-core model, at least for us, really created an inflection in the business, where, you know, now we had a real tangible reason. And, by the way, for what it’s worth, I think we learn this actually from our own prospects, that those who are actually huge fans of Presto, who are huge fans of us even, who were champions of what we’re doing, but couldn’t quite get the purchase across the line in those early days and that first year of our operation, because they couldn’t justify or explain to their boss why one would have to pay for something that was free essentially. And that was the tricky conversation was like, “Well, you get this for free, why would you pay for it?” Like, “We don’t need support, you guys are smart, you can support this, right?” And those are the kinds of conversations that can take place. So, I think that’s where the open-core model is really helpful to the business.

Monetization Strategy

Mike: You’re selling a product that’s almost like a data access product, like I call the Presto Interface, and it connects two back-end databases. How do you price an interface, like what are the buckets – I don’t need to know the price but I’m just wondering like, how do you land and expand, and how do you set up the model, so that it’s easy enough for customers to understand, and you can charge enterprise software rates for it?

Justin: The way that we monetize this is based on CPU consumption. Technically, we actually anchor on Virtual CPU consumption because so many of our customers deploy in Cloud environments. So, that’s the underlying metric, and the reason that’s a good proxy for us is because basically Presto is a technology that scales out super effectively, and is leveraging compute-intensively to execute the query.

So, it’s basically, like, the more queries you have, the more data you’re accessing, the more complexity of the workload, and the more users who are hitting the system you talked about, the strong concurrency that Presto provides. Those are kind of the dimensions that drive CPU consumption up, and we just monetize with that. It’s a straightforward metric I think that customers easily understand, and seems to work for us.

Optionality

Mike: In one of your previous talks I listened to, you talked about optionality, and how you recommended basically that optionality essentially drives freedom – how does Presto help you get that optionality?

Justin: Presto creates optionality by virtue of being disconnected from storage, is essentially not having its own storage layer. I used the analogy in the beginning that we’re like a database without storage. The other way I put it for people who are familiar with data warehousing is, we provide data warehousing analytics without the data warehouse. That’s another way to think about it.

So, because of that, it basically allows you to think about Presto as an abstraction layer, above all the data sources that you already have. And you can kind of skip the complex and time-consuming task of having to move data around, create copies of data, ETL it, extract it, transform it, and load it into another system, instead you can just do that at query time, and access that data, and get your results.

So, that gives you a lot of flexibility, and I think one of the ways we’ve seen that play out is, we have a lot of customers that have a classic data warehouse, maybe it’s Teradata or Oracle. And then, they’ve got some kind of a data-lake strategy, and maybe that’s either Hadoop on-prem, or maybe it’s S3, or some Cloud-object storage.

And the first step might be to use Presto to just join tables between these two systems. You’ve got some kind of user behavior logs in your data lake, and you’ve got billing data in your classic data warehouse, and you want to be able to correlate the behavior with the billing, let’s say. That would be a very common use case for us. You can do that with a simple query and Presto.

Now, what that allows you to do then, as a second step, is, essentially, hide from your own end-users, be them internal analyst, data scientist, or even customers. Where the data actually lives, they don’t need to know that they need to go to the data warehouse to get the billing data, and they need to go to the data lake to get the user behavior – they’re just submitting a query, and they don’t know where the data lives anymore.

And by doing that, you’re able to actually decouple your end-user from where the data is stored and give the architects in the organization the ability to now decide, based on cost or performance, where that data should actually live. So, you don’t need to pay Oracle or Teradata tremendous amounts of money to store your data anymore. That is, of course, the most expensive storage you’re going to find.

You could instead choose object storage, like Ceph from RedHat, or there’s a company on the West Coast called MinIO, which creates S3-compatible object storage. And that’s very inexpensive, relatively speaking. And you can deploy all of your data, or start to migrate your data into this lower-cost storage, and still be able to access it, while your end-users are none the wiser to where the data lives – they’re just getting their results. So, I think that’s where you kind of get to create this optionality and be flexible about where you put your data over time.

Mike: In addition to the technical level, I always think about optionality as, does the open-source license itself also lead, or open-source infrastructure in general, also lead to more optionality and freedom?

Justin: For sure. I mean, I think the notion of not having vendor lock-in is really important to customers. Increasingly so, I think they’ve been burned over decades of very expensive technology that becomes legacy technology, and then, their stock and the pricing goes up. And they don’t feel like they have much ability to resolve that. And I think the open-source license in and of itself gives customers a lot of comfort, in knowing that, you know, a worst-case scenario, they can always roll this themselves, with the open source. But also, Presto is able to read open data formats, which is also great. Because I think data lock-in is probably the worst kind of vendor lock-in.

And in a traditional database system, once the data is loaded into the database, it’s kind of not easy to get access to or get the data out, without continuing to pay for that database system. But if you’re using open data formats, which we’d really pioneered during the Hadoop era, these are like ORC or Parquet, if you’re familiar with those file formats, you can store them anywhere and query them with a multitude of tools. You could use Spark to train machine-learning models, working off the same Parquet files that you’re querying via SQL for Presto. And I think that gives customers a lot of flexibility as well.

Open Source V. Commercial Market Size

Mike: I read a lot of articles about how enterprises are really moving towards open source, certainly when you look at the large consumer-facing services, like you mentioned, Netflix, Facebook, etc., they’re building a lot on open source. Then, you look at the size of the market, and you see that, actually, from a market percentage of open-source software is still only a tiny amount – is the move to open source really real, or is it more hype than reality?

Justin: When you say the market is small, do you mean measured in dollars, or what’s the metric there?

Mike: Dollar, yes.

Justin: Yep, makes sense. And that’s the key piece. I think it’s probably super widely used, but the percentage of open source that actually gets monetized is relatively small. And I think that’s what’s translating to the overall dollar amount, seeming small, relative, to the proprietary solution. I think if you measured in terms of impact to businesses and organizations, I think it’s actually probably the reverse actually, where you might have more open-source software having bigger impact than the proprietary.

But, of course, the challenge – and I suppose this is the purpose of your podcast – is figuring out how to monetize that effectively, so that you can build a successful business, while having that broad impact that open source provides. And I do think that, as vendors, we’ve gotten smarter over the years about how to do that.

I mean, the way I think about open-source business models over history is that it started with the sort of pure-play support model, just offering support, nothing proprietary. I think kind of Generation 2 was the open-core model that we’ve spent time talking about. You know, Cloudera popularized that, as did many other companies. And I think Generation 3, which is actually where we’re moving as well as a company, is cloud-hosted, SaaS offerings.

And, basically, being able to make part of the value proposition, the simplicity of the solution that you can deliver as a SaaS, and I think data bricks is a great example of that. So, I think that’s kind of the next frontier. And I think, as more and more open-source companies move in that direction, I think they’ll probably have better success in monetizing that background usage of the open-source. Because, there’s so much you can control now from a SaaS perspective to really enhance the experience, that is just easier for customers to use your SaaS solution, rather than having to maintain it themselves.

Starburst Cloud Strategy

Mike: I normally ask companies if they’re developing a SaaS offering. And I think that there are some companies where it’s been really successful like MongoDB, Eli Horowitz from MongoDB is emphatic that cloud is the best business model and everyone should be doing cloud. In doing the 50+ podcast, I found that the results have been mixed, where sometimes companies find that it’s a good way to reduce the try by fly time, where the cloud offering is a good introduction, but then the revenues are mostly derived from the enterprise, like self-hosted version.

And it takes a lot of effort to actually — it’s almost like a whole new product, like you’re building a software platform, a great software platform, and then, building the SaaS is almost like a totally new product in different business endeavor. What’s Presto done in this area? Are you working on it? And do you have any thoughts about how that experience is going, sort of making a cloud offering out of the software?

Justin: We definitely are working on it, and we have been actually for quite some time. And it is hard work. I think there’s no doubt about it, but I do think that some recent innovations around Kubernetes actually make this easier than it maybe was a few years ago. Because Kubernetes can kind of create a uniform, almost like operating system, if you will, that you can deploy your software within, and therefore, sort of create the software once, rather than having to have all these different kind of custom versions for different types of deployments.

I think that’s a game-changer. It’s certainly something we’re betting heavily on, as we approached that by trying to create the same experience, regardless of where customers deploy.

Single-Tenant V. Multi-Tenant SaaS

Mike: Most of the old cloud services were multi-tenant, but, are you thinking, like with Kubernetes, we could maybe build a single-tenant and deliver sort of like, “We’ll host it for you, you’ll host it.”, but it’s going to be sort of the same thing?

Justin: That’s exactly right, yeah. You know, I don’t want to give away too much of our strategy just yet because we haven’t released the cloud product yet. But I think those are really important concepts that you highlighted there, that we’re very interested in.

Building A Sales Team

Mike: So, something you must have done a really good job at is building the sales organization, because $10M in sales hasn’t happened by accident. And I think sometimes founders underestimate how difficult it is to build a sales and marketing organization – did you have any thoughts or advice you could share on, like how that went for you, like, how you pulled it off, like how do you do it?

Justin: Yeah. I think the first step I would say is trying to understand yourself as the entrepreneur – what the sales process looks like, like, what are customers buying, how do they understand the value proposition. And I’m a big believer in entrepreneurs selling the first few customers themselves. I think you learn so much, even from a product management perspective of what you need. You get to experience what your sales reps will experience when you start to scale up. So, I’m a huge advocate of that.

The second thing I would say is find a great sales leader. Because you know there are folks out there who have done this many times before, and know what it takes to sort of scale up a sales organization. And, certainly, that was impactful for us in finding our VP of sales, who’s done a great job of really scaling up that organization quickly.

Team

Mike: One question I had was, the pandemic has changed things were much more remote –  were you remote before the pandemic, and what’s your plan for growing the team in the next couple of years?

Justin: We were not entirely remote, but we did have some level of distributed nature to our team. Before the pandemic, we had major teams in Boston, the Bay Area, and then, actually Warsaw Poland as well, as an important development center for us. So, we kind of had to work across these three geographies, which are obviously spread out by 9 hours of time zones. And I think that gave us maybe a head start on the pandemic. But to be perfectly frank, I mean, I would much rather go back to actually having an office, and being able to interact on a one-on-one basis personally, with so many of these people.

Because I think what’s been weird for us is, we have scaled so quickly this year that I have not met probably half of our employees at this point, which is just a weird thing, to have grown the company so much. And the only interactions I’ve had have been over a Zoom call. So, that part I miss. I do think we’re all trying to make the best out of it, of course. And I think good best practices are sort of documenting everything, having frequent all-hands meetings, where you get everybody together, but there’s still no real substitute I think for one-on-one interaction.

Founder Advice

Mike: The last question, any advice for new entrepreneurs who are launching a business, and they want to use open-source software development as part of their business strategy?

Justin: My advice would be to think early about that key question that you asked earlier in the podcast about what your monetization strategy is going to be, and on along what metrics are you going to, or what criteria I should say, are you going to be separating the enterprise value proposition from what you give for free, and I think kind of have a strategy early on and stick to it. Because I think that will just make the decision-making process so much easier for you as you go along. You won’t have to debate each and every feature that you come up with – you’ll just sort of know because it will fall into a framework. That would be my piece of advice.

Close

Mike: Justin, thank you so much for sharing all this knowledge and experience with us.

Justin: Thank you, Mike. This was fun, and it was great meeting you.

Mike: Thanks to the Starburst team for reaching out and coordinating the podcast. Audio editing by Ines Cetenji, transcription and episode website by Marina Andjelkovic. Cool graphics by Kemal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.

Next time, we’re joined by Miguel Valdes Faura, CEO and Co-Founder of Bonitasoft, a global provider of BPM, low-code, and digital transformation solutions.

Until next time, stay safe, and thanks for listening.

The post Episode 54: Justin Borgman, CEO of Starburst, the Company Behind the Presto Project first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full
Episode 53: Rajoshi Ghosh, Co-Founder of Hasura, Controlling Access to Data with GraphQL https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-53-hasura-rajoshi-ghosh/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 16:27:49 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=1937 Intro Mike: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 53, with Rajoshi Ghosh, co-founder of Hasura, a relatively young startup, using GraphQL to connect Enterprise data. I’m happy to report that Rajoshi is the first Indian national we’ve had as a guest on the podcast, a...

The post Episode 53: Rajoshi Ghosh, Co-Founder of Hasura, Controlling Access to Data with GraphQL first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>

Intro

Mike: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 53, with Rajoshi Ghosh, co-founder of Hasura, a relatively young startup, using GraphQL to connect Enterprise data. I’m happy to report that Rajoshi is the first Indian national we’ve had as a guest on the podcast, a trend which I hope continues. Although she’s normally based in the Bay Area, Rajoshi was in Bangalore in late July when we recorded this.

Before we get started, I have a quick request – we all want to help open-source founders and startups. I make the podcast, but I need your help to get the word out, so tell your friends, post on LinkedIn, tweet out a link, post on Hacker News, or follow me and share one of my posts on LinkedIn, whatever you think makes sense, go for it.

As I mentioned, Hasura is a young startup, but given their success in momentum, I thought it’d be interesting to hear their stories sooner than normal. If you’re interested in GraphQL you might also want to listen to episode 41, with Geoff Schmidt, the founder and CEO of Apollo.

So, without further ado, here is Rajoshi Ghosh, co-founder of Hasura. Welcome to the podcast. Thank you for joining us today.

Rajoshi: Thank you so much for having me, Mike. I’m really happy to be here.

Origin

Mike: What’s the origin story of Hasura?

Rajoshi: At that time, Michael, we started working together really long time back, and I think at that point, we really wanted to work on something that would make application development easier, but we did not know what shape or form this would take,  and so, what we started doing was, we started building products for — started off with friends, and then, moved on to like local startups and then started working with one of the largest banks out there, help consulting with them.

We realized that if we were building enough products across different types of companies and different industries, then we would learn a lot about the different businesses, and also, it gives us an opportunity to try and build tooling that can work across companies of different sizes and different industries and verticals.

So,we got into this consulting business that we did, but the entire time we had a small team that was continuously building different products that could be used across different clients that we were working with. So, we did that for about three and a half years, and then, it came to a point, where we built a bunch of these tools, and you know, we were faced with the decision of signing like a multi-year contract for a consulting gig with a really large bank or actually going back to saying, “Okay, let’s take these products to market and build a business out of it.

So, we decided to start Hasura, wind down the consulting practice. So, that’s kind of how we set up the tools, that, like, parts of Hasura were built. So, what we did after that was, we spent a few months taking these different pieces that we built to market, trying to open-source a bunch of them, saw how folks were reacting, trying to understand the business implications of these products being used.

And that’s kind of how the Hasura GraphQL engine, which is our open-source product sort of came about. You know, we spoke to a bunch of people, realized that data access was a big problem that people seem to be struggling with across all kinds of companies, and again, different sizes of businesses. So, that was the piece that when we open-sourced and we wrote about it, and we put it out, and I think the first blog post that we had about our product resulted in our Fortune 500 health care company, reaching out to us and saying, “Hey, we really want this.” So, we knew we were onto something. So, it started out with this consulting practice, building pieces of this data access problem, from there, and then kind of polishing it up and launching it as the Hasura GraphqQL Engine in 2018.

How Is Hasura Different From Apollo?

Mike: A few episodes back, we had Geoff Schmidt, one of the founders of Apollo GraphQL, and although this is a business podcast, not a tech podcast, we have a lot of tech listeners out there. So, maybe you could just give a quick overview. I know that Apollo is part of the community, you’re part of the community, and the products are different, but maybe you could just give a quick overview of like how the products fit in the market?

Rajoshi: Absolutely. At Hasura, we kind of came at this problem, from the data access angle, we were trying to solve the data access problem, and back in our consulting days, we have actually built our own version of GraphQL called Urql, and we had that whole thing going. And every time we would talk to people about what we were building – and this was around the time GraphQL was getting popular, people would tell us, “Hey, this sounds an awful like GraphQL, why don’t you add support for GraphQL?”

So, that’s how we sort of braided into the GraphQL space, but we sort of came at it from the data access piece, so, what Hasura as a product does today is the service that you connect to your database and other data sources, and it kind of instantly gives you GraphQL APIs. So, it’s sort of short-circuits, the path, like you don’t really need to build a GraphQL server, Hasura kind of becomes that piece in the middle that connects to your database and other services, and gives you these APIs. And Hasura gives you a metadata engine, where you can specify the relationships between your different pieces of data – you can add authorization, logic, we have a very granular authorization system built in. And then, you can start accessing these APIs directly from your front-end clients.

That’s how we fit into the GraphQL ecosystem. And now, we have our – Hasura is available as a cloud product, and what you also have is, you have a lot of features that help you kind of run Hasura production. And there’s a little bit of overlap with some of the things that Apollo engine does, which is basically, like monitoring and analytics, and sort of add that API layer. So, these are the features that we have in common, but the problems that we’re solving are very different.

I think Apollo is coming at it from the side of being, like a GraphQL Gateway, where every different service speaks GraphQL, and they’re kind of the GraphQL Gateway. And they are building tooling at that GraphQL Gateway sort of layer, where, we are sort of more on the infrastructure layer, where we are solving the data access problem. And we give you GraphQL APIs.

Lessons Learned

Mike: If you could go back to that day when you said, “Okay, we don’t want to take this contract, we want to move forward with a software company.” That must have been a little while back, but if you could go back to that day, would you do anything differently in terms of how you executed after that?

Rajoshi: That’s a very interesting question. I would say not. Because what happened, like, the steps that sort of followed from there, we took the product, we had built some great text, so, we raised some seed money based on some of the tech built, we took that to market.

And once we put out the GraphQL engine on like, we did a show and launch like a Hacker News launch. And that was a pretty good launch that a lot of people found out about the product, and usually what happens is with Hacker News launches, they are very transient. Somebody finds out about it on one day, sometimes it goes great, but sometimes, there are new products being launched that every single day.

But I think what helped us sort of stick around after that initial launch was the fact that when people started trying it out and looking at our documentation, there were two things that I think really helped us over there. One was that either documentation was very complete. This was also because this was a problem that we’ve been at for a while.

And the second thing was that getting started experience was magical, like it was 30 seconds to your first GraphQL API. You would connect it to an existing database, existing Postgres database. And you would instantly get APIs. So, that sort of helped us get the word around, got people excited. And they spoke about it to each other, and that started off our sort of developer adoption journey.

So, we were still tagged Alpha back then, and we already saw all kinds of companies starting to use Hasura, and putting it in a very critical part of their stack. So, what happened is, we hadn’t actually started building a commercial product just then, we just put this out and we were still trying it out. But because of the kinds of companies who’ve started using us, they started calling us inside, saying, “Hey, you know what, we’re using this — if this goes down like who are we going to talk to, like, can we sign a contract with you. And then, he started getting these calls from companies, and that also helped us sort of like inform our kind of roadmap of how we were going to build into our Enterprise product. And then, we launched that earlier this year.

I think the journey has been one of learning, and on all sides of things, like growing an open-source community, growing the usage of an open-source software, and then building a commercial product around it – that’s been a really good journey. And I think the fact that people really, like, the commercial versions of the product as well is something that comes from having been through the journey with our users, listening to our customers and working alongside them over the last two years.

Monetization Strategy

Mike: So, that pivot that you’re describing is really difficult to make from open-source project to commercial product, and you’re probably still making that pivot as we talk, but can you talk about what are your thoughts about the strategy for whether – I heard you mention that you launched a cloud service – that’s certainly a fantastic business model. There’s also a lot of innovation around open core, making certain parts of your product, commercial vs. open source. So, how have you figured out how to monetize some of the open source to fund the company?

Rajoshi: I think the way we’ve been thinking about what comes apart of sort of our commercial offerings is, things that companies using GraphQL engine in production will start needing, you know, when they are in production. Things like monitoring and analytics, stuff like query capture, so that you’re able to create allow lists when you’re in production, prevent breaking changes with regression testing, great limiting of your queries – these are kinds of features that people need when they’re in production. So, these are the kinds of things that we put in our commercial versions.

And the core GraphQL engine, which sort of gets you building and then, you need to self-manage, and you need to build all of these toolings yourself, but the call that sort of gives you the APIs and helps you connect to data systems – that’s in the open-source part. Because that’s part of your critical infrastructure, and you know, being an open-source product, if you’re in the infrastructure I think is almost given these days.

Cloud Positioning

Mike: What’s the positioning of the cloud product? I understand you just launched that, but what is your vision for? Is that going to be a major part of the revenue streams, or is it just from so people can get started and kick the tires quickly – where do you think that fits?

Rajoshi: It’s very new. We just actually announced a general availability, we launched it about 4 weeks ago. So, it’s very, very new, but we do foresee it being a critical part of our like revenue stream going forward. So, what we did is, we actually re-engineered a sort of open-source engine for it to be like a true cloud SaaS product. Both of the things you mentioned are important in the sense that getting started with Hasura on cloud is something that we absolutely care about, that being the best experience for you to get started on Hasura, so that’s extremely critical to us that anybody who wants to try Hasura, the experience of getting started on cloud should be magical.

So, that’s very important, but it’s also something that we’re building for, you know, companies running Hasura at significant amounts of traffic and scale introduction. We have interesting sort of things that we’ve built into the cloud, and one of those is sort of like dynamic data caching. And that’s something that we’ve — I know that the podcast is going to be out about three weeks after we speak, but actually in just about an hour, my co-founder’s going to be speaking about server-side caching and dynamic data caching as part of the GraphQL summit, where he’s going to talk about how we’ve built it, and what is our sort of vision of the cloud, which is something like CDN for data. So, that’s kind of where we see it going, where you build, you connect your data sources.

Data is being fragmented, and data is everywhere – it’s in your databases, it’s a multiple data sources, and you have this managed infrastructure piece in the middle that just has to connect to all of these data sources, magically get this API. And it’s fully managed, it scales, it’s super fast. And so, yeah, that’s kind of the way we look at the cloud product.

Value Prop

Mike: You mentioned that Hasura is almost like a data connection layer. One of the main value propositions must be getting access to your data, but what are some of the other reasons that driving Enterprise customers in particular.

Rajoshi: I think for Enterprises specifically, since that was your question, I think one of the things that we’re seeing and that our Enterprise customers are seeing is that time to value and time to market. So, as people like building with Hasura, and we recently had our user conference, where, Philips healthcare, one of the Solutions architect there, who’s been a Solutions architect for 26 years, spoke about how something that they were building with Hasura would have typically taken them two to four years, but build and ship this product in under a year.

So, companies and Enterprises are saving like quarters and like years of work by using Hasura, because Hasura is just – you get these APIs with access control out of the box. This could be anywhere from like 40 to 90% of the backend logic that you need to write. So, that’s a huge benefit. And that’s kind of what is also helping Hasura spread by word of mouth within the Enterprise. Once one team starts using it, other teams sort of see the pace at which people are building, and that’s helping the word spread within Enterprise for us.

So, that’s one. The second – there’s two other things that, again, we’ve heard our users talk about. One is having better domain understanding. There is this layer that connects to all of your different data sources. You sort of have a better understanding of your domains. And that helps architects and that helps team lead sort of build faster, because as things are very fragmented, Hasura kind of brings that unified view of your different access control rules across different data sources. That also adds to the speed aspect that I spoke about, but that’s also in itself with huge benefit that enterprises are seeing today with Hasura.

And the third one is enhanced security, and again, each of these points of sort of building on the previous thing that I spoke about, which is, we have the Hasura console, which is this UI, where you can see all of these different access control rules. And so, you’re able to see very granular access control rules are set up for, again, all of the kinds of data access that you need to do. So, having that visibility in one UI makes it very easy for again Enterprises to handle the security aspect of data access. These are things that we’ve heard time and again from our Enterprise users as benefits that they see building with Hasura.

And on top of this is the entire GraphQL piece, which is all of the benefits of GraphQL that is making people move towards GraphqQL, the amazing developer ecosystem around the tooling, the developer experience for front-end developers to get started and build products fast. So, the front-end experience with GraphQL along with the themes experience with Hasura to handle all of the different data sources in the access control kind of makes that package really valuable for our users, especially in Enterprise.

Community

Mike: You mentioned the user conference, and I’m wondering what is the current community like for Hasura, and how do you see developing the community, and giving the community enough value going forward?

Rajoshi: We have a really, really engaged community around Hasura, and it’s something that we’re all very, very excited about. And it really makes us very happy, and we deeply care about the community around Hasura. So, more than half of our engineering team is working on our open-source product. There’s continuous development, and we’re listening to our users in the community very closely and sort of acting on things that they are talking about. So, there’s that aspect to it.

And there’s also the aspect of like really helping the learning process. So, we have a very extensive set of tutorials on GraphQL on Hasura, on authorization that we’ve built on hasura.io/learn, which basically the GraphQL tutorials over there are like vendor agnostic tutorials, which are just about getting started with Hasura, whatever sort of stack your come from, especially for front-end developer. So, I think we have almost more than 10 tutorials for different stacks for you to get started with GraphQL.

And overall, the site has I think almost like 15 to 17 tutorials on like full stack, front-end, back-end authorization data modeling. So, these are things that we put out continuously for the open-source community. We have a very vibrant discord community, and we have community champions, who are folks, who are helping out each other and helping out other users who are coming into the Hasura, new folks who are coming into the Hasura community, so that’s where the community hangs out.

And yeah, I think bringing all of these aspects together at the user conference was truly amazing for us two years into launching Hasura that we put out this user conference, it had about 33 talks of which three were from Hasura folks, and the other 30 were from the community, just talking about different ways, in which they are using Hasura different pieces of tooling that they’ve built. So, it was really, really good to hear and good to see the community coming together, giving back, and by talking about how they’ve learned and build things with Hasura.

Community Code Contribution?

Mike: Does the community actually commit any code?

Rajoshi: We do have community contribution that’s happening on console code based, on documentation, on sort of lots of tooling, but yes that is community contribution going into the code records.

Pricing

Mike: Pricing is one of the hardest exercises, not only for open-source startups, but I think for every company. What are some of the gates that you’re thinking about for pricing, and how do you get, for example, intrinsic value based pricing for the customer?

Rajoshi: Yeah, this is something that we’re thinking deeply about and also evolving. We are very, very early in the stage, in this journey. I’m sure, down the line, that we add a lot more color that I can add to this conversation to this topic, but right now, we’re thinking about it as basically pricing on the cloud product, consumption-based pricing, which is basically on data pass-through.

We have a starting tier with certain amount of data pass-through, and then, we’re basically charging on data pass-through. And we have a few more things on, the number of collaborators and the limits we apply on some of the features that you get. But the primary way that we’re thinking about pricing is on the data pass-through.

So, that’s currently how we price on the cloud product, and for Enterprises, which either on the cloud or on, a self-hosted model currently, its feature bundles and pricing per project, which is unlimited usage but pricing for project – that’s how we roll pricing on the Enterprise, but on Cloud, it’s with these usage limits. And that scales as your usage of the product scales, and each of these is for personal project.

Serving SMB?

Mike: So, a lot of software startups, some in your area, are making most of their money in the Enterprise space. I bet you think that you’ll find a way to also offer products and services to smaller organizations.

Rajoshi: I think. I mean, today our users do span the spectrum from the hobby developers to folks in the enterprise, we definitely – our Cloud product is meant to be something that caters to smaller products that are just kind of getting started in introduction. And there’s always open source that you can sort of sell, post and run across any kind of hosting service that is – yes, but the cloud is something that we have envisioned to be anyone running GraphQL introduction should be able to start a pricing would make sense for them economically. And that’s sort of how we’re thinking about it. And like I said, it’s very early days for us. And so, we’re going to sort of observe and see how it scales for us over the next few months and keep tweaking this.

Team

Mike: Right now, you’re sitting in Bangalore, one of the urban hubs of technology, what are your thoughts about growing the team, and how you’ll have to adjust the plan for the pandemic?

Rajoshi: We started, becoming a distributed company early in 2019, I think 2019 was when we brought our first remote colleague on board. And since then, we’ve been hiring across the globe remotely.So, that was very helpful to US during Covid, like all of our communication and all of our working in a distributed manner across different time zones. So, that really helped us when we all went with Covid-19.

So, in terms of growing the team, I think we will continue to hire across the globe in different cities and different countries –  that’s how we’re thinking of growing the team. We do have a base in Bangalore, and we have a base in San Francisco, so, we will look at hiring across these two cities. But we, also, currently, we have people in, I think, over 20 cities outside of these two, the side of Bangalore and San Francisco, maybe even more – I haven’t actually done a proper count, but we have everybody from, like LA to Melbourne, and like everything in middle.

So, we can’t actually do an all-hand’s call, where we have everybody in the same call, because we have like the West Coast, we have Europe, we have India, southeast Asia, and Australia. So, we kind of do this call in the morning, you know, morning time SS. And then, we record that, and we do one in the evening, like late evening, which works for like Australia, Asia and Europe. And this kind of play the recording, and then do another second half, and then, record that, and play that in the next thing. So, we figured this out, and it’s working pretty well.

But we’re already across time zones, where we can’t fit everybody into one call that is not a crazy hour. So, I expect us to kind of keep trucking along that way. And it’s fun! I mean, it’s great to have colleagues from like all over the globe, and we try to bring everybody together twice a year. That’s surprisingly enough. We actually had one of those this year, which sounds magical and unbelievable almost, that we actually had a team off site in 2020. But we did that just before Covid struck, and now, we’re all waiting for that to happen again.

Advice For Open Source Software Startups

Mike: It’s really hard to start any kind of business, but open-sourcing your software adds a little extra challenge I think. Do you have any advice for founders on how to find the right balance to make open source an advantage in their business model?

Rajoshi: Yeah. I think open source is a very important question to ask, if you are sort of just starting off and the decision is between, like, should I open source or not. I think why is open source important, it’s that specific kind of business is for important question to ask. I mean, there are every kind of products that are open-source and closed-source alternatives.

In the infrastructure space, open source has pretty much become table stakes for people, for how software is being adopted, but I think thinking through the business model from the beginning, and not making that an afterthought is going to be very important. That would be my only piece of advice to sort of think about it from day one, at least as much as you possibly can.

Because there are two ways – either you start a business intentionally, saying this is going to be an open-source business. And then, I’m going to start clearing on commercial features. Or you build something open source as a side project, and that kind of takes off, and then, you try to figure out, “Oh, wow, everyone’s using this – how can I make a business out of it?” I guess if that’s the way you’re going about it, then, you will have to figure it out as it happens. But if you’re intentionally doing it, I think thinking through, really thinking through how will you start monetizing, right from day one, is going to be very important. Because, often times, if the differentiation factor between what is open source and what you plan to make a part of the commercial feature, if it’s not very well-thought out, then, that can lead to all kinds of problems, both from the community, as well as just generally as to become a viable business.

Did Hasura Plan The Business Model Early On?

Mike: Did you follow your own advice there?

Rajoshi: Yes, we did, we did. I think we did. Partially we did, definitely, we know that we didn’t want to make our commercial offering. Their support base model wasn’t what we were going for – that’s not the kind of open source company we were building out to be. And we also did not want to have our Cloud version to be just like a hosted offering. Because the problem, the way we see it, if it’s a hosted offering of your open-source software, then, everyone’s bound to compare it to here. But I can host it on so-and-so provider for like this much cheaper.

We did not want to go down that path, we wanted to really offer teachers, which were part of our commercial offering that would really, again, make sense for the stage of the company you were. And, it would economically and ergonomically make sense.

So, it was always about that – what are the things that you will need once you’re in production, you know, you birth the product, you trust the product, and now, you want to go ahead in production. And what are the things you don’t want to worry about when you are in production. And that’s kind of what we look. The jury is still out – I mean, well, we’re going to see how this works out, but so far, the signs are good. I think people are really liking our commercial features and the product, but it’s early days – we will see how things evolve.

Role Models For Rajoshi?

Mike: You’re the first Indian female founder we’ve had on the podcast, and we hope you won’t be the last. I’d like to end with this different question than I normally ask. Who are some of the leaders and role models that influence your decision to co-found Hasura?

Rajoshi: Wow…that influence my decision to co-found Hasura? That is a very difficult question to answer because I used to be in genomics and research – I’m a bioinformatics person by sort of education, in the first few years of my career. And if somebody had asked me then, “Are you going to be the co-founder?” Like, whatever, start a company – I think it would have not crossed my mind. I was deep in the academic world, and it was so far away from anything that I thought about that, I don’t think I would have had an answer.

When I started working at this Incubator is when I saw how startups work. You know, I found about startups, this incubator that I work. I used tohave a lot of folks who worked at successful companies, who would come and speak to the students, though I was a mentor there, I was also a student, because I was teaching them programming and learning about all of these different amazing business things from folks that had successful startups. And that was the first time that thought crossed my mind.

I think my journey – once I did that, that was an 11-month thing, where I thought – I think for me after that, it just seemed like the next step that I have today. And that’s kind of how I got into it. It wasn’t again like an extremely like, “Okay. I am going to start a company.” sort of thing, it’s sort of just like my life experience has led me to this. So, I guess I don’t know how I can sort of talk about role models and who kind of influenced my decision – I think that experience that I had teaching at this Incubator – which is actually based in West Africa in Ghana, and it’s done by a Silicon Valley company called Meltwater. It’s an amazing program, and they bring students or fresh graduates from university, who want to start companies, and train them. And just being part of that ecosystem, I think that was my inspiration, that entire experience was my inspiration to sort of stop something and not get bogged down by, you know, it’s just going to be really impossible to do.

Closing

Mike: Oh, congratulations. I think you’re going to be the role model for the next generation of entrepreneurs going forward. So, best of luck with Hasura and everything else you do. And thank you so much for being on the podcast.

Rajoshi: Thank you so much, Mike. Thank you so much for having me.

Mike: Thanks to the Hasura team for help coordinating the podcast. Audio editing by Ines Cetenji, transcription and episode website by Marina Andjelkovic, cool graphics from Kemal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke for Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.

Next time, we have Justin Borgman, CEO of Starburst. If you don’t know Starburst, I highly recommend listening because it’s an amazing story of a perfectly executed startup – Justin was great.

Until next time, stay safe, and thanks for listening.



The post Episode 53: Rajoshi Ghosh, Co-Founder of Hasura, Controlling Access to Data with GraphQL first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full 28:58
Episode 52: Melissa Di Donato, CEO of SUSE https://opensourceunderdogs.com/melissa-di-donato-ceo-suse/ Tue, 25 Aug 2020 15:29:26 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=1889 Intro Michael Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I am your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 52 with Melissa Di Donato, CEO of SUSE. SUSE really needs no introduction except to say that as one of the oldest open-source companies in the industry, it maybe has more traction than most people...

The post Episode 52: Melissa Di Donato, CEO of SUSE first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro


Michael Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I am your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 52 with Melissa Di Donato, CEO of SUSE. SUSE really needs no introduction except to say that as one of the oldest open-source companies in the industry, it maybe has more traction than most people give it credit for, particularly in Europe.

As you’d expect for the CEO of SUSE, Melissa has had a stellar career as a developer and business leader, had many large and small firms, including Oracle, PWC, IBM, Salesforce, and SAP. I was particularly looking forward to this interview because SUSE has such a long and interesting history, and it’s reinventing itself right now to play an important role in the next phase of the open-source revolution. Some of you may have read about the recent announcement to acquire Rancher. This was a brilliant tier in my opinion and shows that they really understand the market and how SUSE can add value.

Before we get started, I have a quick request – we all want to help open-source founders and startups. I make the podcast, but I need your help to get the word out, so tell your friends, post on LinkedIn, tweet out a link, post on Hacker News, or follow me and share one of my posts on LinkedIn. whatever you think makes sense, go for it. With that said, I know you’re not here to listen to me, let’s get on with the real star of the episode, Melissa DiDonato, CEO of SUSE.

Melissa, it’s great to have you on the podcast today.

Melissa: Mike, thank you so much for having me.

Career Path To Leading SUSE?

Mike: Maybe before we get into the official questions, I’m sure many of our listeners are curious about your career path to becoming CEO of the world’s largest independent open-source company. What were some of the pivotal experiences that prepared you for this role?

Melissa: I feel like every role I’ve ever had has led me to become the CEO of SUSE. It’s really funny, it wasn’t any and particular spot or position or role that I had that led to being the CEO of SUSE. Last 20 years, I worked predominantly in my entire life with ERP and CRM, predominantly ERP companies, like IBM, Salesforce, SAP, just to name a few.


So, one might even questioned further, “Well, okay, so if you spent your whole life proprietary software, in companies, very big enterprises, like IBM and SAP, how did you find your way to SUSE?” And the past really helped me build the foundation for the future.

So, I have a unique experience and perspective for SUSE. I came in as a user. So, I started my career as an R3 developer, an SAP R/3 developer. So, I started as a coder, and I started creating SAP applications to sit on top of the first Linux systems. And the very first partnership we had 25 years ago was SAP and SUSE.

So, how did I get into technology in the first instance was on the recommendation of a mentor. A mentor I had at the time said, “Have you thought about getting into SAP? It’s really beginning to catch on.” And from that moment forward, I never left, so I’ve got more than 25-year history, in technology, starting out as a developer, with all BOP and Bases code to create applications to sit on top of SUSE.

Every move I’ve made throughout my career has been typically based on the recommendation insights or thought leadership of the people around me, particularly my mentors. So, my mentors have played a really, really big role in my past of which to create the future. And of course, like I say, coming into SUSE was a really unique journey. Having spent my entire career in proprietary software, now making my way into, from a user of open-source and SUSE specifically, into becoming the CEO of this great company. So, it’s been an interesting journey.

Initial Priorities

Mike: So, leading a 25-plus-year-old technology company is a daunting task for any business leader. But joining as a new team member, or maybe you could say an outsider, has both pluses and minuses. Why did you take this on, and coming from the outside, what were your first priorities for the business and culture, and how do you do take the reins to align the company with these new priorities?

Melissa: It’s a really good question. So, how does someone like me find their way in, and once I get in, how do I create some new momentum? When I did the analysis from the outside, when I was speaking to EQT about the role of being CEO of SUSE, I spent my time to do some research. I interviewed some members of the community, the open-source community, I interviewed some customers, some employees, I’ve interviewed customers that had left SUSE in favor of another technology. And never saying of course why I was asking them the questions I was asking, but I poked around quite a bit. And when I realized is that SUSE is at the cusp of historic shift, I really felt the movement of open-source now becoming a very critical part of any thriving enterprises, core business strategy.

When I looked at SUSE, it seemed like the power that enabled these mission-critical business operations, to surge, to grow, to deliver. So, I thought, “Okay, this is very, very interesting company. We will be well positioned to emerge as a clear leader, as this shift as well as because of the innovation and the products that we have to offer. The ability to — I guess power the digital transformation for our customers – and this was of course pre-coronavirus, but I saw the digital transformation root coming onto a main part of play for our customers.

The ability to deliver this digital transformation at our customers pace, but to make sure that we stood as an agile, enterprise-grade, open-source innovation across the enterprise Edge, Core, Cloud – that seemed to me to be something I really wanted to be part of.

And when I began to dig into the fans of SUSE, the community, it was extensive. And I think it was even more so recently with our recent news of our acquisition, people went wild over the fact that, you know, they watched SUSE, and supported SUSE, and we’re going to do anything for the innovation and the growth of our future.

So, then I looked at this company, 28-year SUSE has been around a world-class, engineering-led business, producing rock-solid IT infrastructure, with a huge amount of success. And I thought, “Well, what do I need to do as, you said, what were my priorities when I joined?” So, when I decided to join, then, what should I need to do?” I think when I joined last summer, it’s been — I just passed my one-year anniversary, Mike, so I’m more than 365 days old, and I looked at what areas do I want to impact immediately and first, and what are the areas I wanted to empower and enhance.

So, first for impact. I realized, when I sort of was talking about SUSE more and more, that our brand awareness did not correspond with our success. When I mentioned SUSE, I got a lot of, “Who???”, and I said, “Oh, the green chameleon.” And they said, “Oh, yes, of course.” But there was no connection. I felt it was really important to start amplifying the brand, to show just how successful we are, and how big, and how innovative, and how much of a thought leader we are in the industry.

So, to address this, we rebranded SUSE. We then had a platform to tell our story in a much, much better way. Our new brand, our new tagline, our new story is the power of many, and I think it’s important probably, Mike, for many of your listeners, because the power of many celebrates our open-source heritage, and showcases the power of community-led innovation.

And this rebrand has been a big part of who we are in the last six months. It took us some time to actually launch, but I believe wholeheartedly that the power of many really describes who we were, who we are, and who we will continue to be.

The second thing I wanted to focus on was growth and expansion. SUSE had, and has now ever more so ambitious growth targets. When I came on board, I announced that we would double our revenue in three years, partially by organic, partially by inorganic. And a large part of my first year would be on that, really ensuring that our organic strategy was enterprise-grade in way of sales and go-to-market, and that we had an inorganic growth strategy to execute on.

Within my first year, as you know, we announced our intent to acquire Rancher or Labs, which is the market leading, Enterprise Kubernetes management vendor. So, I think we’ve managed to take a couple of those boxes and we’ve had some incredible results. We ended our Q2 with more than 30% year-over-year growth. So, incredible big ambitions, but great success around growth and innovation and expansion. And then, I think lastly, I wanted to enhance SUSE’s focus much more so on our customers and our partners.

In my first 100 days, I don’t know if you read about this, but it got out quite a bit that in my first 100 days, I set out the target to meet 100 customers. During that time, I got to 97, I didn’t quite get to a 100, almost there, failed by three. But those meetings were absolutely pivotal and crucial in developing our near and mid-term strategy. We began to shift our entire go-to-market focus on customer success and creating for the very first time customers for life team, ensuring that we cared for our customers, we nurtured our customers, and literally created a customer relationship for life.

And I think the last bit is that I knew – we had talked about this, Mike, before – I knew that I wanted to enhance what SUSE’s culture already stood for. We have a very, very strong and unique culture that’s based on ethos originated in open source. We wanted to add to that culture, we wanted to contribute to the culture by mentoring, by having employee groups around diversity and inclusion, so we launched our very first mentoring group for employees. We’ve also launched women in technology, and we also launched, prior to SUSE, amongst many others, like GoGreen and loads of other programs, because we wanted to make sure that we embraced and enhanced and grew and depended upon this incredibly strong culture here at SUSE.

Message Sent By Rancher Acquisition Announcement?

Mike: In order to prepare for this interview, I listened to a talk from Nils Brauckmann, your predecessor, from SUSECON 2019, and he mentioned that SUSE was looking to acquire orchestration and management tools that sit above Kubernetes. And hindsight’s 2020. So, now I hear that, as we’re looking to buy Rancher, but now that the acquisition’s been announced, and can you help us understand the message that SUSE is sending to both the internal team and the world about your goals and aspirations?

Melissa: What Rancher did in the announcement with us is that we showed the world that we are relevant, that we want to create, modern, innovative technologies to deliver against and solve the problems against our customers’ business problems. And it really reinvigorated the spirit.

I mean, the people that came out of the woodwork and applauded about this acquisition was pretty incredible. I mean, it was a real following and a real uptake in SUSE and the interest in us and made us very, very relevant. I think what it’s done is it puts us on the map to solve real business problems that are customers, are depending upon us to help them solve.

And that’s what I learned in the first few months was that I had customers coming to me, constantly saying, “I need more from SUSE. I want more. I want more innovation, I want more modernization, I want you to help me modernize my legacy applications. I want you to modernize my infrastructure. I want you to start thinking about how you can help me accelerate my business, and how do I get on this digital transformation journey.

And together SUSE and Rancher do just that. We help our customers simplify first, and then what we help them do is to simplify and optimize their apps, their data, their environment, their infrastructure. And we’re really trying to make IT, non-stop IT reality for them, and they’re depending on that from us. The second that they kept asking us for is what our intended acquisition does. Does it help leverage the Cloud and bring their IT infrastructure, customers’ IT infrastructure into a modern computing world?

And a lot of our customers have come to us and said, “Well, how do I start? How do I modernize, where do I go?” And with Rancher together, that’s our ambition to help them modernize their legacy applications, utilizing containers, getting to the Cloud, and then being able to leverage edge technologies for the future.

Our customers want to achieve all the benefits from the Cloud, but they want to remain in control, and they want to remain open. And with Rancher and SUSE together, we can do that. We offer – well, soon – we’ll offer a platform to manage our customers’ different environments, as if they were one. And that’s really important for our customer base. Because having been in business for 28 years, you could probably imagine that a vast majority of our customers are what we call traditionalists, the kind of customers that have built a very stable, complex environment on-prem that are beginning now to depend on their partners and vendors to help them modernize. And that could be the Cloud, whether it’s hybrid or multi-cloud or whatever it may be, bit of on-prem, bit of Cloud, and we can help them do that.

And that’s our ambition with Rancher, to be able to together offer the digital transformation journey and be able to reap the benefits of the Cloud, while remaining in control. And what that does is, it helps our customers accelerate their business. And that’s what we’re all after. We’re after success in the end game for our customers.

We can help our customers, with Rancher together, accelerate our customers digital journey, our digital transformation, and help them scale, so they can get their products and services to the market faster. That’s the ambition of the two together.

Value Prop

Mike: So, when I read articles about SUSE, I almost always see Red Hat mentioned. What’s the plan to differentiate SUSE from Red Hat and other Linux distributions, like Ubuntu, or maybe I could say, what’s the value proposition for SUSE?

Melissa: You know, I get that question a lot, and I get – because SUSE is known, our success has been hugely around being a Linux distributor. As I mentioned earlier, and you’ve said a couple of times, Mike, that we are the largest independent open-source company in the world – that’s a differentiator in and of itself. I think that our customers want and need to transform their business via digital innovation. They can’t do it in the most expected but yet most unexpected way is now mainstream.

They understand that a flexible IT infrastructure, that is ready to support their transformation, their digital transformation, rapidly but yet securely, is going to be very key in a world that is, as we all know more now than ever, in constant change. I mean, year and a half ago, when I was looking around the world seeing an SAP, I never thought a year-and-a-half later I’d be the CEO of an open-source company that has navigated extraordinarily well through a pandemic.

The world is in constant change. And I think that constant change has driven, it’s exacerbated the need for our customers to not be locked into just one vendor, or one technology, or one direction, or one solution set, because that just limits their pass. It reduces the ability for them to have choice, and doesn’t allow them to preserve flexibility, and not as a big differentiator. When you’re talking about our competitors, our competitor, the one that you mentioned first is, they want to own the entire stack – that’s not our thesis.

In fact, we’ve supported our competitive technologies before, and with Rancher we will continue to do that. We will continue to be open and agnostic in a way of offering a broad set of portfolio, product portfolio that takes and combines industry-leading solutions across Core, Edge and Cloud, but not locking anyone in. And that is a really big differentiator for us, a really big differentiator for us.

And I think that, also knowing that our customers – having a differentiating IT infrastructure cannot be invented behind closed doors. And they need the best possible infrastructure, services support by – as I mentioned earlier – the power of many. And that’s where open source comes in. And we’re much more than it is a distributor. We’re much more an orchestrator of the power of many to deliver the most innovative solutions that open source can offer in the world.

And being the largest now independent open-source provider, we’re going to bring all of these technologies, all of this innovation, and all this true openness to bear, to be able to provide the most flexible solutions for our customers. And that is what really differentiates us from the marketplace.

How To Create An Enterprise Grade Sales Program?

Mike: I was looking at your resume on LinkedIn, and I noticed that you were Chief Revenue Officer at SAP/ ERP cloud. And I think many open-source companies underestimate the challenge of building a great sales organization – how’s the sales organization involved since you change? And do you have any advice for startups on how to think about building the sales team and sales processes?

Melissa: Yes, Mike. We’ve done a lot, specifically in the sales motion here at SUSE. So, in addition to being the CEO of SUSE, I also serve on the board. I’m the executive in residence at a venture fund called Notion Capital. And at Notion, although their startups have always asked the executives and residents like myself, to specialize in go-to-market, how do we scale, how do we create a sales organization, for not just scale and depth but high growth, and what kind of tidbits and ways we go to market to be really hyper focus on value, but also on customer success.

I do this quite a bit, and I like to think that I’m not just well-educated, but I do a lot of research on this topic of sales – how do we create a sales motion that can change dependent on where the motion originates. For example, is it an existing install customer? Is it partner-led? Is it indirect? Is it direct? Does the customer know anything about SUSE? Have they ever heard of SUSE before? Is it a net new brand, or someone we’ve sold to in the past but then lost?

Each one of these questions lead to a motion that will change also depending upon the solution and the complexity of the challenge and the problem we’re looking to solve. Every sales engagement, every communication with our customers always needs to start first with what problem and what challenge are we looking to solve for our customer.

So, sales motion changed a lot since I started. We invited, first step, our sales organization to be bold, to think differently, to think big, to go after the largest and most complex digital transformation challenges that our customers were looking to solve, and to inspire our customers to solve those challenges with SUSE.

This is why we’re much more value-focused, we’re much more interested on why our customers need to do something, why they want to do something and the why is really important here, because we can only provide our best guidance when we understand the why. In some cases, for example, this means we won’t pursue an opportunity. If I don’t have the solutions and the offerings to be able to solve the problem for the customer, then we’re not the best fit. And sometimes we don’t.

But it also means that we need to spend a significant amount of time doing discovery work. So, understanding why our customers are where they are, what they want to achieve and what are the consequences of doing so.

And it’s much more hyper-focused on the consultative side of understanding our customers that it is driving just a drop in sales solution. Today, we’re very point of view driven – I guess I could say point of view driven – meaning that we’ve developed through research customer experience, customer visits, understanding of what works and what does not. So, it’s really developed a nice point of view that allows us to proactively challenge our customers on their journey. And then be able to be a trusted advisor in which to add value to that journey.

We involve our account executives throughout every sales engagement, every sales motion, every sales call, obviously it’s important for SUSE, that each of our execs in the field can bring back our customers and partners viewpoints. So, even when we have an indirect sale, we include an account executive. And to collect the data, to understand the data, to understand the viewpoints of our customers, so we can learn and build a database of experience to build on that for the future. And I think, not just for me, but I think for the world, we had hundreds of people in field sales in January.

We have hundreds of people in digital sales right now – we’ve all moved to a much more digitally enabled sales cycle than we’ve ever have in the past, ever. I mean, in 25 years, I’ve never seen anything become so digital so fast as sales has. And I think that’s kind of going dark.

When I look at a partner perspective, so a big part of our business, I think you know Mike’s channels, when I look at that sales motion and that go-to-market, it’s a little — you know, we’re also changing how we work, how do we work with the traditional hardware vendor. Or how do we work now with the new cloud service providers or the MSPs or a partner who wants to use SUSE as an embedded solution.

Those have been a very, very big part of our success. Each of these partner types are critical to our go-to-market and really truly a testimony to our ability to create an ecosystem that significant but very robust. How we go to market with them has changed. We look for ways now instead to co-innovate, to co-market and to co-invest. So, the three “co’s.” And we do that because we feel that one plus one plus one is 50. We feel that if we can co-innovate, co-market, co-invest with our partners, we will get to the best amount of success for our customers.

And just like any even customer engagement, we put a significant amount of effort into understanding our partners as well, collecting the data, what problems they’re seeing, what solutions they are trying to solve and sell and add value and be relevant. And I think that’s probably — that’s a lot of advice I’ve now given to a lot of our startups in the community that want to create an enterprise-grade sales team, go-to-market function.

You know, at the end of the day, if we are just focused and honing in on the most important thing is customer success and helping them solve their business problems, everything else will follow.

Market Segmentation

Mike: SUSE is in a very horizontal, global market. From a tactical sales and marketing perspective, do you segment the market or how do you think about breaking that horizontal market apart?

Melissa: We didn’t segment much before I came, but since I’ve come, we’ve now really got into great detail about segmenting our customers and prospects by industry and by size. So, we’ve had delineation between what’s Tier 1 enterprise, upper mid-market, lower mid-market, and SMB. And it’s really important, you know, being able to communicate with our customers, it’s really important to understanding and predicting what their issues are going to be, because obviously that varies by size.

Mike: And does that drive the way that you interact with these customers? Like, I know it’s hard to serve the SMB market, you need a more automated way of interacting, and what’s the impact of that being on sort of the customer relationship?

Melissa: Oh, my god, I love to say that, you know, today was the same as it was six months ago, but you’re right, I mean servicing an SMB in an old world was predominantly digital. The way in which we service, I was mostly online, you know, in fact, a lot of SMBs are not necessarily in an office all the time, and they’re out and they’re remote in different locations, so the ability to get to them physically was even harder.

But now, the world’s changed, now everyone’s a digital sales engine. So, even our Tier 1 Enterprise customers, the last six months we’ve been servicing them through a lot of online video calls and through the telephone and other means, but, yeah, the way we service them is very different. In the old world, Tier 1 was high touch and SMB was low. And now, everything is high touched, but only a digital high touch.

Pricing

Mike: Pricing is really hard for open-source companies. I think it’s hard for all companies actually, do you participate in pricing strategy as CEO? And do you have any advice on how to build a process to find the right price, especially as the business environment is changing?

Melissa: So, one might think sometimes that getting involved in pricing is too detailed for a CEO, but I’ve been called worse where I get into the details of the business and I think, yes I do get engaged, and yes, I do ask a lot of questions. I want to be able to have the best value for my customers at the best price, and that doesn’t mean cheap. What it means is that I want to be able to sell for value, and that’s going to be based on the value of my customers see on price. It kind of goes hand in glove.

And pricing is an important topic, particularly right now when you look around IT industry, when you look at open source. I’d first say, how do we evolve pricing as the business environment changes, how do we set the right price. So, I think the first thing is that we have to price the value always, as I mentioned. The second thing is, we want to understand and be very clear about the problems that we’re looking to solve. So, what are the business challenges? Some customers are willing to pay for things like support, and that could be a main revenue stream for some open-source businesses.

And for others, they want to get everything for free, they don’t feel like they should have to pay. Or that it is not warranted. The value of paying for supporters is not worthy, it’s not warranted. And the case like SUSE, where so many of our customers are running mission-critical applications, the support, and the QA that we provide, and the assurance policy that we provide of the software we deliver is critical. It’s mission critical. And we look at that kind of problem, and what an outage can cause, and how complex it could be. There’s value there. So, the complexity of your product solves a problem, and how severe, and how big that problem is on behalf of your customers. And the market will be very, very key to a pricing strategy.

And that’s all of course based on, we said earlier, which is research. Research is key – understanding third parties, having customer advisory boards, testing our pricing with different customers’ and partners’ segments – that works. And, in fact, you know, we’ve got a big business in Latin America, where it’s being very, very impacted by currency changes. The currency in the pricing strategy you have for certain countries, and coupled again with emerging markets, could be different. So, you know, the research and understanding the customers’ business problems, what you’re looking to solve, what’s going on in the industry, the economy, and the market is all going to formulate the basis for a very strong pricing strategy and approach.

And one point I do want to call out is that pricing is also very much about being confident of who your company is and what your company does. Pricing gives value. The value it derives, and sticking to the beliefs and the nature of the value that you deliver is going to be linked to your pricing, because at the end of the day, customers will pay, like they do for SUSE, like they do for Rancher. They’re going to pay for a solution, for a technology that reduces costs, optimize performance, and improves their time-to-market to be able to service their customers better. Reducing risk is something that all customers are willing to pay for, and that insurance policy is very, very valuable.

How To Prioritize R&D?

Mike: A diverse group of engineers must have a ton of good ideas – how do you prioritize your R&D investments, and how do you balance investments in open-source projects versus investments in software that you monetize directly?

Melissa: So, this is another good one. And being a newbie, I’m only 365 days in into open source, or 370 days, and now I guess to open source, I’m coming from proprietary, and I think, “Oh, my goodness me! How do you balance, how do you prioritize the investments in open source, what the community wants, what your customer wants, how do you invest, where do you invest, and how do you prioritize that from an R&D perspective?”

And we get so many incredible ideas from engineers and from various teams across SUSE. We really live and breathe this culture of collaboration, not just outside the community, but in an extended community inside of our company. We also get loads of ideas from our — what’s now become over 28 years a very rich and vibrant partner ecosystem. We get loads of ideas from our customers via the customer executive councils.

And of course, we depend heavily on all of our communities, in the open-source community. So, we have several mechanisms in place to encourage, to fuel, to really get new ideas going, regardless of where they come from. Because we have many sources. But then, how do we prioritize and get these ideas? The ideas that have potential.

First, for us, go into a Convocation center, where the prototypes are developed and tested. So, we gather, collect and pull together all of these incredible ideas across all of our main areas, ecosystem, customers, partners, communities, developers, engineers, and we put them into a prototyping system and then test it.

In terms of R&D , because you asked for about R&D as well, Mike, we prioritize our investments in innovation, specifically in innovation that matters. We focus first on where we can create and enable, a concrete value for our customers that they couldn’t get before. So, thanks to new technologies or bridging existing technologies and new ways. So, that’s really important from a priority perspective.

This can also be said as well for innovation related to the operational or support improvements that we deliver, documentation and trainings and services, just give you a few. As we think about investments, we’re really fortunate in that we do not have to balance open-source investments with what we monetize. By nature, all of our software is open source, everything is based on open source. So, the balance for us occurs where and how and when and what we contribute to the open-source community.

For instance, how we select and engage in a specific project or technology is really where our balance comes in. And in SUSE, we focus on contributing to the projects that we feel will solve real-life IT needs and real-life IT problems for our Enterprise customers. Because we always got our customers’ needs and insight in the end.

Diversity

Mike: The list of female CEOs of open-source software companies, and that you can really say of tech companies in general is pretty short. What can we do as an industry to enable more gender diversity? And can open-source companies play a more prominent role?

Melissa: There’s no better industry in the world than to be diverse and inclusive than open source. There’s no better industry. This is the most inclusive, most collaborative, most open industry or – being IT – a sub-segment of IT being open source. I think what’s happening, the overall socio-economic environment is going to have wide-ranging impacts in the way we work and live, and not just gender diversity, but true openness, true collaboration, truly be inclusive.

I’ve always tried to do my part to affect change and drive impact in the world around me, but I mean, I’m bringing this into perspective in every role I do, and here at SUSE, as a CEO, I get a little bit of a bigger, maybe broader, maybe louder platform, but it’s certainly no different. I’ve gone on a career-long mission to ensure that technology is – which obviously has been traditionally male-dominated – becomes as inclusive and diverse as we possibly can. In fact, as I mentioned earlier, I was only one of the very, very small handful of female software developers at my first job.

Women – can you believe it, we’re even encouraged not to wear trousers, pants suits, we had to look like a woman back then – I’m not that old, by the way – so, if you look at my picture hopefully I look young, but I’m not even that old. But with that said, you know, I echoe your point that companies need to have diversity and inclusion at every level of their organization.

And every level, it needs to be executive leadership but down to the very corner of the company. It’s not just about enhancing performance and innovation. And of course, making your workplace attracted to top talent, but being diverse and inclusive also ensures and assures employees that they’re valued and that their voices can be heard. Businesses that recruit a more diverse workforce by getting open-source technology into the hands of students as an example is a great way to start building and fostering a talent pipeline.

So, at SUSE, we’ve got an academic program, it’s tripled in size – I’m very proud, very, very proud – I’m tripled in size, year over year, growing to include over 800 academic institutions globally, and there are students in the program over 71 countries. We have main low-resource areas of priority, focusing on places like Africa, where I spent some time, India as well, and I was trying to equip students everywhere, of all genders, with free tools and the necessary training to be successful in tech.
The SUSE academic program is just one example of the vast array of training courses we offer, virtual labs, curriculums, etc. in the latest open-source technologies delivered by SUSE, and that’s no cost at all for the academic community.

So, what we’ve tried to do with training, with certification, with extending the reach, it’s to be role model. I live by the thesis – you can’t be what you can’t see. There’s this thing called birds of a feather, and what we live to do here at SUSE is to stand up, to be visible, to be present. Just show the world what true innovation, coupled with diversity and inclusion can mean, not just for open source, but for the world at large.

And I think the beauty of open-source is what it does is, it breaks down barriers and breaks down gender, extends across every bit of geography gender, political affiliation, life experience – we are the borderless industry in every way. In that same spirit, SUSE will always celebrate openness and diversity. We embrace all principles of diversity and not just gender, but diversity of thought, diversity of experience, diversity of leadership of options and innovation.

And if we want to live this mantra of growing, of being, of open, of openness, of diversity and inclusion, every single way, inside and outside of SUSE, and we hope that we can get back to our open-source community, to encourage more women coming into the industry into open source and to be much more inclusive.

Advice For Open Source Founders?

Mike: So, the last question. And thank you for being so generous with your time.  We’re running a tad over, but I promised this is the last question. I guess, putting on your entrepreneur hat more than your SUSE CEO hat, do you have any advice for entrepreneurs who are launching a business around an open-source software product?

Melissa: I know we’ve gone over. I get quite enthusiastic, Mike. I’m sorry, I’m going to make this one quick. So, entrepreneurs, you ask for advice around entrepreneurs that want to launch a business around open source. So, first and foremost, as I started out, the very first question that you asked me, and I’m going to end on the same note, and that’s, first and foremost fundamental – your trust. Nearly every career move I’ve made, and has been either on the advice of a mentor or in concert was discussing with my mentor, and I’ve had various mentors, I haven’t had the same one for the last 25 years, but mentorship and sponsorship are not just crucial for starting and growing a business, but they also play a hugely prominent role in tackling the lack of diversity in tech. We just talked about, by providing support and advocacy and highlighting different career paths and growth opportunities for everyone across the industry. It’s really important to find the right sponsorship, the right mentors early on. I recommend finding a couple of mentors, diverse backgrounds, diverse industries.

If you’re in tech, finding someone for finance is a really interesting perspective because really, really well-rounded views. Secondly, I’d make sure that you build meaningful relationships. I’ve realized this is a very, very, very small industry. The tech industry is about relationships just as much as it is about skills, if not more. And depending upon those relationships throughout the lifetime of your journey is going to be really important. I think last, build a strong trusted network that’s open, collaborative, inclusive, and then, be the person that you can trust yourself. That would be my last bit of advice.

Closing

Mike: Melissa, thank you so much for sharing all this wisdom and experience with us today.

Melissa: Thank you so much for having me, and thank you again for showing so much interest in SUSE, and constantly being an advocate for us in open source. We’re very grateful to you, Mike. Thank you so much.

Mike: Well, there’s so much to unpack there. You might have to listen to this again and take notes. Thanks to the SUSE team for all the help scheduling and getting this episode to the finish line. Audio editing by Ines Cetenji. Transcription and episode website by Marina Andjelkovic. Cool graphics by Kemal Bhattacharjee. Music from Brooke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.

Next week, we have our first podcast from India. Don’t miss Rajoshi Ghosh, co-founder of Hasura. It’s a really fascinating company that has created a GraphQL interface for your existing data. Until next time, stay safe and thanks for listening.

The post Episode 52: Melissa Di Donato, CEO of SUSE first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full
Episode 51: Cloud Native Agility, Reliability and Stability with Weaveworks CTO Cornelia Davis https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-51-cloud-native-agility-reliability-and-stability-with-weaveworks-cto-cornelia-davis/ Mon, 03 Aug 2020 14:29:51 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=1866 Interview with Cornelia Davis, CTO of Weaveworks, a leader in the cloud native infrastructure open source software ecosystem.

The post Episode 51: Cloud Native Agility, Reliability and Stability with Weaveworks CTO Cornelia Davis first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro

Mike Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 51, with Cornelia Davis, Chief Technology Officer of Weaveworks and author of the Manning book Cloud Native Patterns.

If you’re like me and your whole business has been realigned around distributed cloud computing, Cornelia’s book can help you make sense of it.

Prior to joining Weaveworks, Cornelia was an engineering leader at Pivotal, where she was active developing the Cloud Foundry platform. If you want to learn more about Pivotal, you might remember James Watters was a guest on Episode 40 of Underdogs.

If you’re a fan of the podcast, help us get the word out. The goal is to help startups figure out how to use open-source software as part of their business model. But we can only do that if they know about us. So, take a minute, if you can, to comment on Hacker News, tweet out a link to an episode, or follow me and share one of my posts on LinkedIn.

Cornelia just had so many interesting things to say–I’m sure you’ll be super impressed. So, without further ado, let’s get on with the show.

Origin

Mike Schwartz: Cornelia, thank you so much for joining us today.

Mike Schwartz: At a high level, can you talk about how Weaveworks got started, and what’s the mission of the company?

Cornelia Davis: Mike, it’s great to be here. Thank you so much for having me.

Cornelia Davis: I’ll go all the way back to the founding of Weaveworks, which has been already about five years ago, and the initial thing that Weaveworks went off and did, was they created a networking product, and it was around container networking. We still have that product, or I should say project, because it’s an open-source project, it’s called Weave Net.

And this was pre-Kubernetes, so, it was post-Docker. So, people were moving towards container-based solutions, but then this challenge of how do you do networking across these various containers that are running on various hosts, and how do you do what we now refer to as overlay networks across Kubernetes. These are problems, and it’s a new set of abstractions. It used to be everything was abstracted around the hosts, now, how you do networking across this new abstraction of containers. And that was the genesis, the company.

And if we think about who the founders of the company were, Alexis Richardson and Matthias Radestock, and they had worked together before, they were the cofounders of Rabbit, RabbitMQ, which had been acquired by VMware. And then, VMware had done the Pivotal spin out, and both of them went over to Pivotal, so they both were working on Cloud Foundry at the time.

Now, Cloud Foundry has been container-based from the beginning, and so we needed to solve those problems around networking across containers and how do you do that, and that was kind of the genesis of them going off in creating Weaveworks. And it had a different name, I wasn’t with him at the time, but that was the genesis of Weaveworks.

Now, I’m going to fast-forward a lot to tell you a little bit more about who we are today, because we are not a networking company. We did some things with Weave Net, and Kubernetes came along, and we started kind of branching out into more than just networking for containers, but we’ve got this — there’s other problems that need to be solved around containers. And then, Kubernetes came along, and how do you manage that platform. And so, we started moving into the space of a set of services that assist kind of in this container-based platform space.

And our first product was a product that we call Weave Cloud, which is a SaaS product that allows a customer to effectively sign up for that service, which drops an agent on their Kubernetes cluster, and then it gives them services like observability, and uses things like Prometheus and Grafana to provide those services to organizations.

So, that was kind of Step 2. And then, we were of course running this SaaS product, which was running itself on Kubernetes. So, we had developed a whole bunch of skills, if you will, SRE or CRE skills, around managing this Kubernetes platform in this application on top of Kubernetes.
And you can find Alexis telling the story, we had a production outage, and our meantime recovery was crazy fast because of some of the things that we had put in place. And that was the birth of GitOps.

It was this new set of operational practices that we were employing to run our own platform,
that allowed us to have a very short meantime to recovery when we had an outage on Weave Cloud. And that was when we had the light bulb moment that takes us to where we are today, which is, oh my gosh there’s a set of tools that support modern cloud-native operational practices, the term we use for that is GitOps, and that’s where the company is focused now.

Why Join Weaveworks?

Mike Schwartz:  Cornelia, you worked with James Watters, who is actually a guest on episode 40th of Underdogs. And obviously, Pivotal is a great company. What was it about Weaveworks that made you want to join their team?

Cornelia Davis: There was a great story there as well. I consider James — just working with him in the last seven years, or so, at Pivotal, and I went to work FOR James — in fact, the way that I went to work for James was that I had started, I was in the EMC/CTO office, and I was playing with Cloud Foundry, because I worked on emerging tech. And so, that was an emerging tech space that I was working with, and so, I had started learning about Cloud Foundry, and I had started blogging about it. I’d started blogging about Bosch, which is one of the components under the covers.

And then, I met a few people on the Cloud Foundry team, and I started becoming interested in Pivotal. EMC was spinning Pivotal off EMC and VMware, and I started becoming interested in joining that team in particular, as a part of the spinoff. And they introduced this person that I had met, Elizabeth Hendrix introduced me to James Watters, and I walked into his office, and he said, “Wait a minute. Are you the woman who’s been blogging about Bosch?” And I said, “That’s – guilty!” And so, that was how we met, and we’ve been working together for some time. And it has been just a complete delight, and he’s a good friend as well.

But how I ended up at Weave, it’s definitely connected. So, James and I, James was at VMware before I wasn’t. I started working on Cloud Foundry shortly before the spin-off, but we were both there in the early days of Cloud Foundry. Cloud Foundry was this platform, this application CloudNative application platform that was highly opinionated. And those strong opinions brought to Enterprise customers, and if you found an Enterprise customer, who was willing to absorb those strong opinions, their outcomes were PHE-NO-ME-NAL, absolutely phenomenal.

Now, for some Enterprises, those opinions were too strong. And Cloud Foundry by design was a platform that was designed with these strong — you know, I used to say we’re unapologetically opinionated in our platform. And, again, that really yielded fantastic outcomes.

And then, what happened is that Kubernetes came along. And Kubernetes was a tool kit, if you will, I considered Kubernetes a toolkit for building platforms. And famous people like Kelsey Hightower said it’s a platform for building platforms. And it really is. It is a toolkit for building platforms. And while I was still at Pivotal, we kind of toyed with this idea of, well, what people really want is an opinionated Kubernetes platform. And while I’m not sure that everybody at VMware and Pivotal would agree with this, my two and a half years of working on Kubernetes at Pivotal, I started forming this opinion that an opinionated Kubernetes isn’t what customers wanted, they wanted their own flavor of Kubernetes.

And that is what has brought me to Weaveworks. It is because what we do is, we are really embracing – we’re building out a certain set of tools that will help the platform teams build out the platforms that their developers need, instilling the opinions that their developers need or that their company – sometimes those opinions are not developer opinions, they are compliance and regulatory and security opinions. But it’s more of let the platform teams at these various Enterprises build THEIR platform. And I see that the way that Weaveworks is embracing that and providing that capability to enterprises through declarative configuration, multiple reconciliation loops – we will talk a little bit more about those things – that was what excited me about it. And that’s why I’m at Weaveworks now.

Value Prop

Mike Schwartz: From a marketing perspective, I don’t envy the marketing team who has to consolidate this group of products and services into one understandable business proposition. What do you think are the most important value propositions for Weawork customers?

Cornelia Davis: One of my favorite bits of work, and this isn’t my work but it is such good work in the industry, is the work that the DevOps research assessment group has done. So, DORA – I’m talking about Nicole Forsgren, Gene Kim, Jez Humble. And what they’ve done is, they’ve done this work – I’m sure many of your listeners, and you’re already familiar with it – they did the work to tie specific IT practices to business outcomes. So, high performing organizations, those that are gaining market share that are profitable and so on, tend to do certain things in their IT practices a certain way. They release software more frequently, they have lower meantime to recovery, they have lower change failure rates, and so on.

So, the business proposition here is exactly that – it is to enable your application teams to achieve those metrics. Because, again, DORA – and your listeners might also, if they don’t know DORA, many of them probably do know the state of the DevOps report – there they’ve done the work to prove that these IT practices really correlate to business strength, either negatively or positively. So, that’s the fundamental thing.

What we’ve been doing is, as an industry, we’ve gotten pretty mature on understanding how the cloud-native architectural patterns and software support those things, where we are still developing is cloud-native operational practices, not software design but operational practices. And that’s really the value prop is cloud-native operational practices that are going to contribute to these IT practices which have a correlation to business outcomes.

How Do Customers Find Weaveworks?

Mike Schwartz: Would you say that customers are finding your product sort of through the operations group, or is it more common that maybe the IT leadership of the CIO/CTO office is saying, “Okay, we have to figure out how to make this more scalable?”

Cornelia Davis: So far, a great deal of our traction has come from our presence in the open-source community. And you talked about this set of different projects and challenge that marketing faces, we have a lot of things going on in the open source, that are all related. But you have to read the tea leaves a little bit, I think that’s what you were getting to earlier. And so, we have some very successful open-source projects. And to date, I would say that a good portion of our kind of entrance into commercial things has come from somebody who has been playing with Flux, which is one of the components, one of the kind of core GitOps components that we have out in the open-source community. Or they want to do canary style deployments because that is something that is hugely valuable to reducing your change failure rate.

And people like James Governor from RedMonk is talking a lot about progressive delivery this year. So, there’s a lot happening there. They are looking at Flagger and so on. And so, there’s been a fair bit of that. And I also think, to some extent, that we are still kind of the tip of the spear. I don’t believe that CIOs right now, CIOs in many cases, what they’re trying to do is “move to the cloud”, but they’re not yet at the level of detail.

And by the way, these CIOs understand that they need things like microservice architectures, but they don’t know yet what to ask for when it comes to cloud-native operations. Yes, they’re talking about infrastructure as code, which is something that we’ve had for a while, and they’re starting to look at some of those things. You know, CI, well, that’s something that’s already quite mature, but when it comes to the very things that we are selling, if you will – and I don’t necessarily mean just from a monetary perspective, but that as well – these concepts are still relatively emerging.

And so, I don’t think the CIOs are asking just yet, it’s either the developers or the platform teams who are saying, “Oh, well, I can actually create my platform and create repeatability and reduce my meantime to recovery because I have this completely non-snowflaked expression of what my platforms look like, which means I can stand one up on, you know, in moments.

How Much Of The Code Is Open Source?

Mike Schwartz: I was looking on your website, and there’s eight open-source projects that are listed. I bet you there’s even a couple more that maybe aren’t listed. In rough terms, what percentage of your developers are maybe of your engineering team is working on these projects?

Cornelia Davis: That is a great question. And in fact, that’s one of the things that I’m working with our VP of engineering, David Turner, to kind of rejigger, if you will, that. Well, if we look at the number of places that code is committed, I would say that 80% of the code that we commit into a git repository goes into one of those open-source projects. Even Enterprise product, Weave Kubernetes platform, which I’m sure we’ll talk about a little bit more, a good portion of the Weave Kubernetes platform is based on a project called WKSCTL, which is an open-source project.

So, even that is pretty significant. We have another open-source project that we partner with on Amazon, which is EKSCTL, which is the CLI, it is the UX4EKS that provides a higher level set of abstractions than the base APIs for EKS does. We have Flux, which is kind of our flagship GitOps project. We have a developer experience team that builds a number of getting open-source projects as well. So, again, I would say that 80% of the code that we commit, gets committed to those repositories.

Now, in terms of the teams working on the commercial product, we have people working on a commercial product that could make quite a bit into the open-source projects. Yes, we have some private repositories as well.

Balancing R&D Investment In Open Source

Mike Schwartz: Lot of open-source companies struggle with, well, how do I justify investing in open source versus, let’s say, the cloud platform or the Enterprise, if there’s an Enterprise product. How do you make that balance between devoting resources?

Cornelia Davis: I’ll say that part of the answer here is that is seated in our bias towards community and open-source. The founders, everybody on the leadership team, I daresay just about everybody in the company really feels this draw to open-source and this commitment to a broader industry. I don’t consider Liz Rice – I consider her my colleague, she works at Aqua, she doesn’t work at Weaveworks, but I consider her my colleague. I even consider everybody at Pivotal still my colleagues.

And so, I think that we have this kind of philosophy, if you will, that, we’re community first or industry first. And so, to some extent, it’s seated in that. I used to joke around that my father-in-law years ago always said, “If I ever win the lottery, I’m going to share my winnings with all my kids.” And so, I used to say, “Well, when he wins the lottery – and he has that luck, that’s why I say when – that I’m going to quit my job and work on open source.” I said that 15 years ago, and now, I am gainfully employed and I work on open source, which is great, it’s been a fantastic shift.  So, this bias that I just described around, you know, we have this feel to connect with community is not unique to us or to me personally.

So, that’s kind of, we have that bias towards this, but again, we, of course, in order for them to pay me my salary so that I can work on open source, we have to make money. And one of the areas that we’re super committed to is that we do not want to have Flux for example, which is this reconciler, this continuous delivery reconciler, we don’t want to have Flux features that are open-source and Flux features that are closed-source. So, we believe that everybody should have the ability to do the basic capabilities of these GitOps workflows and these cloud-native operational ways of working.

And what we want to do is we want to help Enterprises, and Enterprises are our target market here. We want to help them do that at scale. That’s where we decide. So, we spend a lot of time, we have this kind of view of what goes into the commercial product is where you’re not applying these things to one or two projects or 10 projects, but you’re applying these to an organization that has 5,000 developers and 3,000 applications. And that’s where we’re helping organizations do those things at scale.

And so, having that kind of as a overall governor of how we decide what goes where, it maybe doesn’t help us decide how much effort to put in places, but it certainly helps us when we’re thinking about a capability, and we’re talking to a customer who says, “I need this.”, we’d look at it and say, “Is it a scale problem, or is it something that we really want to enable the entire community to work on?”

Revenues: SaaS V. Self-Hosted?

Mike Schwartz: Switching into the products space a little bit. So, Weaveworks has a product in the, let’s say self-hosted space called Weave Kubernetes platform, and there’s also Weave Cloud – which of these projects or products are actually more important to you from a revenue perspective?

Cornelia Davis: I’ll answer that question in two ways. I’ll answer the question you’ve asked, which is, from a revenue perspective, but I’ll also answer from more of a strategic perspective. Weave Cloud platform, which is the one that I talked about earlier, which is the SaaS offering that allows somebody to say, “I’ve got my own Kubernetes cluster, and I want a set of services that are going to allow me to manage that Kubernetes cluster and the workloads that are on it in a better way.” So, around observability, metrics, logging and those types of things.

Again, this is before my time, but I think that at the time that we created the Weave Cloud, we felt like there was this need to understand how to help people operate both the platform and the workloads running on the platform. And we have gotten a certain amount of traction but it’s kind of the small to medium business type of thing, or it might be people that are into Enterprises, but they’re still operating at that smaller-scale that I talked about.

So, it’s still a project, where somebody says, “Oh, well, I’m working on a product. I’m within a larger organization, but I’m solving this particular problem just for myself, just for my project. And that’s where we’ve gotten the traction. And that’s generated a modest amount of revenue. But really back to what I was saying earlier, is that what we really want to do, the value that we want to bring to Enterprises, is to help them solve those problems at scale. And so, while the Weave Kubernetes platform is a newer platform, I’m not at liberty to talk about where we sit with revenue today. We absolutely anticipate that the Weave Kubernetes platform, that’s what we’re banking on, that is where we are going to see the revenue opportunity. And so, therefore, it’s also kind of our strategic platform moving forward.

Now, Weave Cloud folks, don’t worry, it’s not that we are going to ditch Weave Cloud. I think that Weave Cloud is still one of the best places where you can start to experiment with some of the things at that lower level of scale, to start to get some of those capabilities. Because, frankly, what we do in the Weave Kubernetes platform, which is the self-hosted, that you talked about, and I like how you said it self-hosted, it’s not necessarily on-premise self-hosted, and it might be self-hosted in the cloud, or it might be self-hosted in your own data center, but it is self-hosted. So, while WKP is strategically, and from a revenue perspective, definitely the direction that we’re going, Weave Cloud folks, don’t worry, we still think that Weave Cloud is a great place for you to start to, you know, get your legs under you and solve some of these problems maybe at the lower scale.

And so, we see both Weave Cloud as a great entry point to understand the services that we offer as open-source is as well, I described earlier how using the open-source projects is also another way for you to understand the set of services that we offer, on your road to solving these problems at scale, which is where the WKP platform comes in.

Is K8 A New OS Platform For The Cloud?

Mike Schwartz: Okay, so, I’m not a cloud native expert here, so, you maybe have to cut me a little slack on this analogy, but would you say that perhaps the Weave Kubernetes platform is sort of like a Linux distribution, where, for example, there are a lot of ways to deploy Linux to there’s room for different distributions? Could you say the same for Kubernetes? That maybe people can think of Kubernetes as a new type of cloud operating system?

Cornelia Davis: Oh, absolutely. And I think that the industry is a whole thing’s of Kubernetes is a new Cloud operating system, but your analogy is actually more — it goes beyond that, it’s deeper than that. Because you said that it is a way of managing perhaps a number of different distributions of Kubernetes. And you nailed something that is really, really subtle there. And that is that we are not aiming with WKP to be the Kubernetes distribution.

While we do have customers who are using WKP as their Kubernetes distribution, what we are really doing is, we are providing a platform that allows you to manage whatever Kubernetes distribution you want. Now, I’m not going to suggest that you can just come along and say, “Hey, I’ve got my own bespoke fork of Kubernetes and all this stuff in it.” And we can just say, “Oh, just point us to that repository, and we can go ahead and install it. We’re not there, but we do support in WKP a number of different flavors of Kubernetes under the covers.” And, you know, for example, we do, out-of-the-box, provide you the mechanics to support upstream Kubernetes. You know, the releases that are put out on the Kubernetes in the GitHub repository under the releases tab.

We also support EKS in there, and that list will continue to evolve. And we are working on ways of bringing other Kubernetes releases in there. And WKP also allows you to say, “You know what? We’re actually going to treat the Kubernetes thing out of band.” Because once you get that Kubernetes dial tone, if you will, there’s still an awful lot that you need to do on top of that to configure Kubernetes, to configure it against the storage systems, to configure it against your networking and your ingress controllers, and to set up the access controls and the pod security policies and all of those things, install the services that you use on top, very services that I talked about on Weave Cloud, like monitoring, and logging, and observability, and all of those things. And, by the way, Flux, which is the GitOps capabilities for your application teams, we are very focused on helping you manage all of that complexity on top of Kubernetes as well.

Partnerships

Mike Schwartz: You’ve mentioned a number of companies in adjacent markets and Amazon for example – can you talk a little bit about the partnerships that have been most important and that you see as being most strategic for Weaveworks going forward?

Cornelia Davis: So, Amazon of course is a close partner of ours, it’s really very interesting – and again, I always come at it from a little bit of a technical angle – but I’ll go back to my days at Pivotal. So, I worked on Pivotal Container service, which was Pivotal ‘s Kubernetes distribution we were working with VMware, bringing that to market. And when I was out talking with customers, they were like, “Well, okay, how this compares to…”, and one of the things that was often asked was, “Tell me how this compares to EKS.”

And one of the things that, at the time, I talked about was how EKS was this — it wasn’t at all a turnkey Kubernetes user experience. You couldn’t go to EKS and say, “Hey, give me a cluster, give me a cluster with three masters and 10 workers.” And it would make it so. It was much lower-level protocols.

And so, our partnership with Amazon really launched when Weaveworks said, “Okay, we believe that we can use these practices that we’re starting to become experts in to provide a better UX.” Or, not better but easier UX. We will use those low-level building blocks to create a user experience on top of EKS, that make EKS accessible to a larger market and a larger set of people. And so, that was the genesis of our relationship with AWS.

Now, the interesting thing is that I can use AWS as a bit of an exemplar. Because AWS has been very successful in – well, massively successful across a huge market, and certainly Enterprises are moving in that direction. But Enterprises still are doing an awful lot of their own stuff, their own self-hosted stuff, so they haven’t embraced kind of the whole cloud-native operational model.

And so, working with companies like AWS and Google, and we have a very strong partnership with AWS – we also have a relationship with Google – to help those organizations connect with the Enterprise in a way that we — you know, our legacy, again, remember that Alexis, Matthias, myself, we all come from the VMware, EMC, Pivotal Enterprise market. So, that’s been certainly part of that partnership is to help the cloud providers move in that direction.

You’ll notice that I haven’t said anything about Microsoft, and I put Microsoft in kind of a little bit of a different category because they also have that Enterprise genesis, if you will. So, they understand the Enterprise, their history is in the Enterprise as well, sure, PCS, and all of that stuff, but they may arguably become very successful in the Enterprise Windows server exchange. You know, they were heavily entrenched in the Enterprise. So, we are very much partnering with Microsoft there as well.

I think the thing that’s given us traction the most in that is that Microsoft, who I have been so impressed with – who hasn’t in the last five years, kind of five to eight years, they’ve totally reinvented themselves – is that they have very early on latched onto this, again, this cloud-native operational model, which is what we represent, and the term we use for it is GitOps.

And so, that is really kind of the core of our partnership there is that all of these cloud service providers are recognizing that were at an inflection point in the industry, where we are really starting to revolutionize the way we do operations. And making that cloud native, SRE was just the beginning of that. There’s a whole set of tools and practices around that.

Customer Perception Of Open Versus Commercial License

Mike Schwartz: You are very much on the open-source bandwagon, but I’m going to play devil’s advocate a little bit and say that there are still some negative connotations around open-source software. And, for example, if there’s a commercial and open-source version of a certain segment of software, the commercial version is often viewed as better or more secure or justifying a higher price. And also, when you look in terms of dollars of the software market, there’s more dollars spent on commercial software than on open-source software.

Obviously, you’re very pro open source, but do you think that perception is changing? And is it changing in all the segments or in certain segments but not others?

Cornelia Davis: Well, I think that, overall, the perception of open-source has clearly changed. It dramatically goes back to that story when I used to think I had to quit my job to be able to work on open source. And now, the reason that people work on open source is because there’s a demand for it. And that demand is driven by revenue as well, because most of everybody who’s working on open source is not independently wealthy. They’re getting paid through something, and they get paid through – you know, the traditional open-source business models are, we’re going to provide support over open source. And that’s a great business. And people definitely do well with that. And then, there’s the, “Okay, we’re going to actually provide a different set of capabilities.

And the former of those models is really where it comes to this notion of open source as “free”, free like a free puppy is, is that, yeah, even though you’re not paying for the source code, to be able to operationalize that open-source project, you need a whole lot of skills, you need support. And you might even need a supply chain, a software supply chain to help you deal with the releases that are coming out.

Years ago, I worked with a colleague in the EMC days, who had really spent his whole career in mainframes, and when we first started working on open source together, he was like, “This is never going to work! Things are changing all the time! I had something running on Friday, there’s a new release on Monday, and everything broke.” But, obviously, we’ve built actually business models around kind of being able to deal with that variability.

But I also think it’s completely fair to have a commercial model that says, “We’re providing some capabilities.” I don’t like the open-core model myself, and I wouldn’t consider us having that open core model, which is to say, “Hey, there are some features that you just don’t get unless you buy the commercial product.”

I know it’s a little bit of a slippery slope. You might argue that the model that I described earlier, which is, “Hey, we’re going to help you solve these problems that scale is a little bit of that, but I see it as a little bit different, which is to say, “No, the core capabilities — it’s democratized, everybody can do that. We’re just going to help you solve a different set of problems.” And that’s where we’re going to put our commercial efforts.


So, the other thing that I’ll share is, I’ve spent a lot of time over the last six, seven years with Enterprise customers, and more and more of them, they want to move to open source. Now, sometimes, they believe that by going to open source, it’s all about vendor lock-in for them. And that is tricky. Because as soon as you engage with a vendor for anything, even kind of the tooling that you’re going to use to keep up-to-date with the changes on open-source, at some point, you end up with some level of vendor lock-in, even if it’s just consulting.

So, I’m not sure that that’s the best reason, but I have found that enterprises, even if they don’t understand exactly how, and think that it’s about vendor lock-in, they have this really good intuition and this instinct that open source actually is a better way for them to go.

And, yes, but at the same time, they’re like, “Look, I want my developers delivering value to my customers. I don’t want them doing all the things that you can do for us. And so, we will enter in a commercial agreement with you.”

What Can We Do To Help More Women Join The Open-Source Community?

Mike Schwartz: Putting on your activist hat for a minute, you’ve probably noticed that the male/female ratio on the podcast hasn’t been that great, although we’re trying to make it better this year. But I listened to one of your podcasts, or one of your previous presentations, and you said it’s up to us to do something about this, to foster a better tech environment that results in more women in the industry. So, what are some of the most important things we can do in the open-source business community to affect that change?

Cornelia Davis: So, you asked specifically in open source, and that one is even trickier. So, by the way, I, first of all, want to congratulate you on. Maybe over the course of your entire podcast, your ratio hasn’t been that great, but you’re knocking it out of the park this year, Mike. So, doing really well. And I really appreciate your efforts there.

And, in a way, what you’re doing is the exemplar, and to answer that question, whether it’s in the open-source community or in the industry at large, which is, you just have to pay attention. And we all have to pay attention, and we all have to make those decisions. So, one of the things that I regularly ask my male counterparts is that when you are invited to sit on a panel, please, decline until there is a woman that is sitting on the panel with you. Do not sit on all-male panels.

So, here’s a very concrete pragmatic thing that we can do.

Now, open source, my perception is that it is even trickier there, is that, in a way, open-source – we kind of think of it as the total democratization of software, all the software is in the open, anybody can participate, anybody can pick up an issue from an issue’s list and study that, come up with a solution, submit a pull request, and those types of things.

But the reality is that the environment, so, one of the challenges of women in technology is that we are constantly getting triggered, signals all day long, all day every day, I always say hashtag #alldayeveryday we’re getting signals that we don’t belong. It could be anything from surprise, like, “Oh, really, you’re a software engineer?!” You know, those types of things to even more overt stuff. And, unfortunately, it still does happen.

And so, we tend to – and again, this is a gross generalization, but I think the studies have shown this that women tend to maybe hold back a little bit and don’t speak out as much. And that ends up just perpetuating itself. Because to participate in open source, you really have to put yourself out there. And it’s harder for women to put themselves out there.

So, I think that – going back to you quoting me – it’s up to all of us. By us, I mean ALL of us. I mean, men and women to use — you know, men in this technology industry have a privilege because they outnumber women so significantly, is, be conscious about that and then lend your privilege. Look for elevating the voices of women.

If you see somebody who is participating in a Kubernetes SIG, who is on the calls every week, and is just listening in and isn’t speaking up, take a moment to ask her opinion. Also, maybe provide encouragement to, “Hey, you’ve got some great ideas here. You should really issue a pull request against this.” Help turn up the volume for the women who are participating. Because I think the numbers in open source have shown that the numbers are even worse in open source than they are in the industry at large.

Advice For New Open Source Startups?

Mike Schwartz: This is the same question I asked everyone last, which is, do you have any advice for the poor entrepreneurs who are launching a business around an open-source software project?

Cornelia Davis: One of the things, and this is quite personal, is that the first bit of advice I would say very directly is, trust your gut, trust your intuition. However, that’s not enough. And just be very aware of the fact that your intuition is surely influenced by the experience that you have to date, what you’ve done in your previous jobs, what you’re seeing happening out in the open-source industry and those types of things, but make sure that you treat that intuition as a hypothesis. And look for ways to validate that.

Now, I’ve spent my entire career in emerging tech, and so that validation step is very tricky. Because — and one of my favorite quotes, and everybody’s heard it, is the Henry Ford quote, which is, “If I had delivered what people asked for, it would have been faster horses.”, or something along those lines. I think I just totally botched that, but I think people get the idea.

So, in many cases, as an entrepreneur, you are really at the tip of the spear. And so, how do you do that market validation. You want to – again, another cliché – but you want to go to where the pack is going to be, not where it is now.

I think intuition is something that is really, really very good. And then, my experience at Pivotal over the last seven or eight years is that they really did a fantastic job on getting there incrementally.

So, get lots of feedback, put things out there, find some trusted advisors, find some people who are willing to go on the journey with you. You are not going to want to go into the very well-established Enterprise organization that has done things the same way for the last 50 years. They’re not your partner on this. Look for the partners who are looking to go on the journey with you and co-invent with you. I always think of the people that are customers as people that I’m co-inventing with.

Closing

Mike Schwartz: That’s great advice. Thank you so much for sharing all of your experiences today, and best of luck at Weaveworks.

Cornelia Davis: Thank you. It’s been a pleasure to be here.

Mike Schwartz: Big thanks to Radmila Ercegovac from Manning for bringing Cornelia’s book to my attention. And also, thanks to Alexis Richardson, the CEO and Co-Founder at Weaveworks for helping us coordinate.

Audio editing by Ines Cetenji, transcription and episode website by Marina Andjelkovic, cool graphics by Kemal Bhattacharjee. Music from Brooke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.

Next episode, I was really honored to get the chance to interview Melissa Di Donato, the CEO of SUSE. Since being spun out of MicroFocus, SUSE is one of the world’s largest independent open-source companies. Don’t miss it. Melissa had a ton of insights into the industry, and how SUSE is positioning itself to provide a leadership role. Until next time, stay safe and thanks for listening.


The post Episode 51: Cloud Native Agility, Reliability and Stability with Weaveworks CTO Cornelia Davis first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full
Episode 50: DataStax NoSQL solutions built on Apache Cassandra with Kathryn Erickson, Open Source and Ecosystem Strategy https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-50-datastax-kathryn-erickson/ Tue, 07 Jul 2020 13:45:03 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=1860 Intro Mike Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 50 with Kathryn Erickson who helps lead open-source strategy at DataStax. Founded in 2010 and currently employing about 500 people, DataStax was one of the first and most successful companies in the Apache Cassandra big data Ecosystem....

The post Episode 50: DataStax NoSQL solutions built on Apache Cassandra with Kathryn Erickson, Open Source and Ecosystem Strategy first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro


Mike Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 50 with Kathryn Erickson who helps lead open-source strategy at DataStax. Founded in 2010 and currently employing about 500 people, DataStax was one of the first and most successful companies in the Apache Cassandra big data Ecosystem.


Kathryn has an engineering background. You can listen to some of her great deep dives into the tech on the DataStax website. In her role on the strategy team, she’s helping to lead the company into its next phase of growth and community engagement. I hope you’ll enjoy this episode. And if you do, don’t forget to share a link on social media. You can find all the episodes on opensourceunderdogs.com, or you can retweet our announcement by following us on Twitter. Our handle is @fosspodcast. So, without further ado, let’s carry on with the interview.

DataStax Origin

Mike Schwartz: Kathryn, thank you for joining us today.

Kathryn Erickson: Sure, of course, thank you.

Mike Schwartz: Most of our listeners probably know about Apache Cassandra, one of the most popular databases for big data, but how did DataStax evolved in relation to the Cassandra project.

Kathryn Erickson: DataStax was founded by Jonathan Ellis and Matt Pfeil, both employees of Rackspace. Jonathan, being contributor to Apache Cassandra and Project Share as well, was considering leaving Rackspace, and Matt Pfeil went to talk to him and say, “Hey, there’s some really cool stuff going on here, you should really consider staying.” And by the end of the conversation, they were founding a company together.

And so DataStax was founded to support Apache Cassandra. Over time, we began adding Enterprise features and selling an Enterprise distribution of the database with these features added, and then, of course, more recently, the cloud platform as a service offering as well.

Evolution Of Support Offering

Mike Schwartz: Actually, I didn’t realize that you started out providing support. Because when I first ran into DataStax, I guess I had just known it as a distribution of Cassandra. And now, I see that you’re also providing support for the open-source distribution. Can you talk a little bit about how that’s evolved over time? Has it always been there or has there been a focus on for or against doing that?

Kathryn Erickson: It hasn’t always been there. When DataStax was founded 10 years ago, there wasn’t really a playbook for how to build and run a successful open-source company.
We were founded around the premise of providing support and consulting for Apache Cassandra. Over time, we did, all for the Enterprise Edition, but what you see with most Enterprises is that they have a mix of the Enterprise version and open source. For some customers, that’s dependent on the criticality of the data, and for other customers, it’s dependent on the features or the distribution, being the as-a-service offering or self-installed on-prem.

And so, what we saw in the last year was that there were some obvious things that we weren’t doing, and our customers needed support and consulting around open-source Cassandra. We are beginning to open-source a lot more of the features that would build Cassandra abundance, and so, it made sense to bring those offerings back.

Astra – DataStax Cloud Offering

Mike Schwartz: Okay, and you mentioned that DataStax launched a new hosted service called Astra. Do you see that product as a driver for revenue, or is it just an easier path for customers to test drive the product?

Kathryn Erickson: I think that will evolve over time. I think at launch, it is the easiest way to learn Apache Cassandra. And I think as we launched the hybrid option, I believe that’s later this year, that would become a more significant line of revenue.

Pricing

Mike Schwartz: Most of the revenue today I guess is from the license Enterprise product, so focusing on that, a lot of open-source businesses are moving towards consumption-based pricing. And I’m wondering, what kind of metrics do you use to determine what is consumption?

Kathryn Erickson: You know, a cloud-based offering consumption is based on capacity. And with our licensed product and with Luna, the open-source support offering, our focus this year has been around simplification of the pricing model. And we revisit that each year.

With the Enterprise product, we previously charged for the Enterprise license, and then, an optional additional fee for advanced workloads, like Spark analytics and graph. That’s confusing for the customer, they just want a simple pricing mechanism. So, we collapse that pricing. And then, of course, for larger deals ,we would have ELAs, or special terms to accommodate those customers.


Mike Schwartz: That consumption is based on, like, per CPU, per server, or how do you actually figure out what is the size?

Kathryn Erickson: It’s true capacity-based, the size of the data set being stored. And as we move to Astra hybrid, which will be that offering on-prem, I think we’ll consider that pricing option there as well.

Market Segmentation

Mike Schwartz: Data persistence is like the most horizontal market on the planet. Every company basically needs to store data. When you can sell to everyone, it’s sort of a blessing and a curse. Do you segment the market at all vertically or by use case, or do you just not segment the market?


Kathryn Erickson: It’s hard to segment when you’re serving a pretty broad market. What we try to do is have as easy of an on-ramp for the different verticals as possible. We see data models look similar between IoT use cases, inventory and messaging data models would be similar.
So, we don’t segment the market for go-to-market strategies, but we try to find places of repeatable consulting efforts to speed up the successes for those customers.

Partnerships

Mike Schwartz: When you took on the role of director of strategic Pprtnerships, you probably did a survey of the range of partnerships that exist. Can you talk about like what is the partner landscape look like at DataStax?

Kathryn Erickson: I ran our technology partner program, and there’s two other sides of that, SI partners and the cloud partners. On the technology side, you want to make it easy as possible for customers to consume your product.

So, in a technology partner program, you want to understand the user journey to get to your product, and make sure that those adjacent technologies have the simplest most repeatable easy to build, easy to test integrations as possible over time. If you want to think about specific companies and integrations, every database needs an ODBC and JDBC connector. And customers want those for BI, for reporting, for simple ways to move data in and out of the system, but in the last few years, most customers also want to see Kafka connectors and more high-speed ingest Pub/Sub integrations.  So, we want to accommodate those as well.

Mike Schwartz: Coming on the System Integrator side, you know, at Gluu, we found that those have been essential for us, to be able to focus on innovating the product versus getting involved in specific projects. But there’s such a broad range when you’re serving a global market of the System Integrators. Do you consider them channel partners or integration partners?


Kathryn Erickson: We usually consider them strategic partners when we take those types of partnerships on. And the goal is usually to help us penetrate markets that we don’t currently have field team in, or packaged, or cookie-cutter solutions. If you look at some of the stuff that we’ve done with VMware and with partnerships at Dell, we want to assert that the product stack works as recommended for customers that are used to seeing these reference architectures from these larger integrators and technology companies.

Most Important Partnerships For Driving Revenues

Mike Schwartz:  Which partnerships, do you think are the most important for actually driving growth?

Kathryn Erickson:  Deloitte’s been in a role to our federal business, they know that space better than any startup could hope. VMware for helping to modernize Enterprise platforms. Enterprises that are looking at Cassandra and looking at DataStax are usually going through some type of digital transformation. And the product that they already have in place is VMware. So, everything that we could do to make that migration to know SQL smooth was helpful to those customers. VMware has been a pretty big partner in my journey.

Open Source Strategy

Mike Schwartz: Some of the companies we’ve interviewed are moving to a 100% open-source strategy, specifically Chef and Cloudera. In the past, the value property DataStax, it had improved distribution of Cassandra.But do you see DataStax maybe moving more in the direction of open-sourcing its platforms and some of that technology it’s developed?

Kathryn Erickson: We are open-sourcing a lot more. We try to stick to simple rules for open sourcing, simple rule is, it’s a Harvard Business review article, simple rules for a complex world.
And so, simple rules for open source, if it increases adoption Cassandra, it should be open-sourced. And if it’s Enterprise feature that’s more specific to Enterprise customers, like security features or advanced replication options, then that would be kept proprietary.

And then, where should something be open-sourced? Well, if it makes a change to the core of Cassandra, of course it should go to the Apache project. And if it increases abundance, but it’s not impactful to the core of the project, then it still should be open-sourced, but maybe able to exist in a DataStax repo or different foundation.

Does Open Source Help?

Mike Schwartz: Do you think the wider open-source community A Cassandra helps DataStax too?

Kathryn Erickson: Of course, open source is all about positive sum games. I think it was Thomas Jefferson that said, “If use my light to light your torch, then we both have light.” And that’s how open-source works. The more communities and more companies that you can move from being other to being self, the larger the positive sum game that you’re playing. So, it’s open source, and open-source abundance is absolutely essential to the success of any open-source company.

Thoughts About Open Source Foundations?



Mike Schwartz: Any thoughts about Cassandra being hosted at the Apache Foundation versus perhaps Linux Foundation or the CMSF?

Kathryn Erickson:  I don’t have any opinions on the other foundations, but I think that Apache Cassandra will always be at home with the ASF. They have their simple rules for what it means to protect the open-source nature of a project, and they don’t waiver. And for a vendor backing an open-source project, that can be like a Northern Light, you can lose your way, and you can always look back up and reorient towards the community.

But you know, there’s nice things when you see CNCF, you know, the marketing wing, and the power of the CloudNative messaging that’s there. But there’s no reason that projects can’t have pieces that exist in different foundations either.

We see ourselves and others that build communities operators or management APIs or drivers is an example, they should live in a project, but management tooling that exists that the maintainers of the project wouldn’t want entry. So, something like that maybe should live in a CNCF type of foundation that’s focused on CloudNative. But no Apache Cassandra will remain Apache, and that’s a tome.

Industry Changes In The Last 10 Years

Mike Schwartz: So, DataStax is one of more mature, well-established companies in the open-source ecosystem today. What are some of the challenges you think that you are looking at now that were different than when you got started?

Kathryn Erickson: When I started a DataStax, it didn’t always feel like we had a lot of competition. And I think as other good distributed databases emerged, we adjusted to having competition. I think the obvious answer that most people would expect is pressure from the public Cloud vendors. But if you stay oriented on the positive sum nature of open source, then that becomes easy to embrace as well.

So, there’s changes in understanding the virtuous cycles of open-source, understanding how to build software as-a-service more quickly as Kubernetes has matured that’s become a lot easier. So, I think the ecosystem around us has matured a lot, the playbooks around how to build a company around open source have matured. And there are more senior projects that kind of exist in our ecosystem that we can work with and learn from as well.

Is Open Source Table Stakes For Databases?

Mike Schwartz: You know, most of the databases that have been released in the last, let’s say five to eight years or so, have been open source. Is being open source basically like table stakes now? So, is it a non-differentiator in the database market?

Kathryn Erickson: I think that if you’re moving from a proprietary relational system, and moving towards NoSQL, then you’re obviously moving into an open-source world. And if you can choose something that has a security life, security blanket that you know will outlive any vendor behind it, then you should consider those options first.

I think that it would be hard to start proprietary databases without the support of the community and of these foundations. I think Snowflake has done an exceptional job and is kind of the exception to the open-source game. But, you know, they were disruptive in a much different way. NoSQL in general is an open-source family.

Data Platform Trends

Mike Schwartz: Just a general database question about the database market. So, we’ve interviewed a probably more database companies on this podcast than any other type of company, but have you ever seen a real shift in the way that customers think about databases.

In the old days, I think you just used to get one database and hope it did everything, but have you seen a sort of on the technology side a shift in the way that companies are thinking about data and databases now, with more SaaS hosted offerings and more database offerings, like in general.

Kathryn Erickson: Yes. I think I think this is definitely the age of data platforms. With Cassandra, we see customers considering NoSQL when they’re using the relational system. And it can’t support the throughput that they need anymore, or they need to replicate more geographies, or exist in a multi-cloud or hybrid environment.

And so, that’s when you consider Cassandra. If you look at when you might consider Mongo, you want to get quick start with a developer friendly environment that’s great for mobile. What you start to see is that there’s a certain fit for purpose that the different NoSQL databases have. We’ve started to see an emergence of multi-model systems that move forward. And consolidating those capabilities, we have that with our Enterprise products and their integrations for graph analytics and search, we want to help customers build high-growth applications, high-speed transactional applications are the sweet spot of any Cassandra deployment.

Advice For Startup

Mike Schwartz: This is a question, a sort of a generic question for entrepreneurs who want to launch a business around an open-source product. I’m wondering if you have any advice, for let’s say, startups? And it could be general and it could be about partnerships.

Kathryn Erickson: You don’t have to invent a path to success, you can listen to the A16 podcast, you can look at other companies that are out there. You can go through so many success stories on podcasts like this, you can listen to Cockroach, and there are Open Source Underdogs podcast talk about how they’re thinking about licensing other companies. You know, having similar conversations, really understand what has made other companies successful, and don’t try to invent that yourself.

How To Improve Tech Diversity?


Mike Schwartz: Last question. As you’ve might noticed, there aren’t enough women in the tech business, including there haven’t been enough women on my podcast, so thank you for joining. What can we do to reverse that trend?

Kathryn Erickson: I think there’s a lot that we can do. as You are on the side of making mistakes, just try things, and if it’s not the right thing or if it doesn’t work, try something else. We’re going to do a program at DataStax, you know, Jumpstart, if you’re a woman or a person of color, and you want to learn Cassandra, and you don’t know where to start, just hit the button, sign up. Somebody from the team will meet with you for 30 minutes and help you get started. That might work, that might fall flat, but we’re going to just start trying stuff. And I think everyone should just start trying the ideas that they have, and we should all tell each other what’s working.

How’D You Get Started?

Mike Schwartz: How did you get started in the tech industry?

Kathryn Erickson: Well, my dad taught Computer Science, Community College, and I was going to be a DNA researcher. And I just wasn’t very good at it, and I thought, “You know what dad’s over Computer Science, we’ve been playing with computers all of our lives.” That sounds more like playing then working, it’s been that way ever since. It feels more like playing than working every day,

Mike Schwartz: That’s great. Thank you so much for joining us today, Kathryn, and sharing your insights. And best of luck at DataStax.

Kathryn Erickson: Sure. Thank you.

Closing

Mike Schwartz: Thanks to the DataStax PR team for helping us to schedule some time with Kathryn.

Editing by Ines Cetenji. Transcription by Marina Andjelkovic. Cool graphics by Kamal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.

Next episode we’re excited to have Cornelia Davis, author of Cloud Native Patterns, a Manning book that needs to be on every software architect’s bookshelf. She’s also the CTO of Weaveworks. She was fantastic, so don’t miss it. Until next time, thanks for listening, and stay safe.

The post Episode 50: DataStax NoSQL solutions built on Apache Cassandra with Kathryn Erickson, Open Source and Ecosystem Strategy first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full
Episode 49: Open Source API Management with Martin Buhr, Founder / CEO of Tyk https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-49-martin-burh-ceo-tyk/ Tue, 23 Jun 2020 18:05:26 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=1848 Intro Mike Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 49 with Martin Buhr, CEO of Tyk. API Management is a hyper-competitive market–there are commercial, open-source and SaaS products from which to choose. This makes Tyk’s success even more impressive. I think they’ve done a lot of...

The post Episode 49: Open Source API Management with Martin Buhr, Founder / CEO of Tyk first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro


Mike Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 49 with Martin Buhr, CEO of Tyk. API Management is a hyper-competitive market–there are commercial, open-source and SaaS products from which to choose. This makes Tyk’s success even more impressive. I think they’ve done a lot of basic things right: keep it simple, provide great support, make sure customers are happy. That’s enabled Tyk to grow organically, with a relatively small amount of outside investment.

This interview, it’s a little bit on a long side, so, let’s just get on with it. Here we go!

Mike Schwartz: Martin, thank you so much for joining today.

Martin Buhr: Hi, yeah, Mike, thanks for having me.

Origin

Mike Schwartz: In 2016, the API Gateway and Management market was already pretty well-saturated, you could say, with existing well-funded competitors. Why were you crazy enough to jump into this shark tank?

Martin Buhr: Well, the origin story, it’s a bit of a Cinderella story actually. I needed to make a gateway for the platform I was running as a side business, besides my regular job. And the existing solutions that were around were either large enterprise monoliths, SaaS platforms or open-source platforms – there was one or two – but they were getting really, really big. There wasn’t anything small and tactical to just use — I mean, I could use like NginX or something as a proxy, but I needed more than that.

I had just rebuilt my existing services with API first, and the platform itself, I didn’t want to write my own authentication code and I thought, “Well, that’s what API gateway’s for.” And I couldn’t find one, and I thought, “Well, what the heck, why don’t I just build one?”, which is probably a stupid thing to do, but it turned out okay.

So, that’s why I ended up with the Gateway. It was really small tactical at first. Work with my platform was really meant to sort of easy to inject into other ecosystems, without having too much deep integration. And I kind of built on it, to get more metrics out of it and understand how people were using my service. Until eventually, I realized that the side business I was running was awful. It was just costing me more money than it was fun to run.


So, I closed that down and open-sourced the Gateway because I thought why not, it is a pretty decent piece of software. And that’s how I ended up in a market, it was almost accidental. And at the start, I had this dashboard which was the UI for the system, and also gave me some analytics. And I thought, “Okay, I will close-source that and I’ll sell it.” The Gateway itself will be open-source, and I’ll sell them, the dashboard.

I sold the initial version of the dashboard for something like 400£ for a lifetime license because I wanted to take my wife to – I was living in London at the time – I wanted to take my wife to Gordon Ramsey in London, which is this super restaurant.

And their average meal per head is 400£, that’s how the meal cost, which is a stupid amount of money, but it’s a very good food, and anyway. So, I wouldn’t say that I started with a great business model – I just wanted to take my wife to lunch.

Origins Continued

Mike Schwartz: The open-source project started before the company. At what point did you say, well, I think we can really scale this, and what was your plan for sort of scaling the business?

Martin Buhr: After that initial sort of launch phase and sticking up the project on Hacker News with the small website, it got a lot of attraction, lots of people were interested, and loads and loads of different companies came along and emailed me, amongst which some of them were — we had Home Depot, Viacom, and a couple others. Some Fortune 500 sort of emailed me saying, “Oh, hi, yeah. We’d love to try your platform out, can you tell me more, can we get a call?”

But I was having those conversations at six o’clock in the morning because I was in the UK and they were in the US. And there I was in my pajamas, trying to convince them to spend some money with me, and they would tell me, “Well, how does your support work, and how are you going to scale this business, and how is this going to work long-term, why should we onboard this?”

It was the first spur to say, “Well maybe there’s a bit of a traction in this, and maybe I need some help. You know, I’m quite technical, but I’ve not run a business successfully, and marketed it and sold it properly, you know.”
Once we got the initial traction, and I saw a lot of interest, I managed to talk to an old friend of mine, I used to work with, into joining. And he came on – his name’s James – he came on as a CEO, commercial guy, and sort of helped me shape the whole thing. He shaped the business, he shaped the product offering and the marketing, and I shaped the product.


And that was a good team, because we used to work together at the agency, and we were project managers together, so he was very much on the commercial side of things and the operation side, and I was very much on the technical side of things, but we pitched together a lot.

So, we kind of knew each other’s flow, so when it came to — I think one of the first people we had to pitch to was Eurostar in London, which is the link between Britain and France, the train that goes up through the channel tunnel. And when we went there, it was our first real pitch as a company. And that’s sort of how it moved from being an open-source project that had some interest to being something viable. I think one of the things I’d really came back that they sort of told me that we were annoying people or, you know, poking them in the eye with this project was when one of our competitors, and they are not the only ones actually, three of our competitors offered to buy us or acquire us.

And this happened early on, when they came along and said, “Oh, don’t you want to work in Silicon Valley? Don’t you want to do this, don’t you want to do that?” And that kind of thing tells you quite a lot about the business having viability. So, at that point, we thought, “You know, let’s do this.”

Our first real sort of tangible money spending client wasn’t even a client, it was a company in the US in Texas that wanted to try us out, and James sort of talked them into doing an onboarding and training session with, so that we could try it out, and so we could do the integration for them.

So, they paid for the tickets in the per diem for us to go visit Dallas, spent a week there, I learned how to two-step. It was pretty cool, a far too much Tex-Mex food. And we actually never got the client, they changed teams halfway through, so we never actually got the deal, but we did get this real validation. And it was on that trip, where James turned around to me, and he said, “When I get home, I’m going to quit my job.”, because we both had day jobs at the time. And that was it. He was employee zero.

So, that’s kind of the way that panned out. We kind of stumbled into it, and then went into it full-on once we felt we had real traction. It was something there that showed growth. We had people who were actually willing to spend money on the product and spend money on us, so, yes. Does that answer your question?

Mike Schwartz: Yeah, definitely.

Value Prop / Open-Source Strategy

Mike Schwartz: So, today, what would you say is the most important value proposition for your customers?

Martin Buhr: When people come to us for API Management, there’s multiple outcomes they come to us for. They might be breaking down a monolith into a microservice architecture, they might be adopting Kubernetes, they might be looking at functions as a service, or they might be looking at the old-school API economy stuff. So, you know when you said earlier how the market was saturated with solutions, those solutions are built on the premise that users wanted to sell their back office.

So, they had existing service that they wanted to monetize them. That was the API economy. And all those business premises were on that, where it’s actually — I feel like API management now is much, much more than that. It is all about managing internal services usage, external service usage, integration – it goes all over the place in terms of the actual market. You know, sometimes we have customers going to us for integration problems, which aren’t API Management problems.

We also get a lot of folks that are just moving vendors, but the main value proposition for us is, Tyk is small, lean, really efficient. I mean, we get benchmarked against NginX and OpenResty all the time. So, you know, latency matters a lot when it comes to high-volume APIs. So, all of those boxes are ticked. Being an open-source product, we’re not open core, we’re open source. It’s just a big distinction between those two things.


So, we spent a lot of time, effort and money on engineering team working on the open-source project, to make sure that it has all the features you need to get the job done. Most open-core products will just give you an empty shell and then sell you the bits you need. We don’t do that, we don’t hide the ball. That’s a big change for us, and I think one of the largest pieces for us is that when folks come to us we have a really unique way of engaging with customers. You know, James and I are from the agency world, and it’s slightly different in terms of how you handle your customers to have a normal B2B sales works.


And I think our customers see that, and it’s created this — we have this amazing reputation for customer support. We’re always rated best of the best in Forrester and Gartner every single time. Our customers are extremely satisfied with dealing with us as a company. We are extremely good handling our customers and handling our relationship. And that’s a great value proposition, because it means, once they meet us, they go, “Oh, this is a bit different.” And then they look at the product, and they go, “Oh, this product actually says what it does on the tin.” And that’s a big differentiator for us.

We were also – and this is slightly different aspect, but when we entered this market, one of the main things we did was say, when somebody wants to install a critical infrastructure, like an API Gateway, they do not want to worry about security concerns, that software phoning home, worrying about external access to it, or external access to those laws.


So, right from the back, our software does not phone home, our licensing system doesn’t check on whether your license is valid – it’s all cryptographically done. And that puts us at a bit of a risk. It puts us at risk to make sure that we are selling something that will not bring us any income revenue, but at the same time, it gives our customers that satisfaction that they can actually create their infrastructure behind the firewall, lock it in the cave somewhere, and it will still keep ticking over. And that’s really important, especially when you go into heavily-regulated markets like healthcare, banking, insurance, and things like that.

Because these organizations, they need to be able to file out their solutions, and make sure that they have full control. So, we kind of revived this on-premise business model, where everybody’s moving to SaaS, we said, “No, no, go on-prem.”, because a lot of organizations need this, especially B2Bs.

You know, for the smaller stuff, we see a lot of companies coming to us for our SaaS, and we were one of the first companies to offer a hybrid SaaS solution, so you could go into our cloud, you could run your traffic via our cloud or, you could run your gateway locally and localize your traffic, but have all of the management infrastructure, which is the more expensive part of the infrastructure sitting in our cloud. And that was a bit of a big deal at the time.

And we took that capability, and we made that into a product, and now that became our Enterprise product. We called it rather imaginatively multi-data center bridge. It doesn’t really roll out of the tongue, but that piece of software is our big, big ticket item. And it’s closed-source. But all it really does is it enables the user to manage their API ecosystem and their gateway fleets across multiple data centers, firewalls, regions, without having to worry about latency uptime of connectivity, they can fail independently, and they scale it independently, and that’s all built into a base platform.

So, it’s quite powerful. When you get out of the box, it’s super powerful. And then, if you add all value-add that we have, that’s closed-source on top of it, it’s worth the money.  So, when it comes to open source, a lot of people try to monetize open source through support, and that’s when it’s hard to scale. You know, when you scale support, you’re scaling the margin you have and your time.

So, your customer base gets bigger, and you’ll look at your own, let’s say, your customer base comes in, they join in, the organization, they’re trying to integrate your number of support calls and the usage of SLA peaks over let’s say maybe six weeks. So, they’re getting their money’s worth on what they pay for support.

But then, once everything’s working, and they got the hang of the product, that tails off again. And that’s great because, obviously, it frees you up to do more support work, but it also means that the value they’re getting out of it, goes down. And then, it becomes more of an insurance policy, and expensive insurance policy, which means, it’s one of the first things that gets caught, especially when your software works really well. You know, as you grow, you then hire more support engineers to help you make sure you can manage SLA.

But as that support tails off, where your business stops growing so quickly, those margins you’re making on someone’s time, just aren’t sustainable, and they scale really badly. Whereas selling a product, so selling a physical thing, you know, the old school put it in a box and sell it to the end-user – that has a huge margin, because you sell a thing, you’re dealing with unit economics. And that’s much, much easier business to run.


So, when we came to the open-source conclusion, we said, “Okay, so we’re going to hamstring ourselves by giving away a free product that’s incredibly powerful. And then, we’re going to have all these value-add products that sit on top of it that are geared towards the enterprise. But those will be closed-source. And that is what we will sell. But it’s worked for us, because the thing is the value-add stuff that large organizations want to pay for is the kind of stuff that gives them those insurance policies.

Most engineers don’t want user interfaces, they don’t want human intervention, but their managers do. That VP of marketing wants to be able to go in and look at a chart. And they need that full back control, where they can manually intervene, without having to worry about a DevOps pipeline, or something like that.

And then, there’s that piece, obviously analytics is a very big piece. And then, last but not least is simple things that all businesses want, single sign-on, role-based access control multi-tenancy. Those are the kind of things that large enterprises just salivate over. And if you can take that, bundle that into your enterprise value-proposition, that’s the bit you sell. And you’ll see actually, if you look at most open-source solutions these days, you’ll see that there’s an open-source product. And then all of those businessy things are the bits they sell for an extortion amount of money.

Is Tyk Open Core?

Mike Schwartz: Actually, I wanted to roll back a little bit to something that you said. You mentioned that you’re open source, you’re not open core, would you say that there’s a core product, or let’s say, that’s open source, and then, there are additional components which are commercially licensed – how does it work?

Martin Buhr: The bit that does all the heavy lifting is the gateway. It’s a proxy, traffic goes in, gets managed, traffic goes out the back end. And that’s where all the hard work happens. So, not only does it move the traffic, but also it applies things like rate limits, quotas, it gathers analytics, it might transform the request in some way, it might run some plug-in middleware – all kinds of transformational or validation elements that you need to do to your traffic. That’s where your authentication lives, where your authorization layers live.

That component is sort of the key bit, that’s what you want. That’s the thing that you want to put in front of you, into your DMZ, in front of your traffic to secure your services. That part is completely open source, and all of the components you need, all the features you need, to manage your traffic, is part of that component.

If I went out and I said, “Okay, I am large business A, and I want to spend no money on my traffic management, my API gateway and my API management.” I could do all of that, with our gateway. The only difference is, there’s no UI, you have to do it all programmatically, with our API, and with files, and all that kind of good standard, you know, unixy way. So, that’s fully functional. We don’t hobble our product at all. But then, we have the components that go on top of that that are the value-adds. So, there’s a separate service called our Tyk dashboard. That’s the management UI. It’s also the management API.

So, the dashboard is a single-page web app. It consumes the dashboard API, the dashboard API is much larger and granular, it’s multi-tenanted, you can have users, RBAC, and all of that good stuff. It also has a developer portal, which you can expose to let your developers that self-serve access to various services in the organization or even externally.

And so, that part, that whole application is closed-source, and that takes a license key. And that license key is essentially a cryptographically signed object, we use a private key to sign it, the public key is embedded in the binary, so all we need to do is validate the signature. If the signature is valid, we can trust the claims inside it, and that then says what you’re allowed to do with the dashboard.

And it has an expiry set, so we know that, let’s say, it’s a one-year license, and then the software will lock you out after one year because that’s expired.

Good thing about that is, it doesn’t need to call home, we don’t need to actually validate the license because all that stuff happens in the software in quite a safe way. It’s hard to break unless we lose our private key obviously. So, that’s one component, and then the second component that I talked about, this multi-data center bridge, also has a license with a separate key because it’s an add-on. So, you can kind of build out your ecosystem with Tyk. You can start with the gateway, which is open source. “Okay, this is great. I like this, but I actually want a UI, and I want all this cool RBAC functionality.”


So, you buy the dashboard, and you just tell the gateway to be managed by the dashboard. So, now, you extended out your installation. And now, I actually need gateways in six different locations or six different networks. Okay, I can’t do that with one dashboard because of latency problems, database problems and things like that, so I’ll buy the multi-data center bridge. It’s an add-on, you point the bridge at your dashboard, and you point your gateways at the bridge. And it then takes care of handling your fleet.

So, we basically license those components, and within the dashboard, there are feature flags, you know, for role-based access control, multi-tenancy, things like that, single sign-on. Those are feature flags we can switch on and off in the license, so we can start with a base license, and then build up on the pricing tiers from there. And we leave that up to – it’s not a software decision, that usually goes to the commercial team. They’ll sort of know what levers they see coming out of the interactions with potential customers and saying, “Okay, well, these are the things that people want. Let’s figure out how we can price those.”

So, there’s always this evolution in how we price our software, but that’s essentially how we manage it. It basically means that somebody could go along, they go to our dashboard installation, they run that for a year, and they’re like, “Okay, we can’t afford this anymore.” They don’t actually have to take away this out – they just simply have to take the configurations out, put them into the open-source system and take away the dashboard, and they can keep running. That’s the important bit.

Whereas with an open-core system, the core thing, doing all the work is hobbled. Because, if you no longer own the components that are doing the work, like your rate limiting, or managing open ID connect, or something like that, then actually, the whole thing is broken. So, you can’t continue, you have to shift.

Products

Mike Schwartz: So, of the pre-products that you mentioned, there’s the self-managed, the enterprise, and the SaaS. From a revenue perspective, which of those is the most important today?

Martin Buhr: At the moment, on-prem, the self-managed is the one with the best margin, because we don’t take on any of the costs of running the software. SaaS is a tricky business, you have to run it, you have to put a margin on top, and you scale accordingly. So, there’s quite a lot of cost of just getting everything running.

We’re about to launch the brand new version of our SaaS, which basically takes all of the stuff you get with the on-prem version, all the good stuff, like our plug-in capability and things like that, and makes it into a multi-region SaaS, so you can say, “Oh, I want to have my dashboards in…”, but that’s mainly on data sovereignty because we operate in Europe, and we operate in Australia and Singapore. You find these data sovereignty levels get more and more and more strict. And that’s why on-prem is really popular.

But the first thing that gets cut during recession is your DevOps team. So, the last thing you really want to do is manage people that manage software, so they all go for SaaS. But then, if your SaaS offering is enough to scratch, you lose them at that point. So, we’re building our SaaS to basically be just as competitive as our on-prem solution, and just as capable in terms of where you locate it, where you run it, and doing it all by a managed controller, to make that work. But essentially, to answer the question, yeah, the wholly-owned system is the one with the biggest margin, and the one we currently see the most interesting.

Sales Motion

Michael Schwartz: So, on your website, I didn’t see any particular vertical, marketing focus. Are the sales opportunities primarily inbound, like i.e people find the open source and then, they reach out to Tyk?

Martin Buhr: It’s a bit of a mix, mostly inbound, yes. People do reach out to us, we don’t necessarily have to go banging on doors, which is good. The way people find us are a few. Yeah, there’s google looking for the open-source software, trying that out. But actually, interesting, a lot of stuff that drives us is, whenever there is a comparison, we’re always in the mix these days with our largest competitors.

And Gartner and Forrester run reports on full lifecycle API management. And we were lucky enough, six months into launch of the company, to be featured in both. I think we were an honorary mention in the first Forrester because we didn’t quite have the revenue they needed for open source, but we did manage to get in there.

So, we’ve been on the radar for a while. Nowadays, it’s more about when people look for, you know, they’re looking to do a proof of concept or some kind of RFP that will hit us off just by default. And then, they reach out to us and say, “Tell us more about your software.”

You know, the other sort of big inbound market is – especially in Asia actually – is partner marketing. So, we have a whole bunch of integration partners out there since our business is mainly the use case for an API Management solution is ultimately an integration problem.

So, we have all these systems integrators that will look to us to provide a solution. And they might be more vertical focused. So, you’ll have NSI that’s healthcare, or you know, government, or things like that. And they’ll specialize in that sector for us. They’ll build on top of our platform.

Partner Development

Mike Schwartz: Did you actively recruit and identify the system integration partners, or did they find you?


Martin Buhr: We hired a really, really good sales guy in Singapore, and he knew how that market worked out there. So, he courted them initially, it was a bit of a mix of inbound and courtship, and usually what happens is, it’s a bit more opportunistic. The problem with legacy providers at the moment is they already have all these partner relationships set up, but they’re also extremely expensive. So, when it comes down to trying to cut costs or trying to streamline things like government spending, looking at the value, those solutions add, becomes problematic for most, especially if they’re closed-source. The open-source model always feels cheaper, so that tends to be a big driver as well.

I’m not saying that open source is cheaper, but open source is perceived as less costly because it doesn’t come with the overhead of training and a sales cycle that comes with it. Because you go and try and get a trial of a large enterprise piece of software, you have to go through three layers of account managers, sales peoples and technical representatives before you can get your hands on the software. And that’s bad accessibility can be a real problem, buying off the back of a data sheet.

Is It Worth It To Serve Smaller Customers?

Mike Schwartz: I’m gathering that enterprise customers are most important from a revenue standpoint, but have you found a way to serve small organizations, i.e through the SaaS? And is serving those smaller organizations actually like materials of the business? Is it worth the effort?


Martin Buhr: It’s definitely worth the effort. I mean, we started off as a community business, still are. The people that pay our bills are the large Enterprise customers. Those are the ones we really try and court, but those are six-month, twelve-month deals. You know, selling into the enterprise takes forever, not just from just getting in the door, but also just getting contract signed and making sure that the invoicing is correct, and going through all their procurement coops. So, that’s all well and good.

That’s the bit that sustains you, but at the end, it’s the smaller engineer, the side project, the hacker that drives interest, that pushes the platform a bit, that actually will probably contribute back. Especially in the open-source place world, and so we do. I mean, as our SaaS version is relatively less costly than the on-prem version, and we do obviously offer discounts for charities or small businesses and things like that.

So, we do have ways in to use the software without paying us a fortune. And we do sometimes say, “Here, you have the dashboard to be filtered free.” But most importantly, what I said is, “If you’re working with a smaller customer, is we can enable them through our community support or through discounting, to make sure that they get what they need.

We don’t actively go after those customers. Instead, actually, almost every single time, you engage in a sale, especially in our market, it’s an integration sale. There’s a lot of expertise required – they’ll have their own identity provider, they’ll have their own databases they want to use, they’ll have different service types that they want to use, they’ll have specific integration problems that they need to solve, and they need your help with.

You know, that’s the old fight of how good is your documentation versus how much help do you want to give on a personal level. In this case, that person’s time is really expensive, so we have to be very careful where we spend that time, but we do make sure that all of our engineers, for example, are on our community forum and are actively engaged in helping the community, make sure that they can do what they need to do and work with the software. We’re not exclusively focused on the enterprise, we just can’t spend a huge amount of time on customers that don’t sustain us.

We do ultimately have bills to pay, and developers got to eat. We have something like 74 people on staff now, in 22 different countries. And, well, it’s lovely to be able to offer an open-source piece of software to the community, and take the position that we will never hide the ball. And you know, it’ll be a fully functioning piece of software forever. The bits that are the value-add, we do need to charge for, and we just need to make sure we can keep the doors open.

One of the things I think that really puts a lot of people off of starting an open-source project is, there’s a lot of entitlement that comes with folks that use open-source software that they don’t quite understand. You know, the person building it is doing this out of love or, you know, because they enjoy it. It’s rare that an open-source project becomes a business. And once it becomes a business, your viewpoint has to change. So, it’s a sort of double-edged sword of how much do you put up with users that feel like you owe them something versus trying to run a business profitably.

Hybrid Cloud Pricing

Mike Schwartz: Hybrid cloud API proxies are hard to price. Some companies are pricing per transaction, but transaction value varies widely based on the line of business per server. And CPU models are tough because in the Cloud Native world with auto scaling, compute can be a moving target. I heard MuleSoft has a pricing model based on per container hour gig of RAM. So, I’m wondering, have you figured out what are the gates you’re using to figure out how do you price for this type of service in the enterprise space?

Martin Buhr: Hybrid’s tough because you’re not actually running the traffic either. So, if you’re telling a user, “Oh, no, you run all the infrastructure, and we’ll charge you for the traffic.” It’s problematic at best. So, what we do is, for us, when somebody comes along and says, “Okay, we want to use the hybrid.”, they are basically using — you have to remember that everybody that uses our software, no matter the large enterprise to the smallest user are all using the same open-source gateway.

So, if you use our hybrid offering, you’re actually using our open-source gateway in the configuration, so it works with our hybrid cloud. So, the nice thing is, we can basically say, “Look, here’s the container, it’s public, do what you want with it. Just make sure you configure it this way. And the way we price is pretty straightforward – you basically pay us for your account. It’s a monthly subscription, and that subscription comes with data retention limits. So, that’s the most expensive part.

We don’t run any of the traffic. The traffic is going through hybrid gateway, so we are just collecting and storing and processing analytics, and that IS expensive.

So, we say, okay, so per gig, per — we actually do it by number of days we store it for. You know, you get seven days, or 30 days, or 100 days, plus the additional features in the dashboard because all the value-add stuff, so single sign-on, role-based access control – all that stuff that lives in the cloud bit, whereas the hybrid gateway itself is fully featured, so they just simply need to configure it.

So, actually the way we offer is just a subscription model, where we don’t charge by scale. If they want to run 100 gateways, that’s absolutely fine. I mean, admittedly it’s a bit of a surprise to us when people do it, but we have had it before where we had one Malaysian customer who was — they were a huge ecommerce provider out there. So, big sort of eshop, mobile shop. And they were running millions of requests today, through our hybrid infrastructure. And they must have had 100 or 150 gateways spun up in their architecture. I think they were using mesosphere.

Yeah, it just sort of, it stood up, as long as we didn’t have to store it, it was okay. So, for our hybrid instead, we’ve actually parceled it as part of our overall SaaS solution. So, if you pay our cloud price, we throw hybrid in, just as part of it, because it’s meant to be a flexible proposition – it shouldn’t be either/or.

Self-Hosted Pricing

Mike Schwartz: I see, what about on the self-managed piece, how do you price that?

Martin Buhr: Well, if it scales according to how many gateways the dashboard has to manage. So, you could for example, have 10 gateways running open source – fine, no problem. But as soon as you introduce the dashboard, we limit that down to how many things can actually connect to it. So, customers come to us and say, “Okay, I have this much traffic, I have this kind of size of server, these are my requirements for a high availability and failover.” And we can then put a package together for them saying, “Okay, well, you need two gateways, or you need five gateways, or you need ten gateways to manage that.” And then the license is built accordingly.

So, they then install the license, and it allows ten gateways to connect. If you try to add an eleventh, the one that rejects the connection, that gateway doesn’t boot basically.

What Is Tyk Doing To Grow The Community?

Mike Schwartz: It sounded, like you were saying, that you actually had good community interactions on the support forums. Are you planning to foster growth of the open-source community and ecosystem, and how are you planning to do that?

Martin Buhr: Yeah, we just hired a full-blown community manager – I think he came to us from Mozilla to help us build out our open-source offering. So, it’s one of those things that gets neglected as you get bigger. You kind of go, “We’re making money, uuu, let’s focus on that.” And then, you sort of forget about all these free users that are sitting there, giving you all this free feedback on what your product needs.

So, we do a couple of things. One, we have an open-source community forum, and all of our engineers are on there, all of our consulting engineers, so these are kind of like post-sales technical architects are on there, plus our support managers are on there to make sure that there is coverage. So, you do actually get access to the staff, it’s not just the community helping itself. So, we do actively do that. It’s obviously a bit slower than our SLA approach, but, nonetheless, it is there.

And then, as a sort of a community manager is focusing quite heavily on what we can do better in Github, managing tickets, managing visibility of the roadmap, managing pull requests, and also in general, figuring out how we can shift from being an open-source project that we mainly drive to becoming more of a platform that people can build on top of.

We are currently investigating ways of doing that to make that really work, because as I said, you know, systems integrators and partners, they will have large companies like Accenture or Tata Consulting, or Capgemini, you know, they do have industry vertical professionals. And those guys will go in there with the product that they’ve got internally around HIPAA compliance or HR compliance, or open banking, or whatever. And they’ll want to build products around that.

So, the more customizable your solution is, to handle an industry, handle a vertical, the better, because they can build products out of your platform, and both people win. You win because you sell a license, they win because they’ve now cornered a vertical with this particular solution that happens to be based on yours. So, that’s sort of where I’d like to see it go.

And we’ve seen it here and there, you know, it’s hard to track them because as I said, we don’t call home, so we don’t actually know where any of these open-source gateways are running. But when they do pop up, you do find some really interesting stuff.


We had a customer in Thailand that said, “Okay.”, that the guys they brought it into the company, they eventually left, and they started their own thing. And they just recently shared with us like, “Oh, look, we’ve done all this extra work, and now it integrates with this, and we have all these plugins.” And they’re literally running a business off of that. And I love to see that, it’s amazing. They’re doing this all open-source work, and we’ve seen a couple of integrators, partners, individual open-source contributors, just taking the product a little bit further. And that’s wonderful to see. So, I actually like to see more of that and have more visibility of it.

As we said, we don’t at the moment, because we don’t really force it to call home, so we can’t really just sort of poke a user and say, “What are you doing?”

Open Source Ecosystem Duplicating Enterprise Features?

Mike Schwartz: How would you feel if somebody took the open source, or some company took the open source and built a sort of platform around it, and there was some overlap, maybe with some of the features that you were offering? Would you see that as a positive or negative for the company?


Martin Buhr: It depends. If they’re taking business away from us. It’s a positive most of the time because they’re doing something with it that we can’t do. If they’re doing full-blown overlap, like they’re taking our dashboard and copying it and adding services on top, and then saying, “Okay, this is a cheaper version of the version you can get from the vendor.” I would be a little bit irritated because it’d be reverse engineering, some APIs we’ve got. BUT, it is the price you pay for being an open-source market, for being an open-source product. It is part of the risk.

You see a lot of people moving into the business source license, and we considered that for a while to think, “Okay, well how do we stop people trying to edge into our market.” And at the moment, it’s not so serious. I mean, if you were a database, like Mongo or Redis, it’s a much bigger problem because your footprint is much bigger, in terms of usage. And it’s this whole thing, it’s sort of API theft, or Driver theft.

And you can see it in some businesses as well that they are API based, where, all of a sudden, they’ll go, “Oh, we support the Uber API for our car service.”, which means, you can just point at a different endpoint, and your SDKs will continue to work, or all your integrations will continue to work. Or, you can just drop in a new driver, you can use the same Redis driver to connect to ElasticCache as you can to run fast. That’s just mean.

It’s really taking advantage of interfaces, and I think it’s part of the open-source problem, it’s a real issue if you become very successful in open source. You know, you become a kind of standard, I mean, we don’t have that yet. I would love that, but we don’t have it yet. But, it’s like MySQL, or Redis is a great example, they have this wire protocol, if somebody wants to launch a competing product, they just need to implement this wire protocol because it’s open source. And all of a sudden, they can say, “Oh, no, we’re driver compatible.”

Cockroach Labs, for example, is driver compatible with Postgres, let’s interface that.” It’s just a way of acquiring users through somebody else’s hard work, which is — it’s a risk, it’s a real, real risk. And that’s why things like the business source license exist. But I think the only time you need to look at something like that is when you do actually have people building out large-scale, high-visibility platforms that are competing with yours.

Most of the time, there should be enough space in the market for you both to coexist, so it’s a bit tricky. There is no answer I think. I’m not sure if that answers your question.

Advice For Startups

Mike Schwartz: So, last question. Any advice for entrepreneurs who are launching a business around an open-source product?

Martin Buhr: The first thing is, try and figure out what are the bits that are valuable in your product, because that’s the thing you’re going to need to protect and monetize. A great example actually is the Caddy Project, a really, really good web server with some really strange monetization options. And they changed their tune several times, from enabling access to a built server, to removing headers, to doing all kinds of stuff with their proprietary version. And it’s because the entire product was open source.

What you need to kind of figure out, if you look at like Kibana or even NginX, you kind of want to say, “Well, if you’re going to try and monetize an open-source project, you can’t monetize the actual open-source piece because that’s always going to be free and open, and you don’t really want to be hobbling your own open-source software.

So, you have two choices: you have the choice of either forking and creating a second branch that has all the value-add stuff that you want to sell, or going open core, where you then sell the plugins and things like that. Or maybe go like us, where you say, “We have an open-source offering, we’re going to continue providing that, it’s fully functional.” But, if you’re a big business, you’re going to want all this extra stuff. That’s the stuff that’s instead of baking it into the core, we’ve created different separate services for it, and we charged for those. That makes it more sustainable.

The other thing is, I guess, if you’re starting an open-source business, you need to really figure out who you want to sell to, because mass market is hard. If you’re looking at investment, mass market is great. So, if you’ve got something that’s got really high penetration – a good example might be, like Postman or Visual Studio Code, that gets a lot of adoption, it gets a lot of adoptions. It means you have access to millions of users. And that’s really valuable because you can eventually monetize that and mine it for that 10-20% that’ll actually pay you some money.

When you’re going mass market, you have to go for as much penetration as possible. If you’re going B2B, and you want to go into the enterprise layer, and you want to start charging those big bucks, you need to really start thinking about your sales process. I think most startups, when they get into the B2B industry, even if it’s open source or not, selling to a business is hard, it takes forever. If you don’t have the experience of working in that environment and dealing with the red tape, the context, the process, and the flow, you’re going to have a really hard time to break it.

So, that’s the second thing, it’s probably easier for an open-source product to go from mass appeal rather than B2B, but B2B is where all the money is. With the mass appeal product, if you’re going to say, “Okay, I’ve got a new code editor, or a driver, or a really cool data stitching API or whatever, if you get a lot of users for that, that’s great, but you’ll need to monetize them down the line.

And one, that means you have to alienate your community, two, it means that actually your value will be in that network, which means you’re going to be trying to sell on that network. And open-source business is that we are relying on a network need funding. So, eventually, you’re going to have to get funding in order to monetize the network, in order to get to a point, where you’re profitable.

At Tyk, we were really, really lucky because we managed to build the business really organically from the start. We started with zero employees, then one, then two, then three, then seven, and that was off of the back of a little bit of Angel money and actual real deals. We were making cash, and we were in the black. And then we grew slowly.

We only took funding last year, but that was so that we could go aggressively into the American market and open an office there because that costs a fortune. You know, you can’t build that organically. So, you kind of need to really figure out where you want to go with your project if you’re going with open source. That’s a lot of weird advice, I guess.

Mike Schwartz: That’s great. Martin, thank you so much for spending all the time with us today, and congratulations, and best of luck.

Martin Buhr: Thanks, Mike.

Mike Schwartz: And thanks to the whole Tyk team for collaborating on this podcast. Editing by Ines Cetenji. Transcription by Marina Andjelkovic. Cool graphics from Kamal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.

Don’t forget to follow us on Twitter. The handle is @fosspodcast. You can also follow me personally on LinkedIn. I always post a link to the episodes, and you can share it from there too. Next episode we have Kathryn Erickson from DataStax, one of the leaders in the Cassandra ecosystem. Hope you enjoyed this episode. Until next time, thanks for listening.

The post Episode 49: Open Source API Management with Martin Buhr, Founder / CEO of Tyk first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full
Episode 48: Zero Trust Security and Packaging with Ev Kontsevoy, CEO of Gravitational https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-48-ev-kontsevoy-gravitational/ Tue, 09 Jun 2020 16:24:32 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=1824 Intro Michael Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 48 with Ev Kontsevoy, CEO of Gravitational.This episode, it’s a little longer than most, clocking in closer to 45 minutes. That’s definitely because Ev has such a broad breadth of technical and business experience, we probably...

The post Episode 48: Zero Trust Security and Packaging with Ev Kontsevoy, CEO of Gravitational first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro


Michael Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 48 with Ev Kontsevoy, CEO of Gravitational.
This episode, it’s a little longer than most, clocking in closer to 45 minutes. That’s definitely because Ev has such a broad breadth of technical and business experience, we probably could have gone on another hour.
If you want to hear a little bit more about the tech stack, watch The FLOSS Weekly, episode 529. I’ll put in a link on the episode website.
Gravitational has two very interesting products, and they are somewhat related but also a little different. It must have been a tough marketing challenge to come up with a unified message, but apparently they did it, because the company’s been super successful by all measures.

So, without further ado, let’s cut to the tape. And after you listened to this podcast, I’m sure you’ll want to check out Gravitational’s website for more info.

Ev, thank you so much for joining today.

Ev Kontsevoy: Thank you for having me, Mike.

Story Of Mailgun

Michael Schwartz: Before we talk about Gravitational, can you talk a little bit about your previous startup called Mailgun and your experience at Rackspace, and how that led you to identify the business opportunity for a Gravitational?

Ev Kontsevoy: Mailgun was interesting, and for those who don’t know, Mailgun is an API platform to send and receive emails programmatically, so it’s email for developers. If you need to send a password recovery email, or if you need to send newsletters to your customers, you just use Mailgun API to send those messages and collect responses.

That company was interesting to me because of two things. First, it was founded in the middle of financial collapse. I moved to New York City around 2009, right when the economy was self-collapsing, I guess. And it’s also when AWS was beginning to happen, which is always interesting, like, which means that when everything is crushing around you, there is always some positives. And I thought, well, if Jeff Bezos can sell APIs to servers, I could probably sell APIs to emails.

And the reason for that is that if you’re moving to the cloud, you cannot really take your things with you, so whatever email delivery appliance you used to have, like you need to have a virtual replacement for it, that’s how Mailgun really got started. It was really tough, raising money back then for a project like this, because most investors didn’t understand what an API was. I would do a presentation, and then an investor will pull out a Blackberry. And he said, “All right. So, I got my Blackberry here out, so how do I use you API?” At that moment, you know that you lost, that this is not going anywhere.

But then, an interesting thing happened. A Twilio got funded. And everyone paid attention because Twilio said, “Oh, we are API for developers to do, like, SMS.” They started saying that Mailgun is simply a Twilio, like Twilio, but for email. And it helped tremendously.

So, we got accepted into Y Combinator, in 2011 actually, and went from there. I ran the company for a couple of years and eventually got acquired by Rackspace, by one of the cloud providers.
So, the interesting thing I learned from that experience – well, it was my first company, so you’ll obviously learn a ton if you do that – but as a technologist, I wasn’t prepared to be exposed to so much…let’s just say crime. That’s what it is really. Because email is a really dark world, so many shady things happen via email. You know, fishing, and viruses, and spam, and I would say that 80% of my attention was consumed by those problems, as we were running that company, which is unfortunate, because you actually want your real users, engineers, developers to enjoy, the product, you want their experience to be great, you want performance to be great, you want documentation to be amazing. And you constantly have to deal with spammers, fishers, and all parts of bad, bad internet.

So, that was my Mailgun experience. And the reason we, I guess, decided to sell that company to Rackspace, is because Rackspace at the time had very compelling vision, for using open source and open standards to free the world from AWS dominance.That was kind of resonating with me because I started my career as a software developer during Windows dominance. And I just remember how boring and bleak everything felt, just operating within constraints of what Microsoft thinks you should be doing. And, yeah, so that was the story of Mailgun.

Technical Origins Of Gravitational

Michael Schwartz: You know, it’s a totally different answer than I was expecting.

Ev Kontsevoy: What did you expect?

Michael Schwartz: I was listening to another episode, or another interview with you, and you spoke for some time about some of the interesting technical challenges around how complex Mailgun was, and how you were considering replicating it on a different cloud, and how completely, like just, it seemed like such a big challenge. And I was wondering if that sort of gave you some technical ideas that might have led to the development of the Gravitational, like, technology stack?

Ev Kontsevoy: Oh, so, that’s more interesting question – how did I go from being an email person to effectively ending up almost in the security space. So, what do you think happens right after an acquisition, when one technical company acquires another technical company? It happened with us, and maybe, like, when Facebook acquired Instagram, there was probably something similar there, the first thing they ask you to do is, start planning to migrate all your stuff into their own infrastructure.

Especially for Rackspace. Rackspace’s a cloud provider. It would be really strange for them to have an email service that’s not using their own cloud. And at the time, we were using SoftLayer, which is now part of IBM – old-school, bare-metal servers, and migrating to a public cloud on Rackspace, which was virtualized and had all these fancy infrastructures as code capabilities. It took us a long time, I don’t remember exactly how long it took, but let’s just say if I say 6 months, it’s not going to be an exaggeration.

And I remember having a conversation with someone in my family, maybe it was even my wife, where someone asked me like, “So, what are you doing – like, now, post-acquisition – like what are you building?” And I said, “We’re not building anything, we’re just moving from SoftLayer data center to Rackspace data center.” And that person wasn’t technical, and she said, “Isn’t that, like, copying files over the internet??” “Why is it taking six months?” Like, “You have that many files??”

And I laughed. But at the same time, it was kind of illuminating. Like, normal people think that copying software from one data center to another, it’s something that happens within few seconds.
Wouldn’t you probably feel the same, like, what is software, is it just some files, you have software on your laptop, I have software on my laptop, like, it’s just copying things around, but apparently, when it comes to data center software, to what we call cloud software today, everything takes months.

And, at the time, I just kind of took this for granted, like you’re sure it’s a complex problem.
We have completely different security here, we’re going to have that over there, over here we are using this kind of load balancing, over there is going to be different kind of load balancing, and the code needs to be updated, and so on and so forth.

But then, when I became a “racker” – that’s how Rackspace employees called themselves, I was a proud Racker by the way, I love that culture – so, once I became a racker, I got exposed to vast representation of cloud users out there, companies who use cloud computing. And I was talking to them usually trying to understand how can we improve, how we can make our cloud offering better.

And I was amazed how frequently they will bring this problem that I had with Mailgun. It’s like, “Hey, we’ve built this application, and it’s running on AWS, and now we’re trying to run it on Rackspace, and it’s really challenging. Can you help us?”

Or they would say, “We want to use Rackspace, or AWS, or Azure, some kind of cloud provider to build applications, the development environment, but for whatever reason, we need to actually run it in Luxembourg, like in the data center that is supposedly compliant with whatever regulations there are under.

So, how do we have staging environment in one place and identical production in a completely different place? And they kept coming to us looking for advice. And sometimes, we would be able to sell them something, you know, like DevOps as a service, or security as a service. But generally, I just saw this trend is that people feel like they’re chained to their cloud environment.
It doesn’t even matter how amazing that environment is.

But not being able to just take your production and have like, I don’t know, a hundred copies of it running all over the world – it’s extremely frustrating. And it’s limiting to a lot of use cases. You know, latency is important. Because the laws of physics, they don’t really change. So, you have to be able to run your code, close to where your data sets are. Data sets are distributed, which means that code needs to be distributed.

And that’s what I became deeply dissatisfied with SaaS model, in general. I don’t think there is anything wrong with Software-as-a-Service, but there is definitely something wrong with software-as-a-service running in a single place.

And as I was talking to more and more companies, I realized that some of them – check this out – they can’t even recreate their production environment in a different Amazon account. Those are companies based in Silicon Valley by the way.

So, let me just kind of zoom into this use case: you have an application running in an AWS account that you have – you control that. Go ahead and create another AWS account from scratch, also yours, so you have full, you know, God permissions for both accounts. And then, have a full replica of what you have in one account and another. And a surprising amount of companies don’t know how to do that.

They just overtime kind of lose institutional knowledge of what would it take to recreate everything from scratch. And as an engineer, you probably understand why that is happening, because you know, when you start building your application, like in the early days, not a single line of code is written, but you’d know that you need some environment.

You’re going to go and click some buttons in that AWS panel, maybe you’ll write some terraform, or cloud formation, but not always, maybe use Ansible, so, you kind of start manually creating first layer of your future environment. Then you start adding things on top, then you start deploying your code, maybe manually at first, maybe SCP. And then, you move to something, I don’t know, maybe like Ansible, or Chef, or Puppet.

So, things happen over time, and not everything is documented. Some scripts, they run daily, maybe they are part of your CICD pipeline. Other scripts you ran three years ago, and maybe the person who did it is no longer with the company. So, the point is, almost any cloud environment today, it’s built with many layers that are created over time by different people.

And that’s the reason why they’re not reproducible. And a company needs to have, you know, we need to have seven regions all over the world instead of one. Or we need to run our software inside of someone else’s AWS account. Or we need to deploy into GovCloud because government wants to use our software. They run into all these issues that they’re chained to one specific environment. And that’s why Gravitational was born. That’s the company that a bunch of ex Mailgunners started. So, that’s maybe a different answer to your original question.

Products

Michael Schwartz: So, let me drill down a little bit more, Gravitational has two products, Teleport and Gravity. Which was the first product? Or were they both coming at the same time?

Ev Kontsevoy: It’s basically a packaging question. We initially built a solution, so if you want to run your software in many different places, you have to solve many different issues for that. You need to separate your application dependencies from infrastructure. You need to solve remote access problem, you need to solve compliance problem – because a lot of these companies, like the reason they needed to be in the different place is because of compliance requirements.

And we had – what I would just call a code base, a bunch of GitHub repositories. We have this culture internally that we create GitHub repository per library. So, we break everything we built into these libraries. Each library has its own repository, and then we compile the software, and then, we produce solution.

So, originally, everything we built was just a collection of these repositories. And we started to sell the solution called Gravity, and Gravity includes everything we do. Gravity is a complete platform. With Gravity, you can take your AWS account – technically, it’s a Kubernetes cluster, but let’s put that aside for now – and you could save it all into a single file. That’s your image, we call it “cluster image”.

Think about like doing a snapshot – it’s not a snapshot, but I think it’s a helpful analogy – and then you can move that file somewhere else, and you can create exact replica. So, you take this image that contains the full copy of your production environment, and you can copy/paste it all over the world, and you can have thousands of identical environments created from that image.

So, the question then becomes, how do you keep them up-to-date, how do you push software updates, how do you fix the vulnerabilities, how do you troubleshoot problems that happen remotely. So, you do need to have some kind of remote access to those environments. Interesting analogy that I like is software updates built into operating systems.

If you have a Mac, it somehow updates itself, it downloads things from Apple, it applies these updates at reboots, and all of this kind of is just working automatically. So, think about it, from Apple’s perspective, how is that different from running a massive software deployment to hundreds of millions of servers running on untrusted network all over the world, with unreliable internet connectivity. For a typical data center person, that is a Star Wars level tech. And that is what Gravity tries to do with data centers, with your cloud account.

And this component that allows you to securely download and apply updates, that is what Teleport is. It is basically a part of Gravity that enables this world-class security into this restricted, regulated, remote environments, where Gravity is usually running.

And at some point, we thought, why don’t we make open source available for people to use as their own software update mechanism in their own kind of applications. And we open-source that, we put documentation in a separate place. And what we discovered very quickly is that people realize that it’s a much better way to do SSH than open SSH oftentimes is. Which was completely unintentional, but it was kind of nice for us because suddenly people started to discover Teleport, and download, and use it more. And basically, it’s a really good way to access infrastructure right now.

So, whatever you’re using to SSH into your servers, or to access your Kubernetes cluster, you’re probably using something worse, so I highly encourage everyone to check Teleport out. It’s free, open-source, Apache license. So, that’s how it happened – everything was built at the same time, but Teleport, just by accident, developed its own fan base, so to speak.

Revenues By Product

Michael Schwartz: In terms of revenues, which product is more important?

Ev Kontsevoy: It’s hard to say. I think both of them are doing really well, and Teleport is definitely not as expensive as Gravity is because it’s not as foundational to company’s business. Because we have Gravity customers who basically run massive, they sell a lot of software into these remote locations and deliver it with Gravity. So, Teleport, it’s usually part of a platform, it’s not the whole platform. So, it’s cheaper per deal, but we do close a lot more Teleport deals.

Marketing Message

Michael Schwartz: Have there been some challenges around finding the right marketing message for this platform?

Ev Kontsevoy: Absolutely, absolutely. I do think we’re still searching for the right way to describe what we do to the world. There are people out there who believe that Gravitational is a company that helps you take your SaaS application and sell it as a kind of on-premise environment. And it’s fine. Yes, we can do that, and we can do it better than anyone else.

But to me, that’s not really the reason why I decided to spend significant, you know, invest a portion of my life into this company. We want to enable a completely different software distribution model. Think about it like push versus pull.

We believe that the reliance of DevOps team needs to be reduced. The fact that most companies today have to set up and maintain these complex environments, with so many moving parts, and have these massive DevOps teams that constantly struggle with this ever-increasing complexity of this environment – it just feels temporary to me. It’s got to be simpler.

The typical DevOps picture at a company, like average company today, reminds me of what you would read in a history book about early computing.

Remember those stories about old electromechanical computers that would take up the whole room in the building, and you had cockroaches and bugs crawling in, and you had special people called debuggers kicking them out with broomsticks and replacing vacuum tubes and relays, computing was like a manual job, you had to have people walk around and constantly do that.

That reminds me a little bit about like a typical cloud environment today. I think it should be sealed, fully automated with zero human presence. So, if you walk into a data center today, you’re actually not going to see that many people, probably you’re not going to see anybody at all. There’s going to be some security at the entrance, but inside, it’s going to be quiet, no people.

So, I want that to be true for virtual access as well. Even though there are no physical people in that data center, but you could be assured that there are probably hundreds, if not thousands of DevOps engineers, maintaining those machines basically manually. And the purpose of like the goal for Gravitational is to make it not so. We want this all to be completely automated, similar to how millions of Apple laptops download software from Apple, apply patches, and keep running. I see no reason why a typical cloud environment for a typical company should be very different from a MacBook.

Value Prop

Michael Schwartz: How do you convert that into like business peak? You know, because it’s sort of, like, what you’re saying is almost like a kind of “sale to the guy with the hands on the keyboard”. Is there a way to convert that into like actual value proposition for the business customers?

Ev Kontsevoy: Well, first of all, let’s be honest with ourselves – can we do this today? Let’s just take a random company that have nothing to do with, let’s say –

Michael Schwartz: – eBay.

Ev Kontsevoy:  eBay. Can they make all of eBay run similar to a MacBook, with no DevOps team or server today? No, I can’t. There’s so many problems. Like, it’s a complex challenge. So, it’s going to take us many years to actually solve all of these challenges. But what you can do, you can start looking into where DevOps teams are overloaded today and start pushing that needle.

So, for example, if you try to run the same application, let’s say in a hundred different places, you will quickly realize that secure access is a huge problem. Because all these different cloud environments, they have their own tools for accessing infrastructure. And then, you have this like open-source ecosystem that all these components need to be integrated and everything used to be secure. And it begins with SSH, and it ends with Kubernetes access, and then you have, like, internal things, like Jenkins, maybe how do you secure access to Jenkins – all of these problems, they become extremely complex if you try to run more than one production environment.

So,okay, now we have a security problem, we have this access problem – that’s what Teleport solves. So, maybe I cannot promise you that your DevOps team will have nothing to do, but I can promise you that your secure access will be taken care of. You no longer need to have a competent team of infrastructure security people.

Or, if you have one, from now on, they can focus on other things, we will take your security problem away. And it doesn’t matter if you have a single cloud environment or 56,000. So, think about any like retail business, like McDonald’s or Taco Bell, they have tens of thousands of restaurants all over the world, each of those is actually a small data center. They have computers in the back, but can you dream about updating software and those locations, using like regular open SSH and let’s say Ansible? That would be quite, let’s say, inconvenient.

So, here’s the problem that we already solved for them. I do think that our strategy will be to just declare that going from 0, which is where we are today into this bright future, where all software runs by itself magically everywhere, we need to solve 57 problems.

Alright. So, let’s outline what those problems are. I think it actually helps because maybe some other startups will help us. Maybe they will solve disaster recovery or backup problems, but we will concentrate on security first. So, that’s how Gravitational is executing today.

Both Teleport and Gravity, they are very much security and compliance oriented. Because, if you want your code to run globally, you have to take care of that first as basically problem zero. That’s why we focus on it for now.

Free V. Commercial Offering

Michael Schwartz: So, a lot of open-source companies, they open-source a funnel for customers who might want to engage commercially. What does the sales motion look like at Gravitational? Is it try by fly, and what’s the effort to bring on these large customer accounts who probably pay the bills?

Ev Kontsevoy: Look, I’m going to be honest with you. We don’t really have a clearly defined strategy that’s documented for example internally, like how do we upsell open-source users. We simply try to — I think we have a following approach, we want to make sure that if you are an individual, like a developer who is curious about where technology is going, someone who has a home lab in their apartment, or a couple of Raspberry Pi’s that they’re running a little toys on – we want to have something for you.

We want you to get access to Gravitational vision, we want you to find our projects interesting. So, we’re going to have something for you. Yes, it’s going to be free, yes it’s going to be open source. We’re not going to sell you anything because you don’t really have problems that we solve at commercial level.
So, then if you are a small team, let’s say about three, two, 20 people, and you are working on some young project, let’s say your startup, we want to have something for you as well.

Then finally, if you’re a large enterprise, let’s say you’re IBM, and you have some problem, we are going to have something for you as well. Every time, we look at the capability that we are introducing into one of our products, we will always have one of those three use cases in mind, simply the size of the team. One-person small team, and then giant team. And it just so happens naturally that things that giant teams want, they are willing to pay for them.

And things that hobbyist would want, I think trying to charge money for it – it is just ridiculous. At least for us. And that’s how we naturally end up in the split, what is a commercial offering and what is free and open-source offering.

Is Gravitational Open Core?

Michael Schwartz: Would you say that Gravitational is open core?

Ev Kontsevoy: I would say no, we are open source, like we are open-product company. Everything we make is open source. We have a tiny bit of proprietary magic dust that we apply to our open-source products, but that dust just happens to be critical for large companies. In other words – let’s talk about a simple use case – you want your engineers to SSH into their machines, in the most convenient way possible. You don’t want to like annoy anybody with additional stuff.

But you also want this to work across all kinds of cloud environments, you want this to work with, you know, IoT devices out there in the field, you want this to be compliant with all these different regulations that your customers want you to be compliant with.

You basically want the best in-class security and compliance, but you don’t want developers to be inconvenience.

Okay, which means you have to use identity-based system. In other words, if a developer, who wants to access something, they need to go through some SSO process, once a day, nothing crazy.
And, usually, if you look at small teams, what do they use, everyone uses like Google Apps and maybe GitHub, which is naturally what are open-source products for. But if you look into what giant enterprises use, you will start discovering products you’ve never heard of. Like, I think SalePoint, and you obviously want Teleport to support those things. And that’s what we’re going to charge you for.

Another thing too is, if you are a giant enterprise, you are going to have all these different teams and different groups, you might have infrastructure developers, or like NetSec team, or you’re going to have like some auditors. So, in other words, the composition of your teams is complicated. And you need highly granular role-based access control.

So, this extra granularity that only large companies require, that’s another proprietary thing, like from our perspective. So, we basically try to attach – we try to draw the line between open source and enterprise offering, basically based on a company size. Because large companies, they need things that are not even obvious to startups.

SaaS Gravitational?

Michael Schwartz: A lot of open-source entrepreneurs, they love the SaaS business model. I’m sure you’ve kicked around some SaaS ideas. Is there a SaaS Gravitational offering, or are you thinking about one?

Ev Kontsevoy: It definitely makes sense. Yes, we do run into accounts every once in a while who simply say, like, “We love your tools, this is unbelievable, but believe it or not, we right now have zero engineers available to set everything up, to get up and running. “Can you just do it for us, can you run it for us?” And we listen, and we, let’s just say we’re considering it.

Pricing

Michael Schwartz: Most of the companies in this space are using a per-user metric for gating. I’m wondering if you’re using that strategy, has it worked for you, is it a good proxy for value and a good way to land and expand?

Ev Kontsevoy: I just told you what our internal motivation is, what we’re actually building – completely autonomous unmanned, operational model. So, it would be strange for us to charge you based per on number of users if we believe that software needs to run without humans standing around.

Difficulty here comes from the fact that we’re not there yet, so yes, you do need DevOps engineers SSHing into boxes every once in a while. But I believe, if we succeed over time, like the need for that will disappear. So, if we, for example, adopt a business model that we’re going to charge you based on how many SSH users are manually accessing servers, that pricing model will not be compatible with our long-term vision.

Even today, I would argue, without even Gravitational technology, if you have a well-running operations, but you are a Cloud environment, you should not be giving SSH access to your production environment, to all of your engineering team.

Ideally, very few people should be able to do that, and ideally, there should be no need. Especially if you’re running on a modern cloud, you can simply like kill things that misbehave and recreate them from scratch very quickly.

Michael Schwartz: So, what gates do you use?

Ev Kontsevoy: It’s based on your footprint. If you’re running large applications, you’re processing tons of data, you’re present in many data centers all over the world, you have tens of thousands of services based on that, we will charge you more for our solutions.

How To Gauge Deployment Size?

Michael Schwartz: In the Kubernetes world, servers are so ephemeral. You get a lot of servers when there’s a big demand and less servers when there’s less demand. It seems like all those per server, per CPU models are so challenged in the new Cloud Native world – how do you gauge the size of a deployment today?


Ev Kontsevoy: Well, I would argue that per server, per CPU, per RAM pricing, it’s not getting obsolete. If anything, it’s getting more and more popular with – like, look, AWS themselves. That’s what they charge you for. Yes, it is more challenging to accurately meter usage, but generally I would say that usage-based billing is the future for almost everything we use in a data center today.
So, for Teleport SSH access specifically, we look at how many servers we’re using. And for different companies, we offer different options there because there are different business models, and that’s the reason why we do custom quotes for every account.
For Gravity though, I do believe that the value we provide is based on how many environments you’re going to be running. Let’s say, if today, you have a single-production environment, then tomorrow, you’re going to be in a hundred production environment – it’s the environment. Like, the number of environments, that’s the value that we give you. So, then we’re going to charge you based on how many environments you have. We don’t really care about how many servers you have in each.
And environments, they rarely jump too quickly. So, it’s kind of slower moving targets. And that’s how our pricing is built on for Gravity site.

Does Open Source Help The Business?

Michael Schwartz: Has open-sourcing the software really materially helped the business?

Ev Kontsevoy: Absolutely. Because it’s the best form of marketing you can do in our market. We are all dreamers. I believe the technical founders and companies that are started by engineers, they almost always have this dream component attached to it.

And you want to find people who agree with you that future is going to look different, the future is going to be moving this direction and not that direction. And that person is probably also technical. And the best way to communicate with that person – and it has always been like this – is to show me the code, let me play with it. Because that’s how we collectively dream together, by downloading each other code, installing it, playing it, and then communicating, and sending each other pull requests and criticism. That’s just the best way for, I think, mankind just collaborate and move the progress forward.

And if you don’t do that, if you use proprietary kind of code in the cave mode, then you’re basically guessing. You’re saying, “Hey, I’m going to go and work on this problem for a year.”, and then I present you with the solution. If solution works for you, you’re going to buy it. And if solution doesn’t work for you, you’re just going to ignore me. And that’s just a much slower way, to get to this optimal state of offering something that the world truly needs.

So, it’s really hard for me to even think differently right now. You see, with Mailgun, it was different because the problem was so obvious. The problem was basically this: the world needs to send and receive email. And there are solutions for it already, and you have them in your data center.

And now, you’re going to go be in the cloud, so you cannot take your solutions with you. So, you need to have a cloud version of it. All right, sure, here’s one. But Gravitational is much more visionary company that we just want to change the way how cloud software runs. And if you’re going to start working on that problem, doing it in the open, it’s the only way I see how it could even be accomplished.

Portability Of Startup Experience?

Michael Schwartz: This is an unusual question that I haven’t asked before, but you sort of backed the question a little bit. You know, I’ve actually started more than one business – Gluu’s my fourth business – and one of the challenges I found in starting the second business was I applied a lot of the lessons from the first business to the second business. And it turned out that the second business was so completely different that actually like I shouldn’t have.

And I’m wondering, are there any cases where – I mean, certainly you learned a lot in the first business, that helps – but was there any like things that you feel like maybe the first experience led you to something to take longer to figure out?

Ev Kontsevoy: Actually, the Gravitational in many ways is anti-Mailgun. So, Mailgun was proprietary code-based SaaS. Gravitational is open-source software that you can download and run. So, from the beginning we knew that our ability to borrow from Mailgun experience is going to be limited.

So, that allowed us to bypass a lot of these potential problems that you’re referring to. However, what was helpful and applicable is just the mechanics of starting and running the company. You know, raising money, incorporating, setting up like basic processes. So, a lot of that you could just fly without even thinking and do exact same things, simply because a lot of early-stage startups are surprisingly similar. So, copy/pasting that experience into your present, I think it’s totally applicable.

Why Leverage An Incubator For A Second Company?

Michael Schwartz: You chose to go to Y Combinator and raise seed funding and go a pretty traditional startup route. But you didn’t have to go that way, you could have probably bootstrapped it. I’m wondering, why did you think going the traditional route made sense, given that you probably had some capital and some experience and maybe could have done without it?

Ev Kontsevoy: Because it worked previous time. You see, I’m a technologist, I’m not a professional entrepreneur. Like, incorporating, raising money, doing all these things – it’s boring stuff. So, it worked wonderfully for us at MailGun, going through this traditional sequence, through Y Combinator seed stage, and so on and so forth. We just did the exact same thing, we would concentrate and spend my time on actually building interesting products and solving problems, because that’s really the reason you’re doing it. Everything else feels almost like distraction.

Yes, you have to do these things, but at the end of the day, they’re not differentiating, they’re not going to define if you’re going to be successful or not – it’s simply getting resources, and office space, and processes, and 401k plan, whatever, just getting it done as soon as possible and moving forward – that was the goal. And look, Y Combinator, they’re very incredibly efficient at getting all of their startups through this early stage, so I highly recommend it.

Team

Michael Schwartz: So, you’re currently in the Bay Area, are you planning to recruit most of the team in the Bay Area? Maybe you’ve already, like, diversified quite a bit – what are your thoughts about building the team in the next couple of years?

Ev Kontsevoy: If you’re asking me, like, what I recommend – I don’t recommend anything. I think it always depends on founders and company culture. There is always this popular question, like, “Shall I go 100% remote, or should I have an office?” I don’t know the answer to that question, there are pros and cons, but what we’ve decided to do is that we want – there are smart people all over the world –we don’t want to discriminate based on either they are in Bay area or not. We want them to be involved, we want them to join the company. And we quickly realized that Seattle actually is the capital of cloud computing of the world. It’s not Bay area.

If you want to recruit engineers who understand what kernel variables are, who understand differences between file systems, who can troubleshoot lost packets in the network, you will have a much better time finding that talent in Seattle because every single public cloud provider is there. You know, Azure, AWS, GCP, it’s all sale companies, even smaller clouds, like former CenturyLink Cloud, in the Oracle Cloud, original team was based there.

So, Seattle, it’s the highest concentration of cloud computing experts. And for that reason, our engineering is actually based in Seattle, even though the company is headquartered in Oakland Bay Area. But we’re also open to hiring people all over the world. We have a small office in Toronto, we have remote people on the east coast, and Germany and Italy. So, we’re constantly evolving in our views on what kind of culture we want to have. It is challenging, it’s not easy.

How To Scale Beyond Startup Phase?

Michael Schwartz: So, you’re in an interesting stage in the company’s development, where you’ve had quite a bit of success, and you’re sort of scaling to the next level. Any advice for entrepreneurs who find themselves in that situation, in terms of, like, how to adjust to this new sort of focus on sales and marketing, especially for technical founders.

Ev Kontsevoy: You just gave them advice – do not ignore sales and marketing. Think seriously about sales and marketing. Something that I learned in my journey, going from engineer to entrepreneur, was that building a sales team, building a marketing team, is absolutely similar to building a product.

So, just like you have an engineering team with your processes, you know, for example, no one can commit to master directly, you have to do your own branch, and a pull request with a code review. And all good engineering teams, they have processes, and then the coding style, and like which programming languages we allow, which ones we do not allow – building this takes experience, building this takes a lot of brains, and doing it well requires a lot of energy and discipline. It’s really tough. So, this is why top technologists are so expensive. And that is absolutely true to yourselves and marketing teams.

Doing marketing and having a marketing machine that’s operating properly also takes a lot of brains. No, it’s not obvious, no, you can’t just read a couple of Golden Books and go do it yourself. And then, the same thing with sales.

So, underestimating the effort and sophistication of sales and marketing activities I think is quite common amongst engineers. So, simply building and expecting that the users will come – it rarely happens. You have to just approach those problems with, I would say, seriousness, and everything else will come from there. Because if you’re not stupid, if you do have engineering approach to everything, simply putting yourself into that frame of kind of mind, will help you solve sales and marketing challenges.

Advice For Entrepreneurs

Michael Schwartz: Last question, any advice for new entrepreneurs launching a business around an open-source software project or product?

Ev Kontsevoy: Yes. I would just say, forget about that word, don’t call yourself entrepreneur – that’s a distraction. Think of yourself as a product person who tries to solve someone’s problem, and just focus on that until you have overwhelming evidence that it is indeed happening. Because at the end of the day, company is just like a vehicle for allocating and distributing resources. This is what it is. It’s deeply secondary to what you actually trying to do. So, if you want to change the way how backups are done, just focus on that and just forget about incorporation, what kind of company you want, what kind of investors you want – all of that, it’s not primary to your success.


You have to understand what your solution is going to be, how it’s going to be different, how it’s going to be better, who is going to like it, who’s going to not like it – solving all of these problems and just focusing on that before you even begin to think about entrepreneurship is probably key.
Because one common thing I see in “entrepreneurial circles” is that people basically start with this, “I want to have a company.”, and then, they start looking for problems to solve. It just feels very unnatural to me.

Closing

Michael Schwartz: Ev, thank you so much for going over a little bit on time and for sharing all your experience, and best of luck with Gravitational.

Ev Kontsevoy: Thank you very much! Thanks for having me, Mike.

Michael Schwartz: Great job by Ev, isn’t it? Editing by Ines Cetenji. Transcription by Marina Andjelkovic. Cool graphics from Kamal Bhattacharjee.

Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere. The podcast Twitter handle is @fosspodcast. Follow us. Retweet the episodes, help us get the word out.

Next episode German-British-Kiwi, Martin Buhr from Tyk, one of the coolest open-source API Management companies around.

Stay safe everyone. Until next time, thanks for listening.

The post Episode 48: Zero Trust Security and Packaging with Ev Kontsevoy, CEO of Gravitational first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full
Episode 47: Jenkins Software Delivery Automation and Management with Tracy Miranda, Director of Open Source Community CloudBees https://opensourceunderdogs.com/jenkins-software-delivery-automation-and-management-with-tracy-miranda-director-of-open-source-community-cloudbees/ Wed, 27 May 2020 14:38:17 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=1812 Intro Michael Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host Michael Schwartz, and this is episode 47 with Tracy Miranda, Director of Open-Source Community at CloudBees. CloudBees is a company behind Jenkins, the famed project, which is used to automate building, testing and deploying software. Many commercial and open-source projects use Jenkins...

The post Episode 47: Jenkins Software Delivery Automation and Management with Tracy Miranda, Director of Open Source Community CloudBees first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro

Michael Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host Michael Schwartz, and this is episode 47 with Tracy Miranda, Director of Open-Source Community at CloudBees.

CloudBees is a company behind Jenkins, the famed project, which is used to automate building, testing and deploying software.

Many commercial and open-source projects use Jenkins as part of their continuous integration and delivery infrastructure, including my company Gluu.

Jenkins was forked from a project called Hudson, started by Sun Microsystems in 2005. After Oracle acquired Sun, Hudson was forked and rebranded as Jenkins.

Tracy has been an entrepreneur, a developer, a technologist for around 20 years. She was active in the Eclipse community, serving on the board of directors. She’s also one of the founders of the Continuous Delivery Foundation, which operates under the Linux Foundation.

Hopefully that gives you a little background, so let’s get on with it. Here’s Tracy. Thank you so much for joining today.

Tracy Miranda: Thanks, Mike. It is my pleasure to be here today.

Joining CloudBees

Michael Schwartz: For 10 years, you founded and ran your own consultancy, specializing in Eclipse development – how did you end up getting involved in CloudBees?

Tracy Miranda: Yes. I think the common thread there is definitely open source. So, I think that’s something early on in my career I’ve always been drawn to, especially because of the innovation that you find with open-source communities. And it came at a time I was looking to just make a change in the career and focus a bit more on some of the community building aspects.

And as I was talking to people out in the industry, I got introduced to Kohsuke Kawaguchi, who’s the creator of Jenkins, and at the time was the CTO of CloudBees. And the more he talked about the next stage of CloudBees, and what he wanted to do with Jenkins, the more exciting it sounded to me, so I could not resist the opportunity to join his team and lead the open-source team and try that future direction.

History of CloudBees

Michael Schwartz: So, for the non-geeks in the audience, can you talk a little bit about the history of Jenkins, and how that impacted the development of CloudBees?

Tracy Miranda: Yes, yes. So, Jenkins is a built automation server. It is most commonly used for continuous integration and continuous delivery, which are big parts of delivering software. So, it’s a tool that’s been around for 15 years. Many might know it originally in its first incarnation as Hudson, but it evolved over the years and became Jenkins and became very rapidly adopted by developers and focused on delivering software everywhere, just because it gave you a lot of flexibility.

And it was the first tool that sort of helped you integrate and build your software. And it was really what we’d say is the start of this whole field of developer productivity engineering.

And around it, so companies like CloudBees emerged, offering more Enterprise version. So, when it came to scaling or features around governance and securities, and CloudBees would offer Enterprise Jenkins. And that’s just sort of evolved and evolved, and now the whole space is currently really doing very well as we deliver more and more software every day.

CloudBees Products

Michael Schwartz: So, CloudBees has a number of products and services. For 2020, what are the most important products, with regard to revenue, and what are the most important projects for your future growth?

Tracy Miranda:  In 2020, well – let me talk about the direction we’re going first of all, and then I can bring that back to the present – so, we see just everybody’s delivering a lot more software, and software has become critical to every industry. So, you know, whether it’s a bank or a travel company or insurance company – you name it – software’s a differentiator for them. So, the more software we have, the more we kind of start to talk about like software factories. And you can use the factory metaphor as well to apply it to this.

So, in that model, we talk about Software Delivery Automation, and Software Delivery Management automation is just – the name says it all – it’s everything you need to do to get the software delivered, pretty much like a factory. And then, the Software Delivery Management, or SDM, is the part where you have the business intelligence coming in, how do you make the decisions, what to release when, and to who. So, that’s the direction we’re headed in, and we’re building out all the different parts that contribute to integrating all the tools.

Today, what a lot of companies have is basically focused on continuous integration and continuous delivery, so, tooling around tools like Jenkins, we also have SaaS versions of CICD tools, and then, any tools that help you deliver faster. So, we’ve got a whole kind of portfolio, depending on your flexibility and what you’re trying to achieve.

Market Segmentation

Michael Schwartz: CloudBees is in a very horizontal market. As you mentioned, you are serving customers in basically every industry. Given that, does CloudBees segment solutions or the marketing effort, either vertically, or by use case, or in any other way?

Tracy Miranda: I think probably the most clear segmentation, which we will kind of see, is whether people want to manage it and have things kind of on-premise themselves, or whether they want software-as-a-service. So, that tends to be a key differentiator.

And oftentimes, it will depend on the industry. So, certain industries might have very strict compliance or governance around it. So, perhaps, it always has to be an in-house solution. But then, perhaps some new startups, so, in different segments can afford to go with much more as a service model, where they don’t really want to deal with the nuts and bolts, and the upgrades and the security patches – they’re just happy to focus on what they need to do to get their software out the door.

Why Open Source

Michael Schwartz: Without open source, there probably would be no Jenkins, at least as it currently exists.  And therefore, I guess perhaps no CloudBees. But going forward, why does continuing to invest and contributing to an open-source community materially help the business?

Tracy Miranda: This is my key role at CloudBees is, it’s kind of overseeing the whole open-source strategy. So, you’re absolutely right, CloudBees is based on this massive open-source project, and as we grow and continuing to evolve, we’re going to do a lot more in open source and in different ways.

I think there’s lots of different benefits we see to open source, so, on one side, if you take kind of just the engineering side, there’s obvious benefits from working with the community – you’d get fast feedback, you’d get people contributing.

A lot of the developers we hired in the early days would come from open-source communities, and then they’d even have the advantage of they are already up-to-speed with the processes and the ways of working and the code base.

But then, there’s also other kind of strategic science to open source as well. Open-source projects tend to spread like wildfire, I had someone using the term, kind of the open-source tsunami. And they have a tendency to change the direction of industries, to take something like Kubernetes, which caused a big shift in the whole sort of cloud infrastructure.

So, in that way, we also kind of look at technologies for them to be open and for them to drive the future direction of the industry and help us to get to an innovative place. So, we always want to be involved with open source and find ways to just create those kind of win-win situations for both the community and the company.

Open V. Commercial Features

Michael Schwartz: You mentioned previously that it was an Enterprise version of Jenkins, and I’m wondering about, today, is there still software that’s non open source, and if so, how do you decide what to open-source and what to keep private?

Tracy Miranda: Yes. I know that’s a key thing, and it’s constantly evolving. So, we have an internal process, and we’ll kind of look at the way things are evolving in the market. In general, like you take something like Jenkins, and we have a lot of plugins added by different groups and different individuals in some cases.

One thing that CloudBees do is, for the software like CloudBees Core, or CloudBees CI built on top of Jenkins, is we also offer kind of tiers of plugin, so we know which ones meet a certain level and meet the requirements for Enterprise type customers.

So, this is focused specifically on things like security and governance and running things at scale. So, typically features in those areas, or verifying plugins, will be the areas we’ll tend to kind of have as the more closed source. And anything developers tend to use, this tends to be pretty open.

Open Source Strip Mining

Michael Schwartz: I’m sure you’ve heard this term “open source strip mining”, where large companies take open-source software projects and commercialize them. You know, you have a SaaS, you are offering themselves, but is this something that you’re concerned about, or any thoughts about this sort of phenomenon?

Tracy Miranda: I’ve definitely heard the term, yeah, it’s a pretty controversial one. But I think it is something that is always a consideration. So, you take something like Jenkins X, which is a new open-source project. It’s not related to Jenkins, as the name might indicate, but it’s actually a complete new CICD tool based on Kubernetes. And it’s one of the best ways to do Cloud Native CICD.

So, a lot of Jenkins X is open source, and you could conceivably imagine another company taking it and wrapping it up and delivering it in a specific way, but I think the reality is that open source is always evolving. And it’s more about kind of the vision in the direction it’s going. And the key thing I guess from CloudBees’ perspective is, we have a lot of the people who are driving that direction working for CloudBees.

So, I guess that the people, at the end of the day, are a secret source. So, even if other people want to come and extend it or do it in a different way, I think we’re always kind of focused on what’s the vision, how is this going to evolve, how we’re going to keep pushing the industry forward. It’s a concern, but we try not to spend too much time focused on that, just more time focused on what do the users want and where are we headed.

SaaS V. License?

Michael Schwartz: In terms of monetization strategy, is the Enterprise license the majority of the revenues, or is SaaS the biggest part of the revenue stream?

Tracy Miranda: Yes. Enterprise licenses are definitely the main focus. I think that will evolve over the next set of years, but, for now, that’s certainly the case.

Pricing

Michael Schwartz:  Few questions about pricing, which is hard for a lot of startup entrepreneurs. Many organizations are using Jenkins for free – is it hard to move these customers to a paid offering? What type of gates do you define? Is it per developer? And is pricing still evolving with new offerings, or have you achieved some stability in the pricing area?

Tracy Miranda: Yeah. No, I think this is an area constantly evolving. You know, Jenkins is a great tool, and a lot of people can do a lot of things with that anyway. So, we’re always looking to add value on top of that. So, we find a lot of the customers who see the value of CloudBees, they’re focused on what they need to do as a business, they don’t really want to be messing around CICD is not their value add, so they want kind of the complete package. And that includes the ability to get support and the ability to know things are going to work for them.

When you are sort of doing things in open source by yourself, you tend to run the risks yourself. You can pick up plugins and you have to decide, are these going to work for me, are they going to have the security patches attached. And what happens if something goes wrong? You know, you can’t pick up a phone and kind of call up the open-source community and ask them to fix your thing in a timely manner. That being said, it is a constantly evolving space.

So, I think kind of the offerings and the bundling and the way that works is always evolving. And like we will do things as well, like offer kind of more analytics on top of that, which give people sort of more insights in what they can do with their systems, and yeah, that’s just constantly growing,

Partnerships

Michael Schwartz: What have been some of the more important partnerships for CloudBees in terms of specially impacting the business?

Tracy Miranda: In today’s world, I think you really can’t succeed as a company on your own – we had a recent kind of partnership program, which I think we’ve got a whole bunch of companies who we were working with. My main tendency is to be on the open source and on the Continuous Delivery Foundation – it’s not partnerships in the traditional sense, but a lot of companies on the open-source side we’re working with closely.

And the other big one today is the partnerships with the cloud providers, and with those we have really strong relationships. I think every cloud provider has a marketplace out there, and you can easily access all CloudBees products very easily from the cloud marketplaces. I think this year we’ve also named the Google Cloud partner of the year, so, yeah, a lot of strong relationships, especially towards a whole Cloud space.

Project Governance

Michael Schwartz: You have a lot of experience in this area, so I can’t resist asking, but companies can host their own open source and build their own governance infrastructure around their project, or they can move to a foundation that can help maybe attract a larger community. What’s the strategy of CloudBees there, and how’s that evolved over the years?

Tracy Miranda: Yeah, a great question. So, Jenkins itself pretty much had its own governance, and that worked well and served the community really well for the first kind of ten, fifteen years. You know, it is very alike with model software in the public interest, it provides some great services.  But, eventually, it got to a point where there was some kind of sticking points in the community. These were things sort of shared widely with the community.

Some key things like just having a business entity so that we could get signing certificates, having a more kind of ability to hire for roles that want developers, but other kind of things that are key to software projects, but you don’t necessarily get contributions for. And again, the ability to build a bigger community.

So, these are kind of some of the limitations that we hit. So, Jenkins got to a scale, where it needed to grow past that and to get companies interested and understanding it, they needed a really kind of known model, which is why it then looked at setting up Jenkins in an open-source foundation. And that led eventually to the Continuous Delivery Foundation forming, which is, as the more we talked to folks, the more it made sense, not just to have a single project foundation but to have something where a bunch of folks could come together and work towards a bigger vision.

So, that’s been the key thing. The creation of the Continuous Delivery Foundation is what have helped launch over the last year. And that’s been a major kind of change, both for Jenkins and for CloudBees as a business.

Fostering Diversity at CloudBees

Michael Schwartz: You have been an advocate for a diversity. And I am wondering have you been able to have an impact on how CloudBees builds the team?

Tracy Miranda: Yeah, I think diversity is super important for all sorts of reasons, but especially for business ones. I am very lucky in my position, I head up the open-source team, I’m a hiring manager, so, in a great position to kind of influence that at CloudBees.

So, I have a great team, and I’m happy to say very diverse on kind of multiple accesses. You know, gender and age, and from where we are across the world. So, that’s been really nice.

We also have lots of initiatives at CloudBees. One of the things I’m pleased to say is, there’s a lot of people doing things like CloudBees, and kind of constantly changing the status quo, which is nice, because it’s not always something I have to do, and then I can just kind of focus on my main job. But, yeah, a lot of great folks pushing things in the right direction.

Pandemic Impact On Diversity?

Michael Schwartz: We’re recording this episode in May of 2020, so the pandemic is on everyone’s mind. It’s easy to look at all the negatives, but being an entrepreneur, I think I’m inclined to look at positives. Is there any way we can spin the pandemic as a positive around creating more diverse teams?

Tracy Miranda: That’s really interesting. But I think by moving online and by a lot of companies had this almost artificial limit on, where people can be hired from and all having to live in specific areas, which are often cities, which often have big barriers to entry in some cases. I think by going virtual, you do remove some barriers, you do make it easier for people to be hired from wherever they are, and all of a sudden, that does open up the field for people you can hire from. So, I think, in that way, it can be very positive.

How To Catalyze Gender Diversity In Tech?

Michael Schwartz: Just speaking from my own personal experience, my company is very globally distributed in terms of team members, we have team members from like every continent, except Antarctica. So, we are doing an okay job in terms of diversity, but in terms of getting more women on the team, we’ve faced some challenges.

I know you’ve talked a little bit about this topic, but maybe you can share why do you think there aren’t more women in tech, and what are some of the challenges that women face? And how can we maybe help more women get into the tech business?

Tracy Miranda: I spent a lot of time over the last three or four years trying to understand for myself, because I think at the beginning of my career, I took it a bit for granted. I thought this is just the status quo, this is how it is, but I think it is down to kind of a number of factors all coming together. And you know, unconscious bias tends to be a big feature.

We’ve got just a ton of research that shows how lots of different things have compounded things over the year. I think there’s a great NPR Podcast as well, which talked about the times of women started dropping out of computer science courses. And it was almost because computers in general were marketed towards boys. And it was very difficult for them to sort of coming disadvantages to the courses, and there was not a lot of empathy for that. So, I think that that’s kind of one factor, but there’s a lot of other things in general that play out, just networks and how people bring people into companies.

So, the good news is I think we have more awareness than ever before of what it takes. And then, there’s a number of things we can do. The bad news is, you almost have to keep at it constantly, and things change very, very slowly. But we know, for instance, just representation matters hugely. So, having more women voices, having more women in higher position kind of modeling — I think there’s a great expression “You can’t be what you can’t see.”

And then, just having more not just mentors for women but sponsors who are ready to kind of pull them up in the right channels, help them to get and meet their goals much faster. And I think we’re getting a lot more systematic approaches in place to do this. And actually, I was really glad to see with your podcast, you have a lot of the recent guests have been some very frankly incredible and awesome women. And I think that’s places you start, just having that representation, having those people talking and telling their story.

Advice For Open Source Startups

Michael Schwartz: Thank you. We are doing our best. So, last question, you run your own company for a decade, and you’ve been around open source for a long time, so I’m sure you’ve seen some successes and failures of entrepreneurs who have tried to use open source as part of their business model. If you were starting out from fresh today, you wanted to use open source and build a business around it, do you have any advice for that person about how they should go about it?

Tracy Miranda: I think there’s a lot that gets said about kind of open source and the relationship with business models. I think I completely buy into it. Building off open source has so many efficiencies and so much kind of leads to a lot of serendipity.

I think you see a lot of startups today embracing open source and understanding that it’s not just open source in the sense of code, but what you’re really doing when you embrace open source is building out a community. And I think people understand more than ever how key developers are to any product and how key that community is.

So, not that open source is the only way to do it, but it’s such a great way to do it, and I think the main advice would be: if you’re doing it, you have to commit to it completely. You can’t kind of be half-hearted about open source, you have to commit to the vision and to the community and constantly growing it and tending to it like garden. And then, it will play huge dividends. And we have seen the companies who have done really, really well off open source. It’s just kind of really sort of impressive.

Closing

Michael Schwartz: Tracy, thank you so much for spending some time with us today. And best of luck with CloudBees and with the Continuous Delivery Foundation.

Tracy Miranda: Thanks very much for having me. It’s been great.

Michael Schwartz:  Thanks to the CloudBees team for helping us to promote this episode on social media. Editing by Ines Cetenji. Transcription by Marina Andjelkovic. Cool graphics by Kamal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.

The podcast Twitter handle is @fosspodcast.

Next week we talk to Ev Kontsevoy, founder and CEO of Gravitational. Stay safe everyone. And until next time, thanks for listening.

The post Episode 47: Jenkins Software Delivery Automation and Management with Tracy Miranda, Director of Open Source Community CloudBees first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full
Episode 46: Create, Deploy, and Manage Modern Cloud Software – Pulumi, with Joe Duffy, Founder / CEO https://opensourceunderdogs.com/pulumi-joe-duffy/ Tue, 05 May 2020 18:01:42 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=1804 Intro Mike Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 46 with Joe Duffy, Founder and CEO of Pulumi. Pulumi is a platform that lets organizations manage infrastructure in the cloud of their choice, using the coding platform of their choice. It’s delivered as either a cloud...

The post Episode 46: Create, Deploy, and Manage Modern Cloud Software – Pulumi, with Joe Duffy, Founder / CEO first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro


Mike Schwartz: Hello and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 46 with Joe Duffy, Founder and CEO of Pulumi.

Pulumi is a platform that lets organizations manage infrastructure in the cloud of their choice, using the coding platform of their choice. It’s delivered as either a cloud service or a software. Joe’s doing a fantastic job executing the Pulumi business plan. No point spoiling the show for you – let’s just dive right in. Joe, thank you so much for joining the podcast today.

Joe Duffy: Hey, Mike. I’m glad to be here, thanks for having me.

Pulumi Products

Mike Schwartz: In one of your past interviews, you described Pulumi as the name of the band, the name of the album, and the name of the song. We’ll take more into the business later, but can you describe the current Pulumi product offerings or maybe I should say super powers?

Joe Duffy: Yes, superpowers, yes. We just launched that sort of as a new marketing theme for ourselves. We started Pulumi because we really have this belief that everybody should be able to leverage the full capabilities of the cloud. The cloud is kind of changing everything about how we build software, and yet, we found that for most developers, the cloud was still sort of an afterthought, which harkens back to the days of virtual machines and N-tier applications.

And on the other side, we found infrastructure teams that are, well, frankly using not-so-great tools, and really what we thought what Pulumi is, “Hey, we can bring decades of programming language innovation, and great tools, and developer platforms, and apply that to the cloud infrastructure space, and really supercharge people’s ability to use the cloud in how they build software. We’re also breaking down some of these barriers between the different sides of the organization.

So that’s our focus, you know, open source was super important to us from day one. And we offer a SaaS for teams and Enterprises that are adopting that open source.

Seismic Changes In Programming From 2004 To Today?

Mike Schwartz: You started at Microsoft in 2004 as a developer and went on to lead teams as a director of engineering. Looking back, what are some of the most fundamental changes in software development that you’ve seen over the years, or what would utterly shock the 2004 Joe Duffy?

Joe Duffy: I think you know a lot has surprisingly remained the same, but the cloud really is the biggest change – it changes everything about what we can do. It’s incredible when I look back, I think at 2004 even, and I was a developer before that, but really back then, like multi-core, multiprocessor systems wasn’t even a thing. And I spent actually a good deal in 2000 working on that.

The fact that every piece of software is a distributed application now, every piece of software has access to infinitely scalable compute and data, and AI, machine learning – all of these capabilities are just an arm’s length away.

Whereas, back then, I mean, we couldn’t even dream of using anything close to those sorts of capabilities. And I think that’s partially why we started Pulumi – we were excited about supercharging people’s applications with those capabilities.

Insights From Microsoft?

Mike Schwartz: From a business perspective, what would you say are some of the most important things that you learned in your 12+ years at Microsoft, or what was most helpful to you to lead Pulumi?

Joe Duffy: It’s definitely interesting, I did not plan on being there that long. I was about to do my own startup before going to Microsoft, but I actually went in part because I knew it was kind of like an extended MBA program for how to build an Enterprise software company.

I think it sounds just, like seeing that sort of innovation at scale, seeing how you keep existing customers happy while still innovating and pushing the boundaries of what your platform can do was really fascinating to see that at Microsoft, and to see how you can effectively innovate and do research while you’re also doing product development. I think that’s a really key thing to be able to do.

Also, a lesson learned over the years was, it was really hard to figure out kind of like what business units actually made money, how did they make money, and how did the money get redistributed across the company. I spent a fair bit of time just reading the PNL breakdowns, and all the investor statements, and trying to figure out, okay, what’s actually making money.

And the funny thing is, there’s a lot of lost leaders in a company like that. In fact, a lot of the open-source investments, frankly, are sort of lost leaders for the real money-makers, used to be Windows, now it’s more Azure at Microsoft specifically. But you see the same pattern, you know, AWS, Google, Cloud, other major players in the cloud, where a lot of the developer tools are really just there to get you to use and pay for their computing storage, and that was an interesting thing to see from the inside at that scale.

Marketing

Mike Schwartz: Pulumi is still a relatively new venture. The marketing team is probably trying to catch up with a momentum of product and engineering – what have been some of the challenges with messaging and extremely complex IT offering?

Joe Duffy: Marketing has been the one part of the company that is constantly changing. I think the product – we’ve really had a very product-led approach in everything we do. The community is everything for us, and so, we lead with the community and everything we do. Even revenue, we only started focusing on last year, and we’re finding that a very inbound-oriented model with open source and SaaS, being a great combination, is working well for us.

So, the challenge really is, how do we find the right people – and that is, the people for which Pulumi is a great solution – and tell them the right story at the right time. Because you can’t be constantly changing your cloud platform every day, so there are particular times we need to find people.

I think that’s been a bit of a challenge. You know, in the early days, it’s probably very common, we tried to tell a more exciting sort of long-term story than the product truth. Especially with the open source, I think you got to get the product truth story nailed first. And we got a little ahead of ourselves. Thankfully, we course-corrected after talking to a lot of end-users. And frankly, I just got out there and went to as many conferences and talked to people as possible – that helped to hone that product truth messaging.

And then, over time, I think you got to be patient. You’ll get there for the longer-term messaging, and it’s important that people know what your DNA and what your company stands for. But even more important than that, on day one, especially with open source, is to understand, what does this product do, why do I care. Especially in the cloud space, where it’s like, there’s a new open-source project every week, if not more frequently than that. And it’s a lot to stay on top of.

Value Prop

Mike Schwartz: So, that leads into my next question, which is, what are the most important value propositions for your customers today?

Joe Duffy: Yeah. We started out thinking they were all technical, and it turns out actually the cultural sort of human component is turning to be important for us. I think the first is, our two main customers, are practitioners, are infrastructure teams, dealing with complexity.

Modern cloud transformation is complex. I mentioned it’s a difficult space to navigate, there’s so many options – many of them don’t work at scale. So, Pulumi, for them, helps them tame the complexity of modern cloud architectures, multi-cloud architectures, modern, even single-cloud but increasingly multi-cloud. So, on the infrastructure team, that’s the thing that’s really helping.

For developers, increasingly developers want to use the cloud in their software. They don’t want to go learn this completely foreign, frankly not as good toolchain. They’d rather just use the tools and techniques that they know and love, and really start incorporating the cloud more into their software. So, it’s great for them.

And then, if you look at the organization, it really helps those two sets of people collaborate and work together. And that’s the cultural part that’s actually fueling most of the growth within our existing customers.

Market Segmentation

Mike Schwartz: Do you segment the market at all? I heard in a previous interview, where you said at the time, you weren’t looking at vertical segmenting, but what about other ways, like size of customers, or how do you look at the market or break it down into something manageable or tackable?

Joe Duffy: This is something we’re learning over time. I think it’s naturally segmenting itself. We have an even spread of customers across SMB mid-market and Enterprise customers. And you know, the takeaway is, like, everybody’s doing cloud. So, everybody is a potential customer for us.

Honestly, running a company, it kind of makes it difficult sometimes to prioritize. The Enterprise needs are not always aligned with the community needs. And so, I think we’ve done a good job of balancing those. For example, we did SAML SSO identity integration very early on, which really was an enabler for us to add more Enterprise value-add features. So, we did a lot of the foundational work that helped us to cater to this broad spectrum.

I’ll also say, we see some verticals, just naturally emerging. And, again, they sort of fall along the same lines of what I was mentioning earlier. You know, folks that are doing modern cloud initiatives. And in certain industries, there’s more of that, like connected cars for example, we’ve got a number of customers in the connected cars vertical that we didn’t plan it that way, but it’s a great partnership with them.

I’d say that the number one thing though is, we listen to our customers, we listen to our community, and we try to let them take us where they need us to go.

Customer Interaction

Mike Schwartz: Interacting with different size customers can be a challenge. Large customers expect one level of support or integration and small customers another – have you seen a big delta there? Or, how do you manage the expectations for some of the larger customers who want more?

Joe Duffy: There’s definitely a very big difference in the engagement model. And I think for us, the key thing was community first for everything. So, we wanted to build a community, nurture the community, build a great community that has bodies or values and is a warm and welcoming place. And what that’s led to is, the community helps the community. And that helps actually, I mentioned this inbound model, where we’re really focusing on open source plus SaaS.

Our goal is that people can get up and running without needing a human to intervene, like they don’t actually need to talk to a sales person. They can download the open-source to get up and running very quickly. People tell us that getting and starting flow is one of the easiest they’ve ever experienced, and we spent a lot of time making sure that was the case.

We’ve got a community Slack, where literally thousands of people are helping each other, and the whole team is encouraged to participate. And so, that takes care of sort of that inbound transactional sort of customer and actually frees up our internal folks on customer pre-sales engineering and post-sales engineering, along with our sales force, to really focus more on those higher target accounts that do want a little bit more white glove service, might want to do a proof of concept, might want some more training and advice as part of the evaluation.

Monetization

Mike Schwartz: Let’s talk a little bit about monetization. Previously, I guess, you had a consumption-based model, where you were pricing based on number of services, but you’ve moved to a per developer pricing model. I’m actually curious, why didn’t the consumption-based approach work?


Joe Duffy: We thought long and hard about this, and we started designing the system so that the open source and SaaS work naturally with one another. So, we have a very high attach rate for people who download the open source. 80% of the people that do that actually use our SaaS, which is great, we have a free tier as well for unlimited individual use. And so, it’s only when you get to a team that you start paying, or Enterprise.

We invented this concept, basically pay-per-project was the previous model. What we found was a few things. And honestly, our hearts were in the right place. We really avoided per user for as long as we could because we want the whole organization to be able to use it freely, we don’t want to stop growing within a group, land and expand is important. But what we found with per project is, no two projects are alike.

Especially in a world of microservices, it’s very common to have mega-projects sitting alongside thousands of little tiny projects. And we didn’t want folks to feel like their architectures were influenced by the pricing model. That felt like an anti-pattern to us, and that was sort of some of the feedback we got on that pricing model.

Although we really did want it to be, “Hey, you pay for what you use.”, and the idea was, “Hey, if you’re using more, you’re seeing more success, and so, you would expect to be paying more.” Per user was just easier for people to model out, easier for people to kind of gauge how much they expect to be spending today versus tomorrow. And frankly, it’s just a familiar model for anybody who’s using a lot of other SaaS products that our customers are using, whether that’s PagerDuty, or Gitlab, or GitHub, or a lot of those other sorts of systems.

I’m not saying per user is perfect, it certainly isn’t, but it’s kind of the least bad that we found today.

SaaS V. Software Revenue

Mike Schwartz: Is most of the revenue from the SaaS platform or from the Enterprise software product?

Joe Duffy: It’s actually a good breakdown, you know. Honestly, it’s about 50/50. Now, it’s importantly, our Enterprise product is actually sold as a SaaS, as an option. So, you can either run, you can use the SaaS as the online hosted version, or you can use a self-host, on-premise version of that.

I’ve been pleasantly surprised at how many people are willing to use the online SaaS because the COGS for us to deliver that service are just so much lower than having to do on-prem support, and installation, and upgrades. And I think my takeaway there is, people now, even more so than even two, or three, or especially five years ago, they are used to depending on cloud services, whether that’s GitHub, or AWS itself, or pick your favorite SaaS.

I think these organizations are getting more comfortable with that sort of dependency. We also architected the system, so that you don’t need to share PII, or Cloud credentials, or anything like that with our SaaS. So, when we go through a security review with one of these Enterprises, they almost always walk away comfortable with where we’ve drawn those boundaries.

Single Versus Multi-Tenant

Mike Schwartz: In your SaaS offering, would you say it’s a single-tenant design, where, each customer has their own sort of database and infrastructure, or is it a shared multi-tenant type of platform?

Joe Duffy: It’s primarily multi-tenant. There are some resources that are per organization, things like, we have a Secrets Management element to the product, and each organization gets their own dedicated hardware encryption key for example. But for the most part, it’s a multi-tenant architecture, unless you use the self-host version, in which case, it doesn’t talk to any shared resources, it can run entirely behind your firewall, it never phones home, so kind of have those two basic models.

Is Pulumi Open Core?

Mike Schwartz: Would you say that Pulumi is open core?

Joe Duffy: I don’t say that, and although some people tell me I shouldn’t be so pedantic on this point because it’s a familiar model to people, but we don’t hold things back from the open-source platform. So, the way I see it is, the entire Pulumi platform is open source.

So, you can use Pulumi entirely offline, and you’re not missing out on any features that are in the platform itself. It’s just that we have a SaaS product that you can choose to use. And that service itself is not open source. So, it’s almost like sort of GitHub. GitHub, you get the Git tool, Git is 100% open source. And then, you’ve got GitHub, and GitHub is a SaaS that you can choose to use or not when you’re using Git, often it’s the easiest way to go.

But that thing is not actually open source. So, that’s the model that we have adopted, where the SaaS, and importantly, the SaaS provides value. And that’s the other thing, where I kind of have some qualms about, where we’re not artificially hampering your experience. The SaaS is there, and you might pay for it because it actually provides significant value that’s worth the money. It’s not that you’re forced to pay for it. So, that’s I think a key distinction as well.

Has Open Source Materially Helped The Business

Mike Schwartz: SaaS provides a lot of the features of a try by fly. So, has open-sourcing really materially helped the business?

Joe Duffy: Yes. I would say especially in the space that we’re in. And I think it would be different for different SaaS products. Like, if you look at PagerDuty, there was something where everything is about the SaaS, and there might be some ancillary tools around it – we’re sort of the inverse of that.

I think it’s table stakes for our space, for developers to change the way they’re writing code, for infrastructure teams to bet their whole organization on this – they need to have something where they have confidence that they’re always in the driver’s seat. And if they need to take things and go, they can do that. So, that was important to us.

The community I mentioned, everything is about community for us. Because of the bet on real programming languages that we made, we allow people to share and reuse packages and contribute to the ecosystem – we have tons of extensibility points. So, if you want to — we’ve had community members bring up, integration with Datadog for example, great, you can do that sort of extension.

If you want to integrate with Spinnaker – we just did a Hackathon with Armory a couple weeks ago, where, if it wasn’t open source, that vibrant ecosystem around it just would have never come to be, and that is essential not only today for how we scale the business, but the long-term sustainability and differentiation of the company itself in large part depends on that.

Foundation?

Mike Schwartz: I was reading today about Google, looking at different foundations, where they might contribute Estio. And I’m wondering, when you have an open-source product, and you’re also hosting it, it’s sort of like enlightened despotism. You know, you’re controlling the roadmap, and you’re making the code open source, but that could always change. We’ve seen a change in some companies.

What are your thoughts about a long-term – does Pulumi ever move to a different governance model, where the roadmap almost becomes part of the community too?

Joe Duffy: I think, never say never. It’s not something that we’re looking at now. I would say if the community takes us in that direction and it’s important to the community, we would definitely go in that direction.

There are a few things. Like, one, we are open in our planning process, we are open with our roadmaps, we are very community-oriented, and how we do all of that. And so, I think, because of that, our end-users feel like they’re part of that process, probably even more so than if it was in a foundation, frankly.

Because a lot of times, in foundations, there are special interests. They’re just not as visible. I think Google definitely has some influence in the CNCF, and so, it’s not a bad thing. You kind of have sponsors, you can have people in the driver’s seat, but I’m just saying it’s not, like, in one model you have no influence, in the other model you do have corporate influence – in all the models you have that level of influence. And I think, really, our community trusts us, and our task now is to make sure we preserve that trust and nurture that trust.

But if there are strategic alignment in projects, I think we would be more interested in partnering up with a foundation. But it’s not something that’s on the immediate radar.

Team

Mike Schwartz: Switching tracks a little bit, is most of the team in Seattle?

Joe Duffy: Yeah, we’re about one-third distributed as far as Europe, East Coast, sort of all over the world, but the two-thirds of the team is here in Seattle.

Mike Schwartz: What are your thoughts about growing the team in the future?

Joe Duffy: The situation, at least at the time of the recording, with the Covid situation, we’re all getting really good at working remote. And that foundation of starting with a third of the team being remote, I think instilled a lot of the foundation we needed to be successful in this new environment.

I wouldn’t say we’re actually suffering too much from it. And I think, if anything, it’s actually helped with our existing remote employees feel like they’re more included in the daily dialogue, we’ve introduced a lot of new practices.

So, in terms of growing the team in the future, I think we’re going to be a lot more flexible in terms of, I don’t know, if we’ll go 100% all remote, you know. I think some people have said they actually enjoy working with people in person, but I think we’re definitely going to be a lot more remote going forward.

And frankly, from here, most of our focus on growth is in the go-to-market side of things. We’re Series A- funded company, we’re looking to that Series B in the not-too-distant future. And really, as we start to build more scalable and repeatable go-to-market motions, we’re going to scale up marketing, we’re going to scale up sales, and so that’s really the focus for us, at least for the next 18 months.

Partnerships

Mike Schwartz: Are there partnerships right now that are critical to Pulumi as business model?

Joe Duffy: I would say all partnerships have been essential. And we’ve done a fair bit of partnering. And that’s an area that, as we look to repeatability, I think one of the challenges is, sometimes I say, “Hey, we’re really good at standing on the top of our own roof, shouting into a megaphone in our own neighborhood, like writing blog posts and tweeting to our existing followers, and nurturing our existing users and helping them be successful – you got to do that. That’s super important.

But what we’re starting to get better at now is leveraging those partnerships to, you know, get into adjacent channels, where there’s actually natural synergy between them. I think that it’s a tough thing to do, you got to nurture those relationships over the long term, but then, some of them start to pay off.

So, the major cloud providers have been great partners with us, but we’ve intentionally built our system to integrate with a lot of other systems, whether those are source control systems, CICD systems, cloud infrastructure providers – in each one of those is a partnership opportunity that we’re just now starting to learn how to leverage to basically grow top of the funnel, while also giving customers a more complete solution because each of these is just really one piece of the puzzle.

Pandemic Impact On Open Source

Mike Schwartz: As you mentioned, we’re recording this episode in April 2020, in the midst of this unprecedented global pandemic. Is there a scenario where the new world that’s emerging will somehow be more fruitful for open-source startups?

Joe Duffy: I think we’re learning to flex a bunch of new muscles, especially when it comes to marketing, more online digital campaigns, events were huge for us in the past. And I think in open-source generally, QCon, it’s great to connect with your colleagues and learn what they’re up to, see how you can incorporate their ideas into what you’re doing. 

DevOpsDays, a great conference that’s very open source oriented, that I personally went to almost a dozen of them last year – those things aren’t happening now. They’re all moving online, and I’ll say it’s a little bit of a stark contrast. It’s not quite the same watercooler kind of informal conversation, it’s kind of hard to have these large group settings, connecting over Zoom, where it’s 30 people on a screen, taking turns, talking to each other.

I think we’re going to invent tools, we’re going to invent new ways of basically moving that conversation online. I think we’re going to come out much better afterwards in that dimension. And that will benefit marketing, that will benefit open source because open source really is about that community dialogue. So, yeah, I think we’ll come out stronger afterwards.

Advice For Open Source Entrepreneurs

Mike Schwartz: Any advice for new entrepreneurs who are launching a business with open source as part of their business model?

Joe Duffy: I would say, we thought long and hard about the monetization strategy. I think the temptation is to launch the open-source project as soon as possible. And frankly, that is a good strategy, you always want to get out there sooner, so you can start getting that sort of virtuous cycle of customer feedback and community building. But it’s really tough to get in a situation where you’ve launched an open-source project is growing vibrantly, but you have no idea how to monetize.

For me, I wanted to build a product company, I didn’t want to build a services organization. That’s a very different playbook. It’s low-margin, lots of people, very expensive to get to scale. You really want to focus on selling product. And if you’re going to do that, it requires really thinking deeply about where that boundary is between what’s free and what something people would pay for.

And my advice is, the thing that people pay for has to be something of value that they want to pay for. You can’t trick somebody into paying for something – it really needs to be valued. And that means you can’t necessarily open source 100% of your value.

Closing

Mike Schwartz: Joe, thank you so much for sharing all these insights today, and thanks for your time.

Joe Duffy: Thanks, Mike. I had a good time. I appreciate the chat.

Mike Schwartz: Special thanks to the Pulumi team for wrangling Joe onto the podcast. Editing by Ines Cetenji. Transcription by Marina Andjelkovic. Cool graphics by Kamal Bhattacharjee. Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere. The podcast. Our Twitter handle is @fosspodcast.

Next episode we talk to Tracy Miranda, Director of Open Source community at CloudBees, the company is behind Jenkins. Stay safe everyone. Until next time, thanks for listening.

The post Episode 46: Create, Deploy, and Manage Modern Cloud Software – Pulumi, with Joe Duffy, Founder / CEO first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full
Episode 45: Continuous Deployment with Tracy Ragan, Creator and CEO of DeployHub https://opensourceunderdogs.com/continuous-deployment-with-tracy-ragan-ceo-co-founder-of-deployhub/ Tue, 28 Apr 2020 14:17:46 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=1792 Episode 45 of the Open Source Underdogs Podcast: An interview with Tracy Ragan, CEO and Co-Founder of Deployhub.

The post Episode 45: Continuous Deployment with Tracy Ragan, Creator and CEO of DeployHub first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro

Mike Schwartz: Hello, and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 45 with Tracy Ragan, Founder and CEO of DeployHub. Tracy is exactly the kind of entrepreneur we’re looking to interview. She is deeply experienced in open source. For example, she served on the board of the Eclipse Foundation. She’s a serial entrepreneur, and she has a plan to succeed that will adapt to whatever the market throws at her.

If you want to learn more about Tracy, she was a guest on two episodes of The Daily Drive. I try not to repeat too much of the content from those podcasts. I’ll put links on the episode page so you can check them out. The Daily Drive is hosted by Ken Knorr to provide entrepreneurs, marketers and sales people with news, information, inspiration and tools to drive success – it’s a fun show. Well, enough of my blabbering, let’s get on with the interview. Here we go.

Tracy, thank you so much for joining the podcast today.

Tracy Ragan: Hello, and it’s my pleasure.

What Is Continuous Deployment?

Mike Schwartz: This isn’t really a tech podcast, but sometimes the background is helpful. So, I’m wondering if, in a nutshell, you could help us understand what is the Continuous Deployment Market, and what are some of the adjacent markets, like, how would you compare to a Puppet or a Chef?

Tracy Ragan: I think the best way to describe it first is to define it around Continuous Delivery. Continuous delivery is the engineering process that says, “Hey, let’s get new innovation out to end-users as quickly as possible.” And that means a change has to go through sort of an assembly line from tracking the change request, to creating the binary, to testing the binary and installing it at different locations, from dev to test or production. That’s what Continuous Deployment is.

So, when you think about companies like Chef and Puppet, they are at a lower level, they are worried more about the configuration and the deployment of the infrastructure itself, so, do I have a cloud image or a physical machine that I am ready to deploy to. So, they are at the lower level. So, Continuous Delivery and Continuous Deployment generally sits at a higher level and worries about the application level.

How Is DeployHub Democratizing Continuous Deployment?

Mike Schwartz: In a previous interview, you mentioned that DeployHub is democratizing Application-Release Automation – what exactly does that mean?

Tracy Ragan: I have been in this business for quite a long time, and I get frustrated when I see so many companies still relying on scripts to do the heavy lifting of the Continuous Deployment piece. It can be a real showstopper for a lot of companies because they can’t do updates as frequently as they would like to.

Now, they can go out and buy a product, but some of these products are really expensive. Some of them are based on endpoint. So, if you’re going out to a few thousand servers, you’ve got to buy an agent for every server.

And when we built out DeployHub, I really, really wanted to provide an open-source solution to many companies and developers who didn’t have what I call Budget Authority, so that they could move away from this scripted process, and instead, do something that’s truly automated, and do it from an open-source standpoint. And that’s what I always mean when I say we’ve democratized it.

Because it’s not just the person at the CTO-level or a director-level, making a decision that everybody in the company is going to use this particular solution, and it’s going to cost hundreds of thousands of dollars. Instead, the developer, who’s already building out that CD pipeline, can say, “This is a good practice for us to use, and I can afford to take advantage of it.”

Differentiators

Mike Schwartz: You mentioned that in your market, competitors are selling expensive enterprise software platforms, how is DeployHub different, not just from a price perspective, but what are your other differentiators?

Tracy Ragan:  When we built out DeployHub – and our open-source solution we call Ortelius, by the way. Abraham Ortelius was the first map-maker, he created the first world atlas – we saw the problem from a microservices standpoint, there’s several really solid ARA, Application-Release Automation tools on the market. But they are monolithic-driven, they don’t think about an application in terms of its pieces and parts.

When we built out DeployHub, we put it back inversion engine on it – just like you would inversion source code – so that we could independently deploy the pieces and parts of an application as opposed to an entire monolithic.

Now, that’s critical in the microservices world. And it’s basically a mapping exercise. What we’re really doing is what I often call Automated Configuration Management from microservices. And as you push the microservices across the continuous delivery pipeline, we’re tracking the changes and building a map.

So, if you think about, if you ever go, “This is a fun exercise.”, if you ever go and Google search on the Netflix Death Star, you’ll begin seeing the kind of world that we’re putting together with microservice, and it’s massive. I think Netflix runs around 4,000 plus microservices. So, what we’re doing is part of the deployment is versioning the Death Star.

Now, in the beginning, we have companies who come to us, and they start hitting a bottleneck at six or seven microservices. That may not sound a lot, but if you put that, and then you add versions, even a version for DEV, TEST and PROD, and then the next version coming, or the version three months from now, you end up with a lot of microservice really, really quickly.

So, what we focus on is creating that map, and that’s what the open source project is all about. Because, in order to be successful with a Kubernetes microservice implementation, you must have a way to organize the microservices in the same way that you had to organize APIs when we first started doing API management.

Community?

Mike Schwartz: So, as I understand it, the monetization strategy for DeployHub is Software-as-a-Service. And I’m wondering, is there a community collaborating to build the software that you run as a service?

Tracy Ragan: We’ve been working on that. When we first started Ortelius, we had a few really important folks show up to help us out. One individual’s name is Doug Orr. He actually designed Kubernetes for Google, he was one of the directing engineers that built Kubernetes out.

We also had a local company called Descartes Labs step in and start looking at what we were doing with mapping and give us some real strong direction on where they thought the product should go.

And now, that’s been a year ago, when we first released the product, and we first brought the community in. We now have Netflix and Google, who have joined our Technology Oversight Committee. And we’d have those board meetings about — we try to do them three times a year, to really build out the roadmap.

So, we’re pretty excited to have some really strong players in the market that’s helping us what our roadmap will look like for the mapping of microservices in a cluster.

Has Open Source Materially Benefitted the Business?

Michael Schwartz: Would you say that open-sourcing the software has materially helped the business?

Tracy Ragan: Not yet. It hasn’t. There are simple reasons why you would open-source. For example, there’s always this term that a lot of companies use, and you’ve probably heard it before, “vendor lock-in”, and there’s also this thing called patents.

We open-sourced it originally under the Affero License, which it currently exists under, and what that does is, it exposes the code to all of our customers, so they don’t have this concerned about vendor lock-in. If they want to enhance it for their own environment, they can, but nobody at this point can take it and monetize it.

Now, on the patent front, it’s a real problem to try to patent software. Everybody says, “You know, if you want to get investment, you should go do that.” When you release something under the Affero License, you’re patenting it. Because anybody who goes to use it, has to use it under that license. They could reuse it internally again, but they can’t monetize it.

Now, as we have grown, we are inviting more folks in, like Netflix and Google, because we need now their expertise. And their expertise comes from having these massive Kubernetes clustered environment. We can’t get that without an open-source tool.

So as we move along, we’re hoping that we will move that Affero License and change it to something that’s a little more liberal license, so that we can include that as part of the CD Foundation, and then other companies can monetize on the mapping.

It’s yet to be determined if we’re going to get a financial gain out of it, but we certainly have become thought leaders because of it. There’s not too many companies talking about this microservice configuration management issue. The more we can be out there as a thought leader and the more input we can get from these big companies, the stronger our tool will be. And the only way to do that is through an open-source project.

How Do You Decide What Is Open Source?

Mike Schwartz: So, you probably don’t open-source absolutely everything, and there’s always this balance between what do you open-source and how do you prioritize R&D, and open-source, or, let’s say, your proprietary. And I’m wondering how do you handle that conflict?

Tracy Ragan: Yes. So, we looked at the product, and we talked to the folks who were using it from an Enterprise perspective, and we asked them what’s the most important part of the tool that they really, really, really love. A lot of that had to do with what we call our Domains.

So, in microservices, you really need to establish what’s called a Domain-Driven Design. I like to equate it to, you know, everybody has a junk drawer at home, and if you don’t know where something goes, you kind of throw it in the junk drawer. And then, if something’s missing, you kind of dig through the junk drawer to hope it’s in there. Oftentimes, right now, microservices are being kind of treated that way.

They’re checked into a repository, but that doesn’t mean there is a domain-driven, logical hierarchy of where to find these microservices and to share them. So, when we looked at the Pro version, what we call our pro version, we have what we call Divisional Domains. And that’s important to an Enterprise, but it may not be important to a project team. And then, on top of that, what’s important to the Enterprise is – the feedback they gave us – is the ability to put security around those domains.

So, if you have a group of API developers, they want to be able to share their microservices, but they don’t want anybody to edit or change the way they’re deployed, and some of that information is what we versioned. We, in the open-source version, we took all of that, the Divisional Domain, and all of the security out of it. And that’s generally what the Enterprise wants, but it’s not critical for a project team.

So, a project team can go ahead and move forward with it. And if they really needed to put security around it, they can do so around their CICD. So, CircleCI, for example, has approvals that move authority it built inside of it. They can actually build security around it without using ours.

Is SaaS The Main Monetization Strategy?

Mike Schwartz: Did I get the monetization strategy right? I was under the impression that you were a SaaS, or that there was a SaaS version of the open source. But other revenue streams besides the SaaS?

Tracy Ragan: No, that’s it. Well, of course, we have our consulting arm, so we help companies with implementing these microservice structures and organization. We do what we can to help anyone who comes to us and says, “We’re struggling with managing our domains – how can we do it?” But there is a – just as a point of clarification – there are some companies who don’t want to use the SaaS. We have a registered container at RedHat, and we’ll be adding one to the AWS marketplace that they can create an on-prem version.

Market Segmentation

Mike Schwartz: Deployment is a very horizontal market, do you segment the market vertically, or any other way, when you’re thinking about the marketing strategy?

Tracy Ragan: We actually do. If you take the financial market for example, they have a very different perception of deployments than somebody that might be in Telecom for example. The financial market is really super highly-regulated. They have serious audit requirements. Now, Telecom does as well, but not at the level that the financial markets would. They take separation of duty still very serious.

When we’re talking to somebody in the financial market, we may be having a conversation that’s stronger around audit, as opposed to somebody who may be in another industry, where it’s stronger around Continuous Deployment. I know it sounds crazy that the financial market may not want the Continuous Deployment. They want Continuous Deployment with a strong audit trail.

The other markets may want to solve microservices. So, we do have a message specific to some of these industries, medical’s the same way. And then, there’s embedded — you talk to embedded folks, and that’s a whole different story for them because they have a whole different set of challenges.

Sales Motion

Mike Schwartz: What does the sales process look like for DeployHub? I know for a lot of SaaS, there’s this philosophy of try by fly. You are a little different, it’s a complicated product sold to Enterprises, and I’m just wondering, like, what does the sales process look like?

Tracy Ragan: We’re still figuring that out. We still believe some of our best sales has come through a self-service model. So, what we did is we took the open-source version Ortelius, and we built it into a SaaS offering so we could call it freemium. It’s free to use, and we have about 150 users out there using a product, many of them are small project teams.

What we find are these bigger companies who want to be able to do a POC and never talk to a customer. We have been successful in closing deals based on that model. So, while they use the free version, they understand some of the problems with implementing of the free version into an Enterprise because of the security, the lack of security on the free version, so then, they reach out to us.


We’re focusing now that we’re kind of low here with the current economy, and we’re focusing right now all of our efforts in making the front end of the product as easy to use as possible. It is a complicated set of problems to solve, it’s our job to make it an easy problem to solve.

So, the sales model is going to rely on our ability to provide a self-service SaaS product. The teams can get excited about and start implementing on a very, very short schedule. We’re talking two or three days at the most.

Pricing

Mike Schwartz: Your business is still sort of new. I think you were formed maybe two years back. But one of the questions I like to dig into a little bit is pricing, which I find is really hard. And the difficulty is really underestimated by a lot of entrepreneurs. Do you have any advice for how do you find the right gates, how do you find the right price, and how has your thinking evolved maybe since you first got started?

Tracy Ragan: When we first launched DeployHub, the company, I reached out to a few CPAs and said, “I need to make these decisions on real data.” And I put together a monster of an Excel spreadsheet. A monster that said, “This is what we want to do. This is the number of freemium customers that we want. This is what we want to do to convert them. This is where we need to get to, and this is what it’s going to cost.”

And from there, I backed in the price. So, looking at how much money we wanted to make off of it, we this time – and pricing is really tricky – we said, “This is what we would have to price the product at in order to get to a certain growth in dollar amounts, and to be able to support the product, and do the development that we need to, and do all the selling that we need to do around it.”

So, that’s how we did it this time. We did it much more scientifically than hunch. You know, I got a hunch that this will work. So, the way we priced it is, we have something we call a “project”. So, if you’re a bank, you have a teller application, that would be a single project. And we price it at $2,500 per year per project, or it comes out to, I think, $300 a month per project, which is a really low price point, but it is a project by project implementation, as opposed to going out and saying, “We want to sell you an Enterprise deal at a 100K with a 30,000 a year maintenance contract.

And the way we’ve done it, a project team can make the decision to say, “I’m going to go ahead and buy the Pro version. And I’m going to go ahead and implement it because we control our continuous delivery pipeline, and I don’t have to get everybody involved to make this decision.”

To say we’re really practical about it, I spent the first six months – when we first started DeployHub – with my head in financials and talking to CPAs and really working out the model.

How To Manage Customer Interactions At Low Price Point?

Mike Schwartz: So, your price point, I think managing customer relationships correctly is really critical to scale. So, what are the different channels that you have in place to communicate with customers?

Tracy Ragan: We try to keep in touch with most of our customers by reaching out and calling. And we have a sales rep, I guess you could call him a sales rep, but he really is a customer service person who reaches out on a regular basis. And we have regular training that we reach out, to help them move from one step of the product to the next and make sure they understand all the features.

But, you know, GitHub is a great resource for that, because, we have on the open source side, we have a GitHub repository, where people go and open up issues. And that creates a really nice conversation, not just amongst us internally, but as well our other customers who are seeing some of the same problems.

So, we have a GitHub repository for the open source, and then we have one that’s private for what we call the Pro and Enterprise versions, but for most part, most of the tickets are opened up under the open source, which creates a really great platform for that.

Partnerships

Mike Schwartz: As we mentioned, the business is still kind of young, but I’d like to ask questions about partnerships. What kind of partnerships does DeployHub have today, and what types of partnerships are you looking to develop in the future?

Tracy Ragan: I would say two of our best partners is CircleCI, they have really embraced what we do around deployments, especially around the management of microservices. We also work pretty closely with the CloudBees folks. They have what I would call a competing tool, but they still want to provide their customers options. So, CloudBees and CircleCI have been great to work with.

Now, we also are working with Plutora. Plutora is a company that manages what we often call Value Stream. And not a lot of companies are thinking about Value Stream Management for microservices. So, we’re doing some integration as some joint customers with Plutora.

When it comes to a broader community, I’m on the board of the Continuous Delivery Foundation, and so I’ve built quite a few relationships with those folks. And I’m currently working on building out a partnership with Gitlab.

Advice For Open Source Entrepreneurs

Mike Schwartz: I ask this question to all the guests – do you have any advice for entrepreneurs who are launching a business around an open-source software product?

Tracy Ragan: You know, I think one of the smartest things I ever did was work on that, build out that Excel spreadsheet. It was painful, it was not fun, it hurt, it really did hurt. Some days, I just feel, like, I just have to go, you know, strap on a drool cup and watch TV for a while.

It’s not an easy practice, to sit down, and visualize, and think through your company for a five-year projection. But, if you take the time to do it, I believe that you will see if your company is viable or not. And you can get the pricing down, and you can really understand what you need to do to achieve success.

That was one of the best things that I that I ever did because I know now, I have marching orders that I have to live by. And it’s in that Excel spreadsheet. I know what I have to achieve on a quarterly basis, and I know when I need to increase the price of the product. So, that was really important.

The other thing that I did that was right was, I got involved in the bigger open-source community. Getting involved in the Linux foundation, even if you’re a young company, that’s a fairly inexpensive entry point, to join the Linux foundation, and then join one of those sub-foundations like the CNCF or the CDF, because it really does give you a broader community to talk to and develop partnership within your community.

So, I probably wouldn’t have the friendships that I have now with folks that are at Gitlab or CircleCi, or CloudBees, for that matter without it. So, those are the two things I believe I did right. I worked on that spreadsheet really, really hard. I worked on building getting my name out there, making sure people knew me from a community perspective.

I’d already worked out to get Eclipse Foundation, so I understood how important that was. And when we started DeployHub, I went back into doing a lot of volunteer work for the community that I love. And anybody who’s starting a company, an entrepreneur of any type should do that. You have to give back even if it’s hard.

Advice For Building The Team?

Mike Schwartz: I just looked through my notes, and I realized I missed a question. And I want to make sure I ask this one. In one of your previous interviews I listened to, you talked about recruiting new team members, and how sometimes, you don’t necessarily look for deep technical know-how, you’re looking for a certain type of person. And could you go into that a little bit deeper, like, how do you know who to recruit?

Tracy Ragan: I learned this when I was running OpenMake Software in the early days. You know, we were small, we needed to expand our ability to recruit without having to pay a lot of money, to be quite honest. And one day, I was sitting at a coffee shop – it was like Caribou Coffee shop – and I was watching this guy work, and he was able to do like — I don’t know, he was making four coffees at the same time, running the register, he just was able to do multitask.

So, I started talking to him, and he had graduated from Boston University, and he was a filmmaker, and I asked him, “Have you ever thought about doing anything with technology?” And he said, “Oh, I’ve done some programming.”, and I continued questioning him, and I ended up hiring him about three days later.

He was one of our most valuable employees at the time. He not only could put a story together for us, he really understood how to build a broader picture, and he could code. Had I not been thinking to kind of open up my mind to how to recruit folks, I probably would have never sat there and looked for somebody who was like, “Wow, he’s multitasking really well – I wonder what else he’s talented at?”

The other thing is, there are a lot of older folks that have a lot to bring to the table, may want to change jobs. We hired an individual most recently who had done some testing, and he had done some deployment work. He was older and he had gone to our community college and taken programming. And we brought him on, and he was fabulous, really, really hard-working. I could rely on him for – and I still do – rely on him for anything that I need. But had I been just looking in the normal channels, I probably wouldn’t have found him.

Advice for Women Entrepreneurs

Mike Schwartz: If you look at our podcast, you’ll see that the male to female ratio for our guest is like 50:1, although we’re trying to improve that this year. Given the fewer number of chances I get to talk to them, and I want to ask you one specific question about, do you have any advice specific for women entrepreneurs?

Tracy Ragan: This is hard for women entrepreneurs. You know, 2% of the funding goes to women. 2%. So, I don’t have a lot of advice except reach out to me, reach out to other women entrepreneurs, get involved in women in technology, consider going to some of these women in technology conferences, because we need to build our network.

When I first got into computers, there were a lot of women. And they’re not a lot now, and there’s even fewer at the top. And that is a problem, it’s a very big problem. And I’ve spoken in high schools and encouraged young women to go into the business of STEM, in particular Computer Science. And I reminded all those boys out there that if they don’t encourage their friends, who are female, to get involved, they’re going to have a really boring life because they’re just going to work with men all the time.

So, we really need to build our own network, and I do everything I can to reach down, when I see somebody really talented, to help them in any way. I do have a couple of ladies that I’ve mentored through the process. And that’s what other women, who have already gone through and have some understanding of how to move from step A to step B, we need to help each other. That’s the best thing I can say.

And I’m hoping that there’s going to be more women, who are investors, who want to start reaching out and bringing women up to the top. I know we have to look at, like, LaunchDarkly, she was great at being an example of what a woman entrepreneur can do. She worked her butt off to get funding now. It’s not easy, and it’s just the reality.

Closing

Mike Schwartz: Congratulations on all your success. And thank you so much for making a couple of minutes to talk with us today, and best of luck in the future.

Tracy Ragan: Mike, thank you so much. It was a pleasure, and I look forward to hearing it.

Mike Schwartz: Special thanks to the DeployHub team for making Tracy available for the interview.

Editing by Ines Cetenji. Transcription by Marina Andjelkovic. You know all those cool graphics on the website? Special thanks to Kamal Bhattacharjee for making them. He’s done a great job for 45 episodes, so, thanks, Kamal.

Music from Broke For Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere. The podcast Twitter handle is @fosspodcast. Next episode, we talk to Joe Duffy from Pulumy. Stay safe, everyone. Until next time, thanks for listening.

The post Episode 45: Continuous Deployment with Tracy Ragan, Creator and CEO of DeployHub first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full
Episode 44: Devops, Security, & Cloud Automation Puppet with Yvonne Wassenaar, Chief Executive Officer https://opensourceunderdogs.com/devops-security-cloud-automation-puppet-with-yvonne-wassenaar-chief-executive-officer/ Mon, 13 Apr 2020 15:08:47 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=1783 Intro Mike: Hello, and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 44 with Yvonne Wassenaar, CEO of Puppet. Yvonne is the third CEO of Puppet. Luke Kanies was the founder, we interviewed him in the episode 22. Sanjay Mirchandani succeeded him, and Yvonne took over from Sanjay in...

The post Episode 44: Devops, Security, & Cloud Automation Puppet with Yvonne Wassenaar, Chief Executive Officer first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro


Mike: Hello, and welcome to Open Source Underdogs. I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 44 with Yvonne Wassenaar, CEO of Puppet. Yvonne is the third CEO of Puppet. Luke Kanies was the founder, we interviewed him in the episode 22.


Sanjay Mirchandani succeeded him, and Yvonne took over from Sanjay in January of 2019, about a year before we recorded this episode. A CEO who takes over a company like Puppet needs a different skill set than your typical founder. Whereas the founder needs deep domain knowledge, usually a hands-on approach to business development, CEOs for companies, in later stages of growth, need this intangible corporate leadership ability. It’s hard to say what it is, but you know what it is when you see it. Yvonne has it, and she also has the values and an understanding of the culture that complements where Puppet is in its corporate life cycle. I don’t want to spoil any of the content, so I hope you enjoy this interview. Here we go.

Why Take On The CEO Role At Puppet?

Mike: Yvonne, thank you so much for joining us today.

Yvonne: Absolutely. It’s great to be here, Mike.

Mike: When you joined Puppet early last year, as CEO, why did you want to take on this enormous responsibility, steering the ship with hundreds of employees and thousands of customers?

Yvonne: You frame Puppet so well in terms of, it is a large employee base. We do have a lot of customers, and I’d extend it even further into we’ve got a massive community around the globe. And I did think really long and hard around was I the right person to take on the responsibility to bring Puppet and the impact of Puppet, the company, in the community to the next level.

And the reason I said yes to that that question, to myself and to the board, is, as I thought about the opportunity, Puppet to me represented a perfect place for my step, next step in my journey, for the following reasons.

One, the values that are represented by Puppet, and the Puppet community aligned really well with my own, in the sense that we are really focused around – you know, being open-source core kind of the democratization of technology diversity and inclusion, having impact at the practitioner level, and really making a difference in the world around us.

And to me, I feel life’s very short, and having strong value alignment is really important. And what Puppet represented resonated very much with me.

The second thing is really around the technology and the problem that we solve. I deeply believe that Puppet and the technology that we build and work, standing upon with the community and with our own team, makes a difference in the world around us, makes a difference not only in eliminating soul-crushing work, which is what Luke started with, but makes a difference in terms of enabling companies to achieve the agility that they want, in a secure and scalable way.

And as an ex CIO, the risk of cyber security I think sometimes is underestimated, and it’s really beholding upon all of us to think about not only how do we leverage technology to make the world a great place, but how do we do it in a safe way.

So, to me, if I think about the values, and I think about the actual product and offerings that we’re bringing to market through the community and with our commercial offerings, that resonated really well. So, the third component was, “Can I personally make a difference?”
 
Given my experience across companies like New Relic, VMware, and my time in Accenture, I felt I had a good breath of experience that I could, not necessarily bring the answer, but ask the right questions and bring the right team on board to really deliver our true potential as a company.

So, those three things combined, all aligned up, and having been here a year, it was definitely the right decision. It’s been a great ride, I think we’re doing amazing stuff, and I can’t wait for what’s yet to come.

Why Expand Product Surface Area from Configuration Management?

Mike: In the past, I might have described Puppet as being a Configuration Management Platform, but today, Puppet’s moving into areas like continuous compliance, incident remediation, and continuous delivery – why expand the product surface area? And I’m also wondering, how do you evaluate the risks that come along with that expansion?

Yvonne: Puppet as a Configuration Management Platform, I’d even say tool, has been the market perception of who we are. And that very much is grounded on where we started.

To me, the fascinating part of your question really comes down to the fact that the big shift that Puppet made in this last year was going from talking about what I would call “feature functionality”, which what Puppet does, is, really, we automate infrastructure in really, really powerful ways, to talking about the use cases and the business problems that we solve.


So, what’s interesting is, from a technology standpoint, what Puppet has built out over the years is going from a declarative approach to infrastructure automation, which is where we started, which is, we’re turning environment to a known, good state, to extending that into both declarative and task-based automation, which we leverage our open-source project, Bolt, to support and drive. And Bolt integrates with Puppet enterprise. So, it’s both declarative and task-based, both agent and agentless. Now, we are extending even further into workflow, event-based automation.

The tool has gotten more robust in terms of the types of things that people can do with it, but the real shift, I think, from an impact standpoint, is, we’ve started to really be able to harvest from our customers, what do they use that tool in capability for. So, you know, certainly some people are using Puppet truly to manage the configurations in their environments, and that’s the main driver. They’re looking for that efficiency and scalability of what they’re doing.

We also found, however, that some people are deeply dependent on Puppet for compliance. And that understanding that that’s the business use for the tool, or one of the business uses for it, allows us to better serve up and meet those needs.

And interestingly, from an incident remediation standpoint, again, there’s a lot Puppet does from a declarative model standpoint that was always kind of remediating your environments in some way, shape or form, if you think about it. But it’s a very simple extension into integration with security scanners like Tenable, Qualys and Rapid7, to really start to go, having a scan, and then, manual process, and sorting through PDFs and Excel files, to get to business impact to saying, “Hey, I can ingest that information, make it contextually aware in the environment, and allow people to act on it in a much automated way.” Which not only reduces the work effort, but very importantly, to my earlier comment on cybersecurity, reduces the time to remediation of a known vulnerability, which improves your security profile.

So, the big shift, I think Puppet for a while has been making the tool or the platform more robust, but the shift that I think you’ve seen in the marketplace perspective is more around how we characterize what our technology can do in the context of business problems and business outcomes.

Priorities After Joining as CEO

Mike: In your first few months as CEO, what were your priorities, and did you feel like you needed to pivot the business after coming in after the founder? And I’m wondering, was there really a pivot needed? Or did you see that it was more of a requirement to incrementally improve what Puppet was doing?

Yvonne: Yes, it’s always challenging when you take a company over as CEO, in part because there’s a huge piece of the culture and the connection with the people that comes with that top job that you have to be sensitive to.

When I look at the journey of Puppet – Luke actually ran the company for the first many, many years very successfully, and the creation of this new market, and the proliferation of the technology at that practitioner level, there was actually another gentleman, Sanjay Mirchandani, who took over from Luke and ran Puppet for three years. And what Sanjay focused on was really selling higher up into the enterprise, and kind of, to your previous question, looking at going beyond configuration management, what was important in the marketplace.

As I took Puppet over a year ago, the key things that I noticed, one was that we were very much on the right trajectory, and it was more some fine tuning and focus that we had to drive to the business. And my real time and attention in the first year, first and foremost, was on appreciating that a CEO change, no matter how great I may or I may not be, is an experience that you need to work through with your employees and with your community.

So, my first focus was on the team and the community and really aligning around purpose. And kind of your first question, why was I even there, did I care about the same things they did, were my values aligned, how are we going to come together as a team and really drive the next level of the journey – I think that’s important advice for anybody taking on a senior level role.

Start with the people, and then, really, from a business perspective, looking at how could we get the biggest impact with these things that we have, how can we simplify and focus what we are doing to those that would make the biggest difference.

So, we did trim the product portfolio a little bit, we doubled down on areas where we felt we had differentiated capability, we started to focus a lot more on the engagement with the community, we had drifted a little bit away from that which happens sometime.

So, really looking at, we did our first ever in person contributor summit, looking at how could we really nurture both, the community who has gotten us to really where we are, as well as being in meaningful service to our enterprise customers, who, at the end of the day, are a critical part of the business model as well, and scaling what is now a relatively large company that has a strong open-source base, and also has a sustainable, monetary business model to care as well for.

Puppet Value Proposition

Mike: What would you say the value proposition is for Puppet today?

Yvonne: I believe that Puppet has gone from being a kind of a practitioner tool that eliminates soul-crushing work, which is a really, really important thing that we have extended a prawn, that value proposition, to being a platform that enables business agility in a safe and secure way. And the way that I see us, really bringing this to market is, if you think about the modern enterprise and open-source projects, they are here to service to everybody. We really focus our commercial efforts on what I would call the Global 1000. And in that segment, those companies are going to be in a hybrid, or multi-cloud world for many years, if not decades, to come.

And Puppet is uniquely positioned to, in some regards, be their automation everywhere platform, be it in the data center or into the cloud, and increasingly across the Internet of Things. And we’re able to do that because we have a portfolio of automation capabilities, so different types of automation are actually required for different types of use cases in needs.

And so, whereas before, the world was a little black and white, you know, it’s either declarative or it’s imperative, and there were religious battles, it’s like now we realize that many different types of automation are needed when you operate at that scale. And we offer all of them in a coherent way. And we’re starting to build out the intelligence from that practitioner level up through the executive level, and helping people do things, all the way from, get the work done, to create the reports and the insights that the auditors need to get you through that compliance check.

So, for me, the real value proposition for Puppet in the commercial space is being that automation everywhere platform that gives you the action that makes things like your ServiceNow and Splunk implementations complete, because they might be able to tell you what to do or where the problems are.

But it’s really when they integrate with Puppet, that you get that completion of that loop, that everybody needs to truly get the business impact.

Market Segmentation

Mike: So, Global 1000 is still a very horizontal market with all sorts of different vertical segments. I’m wondering, from tactical sales and marketing perspective, when you’re trying to convey business value to these different segments, do you have to change the marketing a little bit? Or is there any vertical marketing or segmentation going on, and how you look at the customers, and how to sell to them?

Yvonne: Yeah, absolutely. I love the question that you asked because there are so many horizontal technologies in the world, and I work with many companies, back in the day, BEA, and VMware, all very horizontal in terms of a capability. What’s interesting, however, is the importance that you highlight, which is differentiating how a product is built versus how a product is bought and consumed.

And that’s when you do benefit I think from taking a more vertical or use case approach to a technology. And, for us, for example, we do a lot in highly-regulated industries, and financial services is a great callout.

So, even though the Puppet product offerings are the same, whether in service to retail, or financial services, or tech, or government, how we speak about the technology can start to vary in terms of those segments.

And at the enterprise level, referential buying is a real thing. You know, if I’m a large bank, I’m greatly comforted if I know five other large banks also use that same technology. And you can start to help them understand the financial services banking problems that you can solve, and as I mentioned, compliance or certain compliance requirements in those industries.

So, you can start to make it much easier for your customers to get value out of your technology and to trust your technology, when you can speak in their language, and when you can connect them with their peers, who are in a similar way using your technology to solve problems.

So, what we have done – to answer your question from a segmentation standpoint – one is, recognized where are our open-source solutions most relevant and valued, and continuing to feed and nurture those. And then, being really thoughtful on where our commercial offerings are most valuable, and drive the greatest impact.

And on the commercial side then, further sub-segmenting into vertical industry, and then, as we talked about use case, are you looking to solve problems around incident remediation and reduce time to vulnerability remediation, are you more interested in compliance reporting.

At the end of the day, I like to kind of joke, Puppet is a Swiss army knife, they can do a lot of things. That’s a blessing and a curse. And when you work with large enterprise, then, more specific you can be on the problem you solve – I kind of use the analogy of an IKEA furniture – at the enterprise level, they really don’t want the big box of IKEA furniture showing up in a bunch of little pieces, without an instruction manual they have to solve it themselves.

Some people like that and get a lot of joy. It’s usually not my customers, they want to have a simple easy way to get to business outcome. So, we’ve really done a lot to make that clear and easier for them.

How To Balance Open Source Investment

Mike: I thought it was interesting how you mentioned that you were, let’s say, investing a little bit in the open-source community, for example, an event for contributors. I’m wondering if you could talk about how do you prioritize investments in the commercial product versus the open-source product?

Yvonne: I think about open source a lot. For me, personally, I think we are where we are in terms of the rapid technological advancement because of open source, and how that’s really proliferated around the globe in so many ways. And I do believe that it is a great way to democratize access and contribution to technological development, particularly with underrepresented groups in countries and locations, where they may not have otherwise been able to participate at that highest level.

So, I’m a big believer in the whole concept, and I’m really proud to work at a company that appreciates and celebrates that, and invests in it. What I think is really important in the seat that I sit in is appreciating the fact that open source has in our case almost moral and principle value, but it’s also a critical component of our strategy. It is not the business model itself, but it’s a key part of our strategy.

And I think of open-source in a couple different components. We have open source tools, Puppet open-source Bolts, those are tools that our community members can contribute to and benefit from. We have open-source content, which, in our case lives on the forge, which makes the tools even richer. And we have some people who only contribute to content, and some who only contribute to the tool, and some who contribute to both. And then we have the users of that open-source content.

And to me, it’s important when I think about the open-source community, I think about all those constituencies because they’re all critical players even though they’re playing in different roles. And I’m very proud to say we have over 75% of our commits still coming from the community. We have a very active community.

For me, what’s important is that we are continuing to nurture the creativity, the innovation, the access, in what I would call that “ground level of capability”, and that we’re allowing people, who have interest in ownership and institutions that we’ve built, to be able to contribute and get the benefits over time.

So, we do a lot of things, from – we did a contributor summit in Budapest last year, we are doing Puppet camps again, so we’ve reinvested in that, more currently, in the process, we’re making them virtual just because of the environmental challenges, this coronavirus. But we are looking for ways that we can help people who are part of the Puppet community be able to have a platform to speak about, what they’re doing with the technology, the impact it’s having, and help others.

We have obviously community managers, we’ve got slack channels, we’ve got some interesting ways that we’re looking at engaging with the community from the support perspective. So, there are many different aspects to it.

And to me, one of the beautiful things is I think open source has evolved a lot in the last decade. And I like to think of Puppet as one of the folks who are leading through that evolution, and how you continue to give back, and you know, garner benefit in a very, very productive way. So, super-excited about what we’ve done. I’m sure we’re looking to evolve, but I do think it’s part of what makes Puppet special.

Evolution of Sales Motion

Mike: So, originally, I’m sure open source was one of the primary let’s say distribution channels for finding customers who are going to engage with you commercially. But I’m sure that the sales, you know, processes, and motion has gotten very mature as a company has grown. How does it work today? Would you say that the open source still really is a driver for business? And, if it’s changed, like, how have you adapted to that change?


Yvonne: The go-to-market side of Puppet has evolved a lot. And open source has, as you suggested, played a critical role, and I believe it still does, but it’s shifted.

In the beginning, a lot of people who bought the Puppet commercial products came from the community, and they were the practitioners who were bringing that technology into that environment.

Many of the open-source users never felt the need to actually go and buy commercial products, they scaled up, and they built their own UIs and their own ways of advancing the open-source project in their company.

And so, we did go through a phase, where, in the early days, there was a lot of inbound. And what I would say is, now, the two things that have shifted, one is, as our ability to drive impact across an enterprise has increased, as the maturity of our solutions have increased, we’re actually selling to higher-level individuals in a company.

So, what I’d like to say is, we’re not just selling to the hands-on keyboard people, we’re selling to people who may never actually touch Puppet, the technology themselves. And yet, the fact that there are Puppet practitioners in their company is super important. So, I think one open source serves us today because it keeps a rich set of talents in the marketplace that can work on, and scale and execute the technologies that we’re bringing to the enterprise customers.


The other thing that we found is, many of our enterprise customers have in some way, shape, or form, or division, used, or are using, open source. And they have just set a point where it’s no longer differentiating for them to do all the work around, upgrading the open-source and everything else, to do it that way. And they rather move to the commercial version, take advantage of the incremental feature functionality, have a simpler upgrade process, have 24/7 support.

So, for us, I would say, in some regard, open source is still the land, people are using it, and then they’re starting to realize open source isn’t free. You’re just making different choices, do you want to have the engineering talent work on, keeping your open-source implementation healthy and current, and to build around it.

That’s the right choice for some. For others they are saying, “Hey, open source was a great way to get something started. Now it’s starting to run a critical component of my business. Maybe I’m better off, from an opportunity cost perspective, to engage with Puppet, to have Puppet provide me those services of incremental feature functionality, and reporting and support. And I can spend my valuable engineering talents time on other things that might differentiate me as a retailer, or manufacturer, or a bank.”

Is Puppet Open Core?

Mike: Would you say that Puppet is open core?

Yvonne: What I would say is, Puppet has – and I think this has been the big shift in terms of how we think as a company – certainly Puppet open source is a very mature, very impactful projects that many people can build on top of, frankly, around globe, which is wonderful to see.

What I would say is, as we think about the broader Puppet, what we are looking at is, how do we create open-source capabilities that people can stitch together in different ways to self-problems. And we don’t just look anymore at, we have to be the sponsor of those open-source projects, we absolutely contribute upstream to other projects, we leverage other open-source solutions in some of what we do. For example, Terraform and Puppet work great together, there’s actually some great webinars on how you leverage Bolt and Terraform to drive provisioning, and configuration and actioning on that.

So, we’ve really taken a much more open-minded approach, and thought about open source, almost from a component or an ingredient standpoint, that can be stitched together into whatever solution that you need. And some of those solutions we stitched together in a commercial way for our large complex enterprise customers. And others were providing the componentry that companies can stitch together in the way that they need if they want to do something all open source, or put their own secret sauce magic to it.

Pricing

Mike: Pricing is I think really hard for every company, surprisingly difficult. And it seems like the impact and the value of Puppet is so enormous to organizations – how do you find the rate gate to figure out or to find the right strategy for pricing? And you’ve only been there for a year, but have you seen that change? Do you think that the pricing model that you’ve figured out is going to be stable?

Yvonne: Pricing is an incredibly challenging topic I think to your point for pretty much everybody, and to me, what I learned early on, back in my consulting days, is one of the best ways to think about what the right pricing model is, for your company is, to start with the value chain of what you’re bringing to your customers.

If I take an early-day example of like an eBay, you know, market place, you are bringing value creating community. You’re making value by letting people sell through that community, you’re making value by letting people buy through that community. You are making value by providing different ways to attract attention.


You can kind of map out all the different value points, and then, you can make decisions on where do you want to price to be able to get a return on the value you’re creating. So, eBay for example, could have chosen to say, “Hey, you’ve got to pay to get in, and then everything else is free.” Or, you can get in for free, “There’s value in there, but let me give you that for free, and you’re going to pay these other steps.”

So, I think every company needs to go through that process and figure out where the value is, their driving for their audience that’s worth having an exchange. The interesting thing is, it can easily become way too complex. So, simplicity is an important rule of pricing in my experience, and then longevity.

Particularly if you’re in the enterprise space, you don’t want to be changing pricing all the time, and it runs through your systems. So, I feel Puppet, in terms of where we’ve come from, that we have a pricing model that has worked well for us and for our customer base, on where we’re at. Are there opportunities to fine tune it and evolve over time? I’m confident there are. I’ve never seen a company that hasn’t at some point in time started to shift and think differently about their pricing.

But, to me, whatever you do with pricing, it has to center around what is the value that you’re bringing your customers, and can you come up with something that’s simple and easier for them to understand that will scale out for a meaningful period of time. Because a hard thing to do is change your pricing all the time. That’s an easy way to upset your customers, and make a lot of enemies in procurement. And nobody wants to do that.

How to Encourage More Women in Open Source Business?

Mike: Yvonne, you might have noticed that the male to female ratio in Open Source Underdogs is currently 41:2. And we’re trying to improve that ratio this year, but it does reflect the reality of the tech market, which is that men are overrepresented, especially at the C-level. What can we do as an industry, or even more tactically, what can I do, as a founder of a software company, to improve that ratio?


Yvonne: I love that you’re asking the question, what can you do to improve the ratio, because I believe at the end of the day, it has to start with individual ownership in action. And we can talk about really lofty things we could do, but at the end of the day, we need to create the future reality that we want. And we all have a role in it, whether we’re male and female, different types of necessities and so forth, if we want a diverse world, we have to create the opportunities for that, or diverse roles in leadership I should say.

And what I believe you could do, first and foremost, I appreciate this opportunity, just showcasing Puppet and myself, and having different types of role models in your podcast. I’ve had numerous women come up to me and tell me that they aspire to be a CEO, and in part, they aspire to be a CEO because they see me doing it. That’s incredibly humbling, but it’s also a great reminder that, for many people, if you can’t see it, you can’t believe it.


So, I think, first and foremost, showcasing different types of role models, that it’s not just one type that a successful leader looks like, but there’s many. The second thing is sponsoring and encouraging people to step up to that next level.

What I have found working with underrepresented folks is that – myself included – we can often tend to be much risk-averse. So, encouraging people to retire to build that confidence that they can go to that next level. Sometimes to give them that nice gentle push, maybe not so gentle sometimes, as I had in my career. Sometimes, you just need that.

So, I think creating the models, I think giving the pushes. And then giving the opportunities, take a risk on somebody. You’ll be amazed at what they’ll do with the right sponsorship and support. So, I think there’s a lot we can do across the board, but those are three tactical things that, at an individual level we can engage in, things that I try to do all the time.

Advice for Founders

Mike: Last question, any advice for entrepreneurs who are looking to use open source as part of their business?

Yvonne: Absolutely. I live in Silicon Valley, and I run into a lot of people who get really confused on open source, and – when I say “get confused on open source”, they confuse perhaps a desire and a belief around the power of open source as a way to democratize technology and bring important solutions into the hands of everybody, with the fact that somehow you’re going to have to figure out how you’re going to make money.


And so, to me, it’s really important to understand you can get both, I think Puppet does both, but you have to be really thoughtful what is the role that open source is going to play in your business model, because it is not a business model into itself. That’s kind of a rule number one.


The second thing that I would say is, community, community, community. I don’t think that you’re going to get a lot of benefit out of just open-source thing, the technology you build if you’re the only one building it. Certainly people might use it, they’re not going to pay you for it, they might benefit from it, they might like that it’s open source, but I think part of what’s made Puppet powerful from an open-source perspective is the community engagement, and the fact that we’re collaboratively building these different open-source projects, and that we are collaboratively building content – that is what I think truly makes open-source most powerful.

So, I really think if you’re going to do an open-source solution or have that be part of your solution model, how are you going to invest in, and engage, and nurture, and grow, and sponsor, and give a voice to your community, so that you keep them engaged, so that it truly is really executing open source at what I think is the most powerful level and form.

Closing

Mike: Yvonne, thank you so much for your time and sharing your great insights today.

Yvonne: Great. Mike, thank you, it’s been wonderful. And, again, I really appreciate the opportunity.

Mike: Special thanks to the Puppet team for helping to coordinate this episode. Audio editing by Ines Cetenji. Transcription by Marina Andjelkovic. Music from Broke for Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere.The podcast Twitter handle is @fosspodcast.
Please, tweet at us if you have any comments on this episode. Next time, we talk to Tracy Regan from DeployHub, a great technologists and founder CEO.

Stay safe everyone. Until next, time thanks for listening.

The post Episode 44: Devops, Security, & Cloud Automation Puppet with Yvonne Wassenaar, Chief Executive Officer first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full
Episode 43: Native-Cloud Visibility and Security With Kris Nova, Chief Open Source Advocate at Sysdig https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-43-native-cloud-visibility-and-security-with-kris-nova-chief-open-source-advocate-at-sysdig/ Tue, 24 Mar 2020 13:30:30 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=1768 Intro Mike: Hello, and welcome to Open Source Underdogs, the first podcast recorded in 2020. I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 43 with Kris Nova, a Chief Open-Source Advocate at Sysdig. Kris, who also goes by Nova, has contributed to Kubernetes and several other open-source successful software projects and startups. She’s currently...

The post Episode 43: Native-Cloud Visibility and Security With Kris Nova, Chief Open Source Advocate at Sysdig first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Intro

Mike: Hello, and welcome to Open Source Underdogs, the first podcast recorded in 2020. I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 43 with Kris Nova, a Chief Open-Source Advocate at Sysdig.

Kris, who also goes by Nova, has contributed to Kubernetes and several other open-source successful software projects and startups. She’s currently a leader in the Falco project, a next-gen intrusion detection tool that is an “incubating” project at the Cloud Native Computing Foundation also known as CNCF.
My mission this year is to interview more women who are open-source business leader, so when the opportunity presented itself to interview Nova, I couldn’t resist. But this podcast was a bit of a challenge for me. I interviewed Loris Degionni, the CEO of Sysdig, a few episodes back, so I wanted to stray little from my normal business model format.

It was also really tough not going down the Cloud Native rabbit hole, although I think ultimately I couldn’t resist. So, it’s slightly more tacky than normal, but I hope you enjoy it. Personally, I found Nova’s perspective really thought-provoking, but you didn’t tune in to hear me, so without further ado, here we go. Nova, thank you so much for joining us today.

Nova: Yeah, thanks for having me.

Mike: So, how did you end up at Sysdig?


Nova: Well, I had come out of my third startup that had gone through an acquisition, and, you know, I took some time off from work, I did some traveling, and just kind of — it was the first time in my life and in my career, where I was able to take several months off of work and just kind of mentally reset. And I started to evaluate the industry I was working in, and I wanted to stay working closely with Cloud, and Cloud Native infrastructure, and Kubernetes, but I wanted to pivot a little bit.

And I started looking at the available spaces or sub departments of the industry. And one of the things that really stood out to me was the security. I felt like security was one of those things that you kind of look at it always as an afterthought.

You don’t really ever wake up and design new software on day one to be the most secure implementation. So, I felt like we were finally there with Cloud Native, and started having more involved security conversations. I felt like there was just a lot of room for innovation in a field that I already knew a lot about starting off, with a new spin on it, which was getting involved with security. And then, Sysdig reached out, and here I am.

What Is Falco?

Mike: Sysdig makes a ton of data available from the kernel, as I understand it. And Falco, the project that you’re working on, tries to filter that data to make some actionable security information, maybe about intrusion detection.

Nova: The definition that kind of really made it sing in my mind and resonated with me was, when Loris, our founder, I think you might have already spoken with him, the way he explained it to me was, basically we take the kernel as the new source of truth. Traditionally, if you look at how you would be auditing or attempting to observe a system, the network was usually kind of the most fundamental element you could get down to and, the thesis behind that was, if it’s happening at the network layer, we know it’s true, and we can trust it.

And as we moved into Cloud Native, we realized that TCP packets were not the smallest element anymore. So, we took it even down later further than the network, which is where the kernel comes into play.

I think you said it best yourself, we take a lot of information coming out of the kernel, and then we try to turn that into something meaningful for a human or a team. And that’s really what Falco does. It tries to be that connection point, that adapter between what would otherwise be an unreasonable amount of information coming out of the kernel, and then actually, trying to give you something that can help you tell a story.

Has Falco Been Good For Business?

Mike: Falco looks like a pretty impressive tool, and I’m wondering, has it been able to drive business opportunities for a Sysdig, the company?

Nova: I think if you look at open source, and what that means to anybody doing open source in any industry, it’s got a new way of thinking about how you engage with other people in the industry, other organizations in the industry, other folks in the enterprise.

And I think the easiest way that I can describe, the success I’ve seen with open source is, just looking at it as there’s fundamentally a difference between building a solution for someone and building a solution with someone. And I think open source is the latter of the two, is it gives you, and it gives your organization an opportunity to collaborate with other folks in the industry. And that’s where we’re seeing a lot of these hybrid solutions.

You know, we could have open-source software called Kubernetes running in a public cloud provider, using a CNI implementation from a startup in San Francisco, all of which being secured with Sysdig. So, we’re seeing these multi-level, multi cardinal solutions because people are building an open source, and realizing that it’s actually more effective to build a small tool that is easily consumable than it is to try to build this monolithic solution to every problem under the sun.

Has CNCF Been The Right Home For Falco?

Mike: Falco has been incubated at the CNCF. And I’m wondering if you have some thoughts about whether CNCF was the right home for the project?

Nova: I’ve been involved with the CNCF for years now. Like I mentioned earlier, I’ve worked at a few startups, we’ve donated, and built, and contributed to a handful of projects that ultimately ended up in the CNCF. And I think if you look at open source in the enterprise, and having a neutral third-party organization such as the CNCF, that can just help with things like governance, and infrastructure, and supporting the projects. And doing it in such a way that it’s neutral and unbiased for the project itself, ultimately just makes for a healthier project in a more wholesome experience for the maintainers and the end-users.

I think the CNCF does a really great job at embracing this idea that ultimately in open source the end-user is the new customer. They’re the new consumers of the open-source project, and giving them that customer-like experience is something that you really see with the CNCF, and I think really drives healthy communities.

Introducing Governance For Falco

Mike: So, one of your goals I guess, when you joined Sysdig, was to help build the governance infrastructure for the Falco project. Have there been any challenges along the way for making that happen?

Nova: I feel like when I joined, Falco was already on a trajectory to being a first-class security solution in Cloud Native that is open source. And I think I was able to come in with, you know, like I said, I’ve done this a few times, I’ve been involved with the CNCF for years, I’ve been working on other more household projects such as Kubernetes, or Helm, or Envoy. And I think I was able to come in and bring everybody together and kind of double down on our approach to open source.

I think there’s a lot of work that we had to do, that we have yet to do, but ultimately, it all comes down to this idea that, at the end of the day, Falco belongs to everyone. It’s not Sysdig’s tool, it’s a tool that was originally started by Sysdig and has already started to grow and be used in new and exciting ways.

We have end-users who are using Falco for things that we never even dreamed of originally. I think having that open-source governance, that open-source model of “We’re going to make our decisions in the public, and we’re going to give the broader community an opportunity to get involved with these decisions as we’re making them.”, has been a really big part of the direction that we needed to take the project over the past maybe six months or so.

Falco Ecosystem

Mike: In addition to end-users, have there been any other vendors who joined the Falco ecosystem? Maybe who are looking to commercialize Falco as part of their product or make an offering?

Nova: I mean, that’s something that we’ve tossed around with at Sysdig. And I think any time you have successful open source, somebody’s going to automatically go to, “Okay, how do we wrap this up and stick an SLA on it, and then start offering some sort of first-class support for a project.

And in my mind, once an open-source project reaches that stage, like that’s a sign of success. That’s ultimately where you want to end up. I think Falco is right on the cusp of us getting to more of an enterprise open-source solution.

I’m excited to see both, how my company Sysdig is able to take these new ideas and run with them, and potentially see other organizations and other companies in the industry do the same thing as well. So, I feel like we’re on that horizon of this finally happening for the project, which is pretty rad.

Trade-off Of Moving To A Foundation

Mike: I guess moving your project to a foundation, it’s a lot of bull thing to do for the governance of the project, but not all open-source companies do that. What are some of the trade-offs that you have to make when you decide to move your project to a foundation, and to move the governance to sort of a more open process?

Nova: In Falco, we always talk about exchanging of velocity for altitude. And I feel like in open source, we have that same paradigm of, as you go either more on the foundation side of things or more on the agile side of things, you’re going to be exchanging enterprise opportunity with the ability to be agile.

In other words, if we, as a company, had an open-source project, and we didn’t have open-source governance and open community around it, we would ultimately be able to iterate much quicker, and it would be a much more simpler and less complicated process for us to drive features, and to deal with debt, and to build a new functionality. But we would be sacrificing this ability to build with other folks in the ecosystem.

If you look at Kubernetes, if you look at a lot of the sub-projects of Kubernetes, they do operate at a less agile speed or less agile velocity, but ultimately, that has empowered many different companies in the enterprise to come together and start working on building holistic solutions for everyone.

I think a great example here is, there’s an infrastructure project called Cluster API, I had helped start this project, I think two years ago now, when I was at Microsoft, and the whole point of the project was, for us to come together and start to standardize how folks install and manage Kubernetes. And it’s taken two years for us to get where we are today, so it’s happened a little bit slower than most people might be used to.

But, we now have a standardized holistic API that anyone in the ecosystem can use. And we’ve actually seen large Cloud providers, VMware, Microsoft, Google, they’ve all come together, and they’ve actually started building to this new interface. So, again we’re exchanging that velocity for that ability to be collaborative.

Coalescing Ecosystem

Mike: Remember, when I interviewed Matt Mullenweg from WordPress, he mentioned something very similar how we could build it faster if we just build it ourselves, but the community slowed us down, but we ended up with better software.
And one of the other things I remember from that podcast was, well, just thinking about it, WordPress is really such a central part of so many ecosystems. They’re not monetizing Automattic, the company behind WordPress isn’t monetizing every user of WordPress. There’s companies that do WordPress hosting and WordPress development, so there’s this big ecosystem around WordPress, which is really impressive.

And I’m wondering, do you see the Falco project as coalescing that kind of ecosystem? And how do you get there? Or, is that even desirable?

Nova: I think the CNCF enables this type of collaboration. If you look at the projects, this is something that is baked into the governance model. When we were proposing Falco to move from the Sandbox, which is the most introductory level a project can be at, to incubation, which is where we are now, there is an entire section and an entire conversation around this concept of vendor independence, which is effectively this idea that if one vendor, who is working on a project, decided to take a step back, or take a break, or pull resources back, would the project still be able to grow, and prosper, and be healthy in the same way it is now?
And that’s a fundamental philosophy in the CNCF. So, I think you’re going to see that with every project. I think us doubling down this for Falco was really critical to us getting where we are with Falco.

Surprising Falco Use Cases?

Mike: So, you alluded to some of the interesting business use cases that maybe you didn’t anticipate when you designed the product. I’m wondering if you could share with us what some of those are? Because I was also wondering, it seems super interesting, but how do people actually use it?

Nova: I did a presentation of KubeCon in San Diego, with a gentleman named Abhinav from a company called Frame.io, and he went into a lot of detail about how they’re using Falco in a very limited way, which is funny, because I spend the first half of the presentation talking about how Falco can audit the entire kernel, and how we can start to process and assert various signals in the kernel that go for every system call that would potentially be running in Linux. And then Abhinav walks on the stage and says, “Oh, we only use it for three.”

And it was just kind of this funny moment, where it’s like, if that’s what they needed in their pipeline, which if you go, and you watch the video, you can see the use case, and why they were only interested in a subset of these metrics here.

You can actually see that Falco is dynamic and configurable enough for them to use it very concretely in a very small, but very precise way for exactly what they needed. So, I think you see that in a lot of different open source, but especially in Falco.

Can Falco Consume Non-Kernel Data?

Mike: Can Falco consume information from other sources, other than the kernel, and make sense of it in sort of the same way?

Nova: Yeah, absolutely. One of the things that we’ve been circulating in the Falco community, and I think this is a great example of us not being able to move as quickly as we wanted, but in exchange, we’re getting feedback and insight from the community is, we’re working on a long-term supported release called Falco 1.0.

And one of the things that we learned pre 1.0 was that there was actually a lot of value in taking other input sources other than just the kernel and enriching the Kernel information with these other input streams.

So, a big feature of 1.0 is going to be making secondary input streams much more dynamic and much more configurable, so that folks can start to plug other information into Falco when it comes time to building that story or that alerting system that they’re looking for, when it comes to detection, and anomaly detection, and insecurity.

Is There A Marketing Strategy At Sysdig For Falco?

Mike: Is there a marketing strategy at Sysdig for Falco?

Nova: Yes and no. So, we obviously have our corporate marketing strategy, we have an entire department here. And we have a lot of similar goals, but I feel like they’re implemented in different ways. I think the easiest example here is Sysdig targets customers and users of our platform, whereas Falco targets end-users, which effectively are customers, but the relationship is a little more like, “We’ll give you a foundation in the scaffolding to come and build with us.” And you’ll be able to do that effectively for free, but you’re not going to be getting a lot of the first-class features that you would be as like a commercial partner, or a commercial consumer of what Sysdig has to offer.

So, again, depending on your use case and what you’re looking for, it kind of gives us an opportunity for folks to get involved with — it’s going to cost more, but it’s going to be easier and more resilient, more reliable and more powerful. Or you can take the free open-source approach, which is going to require rolling up your sleeves and getting involved in the community.

And I think what’s really interesting from a business perspective is watching as different implementations change from one side to the other over time. And seeing how 2019, it was a commercial user, and then moving forward, they moved over to open source. Or flipping that around and going from open source to commercial.
So, it’s exciting to have that flexibility, as departments grow, or their organizations, as their needs change, as their systems change, what they might be looking for from us – it could potentially change. And having sort of an array of opportunity and avenues for them to get involved has been really powerful for us.

Difference Between End-User / Customer

Mike: What is the difference between an end-user and a customer?

Nova: I think the easiest way to say “This is an end-user.” is someone who takes advantage of open-source software in its most raw form, whereas a customer is an exchange for goods and services, where we’re willing to provide some sort of monetary compensation.

So, again, we’ll use Kubernetes here. Kubernetes is open source. If you or me wanted to go and go to github.com/kubernetes, we could potentially download Kubernetes and install it on some servers, and then try to go sell those servers that have a working version of Kubernetes running on it, with some sort of service agreement. But there’s nothing that’s really preventing us from doing this.

And in the same way, other folks who have been contributing to Kubernetes for years and maybe even were, like Google, the original creators of Kubernetes, they have both the open-source avenue as well as the more commercial avenue. And I think you see that with tools like how GKE is Google’s Enterprise version of the open-source software that you could go download for free.

Who Ideally Would Join the Falco Community?

Mike: So, if you could see more partners join the ecosystem, what kind of partners would you like to see join the Falco community?

Nova: Honestly, I would like to see the security industry come together and start working together as a community more and more. Like I mentioned earlier in the interview, moving to security, I had to relearn a lot of things. One of the things that hadn’t really been in my career up until recently, after joining a security company, was this concept of very strict competition, and this concept of, if I have some piece of intellectual information, I’m going to kind of withhold that. And that becomes part of our IP and what we have to offer. And I think we saw the same paradigm infrastructure in Cloud

And, ultimately, if you look at the security industry, following applications, following infrastructure, following DevOps, it’s ultimately in my mind going to end up in the same way, which is the industry coming together and realizing that it actually makes more sense for us to work together on something that it is for us to fight each other.

I would love for more folks, whether their security vendors, or security consumers, or even just users of security tooling, at the end of the day, to come together and start exploring different ways of securing systems, and open-sourcing, and collaborate on that.

Is Open Source Security a Trend?

Mike: I think that’s actually true. I remember speaking with Michael Howard from MariaDB, and he mentioned to me that – I don’t know if it was on the interviewer or after – security software is not inherently open source that normally it would be commercial, proprietary, licensed, all the above, to keep it closed. And so, I do think it’s the idea of, there aren’t tons of open-source security tools, so, are there other open-source security tools that maybe you can identify that you can think of this as a trend, or is Falco really at the forefront of this?

Nova: I think – and if I get too often with ranting about security, please, please feel free to stop me – but I think if you look at security, having a holistic approach to two main categories is really what you want to see, when it comes time to taking security seriously and fully locking down a system.

So, I think to give a really simple example of this. If we look at solutions like Kubernetes RBAC, which is role-based access control, just describing who can do what, and when, and how they can do whatever it is they’re trying to do. And potentially rejecting requests if they do not meet whatever criteria you set forth.

But we also see this in Linux with things like Seccomp and SELinux. And it’s this idea of, we’re going to try to prevent somebody from doing something if they’re violating some sort of policy we have in place. So, there’s other CNCF tools like open policy agent as a great example here. There’s an open-source tool from Microsoft called Gatekeeper. That is an implementation, a concrete implementation of open policy agent. That attempts to effectively do the same thing pod security policies do, and Kubernetes, but from concrete implementation of OPA or open policy agent.

But, again, we’re in the situation where these solutions, everything I just mentioned, all attempt to prevent somebody from doing something that they shouldn’t be able to do. Or to prevent some application from doing something that it shouldn’t be able to do. But if you look at the history of security, that’s only part of the story. One of the things I’ve been saying that I really feel like it’s a powerful statement is, at the end of the day, there’s no such thing as perfect software.

Even Linux, the most well-known open-source operating system in the world, the largest open source project in the world, we still get CVEs, there’s still exploits. There was Heartbleed, there was a handful of critical CVEs that have happened in my lifetime. And those are fundamentally never going to stop. And anomalies and things that you aren’t expecting are fundamentally never going to stop.

So, I think having this preventative side of things that you see with tools like access control and policy enforcement, running those in concert with tools like Falco that are more of a detective side of things really gives you like your kind of coming at the problem from two different fundamental perspectives, which kind of I wish you to double down on your security approach.

So, short answer, yes, we see a lot of other tools, but we don’t really see anything that’s as focused on runtime detection, has to do with something say like Falco, or maybe even Wireshark, which was Loris’s original project.

How Can Companies Adopt Cloud Native?

Mike: So, you’re the author of an O’Reilly book on Cloud Native infrastructure, which I just ordered?

Nova: Thank you. You should buy several copies of it, for all of your friends and all of your family.

Mike: Makes a good Christmas present. But this is a very new knowledge domain for enterprise IT staff, and reading your book is a good place to start. But I’m wondering if you have any more thoughts on how companies can get up to speed on Cloud Native infrastructure?

Nova: I think the book is a good starting point, but more importantly one of the things that I really want to stress with folks, to really have an understanding of what this phrase “Cloud Native” even means. And you can go to cncf.io, and they actually have like an entire essay that was put together that attempts to define what Cloud Native means to them.

But I feel like it’s kind of like a personal choice or a personal journey you have to go on. It’s like buying a car. Ultimately, at the end of the day, you’re going to buy the car with the features that you need, that you like, but that whole process starts with, doing test driving things, and doing research, talking to people, and going to look at cars, and spending time understanding why this car may be better in this situation or might be better in this situation.

And I think Cloud Native infrastructure follows the same paradigm of, you have to look at the ecosystem as a group of resources. And you can take these raw resources that are available in the ecosystem, my book included, and those raw resources become part of what you would use to potentially build out your finalized system.

What To Look For If You Want To Join an Open Source Project?

Mike: A couple last questions about your experiences as a veteran of being a part of open-source startups. If you’re looking to join an open-source startup, what would be some of the things you would look for that would be good signs that this company knows how to use open-source as part of their business model?

Nova: I guess there’s two answers here, coming at this from somebody who’s — I’m in a very senior, very high visibility role, here at Sysdig, so I almost wanted to join a company that needed some guidance and needed some help. If I was to join a company that was perfect and open-source was already solved. You know, they were already doing everything “by the book”, it wouldn’t be very interesting or exciting for me, and I would hope that they would not be as interested in having somebody like me come in. And for lack of a better term, do what I do best, which is helping to drive open-source adoption and collaboration.

For me, I wanted to find something that had opportunity to grow, and had opportunity and potential for us to move into really, really great things. And I felt like Sysdig was that perfect intersection of high potential with the right place at the right time with security.

Now, if somebody isn’t as insane as I am, looking to get involved with something that’s going to be a lot of work and a lot of effort, I would say the first thing I always look for is, how are decisions made, both at the company, both on your team and both with open-source projects. And another thing that I always kind of view as a red flag is this concept of open-source announcements.

If you think about it, an open-source project by design should be open to the community, you should be able to go, and read, or watch, or listen to the decisions that are made, the features that are driven, the choices that the community is deciding on. And you should be able to at the very least observe these, and if not, potentially shape and govern these things.

So, anytime I see somebody doing some sort of open-source announcement, to me, that’s just evidence that it wasn’t an open-source project to begin with. That it was built behind closed doors, and then ultimately, hand it over for the sake of publicity, and not originally built in open source, as you would see with a lot of the other CNCF projects, like Kubernetes, like Hellman, like OPA, like Falco.

Advice For Open Source Entrepreneurs?

Mike: Last question about open-source entrepreneurship. So, if you were in the shoes of an entrepreneur who wanted to use open source as part of their business model, do you have any advice for that entrepreneur?

Nova: Get in there and roll your sleeves up. At the end of the day, open source is, you’re not going to have that first-class experience of, “Click here, put in your credit card number, and then poof.” Everything works like it’s going to take understanding what’s going on, it’s going to take contributing to the code, contributing to the project. And you’re really going to have to accept the fact that you are just as responsible as the open-source project as everyone else working on it.

Mike: Nova, thank you so much for joining us today – first guest of 20/20, yay! Thank you so much.

Nova: Thank you. It’s been really nice talking with you.

Closing

Mike: Special thanks to the Sysdig team and Amanda McKinney, 280blue, for helping to coordinate the episode.

The link to the presentation that Nova mentioned can be found on the episode webpage on opensourceunderdogs.com. Transcription by Marina Andjelkovic.

Music from Brooke for Free, Chris Zabriskie and Lee Rosevere. The podcast Twitter handle is #fosspodcast.

I have a big announcement: I just found out that my talk about the podcast was accepted to OSCON in July. If that happens, I’m really looking forward to sharing some of my thoughts on what all these episodes mean.

The next episode features the current CEO of Puppet, Yvonne Wassenaar, who brings us up-to-date on Puppet success in business models. Don’t miss it.

Until next time, thanks for listening.


The post Episode 43: Native-Cloud Visibility and Security With Kris Nova, Chief Open Source Advocate at Sysdig first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full
Episode 42: EnterpriseDB, Collaborating with the community to make Postgres enterprise ready, with Ed Boyajian, CEO https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-42-enterprisedb-ed-boyajian/ Thu, 23 Jan 2020 16:11:35 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=1744 Ed Boyajian, CEO joined EnterpriseDB and helped it pivot from a small organization, to one of the leading Postgres database companies. The company has figured out how to run a profitable business, while embracing and respecting the community and open development process that has formed around Postres for more then two decades.

The post Episode 42: EnterpriseDB, Collaborating with the community to make Postgres enterprise ready, with Ed Boyajian, CEO first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Ed Boyajian, CEO joined EnterpriseDB and helped it pivot from a small organization, to one of the leading Postgres database companies. The company has figured out how to run a profitable business, while embracing and respecting the community and open development process that has formed around Postres for more then two decades.

Intro


Michael Schwartz:  Hello, and welcome to the first episode of Open Source Underdogs in 2020. I’m your host Mike Schwartz, and this is episode 42 with Ed Boyajian, CEO of EnterpriseDB.

This episode was recorded last year, it took me a while to get it out due to some technical challenges. Let’s just say the internet Gods conspired against me the day I recorded this episode, and I had to finish recording on Zoom, which is fantastic for meetings but not ideal for podcast. So, if you hear a slight audio quality difference towards the end, that’s the reason.

After the episode, I have an announcement about what you can expect this year from The Underdogs podcast. We have a new challenge, but I think you’ll be excited to hear about it.

So, make sure you tune in after the main event.

Ed is definitely one of the superstars of open source business. I got a lot of great insights from this interview. And I feel like I only scratched the surface, we might have to have him back for a follow-up.

But, without further ado, here we go. Ed, thank you so much for joining the podcast today.

Ed Boyajian:  Hi, Mike, I’m glad to be here.

First Priorities

Michael Schwartz:  What was the EnterpriseDB product when you joined a CEO, and what were your first priority to transform the business?

Ed Boyajian: I came to EDP in 2018, and the company had been founded a few years before that, in 2005. The original thesis for the company was centered on helping customers solve problems they were having with Oracle. And even then, there was well-known pain around locking that was associated with Oracle and EDB, that is origination, and had developed some technology to make compatibility with Oracle, kind of the flagship technology, such that it was easy to migrate applications, written to run on Oracle, to run those on a Postgres database.

So, when I joined the company, that was kind of the center point of the business. And a company at that time was more prominently known as the Oracle compatible database company. My focus when I joined was to really shift that and center it much more squarely on it, being a Postgres database company.

Pivoting Challenges

Michael Schwartz: What were some of the biggest challenges you faced when you joined a CEO to pivot the business?

Ed Boyajian:  I think, like many companies that have to face change, the core engineering focus of the business, being on Oracle compatibility more so than Postgres, meant that there had to be a shift in mindset, and to get people to really reorient around prioritizing Postgres and our competencies in the database platform itself, as the priority for the company.

And having come from Red Hat, I’ve been there for almost seven years and had some experience obviously around open-source projects, and working with open-source communities, I think that was an important change for the company to really think about what it meant to be participants and contributors to a project like Postgres.

Relationship with Postgres Community

Michael Schwartz: Did the Postgres community welcome EnterpriseDB? How would you describe your relationship with the community?

Ed Boyajian:  I think that the Postgres community was and is very welcoming of contributions from outside, and to that end, and at that time, very, very welcoming to EDB in our contributions.

I think the company had done work with Postgres previously, but in the intervening time, we’ve invested in a number of people, who’ve come to the company, that are key contributors to the community. So that’s been a real strength.

Postgres, like Linux, as you may know, is an independent open-source community. It’s not one that’s controlled by a company. I think that’s inherently the strength of the community. And I think, given the longevity of the Postgres community and the nature of governance, the Postgres is governed by a core team of folks that manage the whole project – there’s no single individual who’s responsible. I think that is also structurally aligned well to encourage contributions from companies like EDB.

Open Source V. Open Core?

Michael Schwartz:  Cloudera and Chef recently went from open core to 100% open source. Of course, you’re familiar with Red Hat that has a similar model – do you think that open-source vendors are moving away from open core?

Ed Boyajian:  I see generally that being true, although many companies, including EDB, do work on the periphery, around the core, open-source project. We do that in the form of tools and extensions that aren’t specifically in the database server itself, and we do those projects outside of the core community.

I think a lot of companies, including Red Hat, do work in similar fashion, but generally speaking, I think there’s a great advantage to being prominent, an active contributor to project. And I think most of the commercial companies associated with open-source projects have recognized that value.

EDB Value Prop

Michael Schwartz: Speaking of value, what are some of the most important value propositions for EnterpriseDB?

Ed Boyajian: I think there really a couple that we focus on, and I think that means most to our customers. The first is around customer obsession, but it’s customer obsession set entirely in the context of Postgres.

And to kind of put another lens on it, I think it would be fair to say Postgres One. That enterprises and governments all over the world have made Postgres a standard database that’s now part of their strategy.

EDB was central in creating that when in the market, and because of that I think, we’re uniquely positioned, with our exclusive focus on Postgres, to provide a level of care for customers that no one else in the market can do at this stage. I think that’s one.

The second is Postgres technical differentiation. And for EDB that manifests in a couple of ways. Primarily in our contributions to the community, where we’ve led advancements in the core Postgres database platform for many of our customers, parallel query, projects like zheap, and other projects, where there’s a meaningful amount of heavy lifting, we’ve been the primary contributors to much of that work.

The second area where we create technical distinction is what I mentioned earlier in the enhancements, that we make kind of around the database server itself. And some of them touch the database server like Oracle compatibility, which many of our customers still value from EDB, but beyond that, doing work in the areas that enable Postgres to be deployed at scale have been really important.

You can think about that in the context of replication, or failover, enterprise-class management, and monitoring – all the things that any enterprise would need to run a database at scale.

EDB Products

Michael Schwartz: How many EnterpriseDB products are there today? And which are most important from a revenue perspective?

Ed Boyajian: So, predominately, we think of it as essentially being one primary product we called the EDB Postgres platform. Within that, there are two database server options: one is the pure community edition, the second is that version of the database server that’s enhanced with the work we’ve done in Oracle compatibility, and in a few other areas.

We bundle with the tools that I described earlier, such that our customers don’t have to pay for a separate skewer line item for the pieces and parts they need to make the database run. And that’s notably different than the traditional enterprise vendors in the market.

Pricing

Michael Schwartz: Ed, pricing is really hard for startups – do you have any advice on how to find the right gates, or how to set the right price, or how to evolve pricing as the business environment changes?

Ed Boyajian: That’s a great question. It is a part of the strategy that’s evolved over time. In the early stages, as we started to develop some of those capabilities around the database server itself, we attempted to monetize those as parts.

And we found that that was particularly complicated largely because customers were turning, the Posgres were turning away from complex, contractual arrangements and complex, buying systems they have with Oracle and other commercial vendors.

So, I think our first attempt at that we got wrong, by putting that into a bundle, it also created the dilemma of figuring out how to price that sufficiently, such that we didn’t over-price. Because we had a lot of extra development, and IP, and value-add on the one hand, but on the other hand, kept things simple.

We, over the years, have been really tuned in kind of creating price points that are appropriate for customers. And I would say, it’s evolved even more recently as we’ve done more extensive work in areas of the product, particularly with replication for example, where that alone has become valuable. Some of our customers want that almost exclusively.

So, we’re starting to rethink how we approach that pricing modeling, and looking at stratification of our product line. And I think what we will see going forward is some additional skews that allows to kind of address different levels in the market.

Market Segmentation

Michael Schwartz: Data persistence is a horizontal market – do you segment the market at all?

Ed Boyajian: Generally speaking, we don’t. And I think if you look at database, and just recognize a database is an infrastructure software, it is incredibly prolific across enterprise environments. I think if you look a little more closely in on database, if you look at the database like Postgres, which is a true, general purpose, transactional database, it has even broader horizontal applicability enterprise.

It is compared to some of the specialty database technologies that are in the market today. So, given that nature that it touches every application, it touches every department, it touches every developer, you know, we’re mindful that our opportunity is equally distributed, both in terms of within an organization, and then across industries and segments.

Now, having said that, we’ve seen centers massive for the business that have been prominent. And, so, we do some specialized marketing to those categories, and the ones that are most significant infotech, which is software and hardware technology. We have a biggest sub segment of our business government is much as a quarter of our business today, financial services, another really important vertical for the company, and then media, and telecom.

Those four segments would represent 90% of our business. We do Orion, some of our messaging and solutioning around those segments. And then split it other way, we are a global company with more than half of our business coming from outside the United States.

Interestingly, that split about 30% in APJ, 20% Amia, and the rest in North America. So, we also, in that context, do segmentation that is more geo-oriented.

Partner Strategy

Michael Schwartz: I’ve noticed that EnterpriseDB has really great partner network – what are the different types of partnerships that are important for EnterpriseDB?

Ed Boyajian: Yeah, it’s been an important part of our growth strategy. and I can only put it in context, we’ve had now 39 consecutive quarters of subscription revenue growth. And if you looked inside of that, that’s come largely because of a diverse network of go-to-market strategy than partnerships.

About 65% of our business comes through indirect channels, and so, we categorize that in the kind of classic form, distributor, reseller market, which is probably clearly the most prominent go- to-market route for us outside of North America.

We rely heavily on distributors and resellers, in both of Amia amd APJ, so, that’s a particularly mature and growing part of the business, in one that we prioritize.

Beyond that, we look at a network of partners who provide some other form of value out. We may try to call them, coin them OEM – they are not literally OEM partners, in one form or another. Or technology partners that bring EDB products to market, somewhat different than a distributor.

A notable one that we just announced this past year, late in the year, was our partnership with IBM, in close alignment with their data and AI teams, and where we bring our products to market. In close alignment with IBM Solutions, particularly around their cloud pack for data, for example.

So, that’s an example of a prominent partner that brings us to market. We see other examples of that, where we’ve developed strong alliances.

I think another notable one is Infosys, where, again, particularly in their new application development practice bring EDB and Postgres to their clients, as they do, to work there.

Partnership Prioritization

Michael Schwartz: Over the years, have you developed any rules of thumb, as to which partnerships to develop?

Ed Boyajian: I think there are partners who have a clear vision and agenda that relates to open source, and then, to go a step further, have gone beyond that and really defined Postgres as a part of that strategy.

Those, not surprisingly, are high-priority partner targets for us. And that actually exists across the continuum we’ve seen in the distributor and reseller world. We’ve seen partnerships evolve and emerge that were specifically focused with a partner specifically focused on bringing Postgres solution to market.

Even our recent partnership with IBM, for example, or our partnership with Infosys, our partnership that we announced last year with Ali Baba – all were centered on their vision to bring a Postgres solution to market.

Sales Organization

Michael Schwartz: Building a global sales organization is a huge challenge – how did you go about transforming the sales organization when you joined EnterpriseDB?

Ed Boyajian: It was a really interesting challenge because I had just come from Red Hat, where when I joined Red Hat, the company was maybe 50 million, and I ran the North America business at the time of my departure, which was approaching a 250-300-million-dollar business. So, I had the opportunity to live through an extraordinary amount of growth in a sales model around open source.

When I came to EDB, the company was tiny by comparison, and there wasn’t a firmly establish sales pattern. So, one of the things that we started to do was, really focus on being efficient in acquiring customers. And I think it’s an important distinction, especially for this audience, rather than plow big money into what I think of is high-end enterprise raps, we started with inside sales motion that toggled around software downloads and incrementing sales spend at a relatively small rate, until we got to higher levels of a value with customers. And really built from what I consider really basic selling model out.

And that proved to be incredibly powerful because we got quite good at addressing customers. Frankly, in the way that I think they prefer inner set companies nowadays.

Modern Sales Strategy

Michael Schwartz:  The enterprise software markets changed a lot in the last 15 years – can you talk about how you think vendors of open-source software should adjust their sales strategy for 2020?

Ed Boyajian: I think you have to look first at what’s changed in the landscape of IT consumption, and how buyers are forming inside companies. If you look in a little closer, first I think the commoditization of compute has allowed users across the enterprise to emerge, and you couple that with the way development is happening now more outside of IT, and more in the business unit.

The pattern of adoption for technologies has changed, its not centered on IT. So, I think the old strategies that we used to use in growing a global sales organization, to bring in relatively expensive high-end sellers, to engage with a relatively finite number of buyers has fundamentally changed.

The other thing that’s changed alongside that is, customers and users consume a tremendous amount of information on their journey. In fact, they’re heavily in self-service mode in their learning about technology or company.

And, here, again, I think an easy mistake to make in a go-to-market model, in an inefficient, go-to-market model is to think that you need to fill that blank in with staff, or we might think of it as high-end salespeople, but rather to build the systems that allow users and prospective customers to self-serve as far as possible, which is their preferred method of engagement nowadays.

So, my view of that has changed radically over the course of the past 20 years, in terms of how to build and structure the right kind of selling motions and sales organization.

Impact Of Cloud Computing

Michael Schwartz: As you know, enterprises are moving to the Cloud for many services, but as an enterprise software vendor, on-premise, or hybrid cloud, is still critical for growth. Is the move to the cloud accelerating? Has it peaked? And any advice for open-source software vendors on how to align with this trend?

Ed Boyajian:  Well, I would say that the move to Cloud is accelerating. It’s hard to argue that, but I think, at least from what we see now, companies are starting to kind of settle in on enterprise strategies for how they deployed technologies.

Cloud is another important deployment platform, just as traditional on-prem deployments are an important deployment platform. And I think it’s easy to get caught in this kind of notion that there will be no tech deployed in what we may think of today as traditional contacts – we just don’t see that as a reality.

I think the difference for companies that are building businesses to think about what are the key technology capabilities that you have to develop to enable your customers to deploy in any environment of their choice – that’s how we’re focusing on this change. And we can’t avoid the reality that 70%, 80% of our customers deploy in traditional on-prem environments.

Now, those environments are becoming more cloud-like in the way they’re being deployed on containers, certainly in virtualized environments.

But, at the end of the day, our customers’ view, and we with them, view Cloud as a another very important deployment platform, but it’s just another deployment platform.

Cloud Strip Mining

Michael Schwartz:  Amazon and other mega clouds are offering RDBMS as a service, and many in the industry are understandably concerned about Mega Cloud providers moving up in the applications stack. As someone who’s experienced this firsthand, do you think it’s a good or bad for your business?

Ed Boyajian: Look, we have many of our customers deploy databases in the Cloud, so they have to separate maybe two things. I think it’s very valuable to have Cloud computing as a utility and as a deployment platform for enterprise customers that makes compute more accessible.

I think it gives a lot of businesses, a lot of flexibility that they can’t get in traditional deployments. In that context, I think that the deployment of databases in Cloud is healthy for enterprises.

I think this question of whether or not Amazon being prominent in offering as a prime vendor of those database services, it intersects that, but I think most broadly speaking, I think the availability of Cloud services is a good thing, for companies like EDB, and for other open-source companies.

Advice For Entrepreneurs

Michael Schwartz: Last question, any advice for new entrepreneurs who are launching a business around an open-source software product?

Ed Boyajian: I guess I’d give maybe a couple of thoughts. One is, make sure that what you’re thinking about is where you want to take your business that you have – a credible, commercial vision for what you intend to do with the technology.

And I think that starts with really being clear-minded about the needs that are being served, and defining that in the context of target markets, and being thoughtful about the kind of business model you designed to serve that market.

I think it’s easy in open-source technologies to, at some level, get caught up in the enthusiasm that goes along with the projects. But I think building a business around that takes surprisingly a remarkable amount of thoughtfulness and discipline.

Michael Schwartz:  Ed, thank you so much for making time to talk to us today.

Ed Boyajian:  It was my pleasure – thank you.

Michael Schwartz:  And thank you to the EDB team for logistical support.

Closing

Michael Schwartz: Transcription and episode audio can be found on opensourceunderdog.com. Music from Broke For Free and Chris Zabriskie. Transcription by Marina Andjelkovic.

Now, as promised, a special announcement time: for those of you who’ve listened to all the podcast, you might have noticed a preponderance of male voices. In fact, the male to female guest ratio is 42:1. The only female guest we scheduled was Jamie Thompson, way back in episode 2.

So, this year, we’re going to hear from more women who are leading pure-play, open-source startups. After this episode in fact, for the rest of 2020, it’s going to be all women.

To start things off, we have Deborah Bryant, Senior Director of the Open Source Program Office at Red Hat.

I had heard her given a presentation at the Open Core Summit last year, and I’m still repeating some of those things that she said. We’re filling out the schedule. If you know of any great open-source business leaders who are women, please let us know.

You can tweet at us using @fosspodcast, or you can send me a message on LinkedIn. Just mention that you’re a listener, and I’ll be happy to accept your connection.

The next episode will be out towards the end of February, and then you can expect episodes about once a month this year.

So, thanks for listening, and best of luck with your open-source business models in 2020.


The post Episode 42: EnterpriseDB, Collaborating with the community to make Postgres enterprise ready, with Ed Boyajian, CEO first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full
Episode 41: Apollo GraphQL, revolutionizing how developers write modern applications, with Geoff Schmidt, CEO and Co-Founder https://opensourceunderdogs.com/episode-41-apollo-graphql-geoff-schmidt/ Mon, 30 Dec 2019 16:35:21 +0000 https://opensourceunderdogs.com/?p=1655 Geoff Schmidt, CEO and Co-Founder of Apollo GraphQL, says you don't get to pick your business model, you get to pick your problem. As part of the team who authored one of the most popular monolithic JavaScript rapid application development frameworks, MeteorJS, Geoff describes how they applied their experience to address an even bigger challenge--how to build more flexible backend data services.

The post Episode 41: Apollo GraphQL, revolutionizing how developers write modern applications, with Geoff Schmidt, CEO and Co-Founder first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Geoff Schmidt, CEO and Co-Founder of Apollo GraphQL, says you don’t get to pick your business model, you get to pick your problem. As part of the team who authored one of the most popular monolithic JavaScript rapid application development frameworks, MeteorJS, Geoff describes how they applied their experience to address an even bigger challenge–how to build more flexible backend data services.

Intro

Michael Schwartz: Welcome back, Underdogs. I’m your host, Mike Schwartz, and this is ep isode 41, with Geoff Schmidt, Co-founder and CEO of Apollo GraphQL. Geoff and his team have a gift for looking at the same problems we’re all looking at, and coming up with inspired solutions. After developing Meteor JS in 2011, they developed the Apollo GraphQL platform, which has coalesced and expanded its community in just a few years.

Geoff has some tactical advice on how to engage with your community to build an amazing business. Apology in advance if there are a few audio blips on this episode.

If you like the podcast, please help us get the word out. Like it on iTunes, or even tweet at a link on opensourceunderdogs.com. Our handle is @fosspodcast. Enough shameless self-promotion, let’s get on with the interview.

Thank you so much for joining the podcast today.

Geoff Schmidt: Of course, it’s a real pleasure.

What Is GraphQL?

Michael Schwartz:  What is GraphQL, and how does it relate to the Apollo GraphQL platform?

Geoff Schmidt: GraphQL is kind of like a query language for the cloud. We’re in an interesting situation right now, where, if you go back 5 or 10 years, the way we built apps was really different. You might have a web server and a web server might connect to a database or two. And then, on the front end, you might have a web browser, maybe even a mobile app.

But now, we’re in this situation that is a lot more complicated, where people are expecting more and more from applications. The applications have a lot more of a richer interactive experience, they do a lot more, they’re also available on more platforms, and at the same time the services in the cloud that back those apps got a lot more complicated too. It’s not just a web server and application server, it’s a whole bunch of different micro-services typically.

And so, you’ve got this problem of, how do you connect all of those devices, all those apps and all that sophisticated functionality to all those services that exist in the cloud. And the old way of doing this was with REST APIs. REST APIs require that you write a bunch of custom code basically for every screen in your app, probably a new REST endpoint for every use case.

And with GraphQL, it’s a flexible query language, so an app developer can ask for any combination of data that they need out of the cloud, and you don’t have to write custom code anymore, like you would with a REST API.

So, one way of looking at it, it’s a better way for app developers to be able to query all the day that exist in the cloud, it’s a much better experience for the developer. Another way of looking at it is, it’s a way that an organization can build a connected map of all their data and services in the cloud, so you can have one central organizational source of truth of all those resources.

And I think another way to look at it is, it’s almost like an abstraction layer for the cloud. It’s a way that you can, even as you are writing your applications, even as you are building your micro-services, you can keep like one consistent stable map, so that really gives you the ability to write a lot more apps, build a lot more cloud services, and evolve your all infrastructure really, in a flexible and more principled way, now that every app has an API inside of it.

Origins

Michael Schwartz: Can you walk us back to 2011. Meteor development is founded – where were you then, and how did you develop that into Apollo GraphQL?

Geoff Schmidt: Sure. This whole journey started for us back in 2011, we were in one of the early Y Combinator batches back in summer 2011, and I was meeting a couple friends, and we had a lot of different ideas, but what we wanted to do is, when we got into Y Combinator, we discovered that all of the people in our Y Combinator batch were really struggling to solve the problems of modern app development.

2011 was kind of a tipping point, when the world went free on rails with PHP as enough, to “Wait a second, now people have bigger expectations about the user experience, where they were trying to deliver that user experience.”

So, what we decided to do is, me and my co-founders, Matt Debergalis and Nick Martin, we’d work on a variety of other projects together, each has been trying to build a different combination of apps, or open-source projects, or SaaS products, and we thought, “Can we take everything that we know about building modern applications and put it into a reusable framework?” That would help people build apps faster.
That gave birth to Meteor JS, which we launched in early 2012. And it grew over the next couple of years to become one of the top 10 most startup projects on GitHub.

When we launched Meteor 1.0 there were local media meetups, I think 134 cities around the world on the same day. So, we had big success with this monolithic JavaScript open-source app development framework. And we were able to build a profitable business on top of Meteor JS with Galaxy, which was a hosting platform for Meteor.

But what we started to realize, as we got toward the end of 2015, there was a bigger opportunity, because we were finding that people wanted to connect Meteor, not just a MongoDB – which was the database that came in the box with Meteor – but they wanted to connect it to all sorts of different sources of data and services in the cloud.

We also found that people wanted to build app experiences that were not just JavaScript in the web browser, but across any number of different mobile platforms, and increasingly, like all kinds of new stuff, these IoT platforms, all these things were happening.

And we really said, “If we could take the technology inside Meteor or the ideas, architectural ideas inside Meteor, and put that in a form where you can use it not just for new applications like Meteor for any app, and you can connect it to any source of data in the cloud, not just a particular database, and you can push into many platforms, not like just one front-end, written in JavaScript, then, it would have an even broader applicability.

The other thing we saw was that Enterprises were starting to adopt Meteor JS, and we were getting much more familiar with the needs that you see when you are building highly-scaled applications of Enterprises, not to scale in terms of how far the technology scales, but scale in terms of how you have larger code bases, larger teams. And so, that led to us starting to research like what would Meteor 2.0 would look like, what would the component to that be. We’d also seen the rise of react.

And we’d seen that something like react, that’s incrementally adoptable, where instead of having to build a new application, you can add it to an existing application, quickly get up and run it, and quickly get some proof points – we saw how powerful that was for growth. So, we thought, “Can we build a new data layer for Meteor that takes everything we learn from the whole experience with Meteor that is a very powerful open-source project?”

Everything we learned from Enterprise customers, everything we learned about the proliferation of back-end services in the cloud and new front-end that people wanted to use, and put it in an incrementally adoptable form. And that’s the end of 2015 I guess.

And that’s when we heard about GraphQL. GraphQL was just what we needed to work on this new project, which is what we were calling the Apollo project, because Meteor has been so tied to MongoDB, whereas GraphQL, this whole idea is, it’s this database agnostic abstraction that lets you talk to any number of different databases or cloud services.

We set it to take some of the core ideas or learnings from Meteor, make it speak GraphQL as a query language, build something that is very easy for people to drop into existing applications. And then, we started launching the first Apollo open-source component in early 2016, and it’s been really amazing couple of years as more and more people adopted this technology. I think it’s really exceeded any expectation we had for it back in 2016.

Sales

Michael Schwartz: Can you talk a little bit about how your sales processes have evolved, because I would imagine initially there was a lot of organic inbound Enterprises saying, “Okay, we want to use this software, but over time, how has that changed and adapted to the demand?”

Geoff Schmidt: I think we have seen a trajectory that’s pretty typical in the sense, yeah, to your point. Some of our first customers were people that were already very sophisticated users, very sophisticated early adopters, who were using Apollo at scale in the Enterprise, as well as people maybe who were small, midsized businesses but had a strong vision for what they wanted to do, and they wanted to get a technology partner for their vision.

Some of those first customers, there were various things that we helped them with, but in a lot of cases, it was the relationship with us, maybe some code development on the open source, us carrying the pager for their assistance maybe.

There’s a couple of different ways those things were structured, but what happened was, more and more of our businesses shifted toward the additional tools and services that we were able to provide around the core Apollo Client, Apollo Server open-source offering.

We have a product called Apollo Graph Manager. Graph Manager is essentially the control plane for a data graph, so, we have Apollo Client, Apollo Server. It’s basically the date plane, it’s the stuff that goes in your data center to answer queries, the stuff that can’t go down, stuff that handles all of your personal data, all your sensitive business data.

But what we found is both as companies scaled the Graph, they go from just a couple developers to 10 developers, to 100 developers, to 1000 developers. There is a lot of additional management tool that you want. There’s also a bunch of architectural best practices that are really helpful. It’s really helpful to put your Graph schema in a schema server, have a central source of truth for the structure of your Graph, how it is changing over time, build workflows, and processes, and governments around that.


At the same time, one of the best parts of the Graph tool is the tooling that’s possible around it. And that tooling is super valuable very early in the development process as well. And so, the SaaS services we built that are essentially souped-up set of developer tools, and even more so, a control plane for a scaled enterprise data graph.

That’s all packaged up in a SaaS service we call Graph Manager. More and more of our business now is Graph Manager. And what we’ve done is, we’ve created both an Enterprise offering around Graph Manager that comes with the full 24/7/365 SLA for the whole Apollo platform, covering all the open source, all the SaaS, as well as our support and expertise. As well as some like in Enterprise Edition of Graph Manager that has features like single sign-on, some of the things that are Enterprise specific requirements.

As well as having, we go all the way down to a $49 per seat per month offering that anyone can buy online with a credit card because you want the support through the whole development cycle.

And we also have a freemium offering. If you just want the developer tools for the earliest stage of development process, you can use it for free. We’ve really tried to understand what the entire user journey is from the moment you write the first line of code and start exploring GraphQL, all the way through to when you have a scaled graph in an Enterprise – it’s the strategic asset.

We tried to understand how people want to buy and how people want to partner with us at each of those stages. And it’s an ongoing process, but we’re building our packaging around that user journey to try to accommodate each stage in the journey.

Revenue Streams

Michael Schwartz: What would you say the current breakdown is of SaaS vs. license revenue? Which part of the business is more important today from a revenue perspective?

Geoff Schmidt: I think there’s some open-source companies where the service offering is a bolt-on, like maybe it’s a nice to have. But it’s not really that critical. Or, in some cases, something was included primarily just to drive renewals. That’s not the case for us. We find that the Graph Manager, the SaaS tools are very important to people as they scale, and also are something that people really value early in the process.

I would say that almost every customer is using some form of the SaaS tools. Now, in terms of what’s the breakdown of revenue versus people are purchasing online versus people are purchasing more Enterprise subscriptions, Enterprise subscriptions are a big part of the revenue. Right now, from a customer count point of view, it is more online purchases, but most people are using some form of the Graph Manager, though there are exceptions to that.

How To Align With The JavaScript World?

Michael Schwartz: JavaScript is the largest community. Do you have any insights on how other open-source companies can align with the JavaScript world?

Geoff Schmidt: JavaScript is really about the rise of app developers, and it’s about the rise of accessible app development. It’s one of the easiest languages to learn, and there is a huge amount of demand for more sophisticated websites built in JavaScript. A lot of what drives the rise in the JavaScript is, there’s this whole world of apps that are written on kind of this LAMP stack derivative frameworks that date back to, in some case, the nineties, like PHP, Ruby on Rails, ASP. Net, Spring. Like the LAMP stack approach to building applications.

And what’s going on right now is, a lot of these apps that were written on those frameworks are getting re-platformed onto a more modern app data stack that includes React Apollo, some of these other components are going to be building a modern experience. I think that the way to think about how you align with JavaScript is to think about how you align without movement toward like modern app development. The thing is, most of the time when a company is going through that transition with a re-platforming, it’s part of a larger modernization effort.

They are often evaluating other technologies too, and they are thinking about, “Hey, is this a time for bringing Kubernetes?” Or, “Is this a time for bringing a different version of mobile development?” Is this a time to go to different platforms?” I think like every offering’s going to be different, you either have an axis with modern app development, or you don’t. If you do have an axis with modern app development.

I think it’s really important to understand like the JavaScript constituency is going to be one of your biggest users if you can understand really what their pain points are.

It’s very driven by community. I think front-end app developers, by nature, they value design, they value community, there’s a really great community there, they are collaborative and positive, community that is more diverse than Symantec, it’s more accessible than Symantec.

Making an investment in how you meet that community where it is, understand what the values of that community are, and maybe build some relationships with the leaders in that community, I think can really help you reach those app developers.

The other thing that’s important is to understand that it’s a community that cares a whole lot about user experience, maybe more so than some other communities. It’s what you do every day is an app developer, you think about how you deliver great user experience to users. It tends to be people that value good user experience.

I think those are some of the values of the community that can help you get more mindshare more quickly if you do have a product that is related to modern app development.

Benefits Of Open Source

Michael Schwartz: Has the open-sourcing of the code materially benefited the company?

Pricing

Geoff Schmidt: Absolutely. Apollo would not exist today if we were not open-source. I don’t think there would have been anyone to do this, other than as permissively licensed set of open-source libraries.

Michael Schwartz: You were mentioning pricing before, and actually I think pricing is really hard for Enterprise startups. In your industry, it sounded like you had a logical gating mechanism, like you mentioned number of developers. Do you have any advice – going from 2011 to today – any advice on how do you find the right price and the right gates for your software?

Geoff Schmidt: Well, it was a journey for us to get here. We originally priced based on query volume, so the number of operations that you performed on your graph. And the reason we went that direction is, we thought of it as utility, like AWS. And we thought, “How cool it would be if you had a very predictable, very simple way of understanding, “Hey, here’s what my costs are going to be.” If you told like electricity, or water or cloud computing. And we thought that was a model that everyone was really familiar with, that would feel like a natural way to purchase infrastructure like a data graph platform.

What we learned was that query volume pricing wasn’t very well aligned, either with how people wanted to buy and budget for technology in this case. And also that wasn’t very well aligned with the value that we were providing.

We had customers that were doing maybe billions of queries a month with a small team, and we had customers that were doing maybe millions of queries a month with a much larger team, for like maybe an even more valuable line of business.

Like the business I associate with the query is so different across maybe a B2C app that is like mostly freemium, versus an internal line of business application. So, that lack of value alignment, which kind of manifested it as the platform would get way too expensive, way too quickly for some people, whereas other people that were driving a lot of revenue from the product and getting a lot of value were very happy with, they might only be paying $2 a month.

It manifested as a churn of some of our largest customers as the query volume pricing just got unaffordable. It manifested as a lot of people who had to contact sales to better understand the pricing. It also manifested as longer sales cycles because it meant that we were forcing people to predict their usage of the Graph far into the future, because if you’re going to adopt this like core piece of infrastructure, you really want to have a good way to understand what your costs are going to be.

If you are looking at this thing and you are thinking, “Man, this is probably going to expand to be all of my app development and all of my traffic.” And especially if it’s a new technology, where you don’t necessarily know the estimate, how many queries are going to be doing, like how many react components might use this, how many queries might each one do, that’s really scary, and it slows adoption and lengthens the sale cycle.

So, what we did was, we listened to customers to understand what’s the most easy and natural way for them to buy what just feels like a great experience for them. And what we found was, at the early stage of the journey, especially if you’re doing a self-service purchase online, or if you are an internal manager that is just buying it for your team, thinking about it as developer productivity, see pricing is A very natural and easy way to understand it because it’s proportional to the investment you’re making and developing your application proportional to your team size.

It’s also pretty easy to predict and plan, and you could plan it alongside your other cost. And as we get into some of the enterprise tiers, there’s a platform fee as well, which is based on sort of the overall intensity of use of the graph, which is a couple of axes.

Query Volume is an axis there, but it’s only one of several axes that we used to understand, like, “Hey is this an individual team?” Maybe it’s a whole business unit, maybe it’s a whole much larger company that’s all family different brands. We found it really startling with an understanding of how people want to buy and aiming to serve the customer, rather than saying, “What do we think our users might want?” Or saying, “What’s the easiest way to plan our business?” was really, I think for us the master key in fighting the right pricing.

Pricing Process

Michael Schwartz: To get you to your new pricing model – did you appoint somebody who is heading up that task, and who made the final decision around what to charge?

Geoff Schmidt: It was my co-founder who’s also our head of product. It was a process that involved many people in our team, many customer conversations, listening to what we were hearing from the sales team, listening to what we were hearing on the developer relations on open-source side. A lot of conversation inside the team, and ultimately, it’s one of the decisions that is hard to change, that you don’t want to be constantly changing your pricing, at least your pricing axes. At some point, you have to gather information you can, and make a decision to commit to it, and take it from there.

Open Core?

Michael Schwartz: Would you say that you are open core?

Geoff Schmidt: I would describe us as a complementary product model, so we have our open source. And right now, we don’t hold anything back on the open source. Could there be open core Enterprise features in the future? Yeah, maybe. And we’ve heard some requests that it might be a good fit for that model.

But currently, open source is just open source, but what we offer is a SaaS service on top of that. I think of it as a complementary product. The way I think about that from a business point of view, if I think about advice I give open-source entrepreneurs, I think your business model as an open-source company is not necessarily something you can force. Like, I don’t think you get to pick your business model, I think it’s more like you get to pick your problems, like pick what you are building. And then, that will have a natural business model associated with it.

I think that there are some things that are open source that are just really hard to monetize. There’s a lot of things that are 100% in a view layer on the front-end, there’s just not a natural way to monetize that. These things, their ultimate destiny, at least I think for the foreseeable future, and in a lot of cases, they are just going to be open-source libraries.

There’s other things that can really naturally be monetized by selling supportive services from day one. There’s other things, like get offering in an open-core model.

There’s other things that very naturally can be monetized by saying, “Hey, I have some open source.”, but any using this open source, many of them will want the SaaS service. I think Git and GitHub is a great example of that.

I think you have to start with what the natural structure of your solution is, and ask, “What are the pieces of this that your users would like to be commercial?” And, “What are the pieces of this that your users would like to be open source?”

And follow what really does right for the user in order to find out that right model. I think if you try to go the other way and say, “I’m going to try to force particular business model on this because that’s my strategy.”, I think you’ll end up creating worse experience for the user. And I just think that the world we are in with dev tools and the internet today, there are so many opportunities. I think you’re going to see competition that correctly shapes product, I think it is going to win with the correctly shaped business model.

Is There Amazon GraphQL?

Michael Schwartz: Is there an Amazon GraphQL hosted service similar to what you’re offering?

Geoff Schmidt: Amazon does have a GraphQL offering called App Sync. App Sync is more focused on mobile development, and it’s more focused on getting mobile developers a great way to access all the data and resources they have inside Amazon. It’s a little bit more of a back-end as a service. Maybe that’s not a quite right way to study because it can do so much more inside Amazon.

That’s different from what Apollo is, which is focused on integrating many different data sources in the cloud as some of you can incrementally adopt. You can add Apollo to any existing application or stack, whereas App Sync is designed a little bit more for new application development typically, so they’re actually complementary.

It makes a lot of sense to say, “Apollo is my data graph integration layer, and then maybe I could have App Sync with some of my back-end services. With technology like Apollo Federation, they are good frameworks for how we can think about federating multiple GraphQL services together to build one graph.

Some of the details that are still being worked out because a lot of this is a new technology. But, conceptually, I see them as complementary products rather than competitive.

Would Amazon GraphQL Be Good Or Bad?

Michael Schwartz:  Let’s just say that Amazon takes the Apollo open-source server and lunches Amazon Apollo server service – would you view that as a positive or a negative?

Geoff Schmidt: I think the more the merrier. I would love to see more people running Apollo server on Amazon. And if Amazon helps them out, that’s great. We’re focused more on how you scale the graph, and that has a lot more to do with workflows, and the control plane, and a schema registry, a bunch of other things that are like really different from a SaaS offering, and really different from Apollo Server and Apollo Client.

I think the more people are building services on top of GraphQL, and the more GraphQL grows, the more people are going to need solutions for managing large GraphQL, like Apollo Graph Manager. But I think it’s a positive for us potentially.

Open Source V. Commercial

Michael Schwartz:  Do you ever feel any friction between, when you’re introducing a new tool, and between should this be open source, or should this be commercial? And how do you decide which way to go?

Geoff Schmidt: For us, we have a pretty bright-line. We start with, “Does this naturally exist inside the SaaS offering or does it just naturally exist inside the open source?” And I think that’s been a really reliable benchmark for us.

On some level, that’s just a technological fact, like where to go, where to live, in our case, because we have a SaaS model instead of being open core currently, but I think there’s some things that we learn along the way that I can talk about.

I think one of the core ideas is, companies who want to own their data graph, this is a very important investment for them. And they don’t want to feel beholden to an outside vendor, just for the continued existence of that, and maintenance of that thing.

At the same time, they also want to see strong vendors with viable business models because they want to know if there’s going to be somebody there to support them. I think your challenge as a vendor is helping craft that right relationship with your customer, so they feel comfortable and secure.

And they trust both of it, you’re not going to be in a position with too much power over them, but at the same time that they trust that you’re going to be around. It’s very rational considerations that customers have when they’re selecting a solution like this. And downstream from that, focus on customer trust, and just really trying to understand what would you want if you were that Enterprise that was purchasing the software, or adopting that solution whether it’s open-source or commercial.

I think that some of the principles we found are what’s inside owning your graph, controlling your graph, it’s important that people own the entire data plane, so everything from when the request comes in all the way through to when it’s answered by your services and the responses stitched together and sent back down to the client.

You want to feel like you’re in control of the uptime of that. You want to feel like you’re in control of the security and the privacy associated with that. You want to feel like if there’s ever an issue, you can look under the hood, read the code, understand what’s going on, and fix it without necessarily waiting for round trip from vendor, at the same time, as you want to have the vendor on a 24/7/365 pager rotation for you.

So, when we think about the features that relate to keeping your system secure, and private, and up, to me those are the things that have to be open source. When you think about the things that relate to how we manage the workflows and processes around it, where maybe it is tolerable for some of those aspects to exist inside of a SaaS platform, and maybe it’s even better. Because you have a supplier that’s constantly keeping that up-to-date data adding new features.


And it’s delivered as a managed service to you. Those are the places where I feel like the SaaS stuff fits really naturally. And so there’s some nuance and complexity there about how we’ve been sharing that. So, for example, one of the things that Graph Manager can do is, it can manage the deployment of your Apollo gateway instances. If you are using Apollo Federation to manage the whole constellation or fleet of these different GraphQL back-end services in a federated architecture.

So, to do that, what we do is we push Graph Manager push the configuration that those Apollo gateway servers are going to need to pick up into a highly-available, global distributed CDN.

That way, we are doing the analysis of how is this going to affect my uptime to have this dependency on this other component.

You can see even if Graph Manager goes down for 30 seconds, it’s not going to affect my ability to scale up and down my servers, because we’ve found a solution like the CDN to ensure really high uptime for our services.

GraphQL Foundation

Michael Schwartz:  Last year, you announced the GraphQL foundation, I’m wondering is that self-sustaining, and what role the foundation is playing in the ecosystem?

Geoff Schmidt: The GraphQL foundation, that was put together by us together with Facebook, and the Linux foundation, and a few other great founding partners coming from Facebook, the folks that originally wrote the GraphQL stack and created the GraphQL language.

The foundation is self-sustaining, it is one of the auspices of the Linux Foundation. The way I see foundations, they are the keepers of the specification. It’s really important that a technology like GraphQL that we have a way in industry to evolve, going forward, while maintaining interoperability.

I think in the early days of GraphQL, there were a lot of questions about the relationship between GraphQL and Facebook. There’s a lot of positives there because there’s a proof point about how GraphQL has powered applications at massive scale at Facebook for years. And I guess people have a lot of confidence that it’s a good, technological direction.

At the same time, too much control by Facebook that isn’t the developer tools company I think was a little bit of a concern for some folks. And now that we have a foundation that can be the custodian to stack, I think that’s a development that’s given folks a lot of comfort and confidence.

Changes In Enterprise Software Market?

Michael Schwartz: The Enterprise software market has changed a lot in the last 10 to 20 years – can you talk about how you think vendors of open-source software should think about their strategy today?

Geoff Schmidt: I think the key thing to understand first is, to the extent, how you are thinking about how you monetize your open source, who is the buyer, is the buyer going to be an end-user, in which case you probably have more of a bottoms-up motion, where it’s probably a product-led motion, where you’re focusing very much on the user’s first moment experience, and what the value proposition is for that first credit card swipe.

And then maybe after that, thinking about what are the layers that drive and upsell the Enterprise possibly as the graph grows, and maybe what starts being used by multiple teams, or whatever your product is.

There’s another approach that can also work well I think, where, if the buyer is more naturally maybe a leader inside the infrastructure team, or maybe another executive where it might make sense to enter around the 1500- $50,000 price point, where it’s more like a comprehensive Enterprise subscription offering.

I think the thing to understand is what really is the adoption model of your software inside the customer, and understand is it really driven by end-users that want to purchase easily online, or is it driven more by the need to have a business relationship and a vendor relationship. And I think that ends being, in my point of view, the driver of how you build your go-to-market strategy.

Advice For Open-Source Entrepreneurs

Michael Schwartz:  Last question, any advice for new entrepreneurs, like the people who are starting this business around an open-source product, what advice would maybe you give yourself, if you could go back 10 years, or so, 9 years?

Geoff Schmidt: It’s a good question. I guess I would say they’re not the easiest businesses to start but they’re some of the most rewarding. Because you get to hold an incredible community, and you get to touch a lot of people, you get to do it very quickly at internet scale. And I think one of the idea about doing open source right is, it’s about building a coalition. There are many different models about how you might structure contributions to your products that whether your project is more like a cathedral or more like a bazaar, what I think is very important is it be a coalition.

In this era, you’re not going to succeed if you go at it alone. You’re going to succeed if you understand the larger set of communities, the larger set of other projects, and needs and customers and entrepreneurs that exist around you, and think, “How can I build a coalition to solve a problem that people really care about?”

I think if you start from that point about the community you want to build and the problem you want to solve, it ends up being a more powerful starting point than, “Hey, what’s a really cool piece of technology I could build?”

Michael Schwartz: I think that’s a really good advice.

Geoff Schmidt: The other thing I’d say is, I think, through podcasts like Open Source Underdogs, I think it’s getting easier and easier to start these types of businesses.

I think if you go back, even not that many years, a lot of the ways that you would build a business like this will really expect a little bit unknown, and that made things a lot harder.

For example, can you find executives that already understand your business model, are there pre-stablished like marketing and sales playbooks that you can run, are there reference points that you can look at in terms of pricing and packaging to understand what’s worked and what hasn’t worked.

Or even, is there a community for you as an entrepreneur, where you can meet some other folks that have been down this road and talk about your experiences – all those things have gotten a lot easier. It’s a model that is increasingly well understood. I think it’s not just the future but also the present at this point.

I think it’s been really rewarding, it’s been a great experience for us, I think they can require some patience because in open-source business models, you have to succeed twice: first, you have to build the great open-source project for your technology, a great community around it, and then, you have to build a great business around that.


But if you have the stamina to do it, not only are they some of the most rewarding business I think, and not only do you have this incredible tailwind behind you with your community and your supporters if you built a good coalition, but additionally, I think they have the potential to be some of the most capital efficient businesses, and have some of the best economics.

Because if you structure your business right, you have some of the best parts of a B2C business on one side, where you able to have a big internet community, and a big group of supporters that will have your back, but with some of the B2B economics on the back end.

You just have to do the work to understand what really is the right way to benefit your users and serve the community, because it is a business model, where you have to start from the point of view of stewardship, asking how you build a community, asking how you adopt the perspective of making the best use of the resources and position that has been entrusted to you in the community, but I think that’s really fun for people that are attracted to that.

Closing

Michael Schwartz:  I think those are really good advice, so, thank you so much for sharing.

Geoff Schmidt: Of course.

Michael Schwartz:  And thanks for the Apollo team for logistical support.

Transcription and episode audio can be found on opensourceunderdogs.com. Music from Broke For Free and Chris Zabriskie.

Audio editing by Ines Cetenji. Production assistance by Natalie Lowe. Operational support from William Lowe. Transcription by Marina Andjelkovic.

The Twitter handle is @fosspodcast.

Next week, for our final episode of the season, we have one of the true veterans of the industry, Ed Boyajian, CEO of EnterpriseDB. It’s going to be a special episode, so please, don’t miss it.

Until then, thanks for listening.


The post Episode 41: Apollo GraphQL, revolutionizing how developers write modern applications, with Geoff Schmidt, CEO and Co-Founder first appeared on Open Source Underdogs.

]]>
Open Source Underdogs full